They
Author: J. F. Gonzalez
Date: 2012-09-15 23:18:24+00:00
Keywords: Fiction; Horror; Thrillers; General
Description: They walk among us unnoticed, unassuming. A year after the auto accident that killed his wife, Vince Walters is finally beginning to move forward with his life. With the support of friends, he's digging back into his career and even beginning to date again. When his estranged mother, Maggie Walters, is murdered, Vince is stunned by the hideous nature of the crime. Maggie lived a quiet life in a small, rural, Pennsylvania town, attending church, reading the Bible, and subscribing to an increasingly paranoid view of the End Times as prophesied in The Book of Revelations. Her brutal killing, whic
Publisher: Midnight Library

Table of Contents

Title

Prologue

Chapter One

Chapter Two

Chapter Three

Chapter Four

Chapter Five

Chapter Six

Chapter Seven

Chapter Eight

Chapter Nine

Chapter Ten

Chapter Eleven

Chapter Twelve

Chapter Thirteen

Chapter Fourteen

Chapter Fifteen

Chapter Sixteen

Chapter Seventeen

Chapter Eighteen

Chapter Nineteen

Chapter Twenty

Chapter Twenty-One

Twenty-Two

Twenty-Three

Epilogue

About J. F. Gonzalez

Also by J. F. Gonzalez

Acknowledgements

Dedication

Copyright

THEY

PROLOGUE

June 17, 1974,

Fountain Valley, California

“ANDY WAKE UP.”

Her son slept calmly, brown curls lying on the pillow. His breathing was deep and even.

She reached down and shook him gently by the shoulders. “Andy! Wake up!”

“Wha…” He groaned. He didn’t even open his eyes. He went back to sleep almost immediately.

“Andy!” Maggie Swanson shook her son’s shoulders harder, more roughly, but not hard enough to hurt him. “Wake up!”

This brought him up. Andy opened his eyes, the deep rhythm of sleep broken. “What!” He sputtered. “What happened? What?”

“Get up and put some clothes on.” She was already pushing the covers off, ushering him out of bed. “Come on.”

“Why?” He yawned, sitting up. He looked at his mother, his eyes still heavy with sleep.

“Because we have to go,” she said. She moved to his dresser and opened the top drawer. She pulled out a pair of blue Levis and a striped polo shirt. She laid these items on the foot of the bed, went back to the same dresser and from another drawer brought out a clean pair of underwear and socks. She dropped these at the foot of the bed. “Get dressed. Come on! Let’s go!”

Andy yawned again. Maggie was so into the moment of flight that she almost breezed out of his room right then to begin the rounds of making sure she had everything necessary: papers, money, driver’s license. But Andy was obviously tired; his eyelids fluttered, and his head drooped forward as if it were weighted. He was drifting into sleep again.

“Andy,” Maggie muttered under her breath. She went to him and gently pulled him out of bed. He moaned, already falling back into a light sleep, and she ended up taking his PJ’s off. She dressed him as fast as she could. When she had him in his jeans and polo shirt, she took his PJ’s into her room where she had a small bag already packed. They were his favorites. They were his Dr. Denton’s.

She checked the bag to make sure she had everything: two changes of clothes for the both of them—she had packed his earlier in the day when he’d been out playing with Jimmy Smitts and Neil Lacher. She also had her make-up, her brushes and hair dryer. She’d looted through Andy’s comic book stash when he’d been out playing yesterday and looted a Superman and a Swamp Thing and stuck those in. Aside from those items and her wallet, which contained her driver’s license and credit cards, she didn’t have anything.

Except for the briefcase.

She rested her hand on it. She’d set it on her dresser top a few hours ago when she started packing. She looked down at it, her reflection in the mirror creating a double image. She opened the clasps and lifted the lid.

When she’d withdrawn her and Tom’s savings account, she asked the bank clerk to give her the fifty thousand dollars in twenties. They now lay in the briefcase in neat bundles.

She looked at them, their very presence seeming to bring her confidence back up. Fifty thousand dollars. It wasn’t a lot—surely not enough to keep her and Andy away from them for a very long time. But with what she had in mind, she was sure it would be more than enough to float them for a while. Maybe a year, possibly more if they settled in a place where the cost of living was cheap. Hopefully there would be a substantial amount left over for her to invest if her plan worked out right. Either way, this money was their only chance in making the escape go as smooth as possible.

She closed the briefcase and locked it. She put it on the bed next to the small duffel bag with their belongings and checked her purse. Everything was in order. She turned to the mirror and gave herself one last look before she set the wheels in motion. Her reflection stared back at her; thirty years old, chestnut brown hair that fell straight to her shoulders, small but ample breasts that hadn’t lost an inch of their firmness. Her figure was now hourglass shaped; no matter how loose fitting her jeans were, they hugged every inch of her hips. She’d gained some weight within the last year, but she was by no means overweight. She’d been skinny two years ago; very unhealthy. She’d been smoking far too much pot, dropping far too much acid, and doing God knew what else—sometimes coke, more often heroin, which she’d gotten hooked on. Thank God she’d been able to reel herself back into sanity. If it weren’t for that she wouldn’t have been able to see reality.

She wouldn’t have been able to see them for what they really were.

With everything in order, she slung her purse over her shoulder, picked up the duffel bag and briefcase, and headed out of the bedroom toward the garage. She had to maneuver down the hall and through the living room into the laundry room to get there, but she made it. She didn’t even turn on the garage light; she put the bag and the briefcase on the floor, fished for the keys, and opened the driver’s passenger side by feeling around for the familiar door. When she got the door open the dome light was enough to work by.

She stowed the duffel bag and briefcase on the front passenger seat. She put her purse on top of them, and then opened the back door. She went back through the house to Andy’s bedroom. He was conked out, his body lying sideways across the bed. She gently slid her right arm beneath his shoulders, her left beneath his legs behind the knees and lifted him up. He wasn’t as heavy as she thought he’d be. With continued sobriety comes strength, she thought, as she carried Andy out of the bedroom and into the garage. He stirred once, when she tried to gently slide him into the backseat. His eyes fluttered briefly. “Mommy, where are we going?” he mumbled sleepily.

“We’re just going on a little trip,” she whispered. She laid him down across the backseat, and then pulled the Afghan that Gladys Robles had knitted for her two years ago and covered him up with it. He was asleep again instantly.

How does he just fall asleep like that? She managed a slight smile at her sleeping son, and headed back into the house to make sure everything was okay. She ran through everything in her mind again like clockwork, ticking everything off; she had clothes, traveling essentials, car keys, and the money. The house was securely locked. Tom wasn’t due back from Chicago until Thursday night, one week from today. She couldn’t take the chance that she and Andy would be discovered missing when he returned home. Countless other possibilities could take place; Gladys and Henry could drop by for an unexpected visit; Meg Carr could call for another one of her monotonous gossip chats; one of Tom’s bosses could call. What was more likely to happen was that Tom would call tomorrow night, and by the following day would become alarmed when his calls were not answered. He would send somebody to the house. That’s when the manhunt would begin.

That gave her and Andy thirty-six hours to get as far away as possible.

She headed back into the garage and closed the door behind her. The dome light illuminated the way to the car, and she slid into the driver’s seat and closed the door. She sat behind the wheel for a moment, a nervous flutter beginning to rise in her belly. Come on, let’s get going! If you sit here any longer you really are going to lose your nerve and then you’ll never leave!

She inserted the key in the ignition and started the car. Then she pressed the button on the garage door opener that was clipped to the visor and winced as the mechanism groaned and stuttered. She looked out the rearview mirror at the dark silence of her neighborhood and slowly backed out of the garage. When the car was out she stopped briefly to check her surroundings; at three a.m., Puffin Avenue in Fountain Valley, California was deserted. A middle-class suburb chiseled between Huntington Beach and Garden Grove, it perched at the beginning of acres of orange groves and strawberry fields. The cul-de-sac she and Tom lived on lay on the outskirts of about a dozen similar cul-de-sacs. With the exception of the nearby San Diego freeway and the suburbs to the north, to the east was nothing but fields.

Satisfied that all was quiet, she closed the garage door. It rumbled down the track and she didn’t back down the driveway until it was closed. Only then did she feel safe enough to leave.

The Vega Hatchback was the only car out on Talbert Avenue that early morning when Maggie Swanson finally escaped from her husband Tom and the reign of terror that had been her life for the past ten years.

THEY’D BEEN ON the road for five hours when Andy finally woke up. The early morning sunlight was streaming through the windshield from the east as Maggie headed down Interstate 10. “Mom, where are we?”

She glanced into the rearview mirror at him. He’d raised himself on his elbows and was looking sleepy-eyed at her from the backseat. His hair was in disarray. He began looking around the car and out the window, as if unsure if he was really awake or still dreaming in sleep.

“We’re almost in Blythe,” Maggie said. Her hands gripped the steering wheel. She’d been mentally preparing herself for when Andy woke up and for the inevitable questions that were sure to follow.

“We’re out in the desert!” Andy’s voice was more awake sounding now.

“Yes, we’re out in the desert.”

“Where are we going?”

“On a little trip.”

“To where?”

“To wherever you want to go.”

She stole another glance at him in the rearview mirror. He was looking out at the rolling tumbleweed and cacti. “But…why?”

“Because we need to get away for awhile.”

Andy looked at her. She tried to meet his gaze. “But what about Daddy?”

“Daddy’s in Chicago, honey.”

“I know, but is he going to meet us?”

“No, he’s not.”

Andy appeared to think about this. His remarkable gray eyes were dark in concentration as his little forehead wrinkled in thought about this sudden predicament. He didn’t look at all like Tom, who wasn’t Andy’s natural father. From what Maggie remembered, Andy’s father had been tall with dark hair and equally dark, piercing eyes. She’d been blasted out of her mind the night he was conceived, in some row house on Haight and Ashbury in San Francisco. Three months later, Maggie and the rest of the Children had made a pilgrimage to the Middle East for a spiritual awakening, and that’s when she’d found out she was pregnant. The commune had been incredibly supportive and loving and had nurtured her through the remaining months of her pregnancy. Andy had been born in a little village in Iraq, and the commune had returned to the US a month later.

Maggie kept her eyes on the road, but stole occasional glances at her son in the rearview mirror. She was getting hungry. Blythe was another thirty miles ahead. Perhaps a quick breakfast, and then a trip to the nearest used car trade-in dealership, and then she and Andy could be hitting the road again by ten. That would give them all day.

“How come Daddy isn’t going to meet us?”

She glanced back at Andy in the rearview mirror. He was looking at her intently, sitting up now. He’d thrown the Afghan off and sat in the backseat impassively. Waiting for an answer.

“Daddy isn’t coming on this trip because this trip is just for you and Mommy.”

“Oh.” That appeared to throw him for a loop, but it didn’t last long. He looked at her uncertainly, slow realization dawning on his features. God, but the kid was sharp. “Did you and Daddy have a fight again?”

Maggie sighed. She’d hoped this would be the questioning he would take. She felt relieved. “Yes,” she said, glancing at Andy every now and then as she talked to him. “I’m sorry about…what happened last week. You know your Daddy’s been working hard at the office and is always on those business trips. But the fact of the matter is…well…you saw how he was treating us…”

Andy nodded. His features solemn.

“And you saw how…well…it hurt me, Andy. Your father and I have talked about it over and over again, he’s always told me that he was going to get help but he never has. And he never will. He just buries himself in his work, and I know it’s important to him. I know he’s just working so hard so we can have such a nice house and live in a nice neighborhood.” She sought her son’s gaze in the rearview mirror. He looked at her. “But he’s in so deep he doesn’t know what’s real anymore. And the more I try to bring him out, the more I try to get him to…pay attention to the fact that he has a family, he gets angry. And sometimes he…blows up.” She chose her words carefully, treading softly for the full effect. “Like what he did last month.”

“That was the only time he got mad and hit you, though,” Andy said.

“No, it wasn’t,” Maggie said. They were approaching a sign that read BLYTHE, POPULATION 15,355; FIFTEEN MILES. Traffic on Interstate 10 was relatively light. “He’s hit me on more than one occasion. He used to do it when you weren’t around. So you wouldn’t see. When he did it that last time…when you saw it…” She looked in the rearview mirror and met his gaze. He looked like he was ready to cry. “…that was the last straw. I told myself that I would never allow him to do that to me in front of you ever again. But I think what I wanted most of all was to pull us out of…that world he created for us. One in which I wasn’t happy, you weren’t happy, and Daddy and me were always fighting and making you sad. I didn’t want that for you any more.” She glanced at him in the rearview. Tears were streaming down his cheeks. “Do you understand, honey?”

He nodded, cheeks red, bottom lip quivering. His chest hitched with a sob. “I’m sorry Daddy hit you Mommy!”

“I’m sorry too, Andy,” Maggie said softly. She turned her attention to the road. They were approaching the outskirts of Blythe. She began keeping a watch for a McDonald’s or a Denny’s somewhere off the Interstate.

“I don’t want us to make Daddy feel bad if we leave him!” Andy sobbed.

“We won’t make him feel bad, honey.” Now she faced the simultaneous task of calming Andy down and finding a suitable eatery for their morning breakfast.

“Yes we will!” Andy cried. He sat in the back seat and cried while Maggie kept her eyes peeled for somewhere to pull off. She was already beginning to get tired.

Golden arches loomed ahead, towering over a Ford and Chevrolet sign dotting the highway. She pulled off the Interstate and looked at Andy in the rearview mirror. “You hungry, sport?”

Andy’s cries had turned to sniffles, but he nodded nonetheless. He rubbed his red-rimmed eyes.

“How’s McDonald’s grab you?”

He nodded again, the waterworks evaporating. McDonald’s had the strangest effect on kids nowadays. The place hadn’t even existed when she was his age, and even when she was in high school they were no more than roadside hamburger stands. Now they had clown mascots. What was the world coming to?

“Great!” She pulled off the road and the McDonald’s loomed ahead. She pulled into the fast food outlet’s parking lot and killed the engine. Then she turned to the backseat with a smile. “I could go for some of those pancakes and sausages. How ’bout you?”

“And a chocolate shake!”

“Two chocolate shakes!” She reached out and began playfully tickling him. That got him laughing and squirming in the backseat. Brought him back to being a normal eight-year old boy.

“Last one out’s a rotten egg!” she cried.

He squealed and fumbled for the door handle. She opened the car door and got out just as he flew out of the car, slammed the door and began running toward the entrance to the fast food restaurant. She closed her door, smiling as she trotted after him.

That McDonald’s breakfast of pancakes, sausages, and chocolate shakes was the best one they had had in a long time.

IT WASN’T UNTIL they were a good two hours past the New Mexico border that Maggie Swanson had a chance to collect her thoughts. Interstate 10 rolled in front of her like a black, lolling tongue. The desert plains were sunburned; red and glowing in the early evening sunset. She yawned. Behind her in the back seat, Andy lay stretched out napping. With the exception of one stop at a roadside rest stop two hours outside of Phoenix to pee and gas up, they had been driving ever since.

Almost ten hours.

She’d been lucky to get a car with air conditioning. It was scorching hot outside, and when they pulled into Blythe earlier that morning she could tell it was going to be a brutally hot day. She figured she could get at least five hundred dollars credit as a trade-in on the Vega, but she had plenty of cash in the briefcase. Before they left the McDonald’s she opened the briefcase, took out a couple of bundles of twenties, and put them in her purse. It was from this bundle that she paid for the car—a 1970 model Oldsmobile Cutlass. It was bigger than the Vega, but it had power steering, brakes, and air conditioning. And it had an AM/FM radio system, too. The dealer had gladly taken Maggie’s Vega as trade-in with the four thousand dollars cash, and after she signed the paperwork over they’d left. Her next plan was to hit El Paso by the next evening, cross over into Juarez, Mexico the next day and trade the Cutlass in for another vehicle—one that would be untraceable. The Oldsmobile dealership in Blythe would have the transfer paperwork at their office should Tom track her and Andy there despite her efforts to not alert the DMV to the sale of the car. She didn’t have the luxury of a fake identification. Mexico would solve that, she hoped.

So far the first day of the drive had gone fairly well. After leaving Blythe, Andy had sat in the front seat for a while reading his comic books, fiddling with the radio. She was glad he’d grown sleepy and retired to the back seat for a nap. If she had to hear Terry Jacks’ “Seasons in the Sun” one more time she was going to scream.

If all went well by this time tomorrow they’d be in the Texas heartland. They’d be in an untraceable car, and with the cash she had they wouldn’t have to rely on the use of her driver’s license to check into motel rooms. She wouldn’t need the credit cards. Besides, she only intended to check into the most out-of-the-way motels in the most remote towns they drove through. The group may be powerful, but they surely couldn’t stretch their tentacles that far. Once Tom discovered she and Andy were gone, Sam Garrison would be notified immediately. He would most likely alert what representatives they had in the major cities; Chicago, Las Vegas, Seattle, New York, Washington D.C., Boston, Miami. They were still spreading, and their numbers could very well spread within the next few years. Until then, she and Andy had to stay clear of the big cities.

It was a combination of her continuing sobriety and her realization of what she had gotten herself into when she sold her soul to them that caused her to take Andy and flee. But what really clinched it was what they intended to do with Andy. Tom had brought it up to her three weeks ago. She’d been appalled, but she couldn’t let Tom see it. She’d been making dinner when he mentioned it to her. Andy had been outside with Neil Lacher playing Dinosaurs. Maggie’s back had been turned to her husband as she mixed the casserole, so he didn’t see the expression on her face. Instead, she’d quickly composed herself and said, “I think you’re right. When do you think would be a good time?”

“I was thinking we could bring him in when he reaches thirteen,” he’d said, matter-of-factly. The Wall Street Journal had been opened in front of him on the kitchen table. “He’s eight now and we’ve already done the necessary preparations before we entered him in kindergarten. Let’s give him a chance to be a kid for awhile.”

Maggie grimaced as she remembered that conversation. She wondered if the boy would be scarred from before, from when she was so deep into the drugs and the counter-culture scene when they were living in the Bay Area. All kinds of strange people had walked in and out of their lives, and they’d had one close call back then that she didn’t like to think about now. Of course, he’d been young when that happened, barely a toddler. But he’d been exposed nonetheless. It certainly appeared that those times hadn’t affected him. By all means he was a normal eight-year old boy. He had no bad dreams, no violent mood swings. And with the exception of the occasional temper tantrum, he rarely flew into a rage over the most trivial things the way she heard victims of psychological abuse often did. She was certain Andy was a victim of psychological abuse; it was the only term she could think of to explain what he’d been exposed to.

Depravities.

But it had been at least four years since he’d been exposed to anything. The bigger the group got, the more they relied on secrecy. Plus, as Sam explained, those early years of exposing Andy to their activities were crucial. He ordered the boy to be watched by a sitter whenever the group got together now, but he must have still suffered some form of psychological tampering. After all, from the time he was four until just recently she had been a functioning heroin addict, despite the fact that she and Gladys Robles had cut themselves off from the hippies they’d hung out with. As Tom had explained, they were quickly moving out of the underground to the mainstream. The seeds had been sown and they needed to bear fruit. Between then and now, they had to assume the mask of normalcy. With that came a promotion for Tom at General Computer Systems. Maggie had gotten a job as a secretary at a law firm.

But she still retained the lifestyle she and Tom had led. Only she’d gotten deeper. Pot and LSD had been frequent indulgences when they lived in San Francisco and were ingrained with the hippie scene, and even though they got out of that social circle she couldn’t stop doing the drugs. Despite her change of appearance—trading in her bell-bottom jeans, paisley shirts and free flowing dresses for a business suit and skirts—she couldn’t go a day without a hit of something. And with her discovery of heroin it had only gotten worse. She’d still managed to get up every day and maintain some semblance of a normal working woman, but the people she interacted with could tell something was amiss. And when she’d gone through withdrawals six hours into her self-induced cold turkey kick of the habit three years ago, she realized she was in deeper than she would have thought. It had taken her another year and a half to finally kick her habit for good. But she did it herself. And she did it slowly, so as not to alert Tom and the others. Because even though narcotics use wasn’t promoted within the group, it wasn’t discouraged either. And because she felt that others thought of her as lesser than them, the “breeder,” her drug abuse wasn’t intercepted. In fact, she had the feeling they supplied her with the smack to keep her in a permanent state of denial. Nobody would believe a drug addict.

She had to be careful when she finally weaned herself off drugs. By the time she was fully clean, they were living in Fountain Valley. Gloria and Henry Robles lived in a nice neighborhood a mile away, near Huntington Beach, with Gloria’s son Frank. A few other members were scattered around Orange County, some near the Santa Ana Mountains, but others were still situated in the Los Angeles area. Many more were still in the Bay Area. Samuel Garrison was headquartered there. Not to mention the close to one thousand members scattered across the country. But with their own local group she fared pretty well. She continued the meetings, handled some of the affairs, and worked a lot of behind-the-scenes administrative work. Tom usually worked that angle. After all, she had Andy to take care of.

That was her most important job.

The sun was almost gone now, the New Mexico sky dark and sullen. It would be dark in fifteen minutes. She looked at the map spread out next to her on the seat and noted that the next town was only ten miles away. She looked up at the road ahead of her, passing a FOOD, GAS, LODGING sign on her right. A motel. They could stay there for the night.

When she finally pulled into the parking lot of the motel—a small, weathered building consisting of a dozen cabins placed in a horseshoe around the main office—she was already beginning to feel that, despite the wrath she was sure to face from the group, she was certain she and Andy would escape. They had to. For his sake, for her sake, they had to escape undetected.

Because if they didn’t they would kill her. They’d never kill Andy, but they’d surely kill her. Without hesitation.

She sat in the car for a moment after killing the engine, listening to the ticking of the engine as it cooled down. The sound of traffic from Interstate 10 rose to her ears. If it weren’t for her getting sober, she wouldn’t have gathered her senses. Wouldn’t have suddenly found herself in the real world. Seen the insane theories and beliefs for what they were. She looked into the back seat at Andy, who was slowly beginning to stir. A normal boy by all accounts, no matter what they believed. Andrew Swanson was normal, not what they said he was, what they claimed he was. And it was because of the insanity of their assertions as to what Andy was, their hideous plans for him that caused Maggie to finally bolt from them in the first place. God help him if she hadn’t.

Andy sat up in the back seat and groggily rubbed his eyes. “Where are we?”

“We’re stopping for the night,” Maggie said. “We’re in New Mexico.”

“Oh.”

And as they walked to the motel lobby with their meager belongings to get a room for the night, Maggie began to look at the future for the first time with a sense of hope.

Chapter One

June 22, 1999,

Mission Viejo, California

VINCE WALTERS PANTED as he rounded the last stretch of his jog. The front of his tank top was soaked with perspiration. His armpits felt like hot patches as he slowed his pace. He was approaching Shadow Lane, and the trek to his home was up a slight incline through the upper middle-class neighborhood. Vince timed his pace, and then picked it up a bit as he ascended the slight grade that led up the street. He lived halfway down, left side. Almost home.

The early evening was still bright and sunny on this Tuesday afternoon. A light breeze blew in from the ocean. The breeze felt good against his sweaty skin. In another month it would be too hot to jog in this weather. He was building his system up quite well. Four months ago he wouldn’t have been able to jog two miles a night. Not that he’d been out of shape—he and Laura had had a work-out room in the house and he still owned the equipment. They’d used it regularly. But he hadn’t been much on cardiovascular activity at the time. The most he ever did was a few minutes on the treadmill every other night. Other than that it was light weight training, abdominal and pectoral exercises, and yoga. He’d been intending to take a martial arts class of some sort, but Laura’s death had interrupted those plans. He hadn’t thought about martial arts since then.

He tried to banish those thoughts. That’s what the jogging was supposed to be for, to keep him from thinking so much about Laura. But he had, and that tiny infraction, that little mention of her in relation to his past physical exercise habits, brought his thoughts back to her again. Started the whole thing over again:

Their meeting at Corporate Financial where they’d both worked. Their courtship. Their marriage five years ago.

Their love. God, how he’d loved her…

He still didn’t know how it happened. He tried to take solace in the fact that it was an honest accident, but he still didn’t understand how it could have happened. Laura had been a good driver; a safe driver.

Laura Walters had just left her office and was entering the south-bound on-ramp of the 5 freeway at Ortega Highway. The on-ramp was long, and the evening rush hour had been over, so traffic was flowing moderately. Laura had left work late that night after having been in a meeting most of the day and catching up on things in her office. She’d entered the on-ramp and by all accounts was driving at a normal speed when her car, a black Nissan Maxima, suddenly left the on-ramp, plunging fifty feet down the incline.

She hadn’t been going that fast. But then she hadn’t tried to stop, either. It was almost as if she’d made a slight error in judgment and driven off the on-ramp by sheer accident.

Hard to believe when that particular on-ramp was one of the most well-lit in Irvine.

Which only left one other possibility—that Laura had intentionally steered her car off the on-ramp.

Vince could not believe that. Neither could her friends or family. Laura Walters had loved life, loved her job, and most important, loved her husband. She wouldn’t have deliberately killed herself.

Something must have stolen her attention from her driving for one brief moment, a fraction of a second.

She’d been killed immediately upon impact.

Vince’s breathing grew heavier with the exertion of his running, but thinking about Laura also helped bring it on. Vince quenched the thoughts away as he sprinted faster up the street, heading for home. He concentrated on the movement of his limbs, the steady pace of his breathing—in and out, in and out—as he ran, and then he was jogging up the driveway of his house. He fished in the pockets of his shorts for his keys as he went up the walk to the front door.

He let himself in, panting heavily. The descending sunlight spilled through the sun-roof in the living room, creating a dazzling effect of light that splashed across the coffee colored carpet. He closed the front door and trudged through the living room, removing his tank top with one quick motion. He threw the garment on the sofa and headed for the kitchen. Beyond the kitchen, the dining area lay in shadows but he paid it no mind as he opened the refrigerator and took out a bottle of Evian. He drank, gulping down the cold water. He wiped his forearm over his sweaty brow. His throat was very dry so he drank some more, taking his time at it and letting the water quench his thirst.

When he caught his breath he put the Evian bottle on the counter and exited the kitchen, moving through the living room, past the family room with the enormous entertainment center they’d built up over the years, and up the stairs to their bedroom. His bedroom. He still couldn’t get used to calling it his.

He stopped at the threshold, looking at the bedroom. By his standards it was in shambles. They both used to keep the house immaculate. Now there was no point. The sheets were pulled down over the king-sized bed and bunched down at the foot. Underwear and socks from the past week were scattered along the floor near the foot of the bed. His shirts, likewise, were strung here and there on the floor without regard to landing. Only his slacks were hung up with some form of neatness in the closet. He could feel the sweat almost vibrate on his body as he stood at the bedroom doorway. I must smell like a pig, he thought. That helped veer him away from what he was on the track of thinking about. Instead, he headed into the bathroom for a shower.

When he emerged fifteen minutes later he felt better, much more refreshed. He walked nude to the bureau and fished around inside for a pair of shorts. He found a pair of white boxer shorts with Bart Simpson imprinted on them. He put them on and paused at the mirror over the bureau for a moment. He ran his fingers through his damp hair, surveying himself. He’d lost weight since Laura’s death, but at least he didn’t look sickly anymore. For awhile he’d been really out of it; rarely eating, never exercising, doing nothing but driving around his and Laura’s favorite haunts, roaming around the empty house crying over her loss and feeling sorry for himself. When he’d returned to work he’d thrown himself into his job, staying at the office at times till eleven o’clock at night. His employees raised questioning eyebrows but never said anything. They were giving him his space. Even his best friend Brian Saunders, who’d hired him almost ten years ago, said nothing, but let it be known that if he ever needed for anything—and I mean anything—that he was there. Vince realized this and appreciated it. And he somehow found the strength to work through the loss.

He even started dating again. Something he thought he would never be able to do. He was currently seeing a woman Brian hooked him up with at a business function. Tracy Harris. He liked her, and he could tell Tracy was wildly attracted to him. It felt good. But it was hard getting used to. He was taking it slow, one step at a time.

He stepped back from the mirror and examined himself. He was gaining some color again, and while he wasn’t the golden tan he’d been of his youth, it was an improvement. His muscle tone had crept back and, with a combination of getting back into his eating habits and exercise, he’d been able to bring his weight back up. Only this time all caution had been thrown to the wind in regards to his food intake. Where before he wouldn’t have been caught dead eating beef, he craved McDonald’s and Carl’s Jr at least twice a week now. The jogging and assorted other cardiovascular exercises he’d implemented helped to burn off some of the extra calories and fat he was getting.

He smiled at his reflection in the mirror. Doing good!

He turned away from the mirror and noticed the blinking light of his answering machine. He wondered briefly if it was Tracy. Curious to hear the message, he crossed the bedroom and pressed the PLAY button. The tape rewound.

The voice that came out of the speaker wasn’t one he recognized. It was a male and appeared hesitant. “Uh…Mr. Walters? This is Officer Tom Hoffman from Warwick Township in Lititz, Pennsylvania. I’m the Chief of Police here in town. Could you please return my call as soon as you can? It’s very urgent. My number here is…area code 717-626-1500. Don’t worry about the time difference. I’ll be up, and I’ll be home. Please call me…thank you.” The sound of a phone being hung up, and then silence.

Vince looked down at the answering machine, puzzled.

Lititz, Pennsylvania. His mother lived there—at least, as far as he knew she did. He hadn’t spoken to her in over five years, and the last time he had she’d still lived there. Since then, he tried not to think about her, much less keep in touch. She’d made it clear to him the last time they’d spoken that he was pretty much not wanted in her life.

He stood before the dresser, the message echoing through his brain. The only explanation he could think of why a small town sheriff from his mother’s town would call him was if something had happened to her. He reached for the answering machine and scrambled for a pen and scrap paper as the tape rewound. He replayed the message, jotted down the number, then sat down on the bed and put his hand on the phone with sickening dread.

What else could it be? he thought. Something’s finally happened to her. She finally went over the edge from overzealous religious nut to bona fide psycho. Maybe she killed a gynecologist. Or maybe her church group turned into one of those militias and the FBI was holding her and her friends on weapons charges. He stopped the mental debates on what possibly could have happened, and picked up the phone to call Pennsylvania.

The phone was picked up on the fifth ring. “Hello?” It was Mr. Hoffman’s voice.

“Officer Hoffman, this is Vince Walters returning your call.”

“Oh, yes, Mr. Walters.” Recognition immediately set in the lawman’s tone of voice, as well as a tinge of hesitation, as if he had bad news and didn’t want to be the messenger. “Thank you for calling me back.”

“What’s happened?” It was the first thing he could think of to say. Why else would a law enforcement official from Lititz call? It was ten o’clock at night in that part of the country. It had to be his mother.

“I’m afraid I’ve got some bad news for you, Mr. Walters,” Hoffman said, gravely.

“Please, call me Vince.”

“All right, Vince.” Tom Hoffman paused. Then he took a deep breath, as if he was composing himself. “I’m afraid I’ve got some bad news,” he said again. His voice cracked slightly.

“What is it? Is it my mother?” Vince’s heart was racing.

“I’m afraid your mother has been murdered, son.”

Vince sat on the bed, the news of his mother’s death settling over him. It should be affecting him more than it was, but it wasn’t. It felt as if the news Chief Hoffman had delivered was more along the lines of, I regret to inform you that your appointment with your accountant has to be changed—is Saturday morning okay? Or, the kids down the street from your house stole your garbage cans; would you like to press charges?

“Vince? Are you there?”

“Yes, I’m here. What did you say?”

“I said, your mother has been murdered.” There was a sense of awkwardness on the other end of the line, as if Chief Hoffman wasn’t used to delivering this kind of news. Vince supposed he wasn’t. He’d lived in Lititz for a little over a year, and the most local law enforcement had to put up with was catching speeders on Route 501 and breaking up the occasional bar fight at the local tavern.

“How?” Vince asked. “What happened?”

That seemed to break the tension. “Well, we’re investigating it now as a homicide because that’s certainly what it looks like. It appears to have been a breakin gone bad. Her neighbor, Jacob Harris, found her when she failed to show up to church that day. The door was busted open and the place was ransacked. They found Maggie in her bedroom.” Chief Hoffman’s voice was deadpan. “She was slashed up pretty bad. The coroner thinks she probably bled to death.”

“My God,” Vince said. He was shocked.

“Nothing appears taken,” Tom Hoffman continued. “At least not yet. The place was a mess; drawers pulled out and rummaged through, cabinets opened and stuff spilled out, sofa cushions slashed open. Crap everywhere. They even tore apart the attic. Nothing valuable appears to have been taken, but then your mother didn’t appear to have anything of value anyway.”

“No, I don’t think she did,” Vince said. As far as he knew, his mother had disavowed all worldly things years ago.

“Anyway, Lillian Withers suggested I call you,” Sheriff Hoffman said. “She said that you’d been estranged from your mother for quite some time, but she felt you should know.”

The mention of Lillian Withers cut through the din of shock that Vince felt over hearing the news of his mother’s death. He managed a slight smile. He’d always liked Lillian, even though she was cut of the same fundamentalist Christian mold of his mother. He didn’t know why he liked her; perhaps it was the gentle way she listened to him when he was growing up, the times she baby-sat him when he was ten years old and mother had that awful job at the factory. This would have been when they were living in Toronto, Canada. Man how time flies, he thought. But there were other reasons why he felt a special fondness for Lillian above all the other people Mom had chosen to surround them with when he was growing up. She’d provided a human touch and voice when all that was shoved down his throat was hellfire and damnation. And in a world devoid of love—especially from his mother—that went a long way.

“I’m glad you did,” Vince said. He ran a hand through his hair. “How did you find me?”

“We may be small town cops, but we can still track people down if we have to.” Chief Hoffman gave his first genuine laugh since he called, and Vince found that to be a welcoming relief as well. “Although I gotta admit, it was tough. With no criminal record to go by, it took me about four hours longer than usual.” This time they both laughed, and Vince found himself in a better frame of mind than he’d felt in…why since Laura’s death. “I finally got your address through tracing your social security number. We kept running names until we found a match.”

“When did this all happen?” Vince said. He had a million questions and they all beckoned to be answered now.

“Last night, we think. She was found early this morning. I’ve been putting off calling you because…well, I don’t convey bad news very well. Never have. Especially when it comes to something this grim.”

“I understand.”

“Lillian wanted me to give you a message,” Tom Hoffman said. “She wanted to know if you could come out and sort of…help out with making the funeral arrangements and maybe tending to your mother’s property.”

“Of course,” Vince said. Isn’t that what you were supposed to do when your mother passed away? “I’ll try to get out there tomorrow if I can.”

“Thank you, Vince. And please accept my condolences.”

“Thank you.”

“Goodnight, Vince.”

“Night.”

He hung up the phone feeling numb, detached. Despite the severity of the news, he didn’t feel anything. He supposed he should feel some sense of outrage or grief. After all, it was his mother who’d been murdered. But he didn’t feel any of those things. A part of him felt guilty over his lack of immediate sorrow and grief, but he quickly quashed them. He’d been a mess when he heard about Laura’s death. He’d cried, gone into a rage. The depth of his mourning for Laura was so deep that he didn’t think he would be able to pull himself out of it. But he was starting to do just that. And now there was the news of his mother’s sudden death.

But he didn’t feel sad over what had happened to his mother. Not in the least bit.

Because let’s face it, he thought as he exited the bedroom and headed downstairs in his Bart Simpson boxer shorts, she was a sad excuse for a mother the last fourteen years. She didn’t even want to see me, much less hear from me. The way she treated me when I left for college, when I graduated, when I got married. She told me I was the spawn of hell. What kind of mother tells her child that?

One like Maggie Walters, obviously. A woman who immerses herself so deep in crazed Christian Fundamentalism that even snake-handling Pentecostals think she’s off her rocker. A woman who plucks her son away from his father at the age of eight and moves him all the way across the country, then enters him in no less than a dozen schools between then and when he’s sixteen, trying everything she can to suppress his life, ruling over him with an iron fist and the King James Bible…telling him that even if he lived in accordance to the word of God he was probably going to Hell anyway…that was a woman who lost all respect from her son.

But I’m all she’s got she can call family, he thought as he pulled out the Yellow Pages from the counter near the phone and began flipping through it to find the travel agencies. What else can I do?

With that question in his mind, he began making arrangements to fly to Pennsylvania the following morning.

Chapter Two

FOURTEEN YEARS.

It was hard to believe it had been that long since he’d set foot in Lancaster County, much less the state of Pennsylvania itself, but that’s how long it had been. Fourteen long years that seemed to have gone by with the speed of a few months.

Vince Walters thought about the time gone by as Delta Flight 189 taxied down the runway of Philadelphia International Airport. It was already late afternoon, and he had another two-hour drive to Lititz. He unfastened his seat belt, pulled his carry-on baggage out from beneath the seat in front of him and put it on his lap. An elderly woman beside him was watching the scene from the window with a sense of longing; she was coming to visit her brother who she hadn’t seen in fifteen years. They’d talked briefly during the nearly five-hour flight, and Vince hadn’t lent himself too well to the conversation. She was a sweet woman, but he had too much on his mind. Last night’s conversation with Tom Hoffman for starters.

And then the dreams.

The dreams had actually been recurring figments for the past year now. The first one had started off innocently enough; he is alone in the dark, seated on something (a raised dais perhaps?) There is the faint flickering illumination of lights far off in the distance. He thinks it might be candles but he can’t be sure. And then he senses others with him, grouped around him. He is elevated above them somehow, as if the dais is a throne. And then the low hum starts. That’s when he wakes up.

Or at least when he used to wake up. The dream had intensified a little bit as the months passed, and they seemed to explode after Laura died. This time the low hum turned into a chant, and the darkness in the room lifted just ever so slightly so that he could make out the figures gathered around him. Only they seemed to be cloaked in darkness.

He’d sought therapy when the second dream came. This dream was more disturbing and violent.

In this dream he is around three years old. He is in a house somewhere. There are other adults in the house with him. It feels very much like the adults are here to visit his parents, although he doesn’t see them anywhere. He doesn’t really recognize anybody in the dream, although he feels that he should. They all have a sense of familiarity to them that is nagging. In the dream he is happy and playing. One of the adults, a young woman, acts as a babysitter. She sits by him, smiling at him as he plays with a Mr. Potato Head on the floor. A few other adults are gathered around talking to her, pausing every now and then to look at him. They are keeping an eye on him, making sure he doesn’t hurt himself or get into any trouble.

After awhile he senses they’ve left their positions and are now in other areas of the house. He turns to see where they’ve gone and finds that the woman is now talking to somebody on the couch on the other side of the room. Her back is to him. All the people in the room are young; the women lithe, wearing blue jeans and halter-tops or long flowing dresses. Their hair is parted down the middle. Some are wearing headbands. The men, likewise, are long-haired for the most part. Some are sporting beards. Others have short hair, but appear to resemble the other men by their choice of dress: blue jeans, sandals, T-shirts or denim vests. There is a scent in the air that he has later come to associate with marijuana. It hangs in the air like a cloud.

He doesn’t notice the wild man until it is almost too late. He sees him hanging in the background of the hustle and bustle of the party, watching over everything with avid interest. Every time Vince turns to see what is going on among the adults, the wild man averts his eyes, as if he doesn’t want Vince to know he is watching him. The man has long scraggly hair and a beard, ratty looking T-shirt and jeans, barefoot, beaded necklaces hanging down his hairy chest. His eyes are gray and piercing in the dim light. He hangs back in the shadows, leaning against the doorjamb between the living room and the kitchen. Not talking or mingling with anybody.

Vince continues playing quietly with himself. He is happy and content. And then a forearm snakes around his throat and hoists him off the ground roughly.

He is jarred out of his play as he’s lifted off the ground. He begins screaming and crying, mostly from the shock of being so roughly picked up, but also from the pain and pressure of the arm around his throat. He screams, but he can’t hear himself over the shouts of the others in the room. He feels a mad rush, and then all at once everything is a sense of jarred images: shaken perceptions of the room he is in, as if he’s being jostled about; excited and angry voices; the rush of running people, the crush and mad violence as he is pushed and pulled and shoved; the constriction of his throat, and then the sharp pain as something is held against his temple, the point digging into his flesh, and over it the mad voice of the man who has picked him up. The man is shouting something above the din of the others and he sounds angry and insane. And then there is nothing else but the screaming and the total helplessness of being unable to escape.

The first time he had the dream he came awake gasping for breath, the beginning of a scream lodged in his throat. He’d thrown the covers off his body, his skin tinged with sweat as the nightmare washed over him. Laura had only been gone a month and he hadn’t had what he referred to as his “darkness” dream in months, and then all of a sudden he’s hit with this. That first night he’d climbed out of bed and went to the bathroom where he’d splashed cold water on his face, then leaned over the wash-basin, head bowed, trying to gather his composure. His adrenaline had been pumping and he felt nervous, tingly. He felt like he’d just escaped the clutches of a deranged madman, or the jaws of a slobbering monster. He looked into the mirror at his reflection, ignoring the dark circles under his eyes. “God, that was bad,” he’d said. “That was a bad one.”

He’d tried to get back to sleep that night, but remained awake.

The dream returned a few nights later, more intense and terrifying then the original. The second time he had it he woke up screaming.

The third time the dream came there was an added bonus. As he struggled to free himself from the wild man’s grip, as the madness erupted around him, he felt warm wetness cascading over him, soaking him completely. And then the smell of blood.

He’d screamed himself awake that time.

Vince gazed out the window as the 757 angled into the terminal. Passengers next to him began to rise and gather their baggage. Vince rose to his feet and hung back, waiting until the plane was stopped and people began moving. The elderly woman who’d been seated next to him had already gathered her purse and was standing up, waiting patiently for the aisle to clear. She cast him a warm smile. “I hope you enjoy your stay in Philadelphia,” she said.

“Thank you,” Vince said. He almost said, I hope so too. He didn’t think anything about this trip was going to be enjoyable.

“Are you visiting family?”

“Family.” He confirmed.

“Oh, that’s nice! Cousins? Aunts or uncles?”

“A little of both, actually,” Vince lied. He looked down the aisle to see if it was moving. The plane had finally parked and those that were in first class seemed to be getting up and moving. Vince was halfway back in coach, near the wing. It would be a while before those in the front of the plane cleared the way enough to allow him to leave his aisle.

“Well that’s so nice,” the elderly woman said. She was wearing cranberry colored slacks and a lavender blouse. Her hair was a mix-match of blond and gray, short and curly. She looked to be somewhere between sixty-five and one hundred. “It gives me such joy to see young people like yourself take time out to visit with their families. I think family is a very important thing to have.”

“I agree,” Vince said. The truth was, he didn’t. As far as he was concerned, she could take her concept of the American Family as defined by wherever she’d gotten the myth from—Newt Gingrich, Ralph Reed, whoever—and shove it up her elderly ass. The only thing the concept of the American Family had ever done for him was hurt and scar him.

He turned to glance out the window, making as if to check the weather. What he was really doing was avoiding more conversation. The woman was nice and he was sure she meant well, but if he had to engage in conversation with her for another ten seconds he was going to snap at her and he didn’t want to do that.

She seemed to take his turning away as a hint and settled her sights on the aisle again. Already those that were toward the front of coach were moving into the aisle and down, heading out of the plane. Vince sighed, hoping the crowd would hurry up. He still had to get his baggage, secure a rental car, and drive out to Lititz. And then he wanted to find a hotel and try to catch some winks. He hadn’t slept well at all last night.

The dreams…

Both of them hit him last night, the “darkness dream” followed by the dream in which it felt like he was going to be murdered by the long-haired man. He hadn’t had either dream in months and had come awake with a sudden gasp, the scream on his lips, his body dotted with sweat. The bedroom windows had been open, allowing an offshore breeze to blow through the curtains to help cool down the house. He usually slept better on warm nights with the windows open a crack.

Not so last night. He hadn’t been able to get to sleep at all, and he finally rose around four a.m. and went downstairs to watch TV. When seven-thirty came, he’d called Brian Saunders’ office. Brian had picked up on the second ring. “Brian.”

“Brian, its Vince.”

“Vince! How’re you doin’ this fine morning?” Vince could picture Brian at his desk, immaculately dressed, sport coat hung up on the coat rack in the corner of his office, his chair overlooking the sprawling suburbs of Irvine and north Mission Viejo. Brian Saunders had the best office in the building. “You caught me just in time. I was just about to go down to the cafeteria to indulge.”

“Those breakfast burritos will kill you, bro,” Vince had said, grinning.

“I know, but ya gotta have a vice, right?” Brian chuckled.

“I guess so.” Vince then plunged into the news of his mother’s death with Brian pretty easy. There was no holding back with Brian on anything. Next to Laura, Brian was his best friend. “Listen Brian, I got some bad news last night. My mother passed away and I’ve got a ten-thirty flight to Pennsylvania this morning.”

“My God, that’s horrible!” Brian had exclaimed. He’d become serious almost immediately. “What happened?”

Vince had given him a quick run-down, which really wasn’t much. Brian listened calmly and quietly. When Vince finished, Brian’s voice was low, sincere. “I’m very sorry to hear what happened, Vince. I know…well, I know you two weren’t very close, but still, it’s a horrible thing. It’s a horrible way for her to die.”

“I know,” Vince had said. He’d been sitting on the couch, still dressed in his Bart Simpson boxer shorts. He’d turned down the volume of the TV, which was tuned to VH1. Lenny Kravitz had been singing about an American Woman. “I keep thinking that I should feel differently about all this. I should feel…sad, or…I don’t know…”

“You should be mourning,” Brian had said. “The way you mourned for Laura.”

Vince had nodded to himself. “Exactly. But I don’t. Is that shitty, or what? Here my mother has died—been murdered—and I react as if it was nothing more than a goldfish I had for two weeks that kicked the bucket.”

“But you weren’t close to your mother,” Brian had quickly interjected. “You told me yourself how she treated you. How she neglected you. I mean, look how she reacted when you told her you were getting married.”

Vince remembered that all too well. When he and Laura had gotten engaged, he’d made a last ditch effort to patch things up with his Mom. Things had been rocky ever since he left home for college and they’d only grown worse. But when he’d told her he was getting married she’d gone, in a not-so subtle term, bugshit crazy. She’d gone into her “Jesus talk,” rambling about Original Sin and how the prophecies were being fulfilled and that he was surely serving the Devil. Then she told him that she never wanted to hear from him again; if he was going to go this far in defying her, in denying what the Lord had offered him, she wanted no part of him. She hated him. And then he’d slammed down the phone, cutting off her hateful, spiteful voice. Laura had been sitting beside him on the couch when he made the call, and when he hung up the phone he’d looked up at her, his throat locking up and the tears springing up into his eyes. His mother…hated him. “She…sh-she,” he’d stammered.

And then Laura had taken him in her arms as he cried.

Vince tossed the memory back in the files of his mind as he talked to Brian. “You’re right. I guess I’m just over-rationalizing things. She really was…well, a shitty person toward the end there. I guess I’m just feeling…I don’t know…required to grieve for her. You know what I mean?”

“Of course,” Brian had said. “Because under any other circumstances you would grieve. You would feel mournful. But in your case there’s no reason to if you don’t feel any grief. And there’s no reason for you to feel guilty over your lack of grief. Laura’s passing was understandable. And if I kick the bucket before my time, you better cry and mourn over my casket as well.”

Vince had laughed. Brian could lift your spirits when you were feeling at your lowest, and this morning proved to be no exception.

“So I take it you’ll be taking the next few days off?” Brian had asked.

“Yeah, I gotta take care of this.” Brian had been his manager a few years before. Now he handled the Middle-East division and reported to the Director of Finance, much as Vince himself did. Vince handled the U.S. division. Their boss, a man who Brian once remarked to Vince looked remarkably like Hubert Humphrey, was currently vacationing in the Cayman Islands. Rumor had it he was with his secretary, a blonde twenty-two year old with a pair of mangos a man could die for.

“Okay, no problem,” Brian had said. “Steve is out for three weeks frolicking in the Caymans with Sarah anyway. He probably won’t even be checking his voice mail. I’ll cover for you.”

“Thanks, Brian.”

“Listen, if you need to talk?”

“Of course. I’ll call you.”

“Okay. See you when?”

“Monday morning, hopefully.” It was already Wednesday, and he figured he would try to arrange for a small service for his mother on Friday and fly back to Irvine on Saturday. He quickly outlined his itinerary for Brian. “If I do get in Saturday, I’ll call you. Maybe we can get together Sunday.”

“Good deal. See ya.”

The traffic near his aisle began to move down the plane and the elderly woman quickly moved in place. Vince followed and made his way down the aisle, the remnants of this morning’s conversation with Brian already a faint memory. He felt drowsy. If he could just get through the next few hours the first thing he was going to do was check into a motel, take a sedative, and crash. He could deal with Chief Hoffman and the task of arranging his mother’s belongings tomorrow.

As he walked out of the plane and down the concourse of Philadelphia International Airport past people greeting loved ones, he never felt so alone in all his life.

THE HOUSE LOOKED the same as when he first left home fifteen years ago.

He pulled up to the side of the road and stopped the car. Behind him, Chief Hoffman pulled in and Vince got out of his rented Toyota Hatchback. The Pennsylvania weather was warm, the air clean and fresh. The sky was a deep blue, dotted by scarce clouds. Rolling hills dotted the countryside beyond his mother’s house, which sat alone on a patch of land surrounded by fields of corn. A farm rested half a mile down Mill Lane, where his mother’s house stood. He turned his attention to the house as a flood of memories threatened to break loose. Tom Hoffman approached him, hands on his hips, eyes squinted against the mid-morning sun.

“Crime scene tape is still in place,” Tom Hoffman said, nodding at the house. The tape was still up, its harsh yellow standing out like a beacon, proclaiming to anyone who came within sight that this was a CRIME SCENE. “But the homicide detectives have already gone over the place and taken away everything they need, and I got a key. Come on.” He led Vince up the worn walk to the sagging front porch. Vince was still trying to take all of this in; how the house and the land around it really hadn’t changed all that much.

Tom Hoffman inserted the key in the lock and opened the door. He turned back to Vince, who was standing on the porch and looking out at the yard with rapt wonder. “Been awhile, eh?”

“Too long,” Vince murmured.

“I know how it feels,” Tom Hoffman said. “Not much has changed here, Vince. The town’s spread out a little towards Newport Road, and you saw that big shopping center when you drove up 501; that’s all new. Not much else has changed, though. ’Specially your mom’s place and the rest of them.”

Vince turned to Sheriff Hoffman. “The others are still around?”

“Oh, yeah. Couldn’t break that group apart for the world.”

“They still have services at Hank Powell’s place on Owl Hill Road?” Vince asked.

“Yep.” Tom Hoffman took off his hat and squinted at the sun as he looked down the road where they’d come from. He was in his early fifties, of medium build with thick brown hair and craggy features. He looked like the Marlboro Man; rugged, beefy with no hint of fat. In short, a man’s man. His blue police uniform was clean and wrinkle free. His hands were large, his forearms thickly muscled. Tom Hoffman appeared to be the type of man you wouldn’t want to tangle with. “Most of them still live up that way.” He cocked his thumb toward the direction they’d come. “Lillian still lives in that little house behind your mom’s. She’s probably home now. She’s been too upset to return to work.”

“I can only imagine,” Vince said.

“Why don’t you come with me and we’ll have a look around.” Tom Hoffman headed toward the door. Vince turned to follow him. The Chief fished in his pocket for the key, found it, inserted it in the lock. He opened the door and stood aside. “After you.”

Vince took a deep breath and stepped into the house.

Nothing had changed. When he and Mom moved to Lititz, the seventy-year old three-bedroom farmhouse that sat off Mill Lane was weathered and beaten by too many snow storms and neglect. He’d helped mother renovate the house that summer; new shingles on the roof, stripping the old wood off the outer walls and replacing them with more sturdy material, a new paint job. Then they’d done intensive repairs to the interior; more repainting, re-carpeting. When all was done the house was cozy. And with what furniture they’d brought with them from Toronto, most of it antique to begin with, it made the house a throwback to the 1920s. Simple furniture, simple times. It brought a sense of nostalgia and peace. The only thing Vince thought distracted from it were the many religious paintings she insisted on hanging where most families would install more secular decorations. None of them had been taken down; there was a large crucifix over the fireplace, Christ’s face looking forlorn and wracked with pain. Above the worn lavender sofa there was a framed excerpt from that old standby, John 3:13: “For God so Loved the World That He Gave…” In Vince’s bedroom Mom insisted that the “The Wages of Sin are Death” framed slogan remain hanging over his bed. Since Vince was already treading the water of sin in the form of good old-fashioned teenage rebellion—sex, drugs, and rock and roll—he hated waking up to that proclamation every morning. If Mom thought it was going to work in steering him away from the occasional toke with the guys after school or a romp in Kathy Stevens’ bed when her parents were at work, then she’d been seriously mistaken. At seventeen, with his hormones raging fiercely, he could not have cared less what she would think about his—

“—when you’re done just give me a holler,” Tom Hoffman was saying. He was putting his hat back on his head, heading for the door. “Number’s on my card. Homicide Detectives from Lancaster are coming back today at three and they’ll probably want to speak to you. They know you’re in town.”

Vince started and turned toward Tom Hoffman. He’d been snapped out of his silent reverie but hadn’t missed much. Tom was leaving, so he could get down to whatever business he had to do. “Fine,” Vince said. He held his hand out to Tom. “And thanks. Really. I appreciate everything you’ve done.”

Tom Hoffman’s eyes held his as he shook his hand. His grip was warm and firm. “Don’t mention it,” he said. “Just doin’ my job. And I hope I do it right, because what happened here really bothers the hell out of me.”

“I know what you mean,” Vince said.

“I understand you and your mother weren’t very close,” Tom Hoffman began. “From what I gathered in talking to Lillian, you and your Mom have been estranged for ten years or so. Is that right?”

“Yes.”

“We’re still checking things out around here,” Tom Hoffman continued. “That’s one of the things you have to do in a homicide investigation. The most likely suspects to come up are usually those that are closest to the murder victim. In this case, Lillian and the rest of your Mom’s church friends are the most viable suspects, since they were the only ones your mother associated with. But there’s just nothing there to connect any of them. A lot of them may be nutty in their religious beliefs—hell, I think they’re nuts and I’m a rock-solid Christian myself—but there’s no way they could have done such a thing. The very idea that Maggie was murdered was enough to get them to assemble for an emergency prayer session at Reverend Powell’s house. Lillian was just beside herself with grief. They not only don’t display the signs of guilt or suspicious behavior, but the physical evidence isn’t there. Vincent Caruthers and John Van Zant were both at home with their families that night; Lillian was on the phone with her sister; a few of the others in their little congregation were with the Reverend preparing for a Bible study. The only person alone that night was your mother. That’s why we think it was a home-invasion robbery.”

Now all the questions that had been on his mind since hearing about his mother’s death wanted to spill out. He’d held back as long as possible, especially since meeting Tom forty minutes before at the station. At that time the Chief had given him information on when the coroner would be finished with his report, and when Vince could claim the body. He’d also given Vince the names and phone numbers of his mother’s friends so that he might contact them with funeral arrangements. They hadn’t talked about the specifics of the murder at all. Now that they were alone, away from the hustle and bustle of the police station, there was so much he wanted to know.

“You told me over the phone that it appeared to be a robbery gone bad. I’ve been mulling that scenario over in my mind since last night when you called me and I just don’t get it. Don’t get me wrong, I realize people are killed in home invasion robberies all the time…especially in L.A. and other big cities. But…”

“To have it happen in a rural community like Lititz Borough is something you just can’t fathom,” Tom Hoffman finished for him, nodding. He hooked his fingers through the belt loops in his slacks and regarded Vince seriously with his dark eyes. “That’s an understandable position. It’s true, we don’t have much to speak of in the way of crime in Lititz. You should know that yourself, having lived here for a while. But it happens. And when it does, especially when it’s a murder like this, it becomes the talk of the town for the next ten years. We just don’t get that kind of crime in communities like this. Christ, everybody in Lancaster County is still talking about the Laurie Snow murder and that happened eight years ago!”

“Which I suppose brings me to my next question,” Vince said. He crossed the living room to the small kitchen that his mother had spent long hours toiling over pot roasts, cakes, and pies for church bake sales. “Do you have any suspects in mind? Could it have been anybody local?”

“That’s a possibility, although I doubt it.” Tom Hoffman looked a little uneasy as he stood in the center of the living room. “Don’t get me wrong, Vince. We have exactly one bad boy here in Lititz. Guy by the name of Steve Anderson. Steve is nineteen years old and is a hopeless excuse for a man. When he’s not serving time for shoplifting and grand auto theft or assault and battery, he usually spends time in our drunk tank for disorderly conduct. He did two years in a Lancaster Youth Facility when he was sixteen for beating another boy so bad that the victim lost an eye and was permanently brain damaged. His parents are alcoholics—his dad is on disability from a work injury as a welder at the Harley plant in York, and his mother is a sorry excuse for a woman. There are two older children who haven’t fared much better; the older son left home four years ago and is living in Baltimore, doing what, I don’t know. The daughter, from what I gather, works as a stripper in Philadelphia and has a few prostitution convictions. The family had a fairly nice home, but they lost it when the parents of the boy Steve beat up sued them and won. It wasn’t long after that when Steve’s father lost his job at the plant. They’ve been gettin’ by on public assistance since then. Anyway, to put it as bluntly as I can, the minute I stepped in your mother’s bedroom and saw what had been done to her, Steve Anderson was the first person I thought of who could have done such a thing. I came this close to heading down to the trailer the Anderson’s have moved to and arresting Steve myself.” He held his thumb and forefinger up, emphasizing how close he’d come to hauling Steve Anderson’s white-trash ass to jail the night Maggie Walters was killed. “But then Guy King, my deputy, talked some sense into me. The…well, the things we found in your mother’s bedroom was what Guy convinced me that somebody like Steve wouldn’t have the sophistication to do.”

“The sophistication?” Vince raised an eyebrow at that. What was so sophisticated about murder?

“Yeah,” Tom Hoffman took off his hat again and rubbed the top of his head with his right hand. He looked slightly queasy. “Did you ever hear about the incident in Arkansas a few years ago regarding the murder of three little boys? Eight years old I believe they were. Three teenagers were caught and ultimately convicted in their deaths.”

Vince shook his head. “No.” Watching the local news was about the most he digested when it came to the world’s atrocities.

“It happened in a community similar to Lititz. The boys had been sexually mutilated and sodomized. Then they’d been brutally slashed with a knife. The murders were committed in a gully, off in the woods. The murder weapon was found six months later, but it’s questionable that’s even the weapon used. Anyway, what led the police to their suspects was that they were regarded as local riff-raff, much in the way Steve Anderson is. Only these guys—kids, actually, ’cause they were no more than seventeen or so when it happened—were nowhere near the scum Steve Anderson is. Their biggest sin was that they were into heavy metal music.”

Vince knew what was coming. “They were swept up in a witch hunt.”

“Right. They were forced to confess and recanted their confessions during the trial. But the prosecution had them. Here they were, long-haired, rock and roller kids and they were the perfect scapegoats. The prosecution successfully branded these young men as Satanists and claimed that the crimes were ritual murders, despite the fact that the evidence said otherwise. The community this happened in is very conservative, and the jury bought it. The prosecution fed on the jury’s fear that these kids were ruthless devil worshippers and that they must be stopped. So they’re currently on death row.”

“And your deputy didn’t want you to react in the same way?” Vince ventured.

“Correct,” Tom Hoffman said. “But here’s where the similarities in both cases end. While the men convicted in the Arkansas case definitely had the sophistication to make the murder appear cult related if they wanted, there was no cult related evidence left at the scene to present such a theory. Steve Anderson, on the other hand, has no knowledge or understanding of cults, much less religion in general, and wouldn’t know a pentagram from a hole in his head.” Tom Hoffman paused, eyeing Vince gravely. “Are you sure you want to hear this?”

“For God’s sake, yes!” Vince exclaimed.

“This murder is a cult,” Tom Hoffman said.

The words hung in the air with their grave clarity. Vince looked at Tom Hoffman with a sense of puzzlement. “What do you mean?”

“You sure you won’t be squeamish?” Tom Hoffman cut off Vince’s impending question.

“No.” He was more curious now than ever before, yet he could feel his stomach grow heavy with dread.

Tom Hoffman regarded him warily. Then he turned toward the rear of the house. “Okay, follow me.”

Vince followed Tom down the short hallway toward his mother’s bedroom. The door to the bedroom was closed, and Tom paused to cast one more look at Vince as if to say, are you ready for this? Are you sure you can handle this? Vince’s expression told Tom that he was ready. Tom nodded, gripped the door knob with his left hand and opened the door.

Vince followed Tom into his mother’s bedroom, the crime scene where she met her untimely demise. The drapes over the windows were drawn, making the room shroud-like, the shadows the furniture cast even darker and longer. Tom reached for the light and chased the shadows away with a flick of the switch. Vince blinked and almost stepped back in horror from the scene in front of him.

The double bed his mother had kept as far back as he could remember was missing, along with the small bureaus that flanked both sides. There was a dried pool of blood on the floor where the bed would have sat, and a spray of blood on the wall where the headboard of the bed would have rested. Toward Vince’s right was a large bureau with a mirror over it. Toward his left was a small chest where he knew she kept her embroidery and crocheting equipment. There was a small closet next to the chest.

On the wall where the headboard would have rested, directly beneath the spray of blood, was a series of symbols in maroon. There were six of them, drawn in a straight line. To Vince’s eye they were archaic and meaningless.

“Homicide removed the bed and the bureaus for testing,” Tom Hoffman said, as Vince looked at the room in growing shock. “They’re still running tests on it. The rest of the room and its belongings have already been swept by homicide for evidence.”

Vince got over the initial shock and took a deep breath. For some reason he expected it to look worse than it was. While he was expecting it to be bloody, Tom Hoffman had built up such a drama around his theory that it was a cult-related murder that he was expecting something… more grotesque. Ghoulish perhaps. With the exception of the strange symbols written in what was obviously his mother’s blood on the wall above her bed, there was nothing else unusual about the scene. His mother had been stabbed to death in what was probably a home invasion robbery, and naturally there was a lot of blood. So what?

“To tell you the truth, Mr. Hoffman, those symbols mean nothing,” Vince began, choosing his words carefully and speaking softly. “Some doped up kid could have done it in emulation of something he read in a book or something.”

Tom Hoffman looked at Vince seriously. “You weren’t here when we found the body.”

“No.”

“I also didn’t tell you…everything.”

“Then perhaps you’d better.” Vince was getting tired of this beating-around-the-bush behavior.

“I will, now that you’ve pretty much proved that you can handle it.” Tom Hoffman gestured at the bloody scene in front of them. “First, tell me if you notice anything out of the ordinary about this room besides that bloody mess on the floor.”

Vince looked at the room. It had been fourteen years since he’d been home. He wouldn’t know if his mother had made slight decorations to the room. But from the placement of the furniture, and the way the room looked, it appeared that nothing much had changed. He looked at the room, trying to remember what it looked like from the last time he was here. The bed was in the same position he remembered, the bureaus, likewise, were where they’d always rested. The wall was bare now, but—

“There used to be a crucifix hanging over her bed,” he said, motioning toward the bloody wall. He remembered that clearly now. For not being Catholic, his mother sure had a fetish for graven images. “It’s not there, and I don’t see it anywhere else.”

Tom Hoffman nodded. “What I’m going to relate to you about the state of your mother’s body when we found it is pretty graphic. I realize that your comments about those symbols are true; they could have been done by some stupid kid who was robbing the place. But the condition we found your mother’s body in is my firm conviction that this wasn’t just a robbery.”

“Okay,” Vince said. If this was going to be bad, let’s get it over with.

“When we found your mother’s body—or, rather I should say, when John Van Zant found your mother’s body—it was lying in a normal position, feet toward the foot of the bed, head resting on the pillow. Her eyes had been gouged out and her chest was ripped open. Whoever did it appeared to know what they were doing. The coroner said the cuts were precise and were executed with surgical skill.” He looked at Vince. “Are you okay?”

Vince nodded. He felt a little light-headed, but he was okay. “Yeah. Just…the initial shock of hearing that did me in there for a minute. I’m okay. Go on.”

“You sure now?” Tom Hoffman looked concerned.

“Yes, please.” Vince swallowed a lump in his throat, bracing himself for the rest. Laura’s death had been horrible, but this…this was madness.

Tom Hoffman regarded him for a moment before going on, as if checking to be sure Vince had the stamina to hear the rest. “The killer, or killers, cut out her heart and her eyeballs. We haven’t found them. Whoever killed her took them with him.” He appeared to hesitate again. “They also shoved the crucifix into her vagina.”

Vince closed his eyes, trying to cast the image away. “Jesus,” he breathed.

“Somebody bent on a simple robbery who encounters the homeowner does not go through the extreme…cruelty that your mother went through. Nor do they invest in the time it takes to do something like this.” Tom Hoffman spoke slowly, as if he were teaching a course on the fine arts of homicide investigation. “The coroner estimates that whoever did this tortured her first—post mortem evidence suggests your mother may have been tortured for probably fifteen minutes before she was killed. They most certainly violated her with the crucifix before she died. The coroner says she would have died eventually from those wounds, but they spared her the pain and horror of that. They slashed her throat. Then they performed the eviscerations. To perform such surgery takes time and precision. They weren’t interested in robbing your mother. They had motives far more sinister than that.”

Vince closed his eyes. He thought the details of Laura’s death were horrible, but this was worse.

“Vince? Are you okay?”

“I’m fine,” Vince said. He looked at Tom Hoffman. His body felt hollow and empty. “You have to understand something here, Mr. Hoffman. I…lost my wife nine months ago in a car accident. I’m still trying to get over it. Was doing a pretty good job of it until I heard about this.”

“My God, I am so sorry.” Tom Hoffman looked devastated at this news, as if he were partially responsible.

“I was never very close to my mother,” Vince continued. He turned away from the cop, looking out the window into the back yard. “The last time I was really close to her was a long time ago. She…changed a lot when we moved to New York. And then we hopped around so much after that, it seemed that she changed into a different person every time we moved. By the time I was fourteen she was a completely different person than the woman who raised me. Hell, I barely remember that other woman. And she became downright loony the last few years I was home.” He managed a slight smile and chuckled. “Shit, she got worse in the years after I left home.”

Tom Hoffman stood quiet and listened.

“Anyway,” Vince seemed to be groping for the right words. “I guess what I’m trying to say is that…I’ve been through a lot the last nine months. I think I’m just now beginning to get over my wife’s death, even though I know I will never—ever—be completely over it. And to hear that my mother had been murdered…didn’t really strike a dent in me.” He looked at Tom. “Do you know what I mean?”

Tom nodded.

“I’ve talked about this already with a good friend of mine back home. I just…I don’t know…I’ve been so numbed by Laura’s death that I guess the news of Mom’s passing just hasn’t hit me yet. And to hear your theory is just…mind boggling, I guess.”

Tom laid a gentle hand on Vince’s shoulder. “I know it’s tough to understand. Hell, I don’t even understand how somebody could do something like this.” Tom Hoffman’s voice was low, gentle and soothing. “But if you need me during the next few days, you know where to find me.”

Vince nodded. He looked away from the bloodstained hardwood floor at Tom Hoffman’s weathered face. “Yeah.”

“Good.” Tom motioned toward the room. “I’ve got a team of detectives from Lancaster coming today to question some of the neighbors and perform another sweep of the property. If you’d like, come back later this afternoon and I’ll give you a key. You can collect what you need then.”

“Thanks.” He turned and walked out of the bedroom. Tom Hoffman followed him. He really wanted to spend time in the house and poke around, look to see what she’d been up to. Find out about her. For the first time since his childhood, he realized he really didn’t know very much about his mother or her family. Why is that? He thought. Every time I tried to bring the subject up as a kid she would find some way to avoid it. She refused to talk about it. I stopped asking as I grew up. But now that he was an adult he realized it was the one enigma about his life that he always knew was beckoning: who am I? Where did I come from? Who are my people?

“Listen, I’ve got to get back to the station.” Tom Hoffman glanced at his watch. “The local PTA wants to meet with me to discuss the fall school semester’s extracurricular activities. And since I’m on the local PTA board, well, that sorta lends to my duties as well.”

Vince and Tom Hoffman walked outside together. Tom locked the front door, and as they walked to their cars Vince asked him one last question, one that had been in the back of his mind since he heard about the grisly circumstances of his mother’s death. “Mr. Hoffman, did my mother or any of her friends talk about anything…well, anything about their past to you?”

“Their past?” Tom Hoffman stopped at his cruiser and eyed Vince curiously. “What do you mean?”

“Oh, you know, the way people make offhand remarks about their pasts. Reminiscing. That sort of thing.”

Tom Hoffman shook his head. “I’m afraid not. At least not to me. Your mother and her bunch were quiet. Kept to themselves mostly. Despite the fact that they’re church going folks, I imagine everybody has a past. Why?”

Figments of the dream drifted in his mind, like tendrils of fog along a dark moor. “Oh…just something I’ve been wondering about.”

IT WAS ANOTHER five hours before he could get back into the house again. This time alone.

He’d spent the rest of the day driving his rented Toyota around Lititz and the surrounding countryside. Remembering. How he and his mother, Lillian Withers and some of the others from Mom’s congregation had moved out here from Toronto, Canada where they’d spent the previous eight years. He’d been sixteen going on seventeen then, and the move had been especially hard on him. He’d been taken out of the middle of the semester, away from his friends, and driven across the snowy country to the Pennsylvania Dutch Country with no conveniences of the modern city life he had grown accustomed to in Toronto. He’d been dating a pretty cheerleader when they moved, and his sixteen-year old heart had especially ached over that. For a while, he thought his relationship with Anna was the reason for the sudden move. Mom became increasingly angry with Vince during the last year or so of their residence in Toronto. He’d started on the rocky road to adolescence and wasn’t going to church with her as often—he claimed his paper route duties kept him from worship, and in turn, mother began spending more time away from home. When Vince came home from school he usually sat down to supper in an empty house. To fill in the emotional gaps, he began inviting his friends over after school for water-bong parties. When he had his first girlfriend, a cute brunette named Marion, they lost their virginity to each other on a night his mother was at a church service.

He always wondered if his mother was praying for his soul that night.

He drove around Lancaster County, remembering the year-and-a-half he lived there. He drove by the local high school. He drove by the homes of the friends he’d made in the year or so he lived in the area, wondering where they were now, or what became of them. He almost stopped at the house of a friend he’d hung out with, a guy named Judd Campbell, when he saw that the Campbell family vehicle was parked in the driveway. The vehicle was a beat-up Ford station wagon that had seen better days in the 1970s. Judd had called it the Campbell hearse because his grandmother was the prime driver of the vehicle and she was eighty-seven years old. Grandma was probably dead now.

Vince pulled the Toyota over to the side of the road and looked at the Campbell house. There were two other cars parked in the driveway beside the wagon, a Jeep Cherokee and a Subaru. He could make out movement in the house, but couldn’t tell who it was. The temptation to walk to the front door, knock and ask for Judd was great, but in the end he suppressed it. Today was not the day to go chasing after nostalgia.

He spent the rest of the day at his motel room where he napped for an hour. Then after a quick lunch at Nino’s Pizza, he headed over to the Lititz Borough Police Station. Tom Hoffman had told him to come to his office at three for the keys to his mother’s place. He picked up the keys and headed to the house.

He let himself in and stood in the dark living room, listening to the silence. Then he turned on the lights. The curtains were drawn and he moved to the kitchen, wondering where to begin.

He went to the bedroom and turned on the lights. The wall and floor were bloodstained with the remnants of death.

Something drawn on the wall in blood, on the other side of the bed, made him gasp.

Tom Hoffman told him about the atrocities performed on his mother but on his earlier trip, in the dim light, he hadn’t noticed this drawing. It was set apart from the other scribbles on the opposite wall where the bed’s headboard had rested against.

No wonder Tom Hoffman thought this was a cult related murder.

Drawn at about chest height was a horned figure. Vaguely satanic, its body was winged, its face long, eyes blazing. It was centered within a circle and a strange design that was not written in blood; rather, it appeared to be drawn with a felt tipped marker. Vince did not recognize the symbol. It wasn’t a pentagram by any means. It held to geometric lines that were similar, but there were a lot of angles, a lot of circular shapes that twisted and turned within it. Scrawled close by, also in blood, was a line of gibberish. M’gwli acht K’tluth K’ryon Hanbi e ’ghorallth liber daemonorum.

He turned away from what was written on the wall and looked around the room, images of the past flickering past the lenses of his mind. This room was as good as any to get started.

He got down to business, going through the closet and the chest. As he began sifting through her belongings, he thought he would stumble upon information somewhere that would reveal relatives; he knew she had a sister somewhere. And she had to have parents. He dimly remembered mom talking about them years ago, but she stopped talking about them after their first move to upstate New York. Now he wanted to find out everything about her, which was almost nothing.

He spent the next three hours going through the house from top to bottom. He searched through the closet in her bedroom, the hall closets and linen drawers, the closet in the second bedroom that had once been his room, and the drawers and cabinets in the kitchen and bureaus in the living room. All he found were clothing, shoes, old books on Christian philosophies, Bibles, a few boxes of Christmas decorations, boxes of old silverware, and an old stereo system. When he left home for college, he’d left a collection of Circus magazines in a cardboard box at the bottom of his closet. Now all those items were gone. Probably burned them, he thought. That would have been her way of thinking. Burn the devil’s possessions and cast the beast out.

By the time he reached the living room he was convinced he wasn’t going to find a single thing. The closest he’d come to actually finding something was a scrapbook in the bottom of the chest in her bedroom. When he opened it all he found were photos of their lives in Toronto.

When he opened the drawer in the kitchen near the silverware compartment he didn’t think he’d find anything either. Amid the scraps of paper, some pens and pencils, a pair of scissors and some clothespins, he found a worn phonebook. He pulled it out and opened it. He flipped through it slowly. Not many names. Twenty in all. All of them people he either knew growing up—people like Lillian Withers, who’d traveled with them from Canada—or their phone numbers and addresses were all local. Not an unfamiliar name in the book.

He closed the book and sighed. He had planned on starting the delicate task of calling some long lost distant relative bearing the bad news, but it looked like that wasn’t going to happen. A small part of him that had held out hope in finding out who her relatives were shriveled up and died. He’d probably never find out where she came from, who her family—his family—really was.

He left the house when he was finished and headed for his motel room.

Chapter Three

THE NEXT MORNING after breakfast and a shower, Vince Walters drove the rental car to Lillian Withers’s home in Lititz.

He’d been tired after the long flight and meeting with Tom Hoffman yesterday. He thought he’d be able to get some much needed rest, but upon arriving back at his motel yesterday afternoon he was met by two homicide detectives from Lancaster who wanted to question him. Vince had wearily agreed, and the three of them had spent an hour talking in his room. The detectives were friendly enough, and Vince could tell that they were doing the best they could in trying to make sense of his mother’s murder, but they appeared to spend most of their time asking Vince about her religious beliefs. He’d told them everything: about his mother’s sudden conversion to evangelical Christianity shortly after they’d moved to upstate New York from California, how it changed her, in many ways not for the best. He told them about the move to Toronto, her taking up with a small close-knit group of fellow believers and their banding into a fellowship; how they’d formed under the leadership of Reverend Hank Powell; how fire-and-brimstone they’d been. He told them how he’d fallen away from the faith, how he never really believed in much of the hardcore elements of their beliefs.

And what were their beliefs? they’d asked.

Vince responded: “She was convinced she and her congregation were God’s chosen ones and that we would be protected from the wrath of Armageddon. She told me I was special. Because I’d accepted Christ in my heart, she and the group had a powerful weapon to wield against Satan and his demons. Really crazy stuff. I would go along with it just to appease her, but I never really believed it. I thought it was just a sack of bullshit. Especially when I saw my friends at school, friends who came from very loving families, some very traditional Christian families who espoused the same basic religious beliefs who were nowhere near as crazy in their beliefs as my mother and her friends were. She believed in the same basic theology, but she took it more seriously. More personal. She believed that she—that we—were chosen by God to lead the battle in Armageddon and that the time was drawing short. She believed that in order to be in God’s Army, we had to live strictly by his law. They advocated living in strict accordance of Christ’s example. To live by the ways of the world was an open rejection of God, because Satan was the ruler of earth. To live by the ways of the world, namely to go out and live a normal life, get a job, pay taxes, go to movies, read books, listen to music, go to parties, drink, smoke, engage in a sexual relationship, whatever, meant you were living in Satan’s world. It pretty much reserved a place in hell for your soul for the rest of eternity.”

The detectives had nodded at this. One of them, a dark-haired man about his own age named Harry Michaelson said, “We understand they were very quiet, kept mostly to themselves and didn’t cause much trouble. We’ve already questioned members of the congregation and people around town that knew your mother, and they’ve pretty much confirmed what you’ve told us.”

Once the detectives left, Vince found it hard to relax, much less sleep. His mind had kept drifting to the church they’d formed—the First Church of Christ—and their beliefs. He thought about their obsession with Satan, especially Armageddon and their overzealous paranoid reactions against what they saw as “the great satanic conspiracy.” According to them, some of the most respected people in government offices and business were top satanic henchmen. They were also pulling the strings behind most of the drug smuggling in this country. And, as could be expected, they routinely kidnapped people for ritual sacrifices.

They were beliefs he no longer held to, much less believed much in anyway. When you were a teenager, the last thing you wanted to be told was that your favorite rock band—in Vince’s case, Iron Maiden—were comprised of devil-worshippers.

When he woke up this morning after a fitful sleep, resolved to drive out to Lillian Withers’s place and face the music, he told himself that he was going to stay strong in his beliefs. He was an atheist now. He may have been a believer a long time ago, when he was a child, but he no longer held to those beliefs. Thanks to the group’s paranoid delusions, he saw no credence in them. He saw no reason to let their beliefs sway him now. Besides, he was hoping that Lillian Withers hadn’t changed much in the last fifteen years since he’d last seen her. Of the dozen or so church members that his mother fellowshipped with, Lillian Withers was the one he’d liked the most. She’d been the most down-to-earth.

All his worries of talking to Lillian Withers turned out to be in vain. In short, Lillian hadn’t changed at all.

She recognized him the instant she opened the door to her small home on Meadow Lane. Her light blue eyes lit up in surprise and happiness when she saw him. “Vincent! How good to see you!” She opened the screen door. “My God, just look at you! Come in! Come in!”

Vince grinned sheepishly and stepped into Lillian’s home. Lillian was wearing a red plaid dress, her auburn hair tied behind her head in a bun. Unlike many of the old order Amish and Mennonite people who lived in the area, the women in Reverend Powell’s sect did not wear prayer caps, but they did dress modestly, mostly in dresses and occasionally jeans. Lillian had aged gracefully; Vince had always pegged Lillian to be close to his mother’s age, give or take a few years. The last time he saw his mother, she’d looked at least ten years older than her forty-one years. Fourteen years later Lillian, who was probably in her early fifties now, didn’t look older than forty. She was positively radiant.

She swept Vince up in a hug. “Oh, it’s so good to see you, Vincent!”

“It’s good to see you too,” Vince murmured.

“I’m so sorry about Maggie.” Lillian’s voice cracked slightly and Vince held her. She sniffled once. “I’m so sorry about what happened.”

What exactly did happen? He almost asked. Lillian looked up at him, her eyes misty with tears. “Well,” she said. “Why don’t you come in? I’ve got some tea if you want.”

“Thanks,” Vince said. Lillian disappeared into the kitchen and Vince took a quick glance around the house. A small living room leading to an even smaller kitchen, a hallway at the far end of the living room led to the two bedrooms and the one bathroom. The living room was furnished nicely and modestly with a couch, two easy chairs, and an oak coffee table. An entertainment center contained a small receiver, a tape deck, and a twenty-five inch television. There was a framed picture of Jesus Christ over the sofa, His gaze cast to the heavens. Another framed picture hung on the wall near the kitchen, this one a work of embroidery with a religious slogan from the Book of Mark.

“How long have you been in town?” Lillian asked from the kitchen.

“I got in yesterday,” Vince said. He sat down on the couch and leaned forward, his elbows resting on his knees. The coffee table was positioned in front of the couch. There was a TV Guide on one side of it. On the other side was a King James Bible and a prayer book. “I talked to Chief Hoffman and a couple of detectives from Lancaster.”

“Michaelson and Harvey?” Lillian came out of the kitchen bearing two tall glasses of iced tea. She handed Vince one, who took it gratefully.

“Yes,” he said, sipping the iced tea. It was delicious.

“They talked to everybody here, too,” Lillian said. “Well, everybody in the group. They were all pretty upset.”

“About talking to the detectives?” Vince asked.

“No,” Lillian said. She sat down in the easy chair closest to the couch, on Vince’s right. The curtains were open, basking the room in light. “About what happened. How somebody could…do something so horrible to Maggie.”

“I know what you mean,” Vince said. He took another sip of the iced tea. “I’ve been wondering that myself.”

“It’s just so shocking,” Lillian said, clutching her glass. “The press has been hounding us, too. What’s happened has become the talk of all of Lancaster County. More so than the Lambert case from seven years or so back. You think things like that only happen in places like this once in a lifetime, but to have another happen within the space of a decade…” She shook her head and took a sip of tea. “I saw Maggie the afternoon she died. We’d done some shopping on Main Street and had been talking about going to the Green Dragon. We went there every Friday, you know.” Vince nodded. The Green Dragon was an open-air flea market that was held every Friday in nearby Reamstown. “We were both planning on making dishes for the pot luck at the church, and there was a recipe book your mother saw there the week before. Anyway, I dropped your mother off at the house and she told me she was going to spend the rest of the day and evening making her stew. We planned on meeting at the church. John Van Zant was going to pick her up in the morning and bring her to church, so I didn’t think I’d see her until the next day.” Her features became stony as she remembered. “I got to church that day with my casserole, Mary Rossington baked one of her apple cobblers that she’s famous for. Reverend Powell baked some of that honey wheat bread that he loves. We were planning on just breaking bread together and fellowshipping, real down home talking and sharing in the Lord. We were all sitting in the den of Reverend Powell’s home when Tom Hoffman came. He…” Her voice faltered. “He didn’t look so good. John was with him and he looked pale. We went out to meet them on the porch, and the minute John saw us he just burst into tears.”

Vince listened quietly, nodding every now and then. Lillian looked at him and tried to muster a smile. “Poor Tom. I don’t think that man was ever used to delivering bad news, especially in these parts. But he was just beside himself that day. He almost cried himself when he told us.”

“Did Tom come out right then and tell you exactly what happened?” Vince asked.

“No,” Lillian said. “Not right then. He just told us that Maggie had been found dead, and that he didn’t want us to jump to any conclusions. John cut right in and said ‘Jesus, Tom, come off it! I found her! You can’t tell me some deranged pervert killed her after what we found.’ Well, that piqued my interest, and when Tom left John told us everything. He’d been the one to find her that way. He’d gone into the house when she failed to come to the door when he stopped by to pick her up and he went in and found her.”

Vincent nodded. “Tom told me yesterday.”

“He told you about…what they did to her?” Lillian asked, breathlessly.

“Yes.” Vince took another sip of iced tea. “But how do you know it’s ‘they’? Suppose it’s just one killer?”

Lillian looked toward the closed front door of the house, then her eyes darted toward the windows, as if checking to see if unwanted ears were eavesdropping on their conversation. She looked back at Vince almost fearfully. “Did I say ‘they’? I guess that was just a slip of the tongue. It could be ‘they,’ or ‘he,’ or ‘she.’ Anybody, I guess.”

Vince opened his mouth to pursue the matter, but decided better. Lillian drained the rest of her iced tea and rose, heading toward the kitchen. “I need a refill,” she said. “Can I get you anything?”

“No,” Vince said, puzzled now. “I’m fine.” He waited while Lillian refilled her iced tea. What the hell was that all about? She got really spooked when I asked her about they. Almost as if she knows something more than she’s letting on.

When Lillian returned to the living room her features were more composed. She looked as if nothing had ever happened. She sat back down in the easy chair next to Vince and took a quick sip of her iced tea as Vince tried to steer the conversation back to his mother. “You know,” Vince began, choosing his words carefully. “I really dreaded coming back here when I heard the news. Especially after all that I went through with mom. We…didn’t really see eye-to-eye on a lot of things in the end.”

Lillian reached her hand out and touched his knee lightly. Her blue eyes locked with his. “I know things were hard for you. Especially the last few years you were here.”

“It was worse when I left,” he murmured.

Lillian’s hand rubbed his knee lovingly, bringing the warm touch his mother never would have bestowed. “Your mother was…very upset with you in the end.”

“But why?” He turned to her, his drink forgotten on the table. “I never thought leaving for college or getting married would make my mother hate me.”

Lillian sighed heavily, as if contemplating the delivering of bad news. “At first I didn’t understand it, Vincent. Your mother’s always been…set in her ways, I guess you could say. And I know that you had it harder than most teenagers when you were growing up. I know your mother wasn’t the most understanding person. But there was one thing she was strong in, and that was her faith in the Lord. Your mother walked the closest walk with the Lord than anybody I’ve known in my life. That’s something to be admired about the woman.”

Fuck my mother’s walk with the Lord, Vince thought, his jaw set in a hard grimace. If abandoning your child’s emotional needs when they’re growing up is part of walking with God, then I want no part of Him. He tried to keep the anger out of his voice. “So she never spoke about me after I left, right?”

“Far from it,” Lillian said. She picked up her glass of iced tea. “She spoke of you often. Prayed for you all the time.”

“Prayed for me?”

“Yes.” Lillian took a sip of iced tea.

“Why?”

Lillian hesitated. “Are you sure you—”

“Yes,” he almost snapped. “Just tell me!”

Lillian blinked in surprise, as if taken aback by Vince’s sudden outburst. Vince closed his eyes briefly and took a deep breath. He exhaled and opened his eyes. “I’m sorry,” he said. “I…I didn’t mean to snap at you like that.”

“It’s okay,” Lillian said. “You’ve been through a lot lately.”

More than you’d care to imagine, Vince thought. He ran a hand through his hair, took a sip of his iced tea, and leaned forward on the couch, ready to go head-to-head with whatever revelation Lillian had. “Why did she pray for me all the time?”

Lillian sighed. “She believed you were walking with Satan.”

The tension that had been building up in Vince’s limbs evaporated. He let out a breath. Was that all? According to the way his mother interpreted the Bible, he pretty much expected her to believe he was one of Satan’s minions. Lillian’s confession wasn’t a big surprise. “Why did she think that?” he asked.

“Because according to her, you’d abandoned the Christian faith she raised you in.” Lillian’s eyes were open, gentle. “You didn’t believe. You chose to cloak yourself in worldly things, which the Bible says is aligning yourself with Satan. Are you familiar with the Gospels, Vincent?”

“Yes,” Vince said. He took another sip of his iced tea.

“Then you know what Jesus said about choosing to live in the world, by the ways of the world. That Satan rules this world and its ways are his.”

“That’s all I heard when I was growing up,” Vince said. He set the glass of iced tea down on the table. “I suppose that despite the fact that I didn’t share my mother’s religious beliefs, she assumed I was a sinner and was doomed to Hell. And that because I was, she couldn’t associate with me because I would taint her somehow. Right?”

Lillian reached out again and caressed Vince’s arm. It felt comforting, soothing. “Vincent…I know you’re troubled by all that’s happened. Your mother’s death…your estrangement from her and all. But…she had a good heart. Really, she did. You may think she was crazy, but she really cared about you.”

“I wish she would have showed it,” Vince said. He drained the rest of his iced tea and stood up. “I’ve got to get going.”

Lillian stood up and walked with him to the front door. He had to get out of this house now; he felt his throat locking up. He felt like he was going to cry again. He felt that a little part of him was dying; the part that had never known the joy and love of his mother. The love that a mother can bestow on her son.

He was almost at the front door when he felt Lillian’s hand lightly gripping his arm. “Vincent.”

He stopped and turned. “Yes?”

She looked at him, her eyes brimming again with tears, and then moved forward, taking him in her embrace. He held her, her voice low and crackling. “I’m so sorry, Vincent. I’m so sorry.”

They stood there for a moment, silhouetted in the doorway of Lillian Withers’ comfortable little cottage set off a narrow farm road in rural Pennsylvania as the mid-morning sun peaked high overhead. Vince could feel the day warming up outside. The scent of lilacs wafting through the doorway was fresh in the air. The crisp, clean country air felt good. Vince closed his eyes and held Lillian, feeling a familiar sense of home, of a childhood he’d never had.

When Lillian finally stepped back she looked up at him, her eyes misty. “You’re a good man, Vincent. I think if your mother were here now she’d be proud of you.”

“Lillian—” Vince protested.

Lillian stopped him by tapping her finger on his chest. “Only the Lord knows your heart, Vincent. In the end your mother was too wrapped up in her own—Lord, dare I say—righteousness, to be concerned with the goodness of other’s hearts. It blinded her. She either didn’t see, or refused to see you for the good person you are.”

“Despite the fact I’m a non-believer?” Vince said. He mustered a smile. He’d said it. He was a non-believing atheist.

“Despite the fact that you’re a non-believer,” Lillian said, without missing a beat. Her features were serious. She looked more composed, more in control of herself. “You’re a good man, no matter what you believe. Don’t let the memory of what your mother used to say to you, or how she treated you, change the way I know you feel about her. Deep down she really loved you, Vincent. She loved you from the bottom of her heart.”

Vince looked out at the road and the thick grove of trees that spanned the property across from Lillian’s. “You know, I’d really like to believe you, Lillian. But so much of the last few memories of my mother is her screaming at me over the phone, telling me I’m the spawn of the Devil, or that I’m going to burn in hell for leaving her and choosing what she called the Left Hand path.” He turned back to her. “Maybe you’ve forgotten about all that happened. When I won that scholarship to UCI. I thought she would be happy for me. She wasn’t. She told me that if I went off to college I would burn in hell.”

Lillian’s features collapsed, as if in shame.

“I went to college and, as you know, the relationship quickly went downhill. She sent me tracts in the mail, she called me on the phone telling me she was organizing a prayer session in the hopes I’d be saved.”

Lillian nodded, closing her eyes. “I remember…”

“It got so that every year at Christmas I dreaded coming home because all she would do was insist I pray with her every day at Reverend Powell’s, for hours straight. You remember?”

Lillian nodded.

“When I started dating Laura, it got worse. By then I was working at Corporate Financial. She saw that as really…being something bad and evil. I’m sorry, but I still don’t see what is so evil about having a career in a financial planning firm. It got so bad that I stopped calling her altogether. I even stopped with the Christmas and birthday cards. All the cards I ever got from her were religious ones. But the final straw was when I broke down and called her after Laura and I got engaged. Know what she told me?”

Lillian shook her head. She looked saddened. “No. Vincent you don’t have to tell me—”

“I think I do,” Vince said. He struggled to keep his voice even, to keep from breaking into tears himself. He could feel his chest grow heavy, his throat constricting. “She all but damned me to Hell. She did not want to hear about what I thought was something every mother would want to hear from her son, that I was engaged. Instead she told me I was doomed, and that she did not want to hear from me ever again. And then she hung up on me.” His breathing was growing heavy. He struggled to hold back the flood of tears that threatened to pour forth. “I expected this, but…I thought she would have been happy for me. You know?” And then he did start to cry, just a little bit, because it wasn’t just the memory of his mother’s rejection of him that he was crying over. It was the memory of Laura taking him into his arms that day after his mother hung up on him and he’d turned to her, teary eyed just as he was now and said, “Sh-sh-sh-she..h-h-hates me!” He’d broken down then, and Laura had been there to comfort him.

Lillian tried to offer comfort as best she could. Her warmth brought a sense of security to him, one that he’d never felt with his mother. But then he’d always felt pretty secure with Lillian. Growing up, Lillian had been the only member of the church group to tell him jokes, or to trade gossip in the latest chapters of the soap operas they both watched (Vince had been a fanatical follower of General Hospital in the Luke and Laura days). In short, she’d been more of a mother to him than his birth mother. And she was filling the role now as well.

He wiped the beginning of tears away. He turned away from her, slightly embarrassed. “I’m sorry,” he said. “It’s just that…”

“You don’t have to explain,” Lillian said. Surprisingly, she remained strong for him when he was at his most vulnerable. Her features were composed, strong and confident. “It’s all right to cry every now and then.”

Vince managed a smile. “I wasn’t expecting to cry like a baby in your home.”

Lillian playfully slapped his arm. “I’ve seen you cry more than once, young man! My Lord, I’ve seen you at almost every point in your life except for when you were really little. I’ve seen you cry over everything from scraped knees to broken hearts.”

This broke the ice and they laughed. For Vince, the laughter helped ease the tension. He’d always liked Lillian, but deep down never really knew whether Lillian thought of him as a sinner the way his mother had. Part of that tension was his fear that Lillian, who he saw as his only hope in regaining some sort of foothold in Lititz, would have succumbed to his mother’s view of him.

He felt better now. He looked outside at the warm blue sky, his rental car parked in Lillian’s driveway. He turned back to her, gratitude welling forth. “Thank you, Lillian,” he said.

“Don’t mention it,” she said, rubbing his arm and smiling at him. “That’s what families are for, right?”

“Are you my family, Lillian?”

“I’ve always felt I was.”

“Good. I always felt you were too.” And he did. And now he suddenly felt a void that he never thought he would; a sense of loss in that he never fully knew how much Lillian Withers meant to him as a friend, as family, until twenty years later.

“Lillian,” he began, not knowing how to approach this question. He decided to take the plunge and ask, even if she became shifty about it the way she had when she inadvertently referred to his mother’s killers as ‘they.’ “There’s something that’s been bothering me for awhile now. It’s recently started bugging me since…well, since yesterday when I was on the plane flying out here.”

“Yes, Vincent?”

“Did…did my mother ever mention her family to you? Do you know what ever happened to them?”

Lillian sighed, and much to Vince’s relief she didn’t appear shifty. “Your mother never spoke much about her family and I never asked. All I know is what she told me when I met her, when you moved to Carlisle Street in Toronto. That the two of you had lived outside of Buffalo, New York for a year and that you were originally from California. Your mother was divorced and she had custody of you. That was it.”

“Divorced,” Vince muttered. He’d tried dredging up memories of his life before New York, but it all came in images. He remembered living somewhere other than New York, he remembered a man that he presumed to be his father. The man had been nice, had seemed like a father to him, although he was gone a lot. Vince just assumed he’d been out working. He remembered other people that had been in their lives, but he had no recollection of who they were, or what their relation to him and his mother had been. One of them, a distinguished looking older man, could have been an uncle. A younger couple close to his mother’s age could have been aunts and uncles, friends of the family. Others floated to the surface of his memory only to dissipate. He shook his head. “I don’t remember him hardly at all. I don’t remember his name, where we lived—”

“You were no more than eight or nine when you moved to Carlisle Street,” Lillian said. When he and his mother moved to Carlisle Street in Toronto, they’d settled into a two bedroom apartment in a lower-middle class neighborhood. Lillian had lived in the apartment downstairs and was the building manager. Once Maggie found out Lillian was an evangelical Christian, the two women had become fast friends. “If you were eight when you and your mother left California, you probably wouldn’t have remembered that much.”

“I thought she would have mentioned more to you about our past life,” he said. He looked at Lillian wearily, realizing it was only noon and he had the rest of the day to make funeral arrangements. He felt worn out. “But she didn’t say anything, not even in passing?”

“No.” Lillian shook her head. She tried to muster a smile, perhaps in an attempt to put him at ease. “I tried asking a few times, but she never revealed more than what I just told you. And that her parents were dead.”

“Her parents were dead,” Vince echoed.

“Yes.” Lillian looked at Vince with concern. “Are you okay, Vincent?”

Vince turned to her. He was gazing out the screen door again. “What? Oh, I’m fine.”

“Will you need any help making funeral arrangements?”

“I suppose I will.” He hadn’t really given it much thought until now, but then who knew his mother better than Lillian Withers? “I’m supposed to claim her body this afternoon at the Lancaster County Morgue.”

“Why don’t I call Reverend Powell and see if we can arrange something? Do you have any particular plans in mind?”

“No.”

They spent the rest of the afternoon making funeral arrangements for Maggie Walters.

Chapter Four

LONG AFTER VINCE Walters left her house, Lillian Withers still couldn’t get the thought out of her mind that she almost lost her composure when Vince asked if Maggie had told her anything about her past besides what Vince already knew.

She’d never been a very good liar. How Vince swallowed that one, she would never know.

She sat in the easy chair, her Bible opened to Revelations. It was ten-thirty p.m., and the night was warm. It had climbed to ninety degrees today and it was close to seventy now. A very comfortable evening. They’d spent the day making Maggie’s funeral arrangements, then had gone out to dinner at a steakhouse called Hoss’s and Vince filled her in on what he’d been up to. Graduating top of his class at the University of California in Irvine with a Bachelor of Science Degree in Business Administration with an emphasis in Economics and a double Masters Degree in Economics and Business. He was the Director of the Western Division at Corporate Financial and was doing quite well. With the exception of losing his young wife, Laura, almost a year ago to that horrible car accident, life had been pretty good to Vince Walters. The Lord had blessed him.

Or had He? Lillian skimmed through the Bible, thinking about all that Vince told her. First the loss of his wife, which he was still trying to get over, and now this. Lillian would never wish something like that on her worst enemy. Not that she had any, but she couldn’t fathom it anyway. It was all so horrible. She fully understood now why Vince had broken down earlier that day. She supposed it was perfectly all right for him to not mourn Maggie’s death. She hadn’t been much of a mother to her son in the last few years before he’d left for college. Vince had every right to feel some sort of resentment toward Maggie. Lillian only hoped he would find it within himself to be able to forgive his mother.

Lillian traced her finger down the pages of the Bible, finally stopping at Chapter 20, verse 7. She read the verse aloud to herself. “When the thousand years are over, Satan will be released from his prison and will go out to deceive the nations in the four corners of the earth—Gog and Magog—to gather them for battle.” She paused, reading through the rest of the passage to herself. Then she closed the Bible and looked out the window into the night beyond. “When the thousand years are over,” she murmured. There were many that believed the thousand years hadn’t started. There were others who believed that the thousand years was almost at an end, right now in these final years of the twentieth century. Maggie hadn’t subscribed to that belief. She’d held the opinion that the Beast was alive and well in this country and that his time was close at hand. This belief had taken root more strongly in the last ten years, and within the last few years she’d been almost paranoid about it. It got to the point that she’d almost had her phone unplugged because she thought the Beast was going to call her in the middle of the night to tell her that he was going to claim her as his own. Her fear had been so insistent that Lillian had convinced her to talk to Reverend Powell about it. But the talk with the Reverend hadn’t done much to calm Maggie of this fear. The best Lillian had been able to do was convince Maggie to buy an answering machine. “This way you can screen your calls,” she’d told Maggie, trying to sound as serious as possible. “You can pick it up if you recognize the voice coming through. That way if the Beast does call you, he won’t actually be talking to you. He won’t be able to get you.”

Surprisingly, Maggie had fallen for it and it was then that Lillian began to fear for her friend’s sanity. Maggie had always been strong-willed and God fearing, but her fear of the approaching of Armageddon and her insistence that it was coming sooner than they thought had really gotten to her the last few years. Lillian even talked to Reverend Powell about it in an effort to lay her fears to rest and the Reverend hadn’t shown the least bit of worry. “Maggie is simply preparing for what the Lord has told us is bound to come,” he’d said. “She may be a little more…impassioned about it than most of us would be, but then she’s a very passionate woman. Her walk with the Lord is the strongest I’ve ever seen in a Christian.”

Lillian had agreed. Maggie’s walk with the Lord was certainly one to try to emulate. But Maggie’s behavior still nagged her.

The tip of the iceberg had been when Vincent asked about Maggie’s past.

Lillian sighed and put the Bible on the coffee table. She felt bad about lying to Vince, but she had to. It was the only thing she could think of until she thought about what to do.

Now she had the time to think about it.

The box…

She didn’t know how long ago it was now, but it had to have been in 1987 or 1988. Well over ten years ago. She’d been over at Maggie’s house helping to arrange the knick-knacks on the new shelves she’d installed in the living room. It was spring and the two women had been talking about the latest lesson from church services the week before. Lillian was embroiled in the subject, which concerned Mark’s account of how Jesus chased the money-changers out of the temple, when she noticed Maggie was gone. Lillian stopped what she was doing, turning to try to find her, when Maggie called out. “Lillian?”

Lillian had turned toward the hallway and saw Maggie near the doorway to her bedroom. Maggie beckoned to her and Lillian had gone into the bedroom, wondering what her friend wanted. And that’s when Maggie showed her the box with the padlock.

“I want you to promise me something, Lillian,” Maggie had said. Her breath was bated, as if she was asking Lillian to contemplate something that was on a grandiose scale. Robbing a bank. Or stealing secret documents. Maggie kept looking around the room, as if to keep reassuring herself that they were the only two people in the room.

“What is it?” she’d asked.

Maggie lifted the box up and jiggled the lock. “I’m going to bury this box in my garden. It will be approximately ten feet from where the concrete of my back porch ends, dead center from my back door. It will be buried two feet down. I want you to promise me that if I should die—”

“What? Maggie what are you talking about?”

“If I die,” Maggie continued, ignoring her protests, “I want you to promise me you’ll dig this box up. I’ll give you the only key. You will keep the key in a safe place. If something happens to me, you will dig up the box. You will take it to a safe place and open it. Read the documents I have placed inside it.”

“Maggie—”

“Then take them to Reverend Powell. Do not take them to anybody else. Especially my son if he shows up.”

“Maggie, this is ridiculous! I don’t understand—”

“You will when you open the box. Now do you promise?”

They’d gone back and forth like that for a good ten minutes before Lillian had given in. She promised Maggie she would unearth the box, and that she and Reverend Powell would read what was inside. Maggie had given her the key, and without another word she put the box back in her room. When she returned to the living room she wouldn’t speak of her request. She’d never spoken of it in the years that passed. When Lillian asked, all Maggie would say was that she couldn’t say anything about it now. She was afraid to. But when the time came, Lillian could find out for herself and then God help her.

She’d talked to Reverend Powell about it in the privacy of his home office and he’d listened to her carefully, twirling the corncob pipe he always carried with him but never smoked. He’d been a smoker back when he lived a life of sin, and even though he no longer touched tobacco, the habit of putting a pipe to his lips was an old vice. Lillian saw it as a familiar reminder of his older, dirtier habit, and if the Lord chose to help Reverend Powell rid himself of that habit by making it impossible to give up fiddling with the pipe itself, so be it. When she finished, Reverend Powell put the pipe on his walnut desk and kicked his feet up, lacing his hands behind his head as he leaned back in his chair. He was staring up at the ceiling in contemplation. “Perhaps the items she has in that box are the holdovers from her past life. Her life before she was saved.”

Lillian thought that was the case, but the way Maggie had been so feverishly incensed when she’d asked her to do this bothered her. “You should have seen her,” she’d told Reverend Powell. “It was like she was asking me not to tell anybody that she’d gotten drunk at the local bar and hit on a CIA agent who was in town, and that her brief affair with him resulted in her finding out who really shot JFK.” Reverend Powell chuckled at that scenario and Lillian cracked a grin herself. “I guess that’s a crazy way of putting it, but that’s how it seemed. She acted like she had the world’s…wickedest secret in that box.”

“To her it probably is the world’s wickedest secret,” Reverend Powell said. “The sins of one’s past life can put a tremendous burden on our walks with Christ if we do not shed them. I’ve no doubt that Maggie has shed her sins through Christ, but why she would keep the mementos of those sins, I can’t say.”

“So you really think that’s what they are?” Lillian had asked. “Newspaper clippings maybe, or old photographs of the person she used to be?”

“Of course,” Reverend Powell said. He’d pulled his feet off the desk and sat forward. He was a big man, but gentle. His voice, which was a deep booming baritone, could be surprisingly mellow and soothing. “We won’t know what she has in that box until the day has come when what she has asked us to do comes to pass. But if it puts your mind at ease, it’s my sincere belief that all it carries is probably pictures of her past life, maybe an old scrapbook or phone book. Maybe there’s information on her family in it.”

“She’s never talked about her family at all,” Lillian said.

“Maybe she has a reason not to. Maybe they…treated her badly at some point in her past. Neglected her, abused her. Maybe they were heathens. And the reason she’s keeping this material is because the blood tie is strong. Only the Lord knows. And I think we should respect her wish.”

That had been the end of it. She’d never asked Maggie about the contents of the box, and she never brought the subject up with Reverend Powell again. On the morning they learned Maggie had been murdered, her mind went back to that afternoon over a decade ago when Maggie made her promise to dig up the box and she’d cast her eyes over at Reverend Powell, who was consoling Mary Rossington in her grief. Reverend Powell’s eyes met hers over Mary’s curly-topped head and held them. They were both thinking the same thing. The time had come for that box to be unearthed.

Lillian rose from her chair and went to the kitchen. She went to the closet where she kept her garbage can and fished around. Her fingers grasped the handle of a shovel and she pulled it out, hefting it in her hand. It was almost eleven o’clock, but she didn’t feel the least bit tired. The key was taped to the pages of a Bible that Maggie had given to her as a gift a year before, but there was no need to retrieve it yet. Nor did she feel like waiting until tomorrow to fulfill her end of the promise she’d made. She pulled open one of the drawers of the countertop and pulled out a heavy flashlight. She turned it on. The beam was strong. She turned the flashlight off and carried both tools to the living room. She set the shovel down, leaning its handle against the wall, and put the flashlight on a small end table. Then she grabbed her tennis shoes and put them on. When her shoes were on, she grabbed the flashlight and shovel and was just about to exit the house by the back door when a hand clamped over her mouth and strong arms yanked her back in the house.

Her heart leaped in her throat as she was spun around. A man she didn’t recognize stood in front of her and she could sense another man behind her, his hand still clamped over her mouth. The man in front of her was holding a piece of duct tape. “We need to talk,” he said, as he stepped forward and deftly covered Lillian’s mouth with the tape.

Oh my God, it’s the same men that killed Maggie! Lillian’s mind shrieked. She knew this was the case even as the man behind her guided her into the living room. Her eyes grew wide as she entered the living room as her gaze lit across a third person in the house. A young woman with blond hair, her features pleasant, wholesome, all-American. The woman looked up with anticipation.

“Sit.” The man behind her barked, and strong hands pushed her into a chair. She looked up at the two men, her adrenaline pumping through her veins. She felt suddenly hot in the claustrophobic closeness of her little home.

The man that had grabbed her stepped in front of her, and now she got a good look at him. He was young, with short dark hair, wearing dark slacks and a dark coat over a white shirt. His accomplice was blond, his features gaunt, his skinny frame bearing loose fitting jeans and a billowy shirt. They looked indifferent as they gazed down at her. What do they want from me, oh my God, what do they want—

“We can make this easy, or we can make this very hard,” the first man said in slow, measured tones. “It doesn’t matter to us, but it will to you. You can either go through the same torture your friend went through, or you can tell us what we need to know right now. And if you think your death will be connected to your friend’s, you can forget it. If you decide not to cooperate, we will torture you, but the authorities will think you’ve succumbed to heart failure. It’s really quite simple to do, especially once you’ve given yourself over to the Dark Lord.”

Oh sweet Jesus, help me Lord, give me strength, get thee behind me Satan—

“So what will it be, Lillian?” The man leaned forward as the young woman stood up and pointed at her. The young woman began chanting in a fluting, musical voice. An homine en guterish en domine en deamon ia, shggth nggslamna hanbi.

“So what will it be, Lillian?” the man said and suddenly, as if by magic, hundreds of large spiders were crawling on her, covering the floor, crawling up her legs and body, some already crawling up her neck. She instinctively tried to bolt out of the chair but something was holding her back as if she was tied down. “Will you tell us everything Maggie Walters told you? We know she told you about her son and us. Please, indulge us.”

Lillian looked up at the man, her eyes open wide in fear as she felt the first spider sink its fangs into the soft flesh of her belly. A minute later another spider bit into her neck and Lillian screamed through the tape.

“We can make this all go away now if you wish. You know what to do.”

Maggie’s words went through Lillian’s brain. You are not to tell anybody about this. You are to dig up the box, then take it and the contents to Reverend Powell. Read them together. She thought about what Maggie had died for, thought about the way she’d died, about the symbols written in blood on the wall of her bedroom. There was no way she was going to betray her friend. There was no way she was going to give in to these denizens of Satan.

And Lillian, her fear rising, casting a quick prayer up to her Lord to give her strength, shook her head slowly. No.

In the end, the torture was to be a thousand times worse than Maggie’s.

June 24, 1999, 10:30 PM, Pacific Standard Time.

Hollywood, California.

FRANK BLACK SAT at the bar inside Harry’s Pub on the Strip, surprised that the glass sitting in front of him didn’t contain an alcoholic beverage.

He took a sip of his Coca-Cola and surveyed the bar from his position. Man, how the place had changed. Originally an Italian restaurant, Harry’s quickly became a haven for movie stars and producers in the forties and fifties. Due to its proximity to the Rainbow Bar and Grill across the street, the spot became a hangout for rock stars in the 1980s. With Gazarri’s (now called the Key Club), the Roxy and the Whiskey A Go-Go across the street as well, Harry’s quickly became the watering hole for members of Led Zeppelin, David Bowie, Aerosmith, and every rock star that came to Los Angeles. In the 1980s it became the hangout spot for the scores of aspiring musicians that played the clubs and littered the sunset strip with flyers for their bands. The LAPD made nightly arrests for everything from fights to public drunkenness to drug dealing. Sometimes they busted people for no reason other than to provide amusement for themselves, thus proving militant blacks wrong that the LAPD was down on African Americans. Frank had seen them beat the crap out of people of all races just because they felt like it. Once he’d been arrested while walking to Harry’s. He hadn’t taken a drink all day, he hadn’t been carrying, and he was cold sober. The pigs had just wanted to hassle him because he was wearing a leather jacket and had long hair.

But all that had changed. Now fourteen years later, Frank was not only sober and loving it, he was married to a loving woman named Brandy and he had a three-year old son named Mark and a two-month old daughter named Melody. He was recently experiencing an upswing in his writing career—he’d almost destroyed it eight years ago when he was deep in his heroin addiction—and he was producing the best work in his life. His income was good, better than it had ever been, and the gigs kept coming in. Most of what they used to pay the mortgage on the condo and the bills came from the CD-ROM games he was writing and Brandy’s partnership in the modeling agency she co-owned with her mother. Now that his fiction-writing career was taking off again, he was selling novels. It was only a matter of time before he gained a solid readership. And then…

And now here he was, sitting in Harry’s Bar and Grill wondering why he would risk losing it all again.

Frank took another sip of coke. Neil Young came on the bar’s sound system, screeching that we had to keep on rocking in a free world. Brandy had taken the kids to her mother’s for dinner after Frank told her he had a meeting in West Hollywood with the CD ROM people to discuss next year’s projects. The CD ROM gigs had become so lucrative that she’d bought the lie. It was the first time he’d ever lied to her in the five years they’d been together. Amazing, he thought, drumming his fingers on the bar. To think that all that I have overcome: inadequate feelings about myself, alcoholism, heroin addiction, destroying my career in publishing, using women for my own sexual needs, allowing women to use me for their sexual needs, lying to people to score the next gig, the next fix, the next fuck. I overcome all that, I redeem myself before God Himself, and now I’m sitting in Harry’s Bar and Grill, the most tempting bar in Los Angeles where one can score the drug or woman of their choice without even trying, after having just lied to my wife about what I am doing tonight.

Jesus.

He set the empty glass on the bar. The bartender approached and Frank signaled for another. The bartender refilled his glass with Coca-Cola and placed it in front of him on a napkin. The bartender, who was large and hulking with a bald head and large hoop earrings, motioned at him. “Nice tats,” he said. “Where do you get your work done?”

Frank moved his arms out. He was wearing a black T-shirt with a Harley Davidson insignia on the front. His tattoos were very well displayed. “Rick Bennett over at Good Time Charlie’s does my work now,” he said.

“They’re gorgeous,” the bartender said, wiping down glasses. His arms were tastefully decorated as well, although not as intricately as Frank’s. Both of Frank’s arms were heavily tattooed from the wrist all the way to the shoulder, blending into the pectorals in the front and snaking down his back to his waist. When Frank went shirtless he got quite a few stares, most of them admiring. The tattoos were Japanese in style, artfully rendered, the bottom designs black tribal, the flourishes a vast array of blending images that melted into one another. To Frank, the designs were reflections of who he was, his experiences, his moods. He had been getting tattooed since he was twenty-one, but had not gotten seriously into it until after he became sober. He found that he enjoyed the sting of the tattoo needle better than the syringe.

In time, the tattooing filled that void left from his addiction.

“Rose Tattoos does mine,” the bartender said. He turned his arms toward Frank, showing off a large portrait of a woman, an evil looking alien, and a mythical figure slumped against a tree. They were striking. “They just did a skull on the back of my left shoulder.”

“Hurts like a bitch, don’t it?” Frank asked, grinning.

“You bet!” The bartender said. “You ever had your back done?”

“I’m having a back piece done now.”

“Your whole back?”

“My whole back.”

“Wow!” The bartender raised his eyebrows in amazement.

A young couple dressed in flannel shirts and blue jeans took a pair of seats at the opposite end of the bar. The bartender turned his attention to them and Frank took another sip of his coke.

He’d started out the evening aimlessly, driving the Saturn around the city, letting his mind wander with whatever thoughts he might have and come home. But he found himself driving down the strip, and when he passed Larabee he thought about Harry’s. He pulled into the parking lot down the street and entered without a moment’s hesitation. And he’d been sitting at the bar drinking cokes and thinking ever since.

He supposed the whole thing had started two years ago with the dreams.

In the beginning they’d been mere haunting images that remained in his mind long after work. He used several of the images in short stories that he sold to magazines. But then they began getting worse. He began having dreams about normal looking people hanging out with him, treating him very friendly, almost as if he were family. And then just as he would begin to ease into the relationships they would change suddenly into hideous monsters. They would become beast-like, resembling various creatures; sometimes bearing the large bulbous eyes of a fly; other times the trunk and tusks of an elephant; other times the flat snout and tusks of a wild boar. Sometimes they would turn into combinations of all three, their various identities meshing together, merging from one to the other, then swimming back to human form, all the while voices rose in his mind, singing, droning voices intermingling with the harsh chants of what sounded like praying.

He woke up screaming the first time the dreams became so vivid. Brandy had to wake him up before he realized he was screaming in his sleep, clawing the air in front of him. He’d collapsed in her arms, out of breath, his heart racing with fright. At first he thought it was an LSD flashback. It was much easier to blame such a horrifying nightmare on the indulgences of his youth.

Without realizing he was doing it, he wrote a novel about the dream, using the images as a metaphor for the monsters that are inside some people. His agent sold it first trip out. It had been his first horror novel in seven years. It was called Those Inside.

It became the best received of all of his works, with the exception of the first book of the science fiction trilogy that had come out the year before. Frank Black had carved a reputation for himself in the world of science fiction, and despite the two horror novels he had published during that time—Conversion, which was a vampire novel, and In the Cellar—he was still typecast as a science fiction author. Even when he got back into publishing again, his first sale was a science fiction novel. He’d always liked horror stories, but had never been inspired to write them. His science fiction stories were weird enough.

But writing Those Inside seemed to trigger an untapped well. The week after it sold, he got an idea for a batch of short horror fiction. He was knee deep in writing the third novel for his trilogy, he’d just landed the CD ROM gigs, and life was on the upswing. He’d plugged on, fighting the good fight.

Those Inside had not only triggered an untapped well, it also drained him. The dreams came more regularly, which puzzled him. Writing about the things that bothered him usually purged those demons, but instead the dreams were coming more and more frequently. He began attending his AA meetings more regularly, actually volunteering for things at his local AA chapter, something he’d never done. The dreams kept coming, growing worse in their repulsiveness, and it was then that he began to slip.

He began smoking pot again.

Hemp had always served as a good escape vehicle in the past and it proved to be more so now. And with California’s new medicinal marijuana law on the books, he liked to tell himself that he had a legitimate claim for his use of it. He tried to get to the bottom of the dreams through therapy, but he was making no headway there. He’d started smoking pot again one night after dropping some work off at the home of the man that owned the CD ROM company. “You look beat,” Jeff Townsend had said that night. “Something wrong?”

“Haven’t been getting any sleep,” Frank had said. The dreams had been keeping him up and Mark was hitting his terrible two’s, which made it worse. “I’m really stressed out.”

Jeff had already fired up a joint and handed it to him. “Have a hit. Sit down. Relax a little bit.”

And he did. He didn’t even think about the consequences of what falling off the wagon would do to him. He took two hits off the joint and it hit him immediately. He felt relaxed and at ease; more relaxed than he felt in a long time.

He’d bought a dime bag of pot from Jeff that night and took it up again. He did not slip further down the ladder of Schedule 1 drugs like he feared he would. Pot was all he did. As a medicinal tool, it worked wonders. It relaxed him, made him calm, more at ease.

Naturally, Brandy was worried about his descent back into drug use, but when he displayed no signs of going back to the harder stuff, or alcohol, she relaxed a little but kept a wary eye on him. What she was worried about were the memories being unearthed in his therapy sessions, which he resumed late last summer.

The first time he told her about the memories he’d buried so long ago, memories he never even knew he had, he’d wept in her arms in utter fear.

The therapy sessions had continued, unearthing long buried horrors of his past.

He’d found out his mother had been involved.

In early fall he realized he wanted to find out exactly what had happened to him. But most importantly, he wanted to find out what had happened to his father.

Two years before, a man named Mike Peterson had called Frank out of the blue. Mike claimed to be a friend of his father’s. At the time, the only thing Frank knew about his father was that he’d left his mother when he was three. He’d barely remembered the man. He’d talked to Mike on the phone and told him that he had no idea where his father was and had no desire to know, thank you very much, and he was doing just fine without daddy-o around. Mike had been pleasant enough and had told Frank that if he ever wanted to talk about his father, if he ever wanted to talk about anything, to call him. He’d left Frank his phone number and that was it.

When the long buried memories of his past life came bubbling forth in his therapy sessions, his past life before he’d tried to deaden it with massive quantities of drugs, he’d called Mike Peterson.

He’d met with Mike that weekend at a restaurant in Orange County. Mike confirmed that the memories that were flooding back weren’t simply planted or suggested by his therapist. After Mike filled in the gaps to what Frank was already realizing, he agreed to help him.

And now, eight months later, they were closing in.

Half a dozen more people had crowded into the bar and the music begun to blare loud. Party time. For the first time in seven years, Frank wished for a cigarette. He checked his watch: it was already closing in on eleven PM. Time to leave now if he wanted to make it home by midnight.

He pushed his empty Coke glass back along with the assorted dollar bills in change for the bartender’s tip. Then he rose from the bar and headed out.

When he got outside he paused for a moment to breathe in the summer air. The action on the strip was already starting. The music from the Roxy was loud and foot traffic along the strip was beginning its midnight shuffle. He headed to the parking lot where he’d left his car.

As he drove home he rehearsed in his mind what he was going to tell Brandy. He hadn’t lied to her yet about his work with Mike. She knew it was important for him to find out about his childhood, to dig up those demons and confront them. He’d told her everything his long buried memories had unearthed and she’d supported him every step of the way. That had made their marriage more rock solid, their relationship closer. Baring his soul to Brandy in all this had not only made him more vulnerable to her, but had also created a strong bond of trust. He felt she was part of his team, working with him to get to the bottom of what he knew he had to do even if she wasn’t on the front lines with him and Mike. Her support of him in this was one hundred percent.

He mulled this over as he drove home along Sunset Boulevard, headed toward Pacific Coast Highway. He hoped that what he and Mike had in store wouldn’t place Brandy and the kids in too much danger. Still, he had to be prepared. Earlier that afternoon he’d picked up plane tickets for them and Mike had reserved the cabin in Vermont under one of his aliases. When it came to the lives of his wife and children, he wasn’t taking any chances.

The plan was simple. Ship Brandy and the kids back east. Tell her it was for her safety; she knew that some of the information they’d dug up was dangerous; hell it was scary, but he had to do this. He had to put a stop to these people, had to make sure they were caught and prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law.

But most of all, he had to contact Andy. Mike had just located him.

Andy was the reason for the insanity. The murders.

The rituals.

With a heaviness in his heart, Frank drove home through the dark night.

Chapter Five

June 25, 1999, 8:30 a.m., Lititz, Pennsylvania

VINCE WALTERS WAS in the bathroom of his motel room shaving when the phone rang.

A frown creased his face as he paused in mid razor stroke as the phone rang a second time. He’d already shaved the left side of his face, so he turned the water off, set the razor on the bathroom sink, and went into the main body of the room to answer the phone.

He scooped up the receiver. “Hello?”

“Vince?”

“Yes.”

“This is Detective Jacobs. We met a few nights ago.”

“Yes, Detective. What can I do for you?”

“I’m afraid I’ve got some bad news for you.”

“What is it?” His stomach grew leaden.

“Lillian Withers suffered a fatal heart attack late last night.”

At first the words didn’t ring clear to Vince. He stood at the motel room’s desk, holding the receiver to his damp face. Then it registered and he looked at his reflection in the mirror. His haunted eyes stared back at him. “You’ve got to be kidding.” His heart began thudding hard in his chest.

“I’m afraid not.” Detective Jacob’s voice was weary, heavy with the bearing of bad news. “She was found this morning by Reverend Powell.”

Vince was still trying to grasp the concept of Lillian Withers dead. How could she be dead? He’d just seen her yesterday. Had made preliminary plans with her regarding his mother’s funeral service. She’d told him that he was family to her, something he always felt. And now she was dead.

He took a deep breath, the loss burrowing in his chest. His limbs felt numb, shaky. He tilted his head back and closed his eyes to will away the pain that was beginning to pulsate.

“Vince? Are you okay?”

“Yeah,” he said. He opened his eyes. “I’m fine.” He felt far from fine. He felt like he wanted to scream.

“Vince?”

“Yeah?”

“I’m sorry to have to tell you this.”

“Thank you.” Vince hung up the phone. He sat down on the bed and looked out the window. Then he got up and went back to the bathroom and finished shaving. When he was finished, he got dressed and drove to Reverend Powell’s house to begin the long, painful process of burying his mother and Lillian Withers.

ARRANGING ONE FUNERAL was bad enough. Arranging two proved to be tiresome.

Vince Walters spent the entire day arranging both services with Reverend Powell. The Reverend was still in a state of shock over Lillian’s sudden death, but he proved to be a valuable asset in arranging the services. The County Medical Examiner declared that there was no need for an autopsy on Lillian, since his preliminary investigation appeared that all avenues pointed to a heart attack. That left Vince and Reverend Powell to plan the ceremony for the following day at noon at the makeshift chapel connected to his comfortable little house on Mill Lane, a mere mile from his mother’s home. Reverend Powell made the necessary phone calls to the rest of the congregation and the few townspeople Maggie and Lillian were friendly with. Vince spent the day assisting Reverend Powell, ordering the flowers and making arrangements with the caterers for the wake. When he was finished, he waited with Reverend Powell and John Van Zant at the church for the coroner to deliver the bodies. They were delivered in matching coffins—Vince had made the arrangements on the phone for their purchase and put the charges on his American Express card. The undertaker’s description of the caskets was sufficient enough for him. Both caskets were to be oak, painted white with brass fittings and velvet interiors. That was enough to satisfy Vince.

By the time they were finished for the day, he was beat. He retreated to the motel and promptly fell into bed without disrobing.

He couldn’t sleep. He lay in bed, tossing and turning. His mind was just too busy going over the last few days. He felt restless, so he rose to his feet and turned on the bedside light. He had to get this off his chest. He crossed the room to the small desk where he’d stowed his leather knapsack. He pulled out his cell phone, turned it on, and scrolled through the numbers until he found what he was looking for.

He hit auto-dial, hoping she was home.

Tracy Harris answered on the third ring.

“Tracy,” Vince said, relieved that she was home. “It’s Vince.”

“Vince? How are you? You’re in Pennsylvania, right? Hey, Brian told me what happened. I’m sorry to hear it.”

“Thanks.” Now with the phone cradled to his shoulder, Vince wished Tracy were here with him. It was the first time he’d felt such a need for her and he realized with a small amount of fear that he was falling for her in a way he never thought he would. “Did I catch you at a bad time?” He asked.

“No. How’s everything going back there?” Tracy’s voice came through clear. She sounded concerned.

“It’s okay. I guess I just need somebody to talk to.”

“Well, here I am.” He thought he could detect a smile in the tone of her voice.

“Here you are.”

“I miss you.”

“I miss you, too.” His heart fluttered in his chest, and he realized he was treading into dangerous territory. Am I falling in love with her? And is she falling in love with me? Because if that’s the case, I don’t know if I can handle it.

He told Tracy about everything that had happened the past few days. He left out the grisly details of his mother’s murder, telling her that the detectives appeared to believe a burglar killed her. He hated lying to her, but he wanted to tell her about the strange symbols in person. Doing it over the phone seemed too impersonal. He also told her about Lillian Withers’ unexpected heart attack. Tracy gasped in surprise at the news. “Wow! That’s horrible!” After Vince wrapped it up, she asked the inevitable. “When do you think you’ll be back?”

“The day after tomorrow. We’re having the funeral tomorrow. Needless to say, I guess I’m kinda shaken up.”

“I would say you are. Are you going back to work Monday?”

“I guess so.”

“Maybe you should take the day off. Get a chance to regroup. Rest.”

“I don’t know,” he said, dreading the thought of all the work that would have piled up in his absence. “I’ve already taken a ton of vacation time this year.”

“Forget about what kind of time you have left,” she said. “I think you could really use the rest.”

“We’ll see.”

“I’ll take the day off, too,” she murmured. “We could spend the day together.”

A smile creased Vince’s weary face. “Ah, bribery.”

“I’ll give you a nice long back rub.”

“And?”

“Make long slow love to you.”

Hearing that brought a sudden flush of warmth through him. This was the first time that physical intimacy was mentioned in conversation between them. So she wants me as much as I want her, then, Vince thought. “I think you’ve convinced me.”

“Wonderful.”

“I’m glad I called. I feel better already.”

“Good.”

He leaned back in the chair. “This trip has been so weird, Tracy. Maybe taking Monday off will be a good thing. It’ll take the whole day just to tell you everything that I’ve found out.”

“Such as?”

“For the first time in my life I’m curious as to where I really came from.”

“What do you mean?”

“When I was eight my mother packed me up in the middle of the night and we left the house we were living in with my father and just took off. No word of explanation. I don’t think we took anything with us, just the clothes on our backs. My mother had money and she bought us new stuff, but…it was just so weird. I’ve never thought about it ’til now.”

“Does your father know your mother’s been killed?”

“I don’t know. To tell you the truth, I don’t even know if he was my father. We moved to New York and then we moved to Canada the following year. Mom found God, and things were never the same.”

“Your mom became a religious fanatic? You never told me about this.” Tracy sounded very interested.

Vince shrugged, cradling the receiver in his ear. “There’s a lot I haven’t told you about myself. Some of it I’m just now starting to learn.”

There was a long silence on the other end. Finally, Tracy said: “You don’t know who her family is, do you?”

“No.”

“And you don’t know much else about your past before she left for New York with you.”

Vince sighed. “No.”

“Have you found anything out?” She sounded like she was treading on soft ground, as if she knew this was a touchy subject.

“Not yet,” Vince said. “But I’m determined to find out everything I can about my mom’s past. About my past before we moved to New York.”

“Are there any photo albums or anything she left that might help?”

“Nothing. Whatever she had she either destroyed, or she didn’t take with her when we moved.”

“You might want to stay longer then,” she ventured. “Maybe talk to some of her friends.”

“That’s out of the question, at least for now.” Vince stood up. He finally felt relaxed enough to go to bed. “I really do need to get back home. But I also want to find out everything I can. After the service, I’m going to go through the house again and collect whatever information I can find and bring it home. If I have to, I’ll hire a private detective to help me.”

“When will you get in on Sunday?”

“I’ll call you tomorrow with the flight schedule,” he said. He was on a standby call at Philadelphia on Sunday and wasn’t sure when he could leave. “You’ll pick me up?”

“I wouldn’t miss it for the world.”

“Okay,” Vince said, getting that tingly feeling again for her. “Thanks for listening.”

“That’s what girlfriends are for, right?”

Girlfriends. “I guess so.”

“Well…we have other uses too, which I’ll be more than willing and happy to perform for you when I get you home.”

Vince laughed. “I love you, Tracy.” There. He’d said it.

“I love you, too Vince.”

“I’ll talk to you Sunday.”

“I’ll be here.”

“‘Bye.”

“Goodbye.”

He hung up the phone, his chest swelling with the sound of her voice saying I love you. Had he really told her he loved her? And had she really said she loved him, too? They had, and he’d finally crossed the line he never thought would be crossed. The line that was drawn when he proclaimed his love to Laura seven years ago, the one he’d drawn himself, declaring he would never love another woman the way he’d loved Laura. He never thought their marriage would end in her untimely death, never thought he would get over mourning her loss, never thought he would ever have the capacity to love another woman again. He wondered if his relationship with Tracy, which was the first relationship he’d had since Laura’s death, was simply a rebound, an outlet for the sexual energy that had been building up. Now they were proclaiming their love for each other and they hadn’t even slept together, much less made out. Was this all going just a bit too fast?

Vince turned off the lights and climbed into bed. He pulled the sheets over himself and lay in the darkness, staring at the ceiling. The night was comfortable, refreshing and still, and he thought about Laura and Tracy constantly, their images chasing him as he descended to sleep.

Chapter Six

REVEREND POWELL’S LIVING room was large and spacious. It merged into an equally large den and a roomy kitchen. It was here that the wake was held, and the congregants at the church service were in attendance. The caterers Vince hired had put out their spread while the gravesite services were commencing, and when they returned the large kitchen counter was lined with various meats for sandwiches plus all the trimmings: shredded lettuce, sliced tomatoes, slices of Swiss and jack cheese, mustard and mayonnaise, wheat and white bread. There were three different plates of chips and multiple bottles of assorted sodas, plus a large bucket of ice. Two buckets of potato salad were also present, and most of the guests filled up on that and the sandwiches. Vince scurried about, making sure everything was in order before he made himself a ham and sliced turkey sandwich and helped himself to a serving of potato salad. Then, with a fresh Coke with lots of ice, he retreated to Reverend Powell’s back porch just off the den.

He sat down on the deck, feet planted on the second step that led to the Reverend’s back yard. He set his drink down and balanced the plate in his lap while he ate. He was ravenous.

The service had gone well. It had been held in the little chapel in Reverend Powell’s home and it had been packed with members of the church and a few people from town that mom had grown friendly with. Chief Tom Hoffman had been present; so were Detectives Michaelson and Harvey. Unlike most of the services Reverend Powell presided over, this one hadn’t gone into a two-hour tirade against the ways of the world, but had focused on the virtues of the two women being honored. Vince had remained seated as various people got up and said a few words in memory of Maggie and Lillian. Vince briefly debated getting up and saying a few words, but decided not to. He was still battling with his feelings of what had happened, as well as his relationship with his mother. It was probably best to remain silent for now.

The wake was going pretty well and when it was all over he was going to help Reverend Powell clean up, then go back to his hotel room to pack for his flight the next morning. He’d used Reverend Powell’s phone in the kitchen to place a quick call to Tracy. How did the service go? she’d asked. Good, he replied. She told him she loved him again before they hung up.

Vince was almost finished with his sandwich, enjoying the late afternoon sun, when he heard the sliding glass door open behind him. “Hello, Vince,” Reverend Powell’s voice called out. “Mind if I join you?” The sliding door closed.

Vince motioned toward the space on the wide steps that led to the backyard. “Have a seat, Reverend. I was just enjoying your backyard.”

Reverend Powell hunkered down on the top step next to Vince. He was carrying a can of Pepsi. Reverend Hank Powell hadn’t changed much since the last time Vince saw him; he was a big barrel-chested man, with a square jaw and large, calloused hands. His hair had gone gray and it also appeared he’d toned down some of the hellfire-and-brimstone rhetoric of his persona. When Vince was a kid Reverend Powell seemed scrutinizing and judgmental, and to a certain extent he was. When he met with the man to arrange the services he’d felt his scrutinizing gaze on him a few times. Vince had ignored it and pressed on.

Reverend Powell had been dressed in an immaculate black suit during the service. When he sat down beside Vince on the back deck of his home, Vince saw he’d changed into more casual slacks and a cotton shirt. “Yes, it’s a nice view, isn’t it?”

“How far does your property go?”

“Not that far, actually.” Reverend Powell motioned toward a small grove of trees fifty yards ahead of them. “My property ends where those trees begin. It extends to the right where that little gully is, and to the left by my driveway. I’m fortunate enough to have the house built on this little ridge here. Gives me a nice view.”

“It does,” Vince said, taking a sip of Coke. “I bet it looks beautiful during sunsets.”

“Oh, it does. It’s very beautiful.”

There was silence for a moment as Vince finished his sandwich and Reverend Powell sat beside him, looking out at his backyard and the land beyond it. After a moment Reverend Powell said, “You and Lillian had quite a talk, I gather.”

“We did,” Vince said, wiping his mouth with a napkin. He set his plate down on the porch and took a swig of coke.

“What did you talk about?”

“My mother.”

“Hmm.” Reverend Powell sounded like he expected this answer and was dwelling on it. This raised a red flag in Vince’s mind.

“Why do you ask?” Vince asked.

Reverend Powell looked at Vince with an apologetic look on his face. “Oh, I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to sound nosy.”

“It’s all right,” Vince said, trying to feign normalcy. “We just talked about…old times, mostly. And about what we’ve been doing with ourselves the last fifteen years.”

“Catching up, in other words.”

“Something like that.”

Reverend Powell paused for a moment and to Vince it seemed like the man was struggling to say something. As if he was wrestling to bring up a subject he didn’t want to touch but had to out of some obligation. Vince was just about to steer the conversation into something more mundane when Reverend Powell asked. “Did Lillian give you anything?”

“Give me anything?”

“Yes. A box. Something she would have kept for your mother?”

“No. Why?”

Reverend Powell appeared troubled by this answer. This made Vince concerned. He tensed up, thinking something happened he didn’t know about, that something was being hidden from him. “I was afraid of that,” Reverend Powell said.

“What is it?” Vince asked. He glanced back toward the den and the Reverend turned to look himself. The wake was still going on, but it wouldn’t be long before somebody traipsed out to join them.

Reverend Powell rose to his feet. “We need to talk, Vince.” He set off down the deck steps and into the backyard.

Vince watched him, dumbfounded for a moment. Then he rose and followed the minister into the backyard and to the grove of trees that bordered the property. “What is this all about?” Vince whispered.

Reverend Powell looked back at the house to make sure nobody else had come out, and when he looked back at Vince his expression had changed. Gone was the look of confidence, of sympathy. It had been replaced by fear. Reverend Powell looked like he had the knowledge of the world’s most evil secret and that keeping it to himself would be worse than telling it. “I have to tell you something Vince, and you have to promise me you won’t reveal to anybody that we had this conversation. Okay?”

“Hank, what’s wrong?” Vince exclaimed, troubled now by the reverend’s demeanor. “You act as if you’ve seen a ghost or—”

Reverend Powell’s hand shot out and gripped Vince’s shoulder, his strong fingers pinching him like a vice. “Promise me!”

“Okay, okay—”

The fingers tightened again. “And keep your voice down.” He whispered fiercely.

“Fine,” Vince hissed. The reverend released his grip and Vince massaged the area the bigger man had gripped. His stomach became a hollow pit of fear as he stood at the end of Reverend Powell’s backyard.

“Lillian relayed to me eight years ago that your mother made a rather unique request should she pass away,” Reverend Powell began, speaking slowly. “Your mother requested that Lillian was to dig up a box in her backyard and to turn it over to me.”

Vince was flabbergasted. Was the box supposed to contain information on his mother’s family—a hint of his past? “What’s in it?” he whispered.

“I don’t know,” Reverend Powell said, his features turned down in defeat. “Lillian died before she could dig it up.”

Vince turned this over in his mind. He could picture Lillian Withers sitting in her little house on the evening she died, thinking about the promise she’d made to his mother. Did she get up to go outside and dig up the box just as she was felled by the heart attack? If that was so, was it possible that thinking about what was in the box was the catalyst that caused her heart to fail? “The police don’t know about this?”

“No,” Reverend Powell said. “Chief Hoffman did mention that Lillian had removed a shovel from the storage bin off the kitchen, but he didn’t inquire about it. After all, she was found in her chair in the living room and the medical examiner has already ruled that she died sitting in it. I’ve been doing a lot of thinking, though, and I think she was getting ready to dig up the box your mother buried in her backyard.”

“The police didn’t stop to wonder why she’d taken the shovel out?” He was excited now. “I mean, my mother gets murdered a few days before and then her best friend turns up dead. Surely they would’ve put two and two together and—”

“Use your head, boy,” Reverend Powell said. “The coroner attributed the cause of Lillian’s death as a heart attack. Perfectly natural. Having an honest to goodness real murder case for them to deal with is more than enough for them to handle. This is Lititz, Vince, not Los Angeles.”

Vince’s mind was whirling. “Okay, but what about now? If that box contains something about my family…if she’s buried it because of…oh, I don’t know, trying to bury a shameful past or something, as a part of her rebirth, her conversion to Christianity…and it’s still there, I think I need to—”

“I’ve already tried looking for it,” Reverend Powell said through clenched teeth. “I tried last night. I went out there and dug in the spots Lillian told me your mother would have buried it. I couldn’t find anything. At least not yet.”

It was as if a bucket of ice-cold water had been thrown over a fire. Vince blinked, his breath held. “Nothing…”

“Nothing I could find,” Reverend Powell breathed. “I dug up the backyard last night for two hours. I looked everywhere, dug in all the right spots. I looked exactly where Maggie told Lillian she was going to bury it.” He sighed. “It wasn’t there.”

Vince was silent for a moment. “Do you have any idea what was supposed to be in this box?”

Reverend Powell shrugged. “Probably a scrap book. At least that’s what I think.” Then he looked over his shoulder at the house again, as if checking to see if they were being watched. When he turned back he looked fearful. Afraid. He reached into the pockets of his slacks and withdrew what at first appeared to be a scrap of paper. When he held it up, Vince saw it was a faded envelope, folded in half. “A few years ago I was moving some of my belongings into the den.” He indicated the den with a sweep of his hand. “I’d added the den on to the rest of the house and had a bunch of junk in my attic I wanted moved out. Your mother loaned me some boxes to store some of the stuff in while I unpacked and moved things around. I wound up keeping the boxes because they turned out to be pretty useful. Lillian asked me if I had any spare boxes a few days ago, when Maggie died. Said she wanted them to help you in sorting through her stuff. I went to the attic and found one, pulled it down. And I found this.”

He handed the envelope to Vince.

Vince took the envelope, unfolded it, and opened it.

There was a photograph inside. It was old, black and white, marred at the edges and slightly curling. A young woman was in the picture, dressed in hippie garb: bell bottom jeans, tank top, long blond hair parted in the middle, headband, love beads, the whole nine yards. She was cradling an infant in her arms. She was seated on the front porch of what appeared to be an apartment building. In the background, beyond the sliding glass door that led to the porch, he could make out people inside the apartment. They appeared to be young, hip, the youth of the crazed sixties.

There was no mistaking the woman in the photograph. It was Maggie Walters.

The infant in her arms was Vince.

Vince looked at the photograph in stunned amazement, then back up at Reverend Powell. “That’s mom,” he breathed. “And me.”

“That’s what I think, too,” Reverend Powell said softly. “Apparently your mother missed this particular photo when she was cleaning out her belongings. If she’d gotten to it, I think it would have been buried in the box along with whatever else is in there.”

“How do we know there really is a box?” Vince said, still holding the photograph. “Suppose it’s just something she made up?”

“If you heard Lillian that day when she told me about it, you’d believe it, too,” Reverend Powell said. “It exists.”

“Then where is it?”

Reverend Powell shrugged. “I don’t know.”

The two men looked at each other. Vince felt that Reverend Powell was telling him the truth. And he also felt there was more to this than simply a missing box containing family heirlooms, something more ominous.

There was movement from the back porch and then a voice called out. “Hey! I thought you two were back here. How’s everything going?”

Vince and Reverend Powell turned toward the voice. Standing on the porch was John Caruthers, one of the members of the congregation. He was holding a can of A&W root beer, his belly held back by a red and blue plaid shirt. He smiled, his wide face beaming giddy happiness. “My, it’s such a beautiful afternoon!” he decried.

Reverend Powell nodded at Vince, signifying that their conversation was over for now but would resume when all the guests had gone home for the evening. Vince sighed. He felt a sense of impatience now as they walked toward the porch to resume the wake. The undying need to pepper Reverend Powell with questions ate at him for the rest of the afternoon.

Chapter Seven

TRACY HARRIS WAS a sight for sore eyes when he saw her smiling face at John Wayne Airport when he exited the plane at the US Airways’ arrival gate. She was wearing a red and white summer dress, the skirt hugging her shapely hips and her auburn hair bounced freely on her shoulders. She swept him up in a hug and kiss that made Vince’s skin tingle. Her lips tasted like strawberries. Vince had never expected to be so smitten with Tracy, but smitten he was. Tracy was a godsend.

“So how was the trip?” she asked, taking his hand in hers as they headed toward the baggage claim area.

“Exhausting,” he said. “You don’t know how glad I am to be home.”

He told her all about it as they stood at the baggage claim area waiting for his luggage. She listened patiently. He didn’t know whether he should tell her about his conversation with Reverend Powell and he almost let it slip out, but stopped himself before it could become fatal. Better not bombard her with too much at once. “That’s so terrible, all that happening at once,” she said as he stepped up to the conveyer belt and lifted his tan suitcase up and double-checked to make sure it was his; it was. “It’s also sad. That poor woman.”

“Lillian or my mother?”

Tracy playfully socked him in the arm. “Both, silly! I can’t believe you would say a thing like that! Your mother was murdered horribly! I know you were…well, estranged from her and all, but—”

“I know,” Vince said, dragging his suitcase along, the little wheels clacking along the tarmac. Tracy and Vince exited the terminal, heading down the airport toward the parking structure. “It is awful, the way she died. You should have seen it.”

“Did you see the body?”

“No.” Vince shook his head. “But I saw the room she was killed in. It was pretty gross.”

“Do the police have any idea why whoever killed her would, you know…do all that to her when robbery was the only apparent motive?”

“No, they don’t.” They were silent as they walked through the parking garage, holding hands, Vince dragging his suitcase along. It was a warm day, but it was a touch cooler in the shade of the parking garage. The sky was a clear blue, unusual for a summer day in Southern California, but there was a nice offshore breeze and that helped blow some of the smog away. Vince could actually see the San Gabriel Mountains fifty miles to the north. On a normal summer day it would be so smoggy, the air so still, that you couldn’t even see them.

They reached Tracy’s car, a black BMW, and Tracy disengaged the car’s alarm system and opened the trunk with the remote. Vince helped lift the trunk up and was just about to hoist the suitcase into it when he heard a clink of keys. “Oops,” Tracy said, her other hand fumbling with her purse, a small black pouch that hung by thin straps from her right shoulder. “I’m always so clumsy.”

“Poor baby,” Vince said as he bent down to scoop up the keys, hearing a sharp ping! strike the metal of the open trunk and the tinkling of glass and feeling the whoosh of air over his head.

“What the…?” Vince stood half-bent over, hands clutching Tracy’s fallen keys, wondering what had just happened. He saw Tracy turn her head slowly toward the cars across the lot, a look of puzzlement on her face, and then he stood up, not knowing at first what to make of the small hole that had been punched through the hood of the BMW and the shattered glass of the car’s rear windshield until there was another pinging sound that winged past his left ear, followed by the sound of more shattering glass, and now his stomach leaped in his throat as he looked out and saw a man crouched behind a car four rows over, and his eyes opened wide in surprise and fear as the man raised the weapon in his hands and rose to his feet and Vince dove for Tracy, yelling “Get down!”, the momentum of his body shoving her to the concrete just as the man let loose with a volley of rounds from a semi-automatic rifle, a rat-tat-tat-tat-tat of shells that were now flying with deadly accuracy toward them, blowing holes in the BMW, breaking windows, and as he pushed Tracy ahead of him down the side of her car toward the next row, the bullets seemed to follow them, sending up showers of glass in their wake and his heart was beating so fast, and the noise of the shots was so loud, that he couldn’t hear himself screaming, “Get down, get the fuck down!”

Tracy was crawling on her hands and knees, scraping them on the concrete, and Vince was yelling for her to “Move, fucking move, goddamnit!” and now there was a brief reprieve, as if the gunfire had suddenly died without warning. They darted out in front of a car cruising down the aisle, and all around them were the sounds of cars and people, some exiting the airport, some opening trunks to stow away luggage, and those in the immediate vicinity were all now standing with numb shock, looking at Vince and Tracy as they scrambled madly in a half-crouched position, weaving their way between parked cars as their assailant made one more try, this time having obviously come out of his hiding place to pursue them. They heard his footsteps running down the parking lot, then felt and heard the rat-tat-tat-tat-tat of automatic gunfire spray up concrete and glass as it showered around them, and then it suddenly stopped, only to be replaced by the sound of running feet, the slam of a car door and the squeal of tires as a vehicle raced out of the parking lot, and now there were a lot of excited voices but Vince didn’t know the danger was over. He was pushing Tracy under a parked car, telling her, “We’ve got to hide, get under there!”, and by the time the police came Vince knew that the immediate danger was over.

WHEN THE AIRPORT police officers helped Tracy out from under the Datsun they had crawled under, she started to cry. Vince’s heart was still pounding, and he still felt in fight-or-flight motion—he wanted to get the hell out of there now! But when he saw Tracy’s composure, that beautiful face crumpled in tears, his heart melted and he immediately went to her. She threw her arms around him, sobbing against his neck. “Wh-wh-why! Why was he shooting at us like that?”

Vince could only hold her, comfortable now that the danger seemed to be over. There were two or three cops with them, and he could hear police sirens growing louder as more raced to the scene. “I don’t know,” he said, holding her in his arms. “I don’t know, Tracy. I don’t know.” He closed his eyes, trying to retrace their steps, to recall the face of the man that had suddenly popped out of nowhere and tried to kill him. His mind flashed backed on that first single shot that had gone through the trunk of the BMW and smashed the rear windshield. If he hadn’t bent down to retrieve Tracy’s keys he might be dead now.

There was no question about it. Vince had been the target of this assault.

The next few hours passed quickly. They were questioned briefly by the airport police and then the Irvine Police Department. Detectives came and scurried about, retrieving shell casings and examining the damage. In addition to the tremendous damage to Tracy’s BMW, thirteen other vehicles had been hit, three of them severely. Some of the owners of those vehicles began showing up during the preliminary investigation, and they were made to wait behind the yellow crime scene tape that had been strung up until it was complete. In the meantime, after an initial questioning by Irvine Homicide detectives, they were whisked away to the police station.

They rode to the station in the same squad car and Tracy clutched his hand during the entire trip. He could tell she was deeply disturbed by what had happened. She stopped crying, but her eyes were dark, her brow furrowed with lines of worry. She kept telling him over and over that she just couldn’t believe what’d happened. He stroked her hand and told her he couldn’t believe it either. He tried to comfort her as best as he could, but the more he tried, the more scared and confused he became.

Once at the station, they were led to separate rooms. The room Vince was led in was small and barren, with a single table and two chairs. Unlike crime dramas on television, there were no two-way mirrors. He mentioned this to the detective that accompanied him in the room. The detective, a burly man in his forties with dark hair smirked. “Well, you aren’t a suspect, Vince. Just a witness. We save those rooms for guys like the ones that shot at you and your girlfriend.”

Vince guessed Tracy was in a similar room being questioned too, so the best thing to do was cooperate and try to remember as many of the details as he could. The detective began by asking him what happened, telling him to take his time, to try to remember as much of the incident as possible. Vince thought hard and went slowly, starting with how he and Tracy were walking through the parking garage to their car, how she’d dropped her keys and he’d bent down to retrieve them and that first shot came zinging at him. The detective nodded. “Count yourself lucky, Mr. Walters. Count yourself very lucky.”

Vince nodded and continued. He told the detective that the gunman had fired at least two single shots at them, but once they started running he’d let loose with automatic fire. The detective nodded, jotting notes down in a small spiral notebook. He told the detective how scared he was, how strong the instinct of flight had been, and that he was fairly positive the gunman popped out of his hiding place to pursue them briefly. Then the gunfire stopped and he thought he heard running feet just as he and Tracy slipped under a car, but he didn’t know where the gunman was running. He thought he was running toward them, and that’s what propelled him to keep him and Tracy moving. The next thing he remembered was the first police officers arriving on the scene.

The detective asked him to repeat the story one more time. Then he asked Vince if he’d gotten a look at the gunman. Vince shook his head.

“Do you know why you might have been the target, Mr. Walters?”

Vince sighed. “No. Until lately, nothing like this has ever happened to me.”

“What do you mean, ‘until lately’?”

Figuring they were going to find out sooner or later, Vince told the detective about the trip he’d just returned from and the details of the murder of his mother. The detective looked real interested in this and jotted down notes. He asked Vince the name of the Police Chief in Lititz. “And they don’t have any suspects yet in your mother’s murder?”

Vince shook his head. “No.”

“And you say that the detectives in Pennsylvania think it’s a robbery gone bad?”

“That’s what they think.”

“What do you think?”

Vince shrugged. “I don’t know.”

“Will you excuse me for a moment?” Vince nodded, and the detective left the room for a few minutes. Vince sat silently, his mind twisting and turning, going over the events of the last few days. It was obvious somebody had targeted his mother; it hadn’t been a robbery gone bad. Somebody had wanted her dead and now they wanted him dead as well.

The detective returned ten minutes later. “Just got off the phone with the Lititz P.D., and told them what just happened to you. They tell me that all indications in their investigation points to a robbery. I asked a detective there, a guy I believe you spoke with named Jacobs, if he had any reasons to believe that what happened with you today might be related to your mother’s murder and he told me probably not. Just the same, I think we’re going to check things out on our end just to be sure. Why don’t you tell me a little about your mother?”

For the next two hours, Vince told the detective—Rob Staley—everything he knew about his mother’s murder, how she’d lived as a religious recluse. After awhile, another detective joined them. Detective Staley asked Vince if his mother had any enemies. “As far as I know she didn’t,” he said, telling him what he’d told the detectives in Lititz. When he was finished they started over again, taking him through the last few days. Vince didn’t alter his story in any way, nor did recurring narratives bring to light anything he might have forgotten.

Detective Staley mustered a smile. “Sorry this all seems so rigorous, but we do this for several reasons. Sometimes talking about what happened can bring certain things back that the subconscious has buried. You remember more when you relive it.”

“Sorry.” Vince shrugged.

“Don’t worry about it. Sometimes it takes a few days. If you remember anything later, be sure to call me.” He handed Vince his card. Vince pocketed it quickly.

There was a knock on the door and the detective whom Vince wasn’t introduced to answered it. After conferring for a few minutes with somebody outside, he motioned to Detective Staley, who rose and joined him. Both men exited and closed the door, but Vince could tell they were standing right outside the door. Probably comparing notes, he thought. I wonder if they think we have anything to do with this. Vince thought it weird that he was thinking this way. He had always been a law-abiding citizen. Why would the police consider him a suspect in anything? Especially in what happened today at the airport? He and Tracy had clearly been the victims.

After a few minutes, Detective Staley and his unknown partner returned. “Tracy’s outside waiting for you. Her car’s been towed so we can continue our investigation into what happened, but your luggage was retrieved. I’ve got an officer lined up to drive you home.”

Vince rose to his feet and held out his hand. “Thanks. And I’m sorry I wasn’t much help.”

“You were a great help,” Detective Staley said. “Just get in touch with us if you remember any more details. And, between you and me, if I were you I’d get out of town for a few days. It’s obvious somebody has a grudge against you and until we can ascertain otherwise, it’s probably best that you lay low. Do you have any place you can stay for awhile?”

Vince shrugged. “I guess I can see if Tracy can put me up.”

“We’ll have you driven to her place then,” Detective Staley said. He clapped Vince on the back as he escorted him out. “And we’ll have your house checked out as well. I can’t guarantee you twenty-four hour police protection, but I can make sure you aren’t being followed to Ms. Harris’s place and that your place isn’t under surveillance.”

“Thanks.”

Tracy was talking on her cellular phone in the lobby. That worried look hadn’t left her face. Her eyes met his as he entered the lobby. “I’ve got to go. I’ll call you later.” Then she hit a button and folded the phone up. “Hi,” she said. She tried to smile.

“Hi yourself.” He kissed her. “You okay?”

“Yeah.” She nodded. “That was my mom,” she said, indicating the phone as she deposited it in her purse. “I…she gets worried about me and I had to tell her what happened.”

“And worry her even more?” Despite the gravity of the situation, Vince couldn’t help but try to keep the tone light.

It worked. Tracy smiled. It seemed to lift her spirits a little. “I…I guess I just had to talk about it, you know? I had to tell somebody what happened, and that I was okay. It made me feel better.”

“I’m sure it did.” He took her in his arms again, holding her close to him. It felt good holding her. He felt the presence of somebody behind him and turned around. It was a uniformed officer, a young man in his mid-twenties with a black crew cut and piercing brown eyes. “You’re our ride home?”

“I’m Officer Ruiz,” the cop said. They shook hands and detective Staley approached them, dragging Vince’s luggage. Vince thanked him, taking the handle. “I’m taking you to Ms. Harris’s place, right?”

The officer stowed the luggage in the trunk and drove calmly while Vince and Tracy sat in the back seat, listening to the squawks of the police radio. “There’s an unmarked car following us to make sure we aren’t being tailed,” Officer Ruiz said as they headed down the 55 Freeway to Newport Beach.

“How long will I have to be in hiding?” Vince wondered aloud. He traded a glance with Tracy, who still looked worried.

“Hopefully not for long,” Officer Ruiz answered.

Tracy Harris lived in a gated community of luxury town-homes. She punched in the code in the security gate, and Officer Ruiz drove through the complex according to her directions. He parked in the guest parking area near her town home and Officer Ruiz opened the trunk. He escorted them to Tracy’s town-home and stood at sentry duty as she unlocked the front door. “I can check the place out if you want.”

Tracy nodded her approval, and Officer Ruiz searched it quickly. He emerged from upstairs a moment later. “You’re fine.” He nodded at Vince. “You have detective Staley’s card?”

“Yeah.”

“Does he know where to reach you?”

“His partner has my phone number,” Tracy said.

“Good. Anything happens, you know how to reach us.”

When Officer Ruiz was gone, Tracy went to Vince. He held her for a moment. “I can’t believe what happened.”

“Neither can I.”

They moved to the sofa. Vince stretched out, suddenly feeling the weariness in his bones. Tracy couldn’t seem to stop touching him, as if she realized she’d almost lost him and that keeping in contact with him physically would keep him there with her forever. It was something Vince could understand and he welcomed it. “Did they question you?” he asked.

They compared notes as they sat on the sofa. Tracy had been questioned as strenuously as Vince had. No, she couldn’t tell them why somebody would want them dead. “I thought he was shooting at both of us,” Tracy said, holding his hand. “But the more I think about it, the more it seems that—”

“I was the target.”

Tracy nodded. She looked fearful again. “Why would someone want to kill you, baby?”

“I don’t know.” And now, for the first time since the horrifying event, Vince almost did break down. He felt himself beginning to collapse emotionally and Tracy sensed it. She took him in her arms and kissed him, holding him, offering soothing words of comfort to him. Vince clung to her, wanting to lose himself in her.

He found her lips and kissed her, tenderly, softly. She kissed him back, her green eyes deep and reflective. He looked into those eyes and he could feel himself getting lost in their depths, and then she kissed him again and this time he did get lost.

He didn’t know how long they sat on the couch in each other’s arms; it might have been minutes, it might have been hours. Tracy broke the kiss, a look of yearning on her face. She rose to her feet, pulling him up. Then she led him to the stairs.

Once in her bedroom she pushed him playfully onto the queen-sized waterbed. “Wait there for a minute.” She disappeared in the bathroom.

She emerged in black lingerie that was so tantalizing that he practically got hard right there. The brassiere pushed her breasts up provocatively. Her panties were black and slinky, the stockings clung to her legs like they’d been dipped in ink. “Well? What do you think?”

“I’m…speechless,” Vince said. Tracy smiled at him and he felt his heart thudding in his chest. The sexual tension between them had been building over the past week or so, and it was now finally leading to this.

He went into it with as equal a passion as she, kissing her tenderly, hungrily. His skin tingled as her fingernails traced down his chest to his belly, exploding in feathery sensations as she ran kisses down his belly. He leaned back, his mind reeling as she fumbled with the buckle of his slacks. And it was at that moment when panic set in and he thought this moment would be doomed to failure.

As she took him in her mouth, his penis withered like a shriveled stalk until she finally stopped and looked at him with those remarkable green eyes. The minute they’d started with foreplay he began thinking that, one, this was the first time he had made love to another woman since Laura’s death and, two, for all he knew, whoever had tried to kill him could be setting them in their sights now. Tracy seemed to read his thoughts. “You need to relax,” she said, moving over him and pushing him back down on the bed gently. She straddled him, running her hands softly along his chest. “Just relax,” she whispered. “Everything is all right. It’s over now. We’re safe. I’ll take care of you.” She whispered this over and over until he closed his eyes, listening to the sound of her voice, feeling her fingernails tracing across his chest lightly, creating a tingly feeling.

She got out of bed and headed to the bathroom again. When she came back she was holding a red candle. She placed it on the bureau and lit it. Then she joined him back in bed. “Turn over on your stomach.”

He complied, and with the cinnamon scent of the candle perfuming the room, she gave him a long, slow massage. Her expert hands kneaded the tension out of his muscles. When she’d worked over his entire body, she told him to flip over on his back. He complied. She massaged him from head to toe, avoiding the genitals, telling him to just lay back and relax, drift in the pleasures of the flesh, empty your mind.

He closed his eyes, the candle creating a waft of scent that was both pleasurable and relaxing. In no time he found himself floating in ecstasy. He felt so good that he barely noticed when she started on the blowjob again.

He stayed hard. And when he’d maintained his erection for three minutes she stopped working him with her mouth and mounted him. He felt himself slipping into her warmth effortlessly. She moaned, moving over him, and he lay back, enamored by the scents, the sensations, the sounds. He stayed hard and as her passion grew wild he began to meet it. When his orgasm came it was with sweet release, plunging him into further depths of pleasure.

They lay in each other’s arms as it ebbed. Vince cupped Tracy’s face in his hands and kissed her deeply. “You are so beautiful,” he said.

“No, you’re beautiful,” she said, grinning.

Vince could feel his heart racing in his ribcage. “That was so intense,” he said. “I think my chest is going to explode.”

“Gave you a run for your money, eh?”

“You can say that again,” Vince said, sitting up against the headboard. Sweat dotted his chest.

“There’s more where that came from,” she said. She kissed him. “But for now, how about a break? Let’s talk. Tell me more about the trip.”

They started talking about what happened to them at the airport. Tracy seemed to be dealing with it better. They both wondered aloud why somebody would want to have him killed, and Vince voiced his own opinions. “I didn’t tell the police because I thought it was crazy,” he said. “But…I keep thinking that…suppose the same people that killed my mother also want me dead?”

“Why would you think that?” Tracy asked. She was holding his hand as they lay in bed. “What makes you think your mother was even…well, targeted for murder?”

“I don’t know.” Vince shook his head, trying to think of the right way to approach this. “Reverend Powell wants me to come back in a few weeks to help him get to the bottom of this. What this is, I don’t know. We had a long talk after the wake was over. And he didn’t have much more to tell me than Lillian did. But he gave me his impressions on what he first thought about my mother and when he originally met us.”

“And that was?”

“He thought that Mom was running from something,” Vince said, reflecting on that long night of conversation that had kept him up late last night. “Mom never actually came right out and said this, but whenever anybody brought up a question as to what she did before she became a Christian, or what our past lives were like, she evaded the subject entirely. Didn’t even attempt to answer it, much less lie about it. Just evaded it. Changed the subject. And the way she did it was, I suppose, not so subtle. Reverend Powell said he got the strong impression that whatever life we led before mom joined the church was shameful to her. But something so shameful that it pales in comparison to what most people would consider shameful.”

“Don’t most born-agains think that about their past lives?” Tracy asked.

“Yes, in a way,” Vince said. “The shame comes from the sudden knowledge that you’ve led your life without walking with the Lord, and that you lived the kind of life that He would find displeasing. You have lived a life that has offended Him and because the act of being Born-Again is more or less an act of becoming aware of the order of the universe as spoken through God—that He has created us because He loves us, that He offered His only son Jesus Christ up for sacrifice to redeem us—reinforces a sense of …sorrow I guess is the best way I can put it. You feel sorry to God for having lived in such ignorance and sin. And part of that shame comes from the fact that you are so overwhelmingly happy to be saved that you’re ashamed that you’d ever lived the life of a heretic.”

Tracy’s green eyes seemed to glimmer as she grinned. “I can’t believe you were actually a born-again!”

“You say that as if I were once a leper,” he exclaimed, an embarrassed smile on his face.

“It just doesn’t seem like you,” she said. She snuggled against him. “You’re just so….not like that.”

They laughed and kissed again. And they didn’t resume their conversation. Instead, they made love again.

After climax and a brief resting period where they lay in bed, basking in the afterglow of their pleasure, Tracy got out of bed and went to the bathroom. Vince sat up, noting for the first time that the hours had breezed by. It was dark outside now. He rested against the headboard and let his mind drift.

His thoughts returned to the discussion he had with Hank Powell after the wake. They’d talked about plans for Vince to return to Lititz to assist him in investigating the mysterious box that Hank assured him he would find. “I didn’t find it last night,” he’d said, “but I’ll find it soon. I’ll find it if I have to dig up that whole backyard.”

Reverend Powell had appeared nervous and fearful the whole time they’d talked after the wake. He’d appeared nervous, twitchy, and he kept glancing around the room, as if he were afraid their conversation was being overheard. Everybody had left the wake three hours before, so Vince didn’t know where the man’s nervousness came from. He thought of asking him but decided not to. Might just make him more nervous.

Something about that nervousness bothered Vince.

He voiced this to Tracy as she came back into the bedroom. “He was probably just shaken up about facing two deaths in the space of only a few days.”

“Yeah, you’re probably right,” Vince nodded. He really hadn’t stopped to consider how the deaths were affecting Reverend Powell’s sanity. Maggie Walters and Lillian Withers had been very close to him. Reverend Powell’s nervousness, his almost stark fear, could be interpreted as a subconscious way of dealing with their deaths.

Tracy grabbed his hand and tugged him gently. “Want to take a shower?” she asked playfully.

He grinned at her, Reverend Powell, the mysteries of his mother’s past, and his own brush with death forgotten for now. “Of course. Lead the way, my fair maiden.”

And as they continued with their lovemaking in the shower, Vince never thought that Tracy would be able to divert his mind from the horrible events of the past week, much less turn his mind away from Laura. But she did.

HE IS IN a large room in a huge mansion.

The room is dark and he’s seated on a table set low to the floor, which appears to be a cold, polished wood. The room is bare save for the impression of paintings on the walls. A large chandelier hangs from the ceiling over the room, the glass beads trailing down like drops of dew from a heavily misted forest. The lights of the chandelier are off, but the room is illuminated by dozens of glowing candles. The candles are black and white. He sits on the table in the center of the room as the air grows warm. It is then that he is aware of the shapes grouped around the walls.

They move forward, surrounding him slowly. They are dressed in black flowing robes and hoods. They step forward slightly but remain in shadow. The air in the room intensifies, grows leaden. And then the chanting starts.

He snapped awake and blinked, the sounds and smells of the dream fading away as consciousness set in. He shook his head to clear his fogged mind, then glanced to his left. Tracy was lying on her side, her back turned to him, her legs drawn up slightly. He glanced at the digital clock on the stand by his side of the bed. It was 3:35 a.m.

He leaned back into the pillows and sighed. The dream had not only come back, it was more intense now, more real. Shortly after Laura’s death, he’d revealed both the dreams to a therapist he saw for grief counseling. The therapist had been very interested in them. After Vince told him the whole dream, Dr. Smith asked him if he felt any blame for Laura’s death. Vince had mulled this over. He’d told Dr. Smith that consciously he didn’t blame himself for her death, but it hurt him just to think about it. Dr. Smith suggested that this particular dream might be his subconscious’s way of heaping the blame on himself. The toddler in the dream represents how he feels now—alone, childlike, fragile in the face of grief. And the people in the room represent his friends and associates. They appear the way they do—a throwback to the hippie era—because he feels different from other people. Laura’s death has made him feel this way, and the unseen man who grabs him and holds the knife to his throat represents self-destruction as a result of guilt. “We need to explore this further,” Dr. Smith said that first day when Vince spilled the beans about the dream. “If we can get past these feelings your subconscious is holding, you should be able to relax more and go on with your life.”

The dreams ceased shortly after this, and he began to go on with his life, even though he still missed Laura. Now he looked down at Tracy’s sleeping form, snuggled naked into the pillow. He snuggled next to her, spooning his body against hers. His pelvis moved against her rump and she made a sighing sound in her sleep. He kissed one bare shoulder, then lay down beside her, waiting for sleep to overtake him again.

The more he thought about the dreams, the more it felt like they were actual events, dredged up by his subconscious mind. He remembered fragments of his life in California. Some of the people in the Hippie Dream appeared to be people that used to drop in on his parents when they were living in California. He tried to remember the events of his past, but the most he could come up with were scattered images; the time they lived somewhere in a suburb (was it LA? Orange County? Wherever it was, it was Southern California) and he went to school, his mother worked as a secretary, and his dad wore a suit and tie when he went to work. His dad was gone on business trips a lot. He had played with some of the kids in the neighborhood. His mom visited with some of the people in the neighborhood—two of them stuck out prominently in his mind. A woman named Gladys and her husband, and their son, a boy who was a few years older than Vince. Was his name Mark? Frank? Alex? He couldn’t remember. Whoever he was, the older boy was rough, but played with him and looked out for him. There was a girl they sometimes played with, her parents being friends of Vince’s. He remembered her name perfectly. Nellie.

And before then? He really didn’t remember.

If the events of his dream were real, if they’d happened to him a long time ago when he was three or four years old as the dream suggested, he would have blocked it out of his memory. An experience like this would have been traumatizing. And if it had happened, then somebody really tried to kill him when he was a toddler. But why? If the people they were with were hippies, could the would-be killer have been on drugs?

Could this be the reason they’d left California so abruptly? Had his mother angered a cult of hippies?

He reflected on the images written in blood on the bedroom walls of his mother’s house…strangely occult-like in design. He thought of the dreams.

He thought about the attempt on his own life.

Vince turned over on his back, staring at the ceiling. These questions and hundreds of others gnawed at him. He knew he wouldn’t be able to rest until he did some investigating of his own and found out exactly why he and his mother had pulled up stakes so suddenly and moved out of California. And the only way to do that was to try to contact the people he only had a faint memory of. But without last names he was sunk.

When he finally drifted to sleep he went down deep and he had no dreams.

Chapter Eight

June 29, 1999, 11:30 p.m.

REVEREND HANK POWELL was afraid.

Very afraid.

Night had cast its dark pall over the vast Pennsylvanian sky, and Reverend Powell closed the curtains of his living room window, which he’d been gazing out for the better part of the last thirty minutes. He made sure the window was double-latched, then went to the front door and made sure it was locked and bolted. He swallowed a dry lump and stood in the silence of his house. The living room lights and the light over the stove in the kitchen were on. Other than that, the house was dark.

Feeling better that the windows and doors were locked, Reverend Powell retreated to the bedroom. He turned on the light and went straight to the closet.

He began rummaging along the top shelf, past old shoe boxes and books until he found what he was looking for.

The Cavalry Model Colt he’d purchased two years ago was an authentic reproduction of the 1873 Hartford Model. It had a 7-inch barrel. He took the Colt down along with the extra cylinder and a box of .45 shells that he’d bought with it. He opened the cylinder, made sure it wasn’t loaded and that there wasn’t a shell in the chamber, then returned to the living room with the gun and the shells.

He sat at the kitchen table and laid the gun and the box of shells on the counter top. He cleaned the cylinder with a white rag as his mind turned over the events of the last week. If it wasn’t for the promise Maggie Walters made Lillian Withers swear to, he supposed he wouldn’t be so nervous. As it was, the fact that he’d felt Maggie Walters was telling the truth about the buried box in her backyard for Lillian to easily dig up was what scared him.

The fact that he’d finally found it and taken a look at what was in it scared him even more.

He couldn’t think about what was in the box now. Instead, his mind flashed over the gruesome images of the past week; Maggie’s butchered body sprawled across the bed in her home; those hideous symbols smeared in her blood on the wall; the reappearance of Vince Walters after God knew how long of an absence; and then Lillian’s sudden death five days ago.

Reverend Powell finished cleaning the Colt and began to load it. He did it slowly, inserting one bullet at a time in the cylinder. When the cylinder was loaded, he snapped it in place and spun it, just like Clint Eastwood did in those Dirty Harry movies. He raised the Colt to the side door that led to his garage and closed his left eye, feigning a sharp shooter. Blam! I got you Satan. Get thee behind me.

He shivered at the thought that what he’d preached against, what he’d warned his brethren time and time again in his services, in his ministering to the unsaved, was not only a real force but that it had touched down upon Lititz. As a man of the Lord, Reverend Powell knew the love of God and knew of His greatness. He had felt God’s presence in times of prayer. Heard His voice. Been inspired by His teachings. Believed in Him and loved Him with all his heart, soul, and mind.

But if there was good there was most definitely evil, and it walked the earth in human form now. He knew this to be the truth. Maggie Walters had told him that much; she had been in the presence of it a long time ago, and she knew of the Prince of Darkness’ plans. She’d told Hank that the Devil’s Imp was a man nobody would ever imagine, and that when his time came he would gather his followers with his mighty power and the world would fall under his spell so fast that even the followers of Christ would be astounded. He would work like a thief in the night. Reverend Powell had felt the sincerity of Maggie’s revelations come off her, pure and with steadfast conviction, and as he prayed for her a part of himself wondered what Maggie had been involved with before she and Vince moved out of California and became saved.

What…evil had they been exposed to?

Whatever it was, it had caught up with her. That much, Hank was positive of. When Maggie made her confession/revelation to him eight years ago, Hank had tucked it into the back of his mind, ministering to her spiritual needs and turning what she said over in his mind. He knew there was a devil, but like most Christians he put that icon of all that was evil and unholy in the back of his mind. Why dwell upon the negative side when there was so much to celebrate in the positive? But not dwelling on it was a symbolic way of sweeping the nasty under the rug. If it’s swept away where it won’t be seen it won’t exist. I’ll never have to see it or deal with it.

Now he was dealing with it. And it wasn’t just because of what Maggie had confided in him eight years ago.

It was what he felt.

Dr. Adam Walsh over at the county coroner’s office attributed Lillian Withers’ death to a heart attack. A perfectly natural death, Dr. Walsh had said. Hank didn’t think it was natural. Lillian was one of the healthiest people he’d known. Two months ago she’d gone for her annual physical and she’d been given a clean bill of health. Doc says I got one healthy ticker, he remembered her telling him after church the Sunday after her appointment. He said with a heart like mine he doesn’t see any reason why I can’t last another hundred years!

With such a clean bill of health how could she have died of a massive heart attack?

And then there was the foremost question of Maggie’s murder.

Chief Tom Hoffman attributed Maggie’s death to murder at the hands of a burglar she’d surprised. Hank could tell Tom was lying when he told him his theory, but Hank hadn’t pressed it. The police had their job to do, praise God, and if they had to downplay the facts so they could go ahead with their job, so be it. But Hank had caught the strong whiff of fear from Tom as they talked the day after Maggie’s body was discovered. Hank had only heard about the condition of the body and the room from John Van Zant, who’d found her, and that had been enough to be worried about. Feeling the vibe emanate off of Tom Hoffman as the Chief told him that the murder was probably the work of “some doped up kid robbing the place” was enough to convince Hank that Tom didn’t believe that one bit. He thought it was the work of something much worse. But whether he knew what it was, Hank couldn’t tell.

And then there were the symbols…

John said the symbols were satanic. Hank was of the type to never take anything for granted. If other brothers and sisters in the Lord claimed that Proctor and Gamble was a satanic organization because of their company logo, then he would go the other way and accuse those brothers and sisters of bearing false witness. He’d seen examples of this time and time again, from the endless crusade so many of his fellow Christians heaped against popular culture; rock and roll, movies, books, certain ethnic groups, other religions and Christian denominations. It all defeated the purpose of the Gospel. When a heavy metal artist like Marilyn Manson declares himself an Anti-Christ Superstar on an album, it was for shock value. Hank Powell didn’t endorse it, didn’t approve of it, but he didn’t see it as part of some Satanic conspiracy. He believed artists like that were lost, true. The secular world didn’t see the symbolism for what it was; they were ignorant of the powers of darkness, but that didn’t make them evil. They were lost sheep. Likewise, when Jerry Falwell gets up on his pulpit and tells his followers that homosexuals deserved everything they had coming to them including discrimination, AIDS, and the violence of gay bashing, Hank Powell had to attribute the Reverend Falwell’s misguidedness to the Prince of Darkness again. The Lord may work in mysterious ways, but Satan had his fingers on everything and was a master of deception. To turn scripture around to make it sound hateful and bigoted was the devil’s way of snaring those who were destined to reign in the Kingdom of God.

So when John related to Hank that the symbols drawn on the wall of Maggie’s home were satanic in origin, he had to question it. What were they, half moons or something? Maybe a star drawn in blood? he remembered asking John. He was getting sick of Christians seeing the devil in everything from a moon to a simple star.

John had shrugged his shoulders. Just symbols. Weird things. They looked satanic to me.

Hank had asked Tom Hoffman if he could view photos of the symbols John described seeing and the Chief had politely refused. I can’t, he’d explained calmly, patiently. Not while the investigation is ongoing.

He’d asked Tom about the symbols John had seen on the wall. Tom wouldn’t comment on those, but Hank could tell from the look of the lawman’s face that John had been telling the truth. The symbols existed, and Tom’s refusal to comment on them was most likely for the sake of the investigation. But Hank got the faint hint that Tom Hoffman was afraid of something as well. Afraid of commenting on it because it would expose his inner thoughts as to what he really felt was behind the brutal slaying.

Hank sat at the kitchen table of his home, the Colt in his hand and the box of shells within easy reach. He sat in the silence for a moment, noting the tick of the grandfather clock in the hallway, the chirping of the crickets outside, the soft rustle of the wind. He sighed and rose to his feet. He was nervous and while he thought he knew why, he still felt like he was groping in the dark for an answer. I’m a man of the Lord, he thought. If I believe in all that is holy and pure in spirit, why do I find it so hard to accept the fact that when all that is Unholy and Satanic comes and practically strikes me in the face, I find it hard to admit it?

Perhaps it was because he hadn’t been confronted with it before. A person is more likely to believe in something that is physical. But my faith in God is just as strong as my faith that the wind blows, that a tree is made of wood and bark, that I am covered with skin and hair, that I am part of the Mammal kingdom. That concrete is made of sand and stone. If my faith in God is as strong as my belief in the existence of the things He has created, why do I find it so hard to believe that something truly evil has happened in this village?

Hank Powell sat in his favorite easy chair in the living room cradling the Colt .45, debating this in his mind. He thought about what he’d found in the box, which he’d missed by a scant two feet during his first dig. He’d found the key to the lock in Lillian’s home, taped to the inside front cover of the Bible with the black leather cover where she said it was going to be. He’d looked at the photographs and newspaper clippings, read them over and over again with slowly mounting horror, then put them away, not knowing what to do. Surely they couldn’t mean what his frantic mind was trying to warn him was the truth. Despite his conflicting thoughts, there was one thing he was certain of; in order to fully believe in what his mind and soul were battling, he didn’t want to be faced with it the way Maggie Walters and Lillian Withers had.

VINCE WALTERS WAS at his desk in his office the following morning preparing for the Tillinghast Project when his private line rang.

He picked it up on the first ring, thinking it was probably Detective Staley. The detective had called him earlier this morning to tell him they had a suspect in custody, and that he would be calling later to give him more information. “Yeah?”

“Is this Vince Walters?” The voice was male. Vince didn’t recognize it; it surely wasn’t Detective Staley.

“Yes, this is,” Vince said, slightly irritated. There was a deadline on this project and this had better not be some goddamned secretary calling to schedule a meeting. Nobody knew his private number except for Tracy, his secretary Glenda, and Brian.

“I have some information on your mother’s death that I think you might find interesting.”

Vince was startled. “What?”

“You heard me right the first time,” the voice said. “I’ll only repeat it one more time: I have some information on your mother’s death that I think—”

Vince’s heart was racing madly and it took all his will power to lower his voice. “Who the hell are you and how did you—”

“If you want to talk to me, meet me in twenty minutes at the Holly Street Bar. You know where it is?”

Vince’s mind was racing. Was this a trick?

“Holly Street Bar and Grill in Irvine. On Jamboree Avenue next door to Tower Records. I’ll be in a corner booth. Twenty minutes.” The line went dead.

Vince held the receiver in his hand, the open dial tone humming. He put the phone down and rested his head in his hands. His stomach was doing slow flip-flops and his hands were shaking. His mind was a jumbled mass of questions that threatened to tumble out of him. How the hell did this guy know his name and who was he? How did he know mom was dead and how did he get my private phone number?

Vince looked out his office window into the business park Corporate Financial had their offices in. He’d gotten a police escort to work this morning, and with the news of the arrest of a suspect in yesterday’s attack Vince guessed that they might be scaling back their protection of him. After all, he was only an ordinary citizen, and it was probably costing the city of Irvine a lot of money to give him and Tracy what protection they’d been able to give. He wasn’t even planning to go to work, but he had a project deadline and decided to go in for a short day to tie up those loose ends.

Vince contemplated the repercussions of heading out to this meeting. Surely there wouldn’t be any harm in darting out real quick, would there? He’d be careful, would pay attention to everything around him, and he knew enough not to get himself in a sticky situation. It wouldn’t take long, either. Ten minutes to drive over, ten minutes back, maybe five minutes to get the bottom of this and he’d be back in his office. No problem.

He left for Holly Street Bar and Grill three minutes later.

HE WAS NERVOUS on the drive, checking his rearview mirror constantly. Several times at stoplights he was afraid every car that pulled up next to him was going to be an assassin. Several times he found himself flinching, one time almost ducking. He kept telling himself, they’ve got the guy in custody, it was just some fucking nut and we’ll find out why he was trying to kill me later this afternoon. That calmed him down, and he was able to drive to the mini-mall with a renewed sense of ease.

Once he found the mall, he swung into the parking lot and cruised until he found a spot. He killed the engine and sat in the car. He looked out at the mini-mall, which was bustling with business as teenagers out of school cruised for action and soccer moms shopped with their kids. The mall housed a Ralph’s grocery store, a Target, a couple of gift shops, a Barnes and Noble Bookstore with an attached Starbucks coffee shop, and an assortment of fast food eateries. Holly St. Bar and Grill was situated in the middle of the structure, between Tower Records and Round Table Pizza. Vince got out of the car and started walking toward it.

He’d driven to the mini-mall in a numbed state of shock. All he could think about were two things: this was a scam to get him out of the office so they (whoever they were) could kill him; and who was the man that called? As he drew up to the restaurant his stomach began fluttering again. His hands were clammy. He gripped the brass door handle and pulled.

The restaurant was a classy version of one of those Bar and Grill restaurants that sell burgers and taco salads and chicken strips and also have a full bar. The restaurant was filled with tables and booths, all of which was situated around a full bar. I’ll be in the corner booth, the voice had said. Vince craned his head, trying to look over the sea of people. A pretty blonde hostess smiled at him. “Can I help you, sir?”

“I’m here to meet someone,” Vince said, stepping inside.

He walked slowly to the rear of the establishment, looking for a corner booth. There were no booths back there save for one along the side against the wall. The booths had those high-backed seats that made it difficult to tell if a patron was actually seated there.

He reached the corner booth toward the rear of the restaurant.

Empty.

He let out a sigh and turned toward the front of the restaurant. He was scanning the tables, trying to make eye contact to see if somebody would meet his gaze and rise to meet him. None did. He glanced at his watch. It had taken him ten minutes to drive over here, and he supposed that from the time of the call and the time it took him to leave and get out of the building, close to twenty minutes had passed. So where was he?

He felt the presence of somebody behind him and he turned just as he heard his name being spoken aloud. “Vince Walters.”

The man had come from the short hallway in the back, which led to the kitchen and the restrooms. He was big, six foot two and muscular. Mean looking. Wearing faded blue jeans and cowboy boots, his white T-shirt sported the logo from the band White Zombie. A denim sleeveless jacket was draped over his large frame. The man had shoulder length black hair swept back over his face. Both arms were very heavily tattooed and he wore leather biker gloves. His mirror shades made it impossible for Vince to see his eyes.

“You called me here?” Vince asked, staring up at the big man’s impressive form, feeling himself tense up.

“Yes,” the man said. When Vince first laid eyes on him, the man’s features were intense. Now they softened a little bit as the man appraised him through the mirror shades. He cocked a thumb at the window, motioning outside. “Why don’t we go somewhere else and we’ll talk.”

Vince gritted his teeth. “No,” he said. “Whatever you want to say to me, say it now. You wanted me to come here, here I am.”

“Not here,” the man said. “I have my reasons.”

“And I have mine,” Vince snapped. “I’m not going anywhere with you. Now tell me what the fuck you want and—”

The man reached into his pocket. At first Vince thought he was reaching for a gun, but then relaxed as he extracted his wallet. The man flipped it open and rummaged through it. He pulled out a photograph. He held it up for Vince to see.

Vince gasped. There were two children in the photograph, both of them boys. They were sitting on a bench, mugging gap-toothed at the camera. They appeared to be between the ages of six and eight years old. The older boy had short black hair and wore blue cord jeans and a striped shirt. But the most recognizable boy in the photo was the younger one.

It was Vince. At the age of six.

Upon realizing that he was in the photo, Vince immediately placed the older boy seated on the park bench with him. His name was Frank. His parents had been Gladys and Tom, and they’d lived around the corner from Vince and his parents in those dim fog-clouded days when they’d lived in California. Vince remembered he and Frank often played together when both boys’ parents were visiting with each other. Frank had been rough sometimes, but was mostly okay. Vince remembered he’d wanted to be just like him.

The man holding the photo tapped it with one black leather gloved finger and took off his mirror shades. He had brown eyes and now Vince could make out the vague resemblance to the boy in the picture, the boy from his dim childhood. “That’s you and me in that photo, Vince. Our parents used to be friends, we lived around the corner from each other. I’m—”

“You’re Frank,” Vince said, looking at the bigger man with a sense of awe.

“Frank Black,” the man said. He put the photo back in his wallet and shoved it back in his jeans. “No resemblance to the character Lance Henrickson plays on the TV show Millennium.” He cracked a slight grin at the comment, then leveled a serious gaze at Vince. “I’m sorry to intrude on your life like this, old buddy, but I had to. You’re in danger. Serious danger, and we need to talk now.”

VINCE BEGAN TO suspect Frank was serious about the being in danger part when he suggested they exit out the back. Vince agreed—why the hell not? It was only Frank, his old childhood buddy and playmate from a time he’d almost forgotten. He’d popped back into his life to warn Vince that he was in danger, so obviously he had some information on who’d tried to kill him, right? Frank was somebody he could trust. Vince followed the bigger man warily down the short hallway to the rear door of Holly St. Bar and Grill and into the alley.

“Where’s your car?” Frank asked, putting his shades on again.

“Parking lot,” Vince said. He felt awkward standing in the alley in his business attire, especially standing next to the heavily tattooed, swarthy Frank Black.

“Anybody follow you out here?” Frank asked.

“Um, no,” Vince said. “I don’t think so. I tried to make sure of it.”

“Think!” Frank breathed, clenching his teeth. He faced Vince, glaring down at him through the mirror shades, putting him on the spot. “This is serious Vince, deadly—”

“If it’s so serious, why are we—”

“Our lives are in danger, Vince,” Frank turned to him. His face was intense, menacing. His raven hair blew over his shoulders from a slight offshore breeze. “Yours, mine, maybe others. The same people that killed Laura—”

At the words the same people that killed Laura, Vince felt as if a freight train slammed into him. He gasped. “What do you know about my wife!”

“Everything,” Frank said, gritting his teeth. “Now, the longer we stay here arguing about this, the more of a chance we may be spotted. Do you want me to help you or not?”

Vince almost hesitated again, then nodded. “Yes.” He had to know what Frank meant by Laura being murdered.

“Okay.” Frank accepted this easily enough. “Now, let’s go through this again. Were you followed?”

Vince didn’t think he was, and he retraced his thoughts of the drive over. As far as he could tell he hadn’t been followed. He shook his head. “No.”

“Okay.” He looked up and down the alley. “We need to go somewhere quiet where we can talk.”

“We can go to my place,” Vince suggested.

“I wouldn’t mind that, but I don’t think that would be safe,” Frank said, turning back to Vince. “Is there a public park around here?”

Vince tried to think of where the closest public park would be. There was a nice park near his home in Mission Viejo, but that was a good fifteen minute drive down the San Diego Freeway. He had to factor in the time spent away from the office as well; he didn’t want to arouse suspicion by being gone so long. He wracked his brain for a moment, then shook his head. “I’m afraid I don’t know,” he said.

“Then we’ll find one,” Frank said, stepping into the alley, motioning for Vince to follow him, away from the parking lot. “I parked on the other side of this strip mall. Why don’t we drive around until we find someplace quiet and we’ll talk?”

Vince shrugged and reluctantly followed the big tattooed man down the alley, his heart beating heavy in his chest with impending dread.

Chapter Nine

FRANK BLACK DROVE a car that didn’t fit his image: a dark, four door Saturn sedan. There was a baby seat in the back, positioned in the middle. Frank looked more like the type of guy that would drive something sleek and powerful; a Corvette, a TransAm, a Camaro, a Jaguar. Something sporty and powerful. A Saturn suggested he was a family man; it also eased the tension from Vince. A guy driving a Saturn with a baby-seat in the back wasn’t the kind of guy that was going to lure you somewhere so you could be murdered. Vince was about to ask Frank if he was married and had a kid, but decided not to. He wanted to hear about Laura more than anything.

They drove around Irvine for ten minutes, making small talk as Vince navigated Frank around the city, trying to find someplace they could pull over. Frank didn’t want to talk in a public place like a bar or restaurant, and he was reluctant to go to Vince’s home, and especially his office. Vince thought it was odd that a man that looked like he wouldn’t be afraid of anything could be so nervous and scared about talking to him about Laura and the mystery surrounding his mother’s death. But then his mother had been pretty paranoid in the end, hadn’t she?

For the first five minutes, Vince’s heart raced with nervousness. He still didn’t know what Frank was up to, what his motives were, and he was tense every time the big man moved or said anything. His stomach knotted itself as they drove; Vince had an insane thought that the man was going to drive him out to a remote section of Irvine or Laguna Hills and do something hideous: beat him up, torture and kill him. Why he thought this he hadn’t the slightest idea, but he supposed it had to do with the strange nature in which the man had suddenly stepped back into his life. Why would you track down a boyhood pal you hadn’t seen in over twenty-five years and then behave real paranoid around him? It didn’t make sense.

Frank checked the rearview mirrors constantly as they drove. Apparently his paranoia wasn’t limited to just Vince being followed.

Vince relaxed more as he realized Frank was following his street directions in finding a quiet spot to pull over. Vince remembered a small park that was near a library and the Town Hall. He directed Frank to it and they drove in silence as the Saturn purred down the suburban streets. It was a nice, warm day. The sky was blue with specks of white fluffy clouds scattered about, and there was a nice offshore breeze blowing from the west. It was probably close to eighty degrees and it was only twelve o’clock. Vince figured he could get away with being away from the office until at least two, so he hoped Frank would tell him what was on his mind so Vince could go about the task of asking his own questions.

They approached MacArthur Boulevard, and Vince directed Frank across the intersection. The park was just ahead of them, to the right. Frank pulled the Saturn into a parking slot away from other cars and killed the engine. Outside, a group of kids played scratch baseball in the open field of the park. To their right a group of women were seated at a picnic table scurrying about like busy bees, unloading baskets of food and talking as children played around them and on the playground. In short, it was a normal summer afternoon in the park.

Frank turned toward Vince, his mirror shades menacing in the closed space. “Okay, I think we’ll be cool here.”

“Nobody followed us?” Vince asked. He felt silly asking, but it seemed like a joke to him. He tried not to let his skepticism creep into his tone of voice.

“No,” Frank said. Then he jumped right into the subject at hand. “Do you remember any part of our childhood?”

“I thought you were going to tell me about my mother?” Vince asked, the cockiness of their earlier encounter at the restaurant creeping in. “And what do you know about Laura being—”

“First things first,” Frank said, holding up one leather clad hand to halt Vince’s flow of questions. “I’ll get to your questions as soon as I can. I promise. Please, just bear with me. How much of our childhood do you remember?”

Vince sighed and backed off from his confrontational stance, realizing it wasn’t going to get him anywhere. Might as well play Frank’s game his way. “I just remember snatches of it.”

“Like what?”

Vince shrugged. “Kindergarten through second grade basically. I remember playing with a bunch of other kids after school. I think you were one of them. There was a little girl with blond hair…our parents were friends with her parents—”

“Nellie,” Frank said. At the mention of that long lost childhood name of the little girl Vince had played with, he felt a sense of nostalgia.

“Yes,” Vince said.

“What else?”

“I remember…” Vince thought hard about this, dredging up long buried memories. “Just various people that used to come by. I don’t remember who they were.”

“Do you remember any names?”

“Just you and Nellie,” Vince said, trying hard to dredge his memory. “I remember a guy named Tom…I think he was your father.”

“He wasn’t my father,” Frank said, almost spitting the words out. “He had a hand in raising me, but he wasn’t my father.”

“I remember an older guy. An Uncle I think.” His searching mind unearthed the name. “Sammy, I think his name was? Uncle Sammy? That sounds weird, but—”

At the mention of Uncle Sammy, Frank turned away from Vince, his hands gripping the steering wheel. He appeared to be visibly affected, as if he’d just heard a set of fingernails being scratched against a chalkboard. “That’s Samuel Garrison,” he said, softly. “Yeah, you got that right. What else?”

Knowing that the mention of Samuel Garrison bothered Frank immensely and wondering why, he plunged on. “There were others, I don’t remember all their names. There was an older couple named Paul and Opal…that’s an old fashioned-sounding name, isn’t? Opal? I remember a black guy, real thin, friendly…a real cool dude. Sharp dresser. I think his name was Bobby. There were a couple of young guys that my dad used to hang out with. Maybe it was my mom’s boyfriend. I’m still not so sure who my dad was . They looked like hippies. A lot of the people that used to come around were kinda hippie like, but they were also respectable. You know, normal looking.”

Frank was nodding. “You remember more than I thought you would then. Much more.”

“I remember you and I used to play together,” Vince continued. “We used to play with Nellie and a couple other kids in my neighborhood. Sometimes there were kids whose parents our folks hung out with. I don’t remember their names.”

“I remember them, too,” Frank said. “I don’t remember names much myself. I had to dredge them up with the help of regression therapy.” He motioned to Vince. “What else?”

Vince shrugged. “Just…it all ended. We moved, and you weren’t around anymore for some reason. I don’t remember why. Or maybe it was you and your folks moved.” He concentrated, trying to remember. “Yeah, I think that’s right. My mother told me you and your folks moved.” He looked at Frank. “Is that right?”

“Pretty much,” Frank said, looking out the window idly, as if he didn’t want to answer Vince’s question. He turned to Vince. “Anything else?”

Vince tried to remember but he couldn’t. The images floated in his mind, intermingling with the dreams: the darkness dream, the dream in which the weird man tried to kill him. They all swirled in his head like a kaleidoscope. He felt weird telling Frank all of this, especially since he barely knew the man, but then it was Frank Black, his childhood friend. There’d been a bond between them twenty-five years ago, almost brotherly like, and despite the long gap of not seeing him he felt he could tell Frank everything. He told Frank a watered down version of his mother suddenly packing him up in the middle of the night and moving back east. He related what he remembered about the drive. “Now that I think back on it, I get the feeling that my mother was running from something out here,” he said. “What she was running from, I don’t know. But I remember how nervous she was during the drive. Her determination to put as many miles down every day, her insistence that we stay in out-of-the-way motels, our changing cars every few states.”

Frank nodded through the narrative as Vince continued. He summed up their arrival in New York, then their move to Toronto, and then the move to Pennsylvania. He left out the stuff about his mother becoming increasingly fanatical in her religious views. He didn’t want to taint Frank’s ears with his theory that he believed mother had skipped California so suddenly because she’d angered some cultish hippies. It was his own pet theory he’d developed in the last day or two and he wanted to see what Frank knew about his mother before he voiced this opinion.

“That’s it. What about you?”

Frank looked out at the park, noting the activity around them. He looked in the rear and side view mirrors, as if checking to see if they were being observed. It made Vince a little uneasy. Then he keyed the ignition to activate the battery and pressed the power window button; it slid down. He turned the ignition off and settled back in his seat, twiddling with the keys. “When you say that you thought I’d moved,” he began, “it isn’t really the whole truth. The truth was, I was taken out of my home and placed in foster care and my parents were jailed for abusing me.”

It didn’t surprise Vince. Maybe it was the air of dysfunction that seemed to permeate around the man. Now that he thought about it, he recalled that Frank’s mother, Gladys, and his stepfather had been pretty strict. He remembered thinking to himself once that he would have hated to live with them. While he never actually saw them physically strike Frank, the implication was always there. Mom used to always say Frank was “a bad kid,” and he certainly remembered the older boy as being sullen and troubled. This new revelation explained it.

Frank took off his shades. His eyes were dark brown and piercing. They were haunted, liquid pools of pain. “What I have to tell you is pretty heavy stuff. It’s…going to sound pretty crazy to you.”

“Nothing sounds too crazy,” Vince said, thinking back on the past week of hell he went through regarding his mother’s death and the attempt on his life.

Frank looked at Vince, then cast his eyes out at the circle of women around the picnic table, as if contemplating how to begin. “Before I was sent to the foster home something really weird happened that…I guess sort of precipitated the beating I received that eventually led to the arrest of my parents. A classmate of mine, a guy I remember quite well named Larry, was with me one day after school. I was in the third grade. We were playing together outside and my dad came home. He was furious that Larry was at the house. I wasn’t supposed to have guests over unless they were what he termed ‘pre-approved’; you and Nellie, kids that were the progeny of our parent’s friends. Kids from the neighborhood or from school were a no-no. He blew his top and began wailing on me. Larry got scared and ran into the house—my house. That neighborhood we lived in, if you remember, consisted of older homes.”

Vince nodded.

Frank continued. “Some of those houses had little basements. Ours was one of them. Larry made his way to the basement where I later found out he stumbled upon a woman’s corpse.”

A sharp intake of breath from Vince. “Jesus,” he said.

“He scrambled back up the stairs and out the back door just as my step-dad was dragging me into the house. He beat me up real bad, and when it was over the police were there. Larry’s folks had called them.” He looked up at Vince. “Guess what they didn’t find?”

“The body,” Vince said.

“You got it,” Frank said, almost deadpan. “They didn’t find a body. I had no idea until later that that’s why they came to the house. How my stepfather managed to get rid of it before the cops showed up, I still don’t know, but—”

“Wait,” Vince broke in. “How could you even be certain there was a body in the basement. Maybe this Larry kid was just…scared and out of his mind with what he saw happen to you.”

“That’s what I always used to think,” Frank said. “Until just lately.”

A slight shiver coursed down Vince’s spine.

Frank continued his narrative. “They didn’t find a body, but they did find evidence of physical abuse against me. They took me out of the house and placed my folks under arrest. I was in and out of foster homes for three or four years. When my folks got out of jail, they sent me to El Paso, Texas, to live with my paternal aunt and uncle and their kids. I didn’t know them very well at the time, since I rarely saw my dad’s side of the family. In fact, I barely remember my real dad. It’s only been recently that I’ve learned more about him.”

Vince’s heart was thudding. Could it be that their fathers were the same men? “What about your father?”

“Long story,” Frank said, dismissing it with a wave of one leather gloved hand. “I’ll get to that in due time. The basic story I got was that my father left my mom when I was three. That’s all I knew. It’s only been within the last year that I’ve discovered that my father didn’t leave so much as that he was…driven away. I’m…still doing some research on this, and don’t want to go too much into it now, if that’s okay.” He cocked a glance at Vince.

Vince shrugged. “Fine.”

“Okay.” Frank sighed and continued. “I went to live with my dad’s sister and her husband and my cousins, and I eventually left for Hollywood when I was sixteen. I wanted to be a musician, and I was in a band that came out here to try to make it in the music industry. To make a long story short, I lived on the streets for a while, sold drugs, became an alcoholic and a heroin addict, spent time in jail—the whole nine yards. I used people and people used me. I’m not proud of it.” He paused briefly, as if those memories of his past life were causing pain. “I lived in New York City for awhile and later moved to New Jersey. When I got clean, I came back out here. I’ve always had a knack for telling stories and writing, and I’ve been writing for as long as I can remember, probably as a psychological method of escaping what I was going through. Makes sense, now that I think about it. Most of my stuff is fantasy and science fiction. Anyway, I started selling stories professionally when I was nineteen, and was already building a pretty reputable name for myself as a science fiction writer when I blew it with my addiction. I managed to get it all back, and now I’m doing pretty good. I’ve got a short story collection coming out this summer, and the third installment of a trilogy due out next winter. I’ve just started a new novel, and a screenplay I wrote has been optioned. I’m married to a beautiful successful woman who I adore above all of God’s creations. I have a three-year old son and a baby daughter. Things are going better for me now than I can ever ask for. And I wonder why I would want to jeopardize all that by…finding you and going through with all this.”

His voice became brittle, verging on that cracking edge of anger and despair. He turned away from Vince and rested his arms against the steering wheel. His breathing became heavier. “All this….stuff just started emerging during therapy over the past six months. I haven’t seen or spoken to my mother or stepfather in almost twenty years, and I remember the names and faces of my childhood with such clarity that it’s almost as if I can step back into that world and relive the horror I thought I’d escaped. It’s pretty surprising considering the amount of dope I shot up to deaden those images.” He paused, his face quivering as he looked out the windshield. “Goddamn,” he muttered, tears pooling in his eyes. He slammed his fist down on the dashboard. “Goddamn, goddamn, goddamn!”

Each “goddamn” was punctuated with a pounding of his fist on the dashboard. He lowered his head to the steering wheel, his long black hair draped over his heavily tattooed arms and shoulders, struggling to compose himself. Vince felt leaden, as if he was a spectator in a film he’d been cast in that he hadn’t rehearsed for. He felt awkward sitting in this car while the owner, who looked like he could snap the vehicle in two with his bare hands, struggled to keep from weeping. Vince sat still while Frank reined his tears in, trying to not seem so conspicuous.

When Frank was finished he wiped his eyes with the back of his gloved hands and smoothed his hair back. He turned to Vince. “I’m sorry. It’s just that…thinking about this…remembering the hell I went through…what it made me, just…” He let it drift into an incomplete sentence, as if he didn’t know how to finish.

Vince nodded, uncomfortable. “It’s all right. I’ve been going through my own personal hell as well. But I guess you already know about that.”

“Yeah,” Frank said, looking out at the park again, then back at Vince. “I do.” His deep brown eyes held secrets that wanted to spill forth.

Vince was going to try asking Frank what he knew about his mother and Laura’s death, what he knew about the attempt on his own life, when the bigger man began again. “Do you have dreams about being in a dark room and candles are burning all over the place? And there’s a strange humming sound and black hooded figures move closer to you? And they’re chanting?”

Vince’s stomach turned over in his stomach, as if dropped down an elevator. The chanting dream! “How do you know about that?” he breathed.

“I have them, too.”

Vince looked surprised. “You? Wh…why?”

“I was there with you, Vince. That’s why I remember a little bit more of it than you. We were both there. Along with Nellie, and some of the other kids we used to play with. They stopped bringing us to them when I was five or six, but they continued the ceremonies themselves.”

“Ceremonies? I don’t understand—”

“Our parents were involved, Vince. Mine. Yours. A group of twenty or more people. Samuel Garrison was their leader. I even remember the sacrifices.”

A bolt of memory flashed through his mind. “Sacrifices?”

“Yes. I know it’s hard to believe, but—”

“Your parents were devil worshippers?”

“Not just my parents, Vince. Yours, too.”

THIS SUDDEN REVELATION drained Vince. He needed a drink.

Frank suggested they get out and wander over to the recreation center. There would be soft drink vending machines there. They walked across the park to the recreation center, not speaking, both lost in their own thoughts. Vince bought a Coke, Frank a Dr. Pepper, and they walked back to the car, the summer sun beating down over them as they made their way back to the vehicle. The shouting laughs of playing took Vince back to the summer he remembered spending in California that was clearest in his memory. Seven years old and playing outside with the neighborhood kids, delighting in afternoon games of hide-and-seek, playing Dinosaurs, watching cartoons. Mom and Dad working, spending his days with Nellie and her folks, chasing after the ice cream man in his carnival-music-sounding truck as it drove slowly down the street as sprinklers showered summer lawns with cool water to run and play in. It was a magical time that seemed to last forever.

When they got back to the car, they climbed back in and sat in the stillness for a moment, savoring their soft drinks. Vince broke the silence. “It’s just so…hard to believe.”

“I know,” Frank said, sipping his Dr. Pepper. He turned to Vince. “And I’m sorry you had to find out about this. Especially after your mother died.”

“Are you sure my mother was involved?” Vince turned to Frank, imploring him to tell the truth. Don’t lie. He hadn’t had a lot of respect for his mother in the last ten years of her life, and he could accept anything about her regardless of how hideous. But this? Devil worship? It was beyond him. She’d been so…fundamentally Christian.

But then maybe that explained it.

Frank nodded. “I thought the memories were planted by the therapist I was seeing. I thought they were the result of my drug use. I didn’t know what to believe. But the more I thought about it, the more it began to make sense in a sick sort of way. I started thinking back on what I could remember that’d happened to me and place them with what I knew. It wasn’t until I started doing my own research into the occult that I found out a lot more. A whole lot more.”

“Like what?”

“So much that you can’t even imagine,” Frank began.

“My mother was killed by a devil cult I think,” Vince broke in, the words just tumbling out as everything began to come together. “The local detectives just think it’s some twisted kid or something, but… hearing all of this really ties it all in.”

“That’s why I’m here,” Frank said. “When I heard about your mother, I knew they’d tracked her down. And that’s why I had to get to you before they did.”

“But who are they?” Vince admonished. “I still don’t understand all that’s happening.”

“Okay, first things first.” Frank took a sip of Dr. Pepper, put the can in a holder between the bucket seats. “You need to know some background, how I came to find you and know about all this stuff. Okay?”

Vince nodded; he wanted to ask Frank why this cult would want him dead, but he remained silent. He took a sip of Coke, sat back and waited for Frank to begin.

“When I began my research into the occult, it was because of the repressed memories and dreams I was having that were coming out during therapy. At first I thought it was bullshit. The dreams actually first started coming sporadically about three years before I went into therapy. I wrote a novel loosely based on them called Darkness Inside. I thought I was purging the dreams when I wrote that novel. The dreams became a flood when the book was published, and that’s when I sought therapy. I thought I had another idea for a book—in fact, I’ve written several things based on these dreams, but we don’t need to go there. What you need to know is what I found in my research.”

He took another sip of Dr. Pepper and continued. “When I started doing my research I realized that there were many different kinds of satanic cults. There’s the usual group of stoned teenagers who have maybe listened to a little too much Danzig or Marilyn Manson, smoked too much dope and think Satan is cool and form an informal coven out of a sense of camaraderie. Most of the time these groups are harmless. Sometimes they cross the line into vandalism and other petty crimes. Sometimes they cross the line further and sacrifice neighborhood pets. Very rarely do they cross that line into killing people. Most often they’ll do blood ceremonies where they prick their fingers, squeeze blood into a chalice and drink it as their benediction. For the most part, these groups are very unorganized. Their theology is largely made up as they go along, but they usually find inspiration in black metal bands, horror movies, and a snippet from The Satanic Bible. In short, they’re usually formed out of rebellion.”

“The Satanic Bible?” Vince was amazed. “You mean one actually exists?”

“That’s where the second group of Satanists comes in,” Frank said. “That would be the ‘legitimate’ satanic groups.” He emphasized the word legitimate by moving his fingers in the air: Quote, unquote. “I call these groups legitimate because they have taken the pains to register their organizations as institutional religions, and have even gone so far as to advertise themselves in local phone books. Groups like the Church of Satan, the Temple of Set. Both of these groups revolve around the basic belief structure of The Satanic Bible, which was written in the late sixties by Church of Satan founder Anton LaVey. LaVey passed away almost two years ago and the reins have now been handed down to his companion, Blanche Barton and his oldest daughter, Karla. The group itself is basically atheist. They don’t even believe in the Devil, much less God. They use Satan as a symbol of man’s carnal, natural instincts and behavior, and encourage this through ritual designed to appeal to man’s basic Jungian need for religious ritual. To the LaVeyan Satanist, you,” he pointed at Vince, “are your highest God, thus if you are a LaVeyan Satanist you worship yourself.”

Vince was soaking this in. “Wow! I’ve never heard of this.”

Frank managed a small grin. “Satanism in this context is somewhat misleading. In actuality, it is a philosophy of Jungian ritual and social Darwinism that seeks to appeal to man’s basic’s instincts. LaVey was very heavily influenced by a German philosopher named Frederick Neitchze and utilized his concepts and philosophies when formulating his church’s beliefs. While LaVeyan Satanists use the traditional trappings of the occult like the Baphomet symbol and invoke Satan and various demons in their rituals, these are only used symbolically. Despite what born-again Christians may think, LaVeyan Satanists are harmless. They don’t believe in killing innocent people, or animals or children, nor do they engage in the type of behavior that your average born-again might like you to believe. In fact, they explicitly disapprove of such behavior. They’re very law-abiding people.”

He continued, holding up three fingers. “Then, there is the third kind of Satanist, the kind that most of our current myths of devil cults are based on. The more traditional form of Satanism, I guess you could say. Traditional in that unlike the legitimate Satanists, these groups, or group in this case, really believes in the Christian Devil and God, and they worship him the way Catholics pay homage to Jesus and the Virgin Mary. Unlike the LaVeyan Satanists, they whole-heartedly believe in blood sacrifice and they practice it. They are hold-overs from the old European devil cults of the Middle Ages and their sole purpose in life is the total destruction of not only Christianity, but man in general. It has been suggested by various groups that this group is largely imaginary, that it has been fostered for years by the Christian church and doesn’t exist, except in the minds of those who wish to believe in them.”

He paused for a moment, his eyes riveted on Vince. “To a certain extent, the skeptics are right. Fundamentalist Christians who specialize in writing about the occult from a Christian standpoint claim Satanists kill 50,000 people a year in ritual killings. That’s twice the number of the average homicide rate. They also claim they’re responsible for the majority of missing person’s cases and the list goes on. Most of what they say about Satanism is pure bullshit.” He leveled his gaze down, took a sip of Dr Pepper. “But unfortunately, a group like this does exist. They aren’t responsible for 50,000 murders a year. And they aren’t involved in the majority of kidnappings and child molestations that occur, either. They don’t run all the day care centers in America and rape our children. But they do exist, they can—and do—kill, and they are so powerful you wouldn’t believe it. It is this last group that our folks were involved with. A group that has been gaining strength since the late sixties and is now established all over the country and in many parts of the world. They worship not only Satan, but a god that is even older than Satan, a god that was worshipped when man was just a primitive ape with no language skills. This god is almost unknown to everybody but an elite sect of devil worshippers and these people are very secretive, very real, and very dangerous.”

All of this was coming at Vince so fast that it was hard to process, much less believe. He took another sip of Coke, his mind racing with a thousand questions. “I just have one question. If you found out my mother was killed and you feel she was killed by…one of them…how can you be so sure they don’t know about me yet?”

“I made extra sure of that, trust me,” Frank said, sipping his Dr. Pepper and looking out at the park beyond.

“Are you sure? Because…if you’re sure they don’t know about me, then who was the guy that tried to kill me yesterday at John Wayne Airport?”

“What’s that?” Frank raised his eyebrows, interested.

Vince told Frank a simplified version of what happened at John Wayne Airport. Frank reacted visibly; he actually went pale. “Fuck,” he said, one gloved hand rubbing his mouth. “You’ve got to be kidding. And the cops say they’ve got somebody in custody?”

Vince nodded. “Yeah. One of the detectives I’ve been working with is supposed to call me this afternoon with more info.”

“This changes everything, then.” Frank glanced in the mirrors, once again making Vince paranoid as well. “I’m gonna have to tell Mike about this.”

“Who’s Mike?”

“A friend of my father’s. He and I have been working on this for the past six months or so. He’s the one that did the extra surveillance on you and determined they hadn’t gotten to you yet. Obviously, they have. Shit!”

Frank’s mood had darkened considerably since this bit of news, and Vince sought to steer his mind back to the task at hand; he needed to know everything Frank knew. “Tell me about Mike.”

Frank continued looking out the windows and into his rear and side view mirrors. “He contacted me over a year ago. He’d been researching my father’s disappearance. You see, my mother originally left my father when I was about three years old. She just packed me up and moved to San Francisco and she took me with her. From what I’ve been able to gather, she wasn’t a member of the cult yet, but she was exposed to them in the Bay Area. My dad tracked us down and things get kind of fuzzy there.” He turned back to Vince. “He essentially disappeared for two years. He turned up later in El Paso. He was…all fucked up. Severe mental problems. My aunt Diane and Uncle Charlie tried to help him out, but he took off again a year or so later and nobody’s seen him since. Anyway, a few years ago, my dad’s best friend from when he was a kid, Mike Peterson, decides to do some of his own detective work. And he found out more than he cared to know. He was the one that initially found out the basic information on the cult. He tracked me down and asked if I wanted to help him. At first I didn’t, but by then I was having the dreams. So I agreed. It was through my memories that you and your mother came into the picture. I didn’t remember your names but therapy helped that, and even now I’m surprised I was still able to find you the way I did.”

“Why’s that?”

“I don’t remember you as Vince Walters,” Frank said. “I remember you as Andy and your mother as Margaret. Your name is….or was…Andrew Swanson.”

At the mention of the name Vince felt a weird sense of deja vu. Andrew Swanson. The name came to him so effortlessly, so easy. It was as if the long missing piece to a puzzle had been finally inserted in its place again. He felt whole and complete.

“Andy,” he let the name roll off his tongue.

“Trouble was, we couldn’t find you,” Frank said, turning back in his seat again and facing Vince. “We tried every method of skip tracing known to man. So do you know what we did?”

“What?”

“Several things.” He brought the old photograph of him and Vince out and held it up. “We scanned this into a computer and with the aid of a sketch artist I know, he aged your picture to make you appear as you might look now.” Frank grinned. “Scott was pretty damn accurate.”

Vince managed a small grin.

“Next, I remembered you were good in math and sports. I thought this would be a long shot, so I checked at the local universities and colleges first. Our plan was to search colleges and universities statewide, but I thought I would try California first, since it seemed the easiest thing to do. I had them compile a database of alumni from the years 1985 to 1992, years I figured you would be attending college if you enrolled, and I asked them to pay close attention to math majors, computer science majors, and accounting or business management majors. I also paid attention to those students that excelled in sports or maybe gained sports scholarships. The database spit out a list, and Mike and I narrowed it down to several hundred thousand candidates.” He laughed. “Quite a lot, I know, but it didn’t take us that long to go through it. We obtained school photos and began comparing, which helped whittle down the list. And we found a match right away. A University of California at Irvine alumni by the name of Vincent F. Walters, graduating class of 1988. From the small town of Lititz, Pennsylvania where he had previously lived with his mother, Maggie Walters.”

Vince sipped at his Coke, amazed that he’d not only been tracked down so deftly, but that the pieces were slowly coming in place. “The rest was simple,” Frank said, sipping his Dr. Pepper. “We found out where you lived, did some background work on you and your mom, and started doing some background work on your close friends and co-workers to make sure they hadn’t found you yet.”

“You did background checks on my friends?”

“We had to,” Frank said. “In order to make sure the group hadn’t found you. We found out about your wife’s death and checked it out as much as we could. There’s no physical evidence they had anything to do with it, but if you know their history you could see that they might have had a hand in it. They’re experts at making deaths seem like accidents. Defectors from the group always wind up dying from them. One such accident was very similar to Laura’s—his car just suddenly veered off a highway at fifty-five miles an hour and he died in the crash. By all accounts, the guy was a good driver, the car was in top shape, and he had no health problems. And there were no other cars involved—plenty of witnesses testified to that. They just…”

Vince finished for him. “It’s like they maybe used some kind of supernatural power to make the car lose control. Right?”

Frank nodded. “Yeah. Sounds crazy, huh?”

“And you think they got to Laura this way? Why?”

“It’s just a theory,” Frank explained quickly. “From what we were able to gather, they seemed to have no knowledge of your new identity. So it seems unlikely they had anything to do with Laura. What happened to Laura was tragic and unfortunate and probably not their doing. And…I know this is gonna fuck with your head, but it just seems so unlikely they had anything to do with this incident at the airport. That just isn’t their style, but then I could be wrong. If they were going to get to you, they would have done so through your friends. That’s why we had them checked out. Yeah, your wife’s death was probably an accident, but we couldn’t be sure of that, know what I mean?”

Vince shook his head. The whole thing sounded like an Ian Fleming novel. “You checked out my friends!”

“Brian Saunders and Tracy Harris seem okay,” Frank said. “At least on the surface, but then so does everybody else in your life. So does your shrink, Dr. Cartwright. Likewise, Laura’s parents in Kansas checked out okay too—”

“You did background checks on my in-laws?” Vince snapped. A hot flush crept up the back of his neck. Now he was getting irritated and more than a little angry.

Frank held up his gloved hands. “I’m sorry. We had to. You have no idea how good these people are at blending in with society, leading double lives that are all but unknown to those they’re close to when they parade around wearing their masks of normalcy. We had to make sure that—”

“This is starting to sound like a bunch of private eye bullshit!” Vince spat. “What the hell do you think you can accomplish by telling me this? Who the hell do you think you are to butt into my life, invade my privacy?”

Strong hands grabbed Vince’s shirt and pulled him toward Frank. The bigger man scowled as he held Vince firmly in his grip, rumpling his clothes. “You listen to me, goddamnit! I’ve got more than our lives at stake here on this. I’ve got my wife and kids to think about, too. If they were already onto you and I come poking around, they’d find out, find out who I am, then go after my wife and kids and kill them. So don’t you come to me with your whiney bullshit about your pathetic loss of your privacy!”

Frank let go of Vince and turned back to the front of the car. Vince slumped in his seat breathing heavy, his heart beating fast. He’d been taken aback by Frank’s sudden outburst and it scared him. He looked at Frank and realized he was dealing with the real thing here. The man was serious and it might be beneficial if he just kept his feelings in check and listened to what he had to say.

“I’m sorry,” Vince began, softly at first, then more assertive. “Look, I’m really sorry. I didn’t mean to be so…pissy about what you said. I just freaked out. I’ve…never had anybody poke into my life like that and I guess I just felt…I don’t know…violated.”

Frank regarded him from his seat, his eyes dark and piercing. Vince noticed for the first time that Frank’s sudden assault had spilled some of his soft drink on his slacks. He wiped at the dampness with his hand as he put his can in the cup holder on his side of the seat.

“I am not trying to fuck with you, Vince,” Frank breathed through gritted teeth. “If you don’t want to know anymore about your mother or why she was killed, just tell me and I’ll take you back to the mall and we can forget this whole thing.”

“No,” Vince exclaimed, forgetting the stain on his pants. “Don’t do that. I’m sorry. Really. I won’t do it again.”

There was silence for a moment as the tension eased. Frank remained hunched over the steering wheel, head bowed, eyes closed. Finally he let out a big sigh and lifted his head. He looked at Vince through haunted, bloodshot eyes. “Okay.”

Vince sighed, relaxing. He felt better now that the tension had died down. “You were saying that I checked out.”

Frank nodded. “Yes, you did. From what we’ve been able to gather, they haven’t come in contact with you yet. That still doesn’t mean they don’t know who you are. They very well could, which is why I’m being such a paranoid bastard. What happened to you and Tracy is just totally unexpected.”

Frank continued with his narrative. “Before we even started looking for you, we did some checking on Samuel Garrison. That was easy. I remembered he was involved in big business, that he owned some big corporation, but I didn’t remember exactly what kind. Who remembers that kind of shit when they’re nine years old? Mike and I sifted through back issues of the Wall Street Journal and various business magazines at the library until we found what we were looking for.” He leaned forward, fixing Vince with an intense eye. “Samuel F. Garrison is the leader of this group. He’s known as the Head Devil, or the Grand Chingon. He currently sits on the board of Directors of Cyberlink Systems, Corporate Financial Consulting Group—”

At the sound of Corporate Financial Consulting Group, Vince flinched. He felt his stomach turn into a knot. Frank noticed. “Don’t think we didn’t notice that you work for them. That’s why we really went to town on your background check. We thought maybe they’d found out about you long before you applied for that position. From what we can tell, everybody at Corporate Financial is clean, from top to bottom.”

The coincidence was striking, though. And disturbing. “Go on,” Vince said. “He sits on the board for my employer. What other companies is he on the board for?

“He also sits on the board for Al Azif Oil and Commodities and he is also the CEO and Chairman of the Board of Garrison Enterprises and Real Estate. You may have heard of them.”

Vince’s mind was racing. He’d heard of Cyberlink and Al Azif; Corporate Financial was their top client. “Garrison owns most of the shopping malls in Orange County, don’t they?”

Frank was nodding. “And the land that several buildings in Costa Mesa are on, most of them insurance and financial firms. They also own the Orange Coast Theater and a string of hotels. They’re very big. But here’s the thing that worried Mike and me. Garrison once served as CEO of Corporate Financial.”

Vince blinked in surprise. A flutter rose in him. “What?”

“Yeah, no shit. You don’t know that?”

Vince shook his head. “No. I don’t. My knowledge of what happens where I work is confined to my division and the executive branch. I get the quarterly reports and stuff, and I know there’s a list of the current board of directors somewhere in my office, but I’ve never paid attention to it.”

“That doesn’t surprise me,” Frank said. “As you can imagine, when we learned this we freaked. It certainly made our mission more critical.”

“I can see why,” Vince said, the flutter in his belly growing colder. He turned to Frank. “Should I be worried? I mean, are you sure they don’t know about me?”

Frank nodded. “The headhunter that recruited you has no ties to any of Garrison’s companies. Their current executives have spotless records when it comes to dealing with Garrison’s former and current companies. It’s just a coincidence—a pretty fucking weird coincidence, I gotta admit, but it was too close for comfort.”

“So what about this Samuel Garrison?”

“He’s a killer,” Frank said, his face dark, unbroken by the comment. “He’s in charge of an international organization of killers, drug cartels, pornographers, white slave leaders. You name it, he has his hand in it some way.”

Vince took another sip of his Coke. “This is all so crazy. It’s like something out of Geraldo Rivera or something.”

“That’s why they’re so successful at hiding it,” Frank continued. “It sounds crazy to most people, therefore, they refuse to believe it. That enables them to carry on with their activities. They’ve also got people planted in various law enforcement and government organizations that make sure all their tracks are covered.”

It sounded like something out of the mind of a paranoid End-of-the-World wacko. Vince held his tongue.

“Once Mike and I identified the group we stepped back and started doing research at the library, looking through microfilm of old newspapers. We couldn’t find any proof or evidence this group exists. Not a bit.”

Vince shrugged. “They sound pretty secretive.”

“They are,” Frank said, taking a sip of Dr. Pepper. “I contacted the LAPD under the guise of an investigative reporter. I told him I was doing a book on unsolved crimes to connect some of the murders I’d witnessed—”

“You witnessed murders?”

“Oh yeah,” Frank said, matter-of-factly. He took another sip of Dr. Pepper. “I did.”

Vince leaned back in his seat, staring out at the park. His stomach was queasy. The more he listened, the more this was making him sick with dread.

“I got a chance to go through their files and do some poking around,” Frank went on. “I didn’t find anything. I spent a few weeks after that driving around in the Topanga Canyon area, Malibu, Mission Hills, Calabasas, Canyon Country. Beverly Hills and Bel Air. Just trying to jolt my mind. I remember spending time in a lot of those places when I was younger—Sam had a mansion in Bel Air, and I remember being there at a very young age. Anyway, I finally found something two weeks later: the house I’d lived in as a child, shortly after we moved back to Southern California.”

“Fountain Valley?” Vince asked, breathless.

“No, Tustin,” Frank said, taking another sip of Dr. Pepper. “Close enough, though. I spent a lot of time driving all over southern California trying to remember things, place locations with my memory. It wasn’t until I was driving in the Santa Ana Mountains that things started coming back. It was almost like I was being guided to the exact spot by some force. I remember driving past the cul-de-sac and something just popped into my mind and said that’s it! I made a U-turn and drove through the neighborhood and saw it immediately. My house.”

He breathed heavily and at first Vince thought Frank was going to collapse emotionally again. But he regained his composure and continued. “I ended up obtaining copies of the mortgage records and deed to the property of the current owners. I did a background check on them. They turned out to be normal. I decided against going to the house and knocking on the door, introducing myself, telling them I grew up there and that I was just passing through the neighborhood. But God, did I want to see the inside of that place. Despite the fact that I lived nightmares in that house, I just had to go in there.

“I spent the next two weeks shadowing the owners,” Frank continued, leaning back in his seat casually, looking out at the park. “I learned their habits, their whereabouts. Then one day when they weren’t home, I broke in.”

“You broke in?”

“Yeah. Holdover from my days as an addict when I used to break into houses and steal shit I could sell for dope. I managed to slip through the back. I must’ve sat in the living room for thirty minutes, letting old memories wash over me the way waves lap on the sand of a beach. Then I hit all the rooms. I didn’t take anything. Didn’t touch anything. Just walked around, letting the memories come to me as I entered each room.” He paused, struggling with the next bit of memory that was coming to the surface. “And then when I got to a room that was an addition to the house—it was set in the back and was sunk down into the foundation by a few feet—the last memory hit me hard.” His voice lowered, his face grew stony as he remembered that long ago incident. “I saw my parents. Your parents. Opal and Paul—you remember them?”

Vince nodded. Opal and Paul had been a sweet older couple, very grandparent-like in appearance. Vince used to like being with them.

“There were others you’d probably remember as well. You remember the people our folks used to get together with?”

Vince nodded, his own memories now flooding to the surface. The people that used to come to the house—friends of his mom and dad, co-workers, people he referred to as “Aunts” and “Uncles,” people he thought until recently had been blood family—memories of their faces swam to the surface of his mind.

“Your folks were there, too,” Frank continued. He was gripping the steering wheel hard. “I don’t remember what I was doing at the time. Maybe I woke up in the middle of the night and heard a noise. I think my folks used to drug me on nights they had ceremonies. I remember my mother used to give me a pill with a glass of water before I went to bed on certain nights. I’d sleep all the way through. But one night I must have woken up and heard something and stumbled onto what they were doing in the den and later blacked it out of my mind.”

“What was it?” Vince asked, breathless with dread.

“They were in the middle of a ceremony,” Frank said. “They were dressed in black robes and cowls. The room was dark, illuminated by several burning candles. They were grouped around something lying on the floor. When I got there I remembered a frenzied chanting, and then I heard a wet thud and a cry, almost like a cry of passion. The group was huddled around whatever was on the floor and they parted briefly, allowing me a brief glimpse.” Frank gulped once, turned to Vince. His eyes were wide liquid pools of fear. “It was a body. A young man, kinda hippie looking. He was naked and they’d just killed him, stabbed him in the chest. One of them was cutting into his chest with a knife, and as I watched I saw somebody pull out his heart and hold it up. The heart was still beating, blood was running down the man’s hands. And they were all chanting something weird, like one long continuous voice.” He paused briefly, his voice deadpan. “And then the guy brought the heart to his mouth and bit into it.”

Vince winced.

“And it was passed around and everybody bit into it, everybody ate a piece of it. And then they all fell on him, tearing into him, rolling in his body like some insane orgy.” Frank paused for breath. “I don’t remember how I got back to my room, but the next thing I remember I was sitting up in bed. I was sweaty all over. I thought I’d dreamed the whole thing and then I heard a sound and realized what it was. It was them. Making sounds. Grunting, horrible sounds.”

Vince watched Frank grapple with the memories he’d witnessed. Vince still had a hard time believing that what Frank just related was true. How could it not be, he thought, if his conviction of the events seems so real? The only thing that kept him from believing in Frank’s story wholeheartedly was the absurdity of it. To think that the supposed satanic group was as powerful as Frank said they were, and had avoided detection by law enforcement agencies thus far, suggested they boasted an intelligence system that exceeded the CIA’s.

But if you consider the spiritual nature of the story—which Vince had a hard time doing since he didn’t even believe in God or the Devil—perhaps there was some sort of infernal doings here.

Frank regained his composure and continued. “When this memory hit me it was like being sucker punched between the eyes. It literally knocked me down. I sat on the steps that led down to the den and just reeled with the intensity of it. And then I guess I lost it there for a minute. I was bawling like a baby, but more out of fear. I was so utterly petrified, so scared for my life you wouldn’t believe it. Until then I had sort of been coasting through this whole ordeal, accepting the fact that I had been physically and psychologically abused as a child, but still not accepting the whole Satanic thing. I guess you’re feeling the same way.”

Vince nodded. It was hard to grasp.

“But when this memory came back, I was floored. I’d never told my therapist about any suspicions I had about my parents being in a Satanic cult. The memories that always came up before were those of basic dysfunction; my dad striking me, the neglect I used to suffer. Nothing like this. And I realized then that the room I was standing in when this flashback occurred was the same room it happened in. That’s what triggered it. So I got out of the house as quickly as I could and drove to Mike’s place. Told him everything.”

They were silent for a moment, Vince digesting everything Frank had just told him. He finished his Coke and set the empty down in the cup holder. Frank sat forward in his seat, looking out at the park, sipping his Dr. Pepper. The afternoon sun was burning high overhead, and a scratch baseball game had started in the diamond to their left.

“Okay,” Vince said, breaking the silence. He turned to Frank. “So you put two and two together and came after me. And you have no hard, physical proof that any of this happened.”

Frank nodded. “Just my memories.”

Vince thought this over. “How much do you know about this group?”

“Too much and not enough.” Frank shifted around in his seat. He turned to Vince again. “The present lineage has been in existence since the 1960s. They’re called The Children of the Night. The earliest mention of the cult comes from the early part of this century, but it’s believed their links go back much further. I don’t have the time to get into ancient Sumerian and Babylonian occult teachings, but elements of their belief system and rituals go back to them, especially in regards to the Sumerian devil Hanbi.”

“Hanbi?” Vince asked. “What’s that?” His mind flashed back on that jumble of words written in his mother’s blood. That word had been one of them.

“My research on that isn’t complete yet,” Frank said. “In fact, it’s pretty fucking hard unless you can read ancient Sumerian. Hanbi is said to be the father of a more well known Sumerian God named Pazuzu, who was the devil-god of the southeastern wind and brought drought and pestilence. Ever see The Exorcist?”

Vince nodded.

“The little girl in that movie, Regan, was possessed by Pazuzu.”

“So…Pazuzu is just another name for the Devil?”

“That’s what it all boils down to.” Frank took a sip of his drink. “The devil has gone by numerous names throughout history. Azazel, Beelzebub, Shaitan, Behemoth, Satanael, Melek Taus. With each name he goes by a different appearance but he’s pretty much more or less the same.”

“A fallen angel,” Vince said, the Bible lessons his mother forced him to partake in coming to mind.

“So they say, but there’s a lot more to it than that. I’m still trying to chase that end down too. Needless to say, he’s been worshipped since the dawn of time. In fact, my evidence suggests he was worshipped well before our concept of God even developed.”

“Oh yeah?” Vince looked at Frank curiously.

“I’ll tell you more about that later. Let’s stick with what we’re going on now, which is the group our parents were involved with. The first tangible evidence of our group is from Europe around 1914. It’s alleged that Aleister Crowley associated with them and later left, some say, out of fear, which was out of character for Crowley. There’s evidence of cult activity in the U.S. in the 1920s, especially regarding the Archibald Lasher serial killing case in Los Angeles. By the 1940s, the cult was very active and it’s alleged that Adolf Hitler and several key SS personnel were members. The cult was largely inactive after World War II until the late 1960s. That’s when you had the End Times Church, who worshipped Jesus, God, and Satan simultaneously, their reason being that you can’t have one without the other, that all of them worked together in some sort of tandem. A group called the Four P Movement broke away from yet another cult, one called the Process Church of the Final Judgment and was largely blamed for the rise of cult killings in the US in the late sixties and early seventies. I studied both groups and that’s when I saw that The Children of the Night had re-emerged within this period. By then they’d seamlessly blended into the background of mainstream society. Folks like Charles Manson and his cult were popularly attributed to belonging to one or the other.”

“Oh yeah?” Victor had watched a documentary on Charles Manson a year or two before Laura’s murder.

“Yeah,” Frank said. “There’s no hard proof, of course, but the evidence is pretty strong. There’s even stronger evidence The Children of the Night rubbed shoulders with members of the Japanese Yakuza, various Islamic splinter groups from the Middle East, Reverend Sun Myung Moon, the Army of God, Jim Jones, and serial killers like Henry Lee Lucas and Son of Sam. Their leader was—and still is—Samuel F. Garrison, the “Grand Chingon,” or “Head Devil.” You wouldn’t know he was involved in this stuff from looking at him.” Frank leaned back in his leather bucket seat. “Very suave looking man, early seventies, in great shape for a man of his age. Sharp minded. Very cultured, polite, respectful. A man who has contributed immensely to the business world and the community. A man who is an icon of respectability. But beneath that the guy is the fucking devil.”

Vince was silent for a moment. He was just about to ask a question when Frank continued.

“They’re also connected to similar sects around the world, all involved in the same thing. Are they responsible for all the child abductions and murders you hear about from Christian fundamentalists? No. But they do prey on runaways for their rituals. They’re the easiest targets. Do they keep women in compounds as ‘breeders’ for infants that are later sacrificed to the devil? No fucking way. They probably had a hand in spreading such a rumor because doing so takes all suspicion off of them. But they have used infants in sacrifices.” He stopped himself and for a minute Vince thought he was going to collapse again, but he managed to get under control again. “They are in our government and military. They are experts in mind control, Physiological experimentation on humans and controlling via biochips. They are deceptive and infiltrate the government, modern society, and the Christian church intentionally to pervert it and cause divisions. And the reason they’ve been able to survive for so long is because they are incredibly organized and by outward appearances are outstanding citizens: doctors, lawyers, CEO’s, Law Enforcement Agents, Government Officials, members of the clergy.”

Vince was shaking his head. “This sounds so unreal.”

“I know,” Frank said. “How do you think I felt when we started uncovering it? I’m starting to feel like Whitley Strieber.”

“Who?”

“Whitley Strieber…the guy who wrote Communion. He’s a very high profile horror and science fiction writer. Wrote a couple of great novels: Wolfen, The Hunger. In his book Communion, he claims he was actually abducted by aliens and was used as a guinea pig in their experiments. He claims they’re still doing this to him, tracking him down. All this from a guy who makes a great living making this kind of shit up.” Frank patted his chest. “That’s how I feel.”

So he feels funny believing in it, too, Vince thought. Still, he found it even hard to consider what Frank was telling him. It was just too crazy. But he couldn’t voice that to Frank. He had to deal with whatever doubts he had himself. Maybe tonight he would do some research on what Frank was insinuating.

Vince let out a careful sigh. “This stuff sounds pretty heavy.”

“It is,” Frank said. He finished his Dr. Pepper and set the empty in the cup holder. “You wouldn’t believe some of the stuff Mike and I have discovered. Did you know the Son of Sam killings in the late 1970s are vaguely connected to an offshoot of this group?”

“No.”

“There’s evidence that suggests that David Berkowitz didn’t act alone when he gunned down those people in ’76 and ’77. In fact, witness descriptions place three or four other gunmen at the scene of the crimes. One theory is that the shootings were committed by order of the cult to enact something—exactly what, I have no idea. The attacks were all committed on a day that corresponds with a holiday or festival on the occult calendar. Berkowitz, on the other hand, was most likely fingered to take the fall before he even knew it. He initially clammed up and claimed to have acted on the order of his neighbor’s dog, which he said was possessed by a demon. Psychiatrists dismissed that as a ploy, but a few years later when he began talking to an investigative reporter about the murders and hinting he was involved in a large nationwide satanic cult, he was attacked in prison. His throat was slashed and he almost died.” Frank looked at Vince. “As you can imagine, he kept quiet about the cult after that.”

Vince was silent, taking this all in.

“There’s more. I can go on and on about what we’ve found out. The Manson family, the Metamoros thing down in Mexico, the Edwin Groose serial killing case, all that stuff had some trail leading back to The Children of the Night. Did you know that they even own a major Christian Broadcasting system?”

Vince shook his head. This was all sounding like the paranoid delusions of a bad dream. The events of the past week raced through his mind: his mother’s sudden death, rushing to Pennsylvania, Lillian’s sudden death, talking to the detectives and his mother’s friends in Lititz, the visit from the attorney, the crazy guy at the airport that tried to kill him and Tracy. And now this.

“Why is all this happening?” Vince said, more to himself than to Frank.

“I have my suspicions, trust me.”

“No, I mean…” Vince turned in his seat so he was facing Frank. “Why me? Why is all this shit crumbling down around me? Even considering the possibility my mother might have belonged to such a group and that they exist even now and are involved in everything you claim they are, why would they be after me? Why would they want to kill me? I have a fairly good life, I have a career I love, I have friends that I love and care for and who care for me. I have a good life. I had nothing to do with what my mother did in the sixties. I’m not in the least bit interested in the occult. So why should I care if my mother—our parents—were involved in a satanic cult? Why would a bunch of religious nuts want to kill me?”

Frank was silent for a moment. He regarded Vince sternly, his dark eyes resting heavily on him. “I could just go on and say that I came here to help you. If you remember, I told you that you were in danger. That part is certainly true as evidenced by what happened to you and Tracy.”

“But why am I in danger?” Vince asked. “Why would they want me dead? I’ve never done anything to them! And why did you go through all this trouble to find me? What business is it of yours?”

“It’s my business just as it is yours. You see, Vince, my reasons for tracking you down are not entirely for your concerns. I have my own self-interest at heart as well. I came here today in the hopes of helping both of us out because this is my problem, too.”

“How so?”

Frank reached in the rear of the Saturn and pulled out a black leather satchel of the sort carried by business executives. He rifled through it and pulled out a sheaf of papers. He handed them to Vince, who took them curiously and began to glance through them. “These are transcriptions of Internet communications,” Frank explained. “They were copied and pasted into an e-mail I got two months ago. I’ve been unable to track the sender of the e-mail. See there?” he pointed to a portion of the communication. “Where it refers to ‘plateau’?”

Vince saw it and nodded. “Yeah.”

“Read it.”

Vince read it. It only took a few lines to realize the implications of the communiqué. He looked at Frank, astonished. “There’s a reference here from this one guy about snuffing out ‘plateau’.”

“Exactly.”

“Plateau is you?”

Frank nodded. He looked grim. “That’s my screen name.”

“How did they get your screen name?”

“I don’t know,” Frank answered softly. “I’ve never tapped into any kind of occult bulletin board before in my life. All of my research on this was done at libraries and bookstores. My electronic correspondence is largely confined to people in publishing. I’ve tried to trace who I know in publishing who could know people that belong to The Children of the Night, but I’ve been unable to come up with anything. Everything runs into a dead end. I started thinking maybe none of this was real, that I was chasing something that doesn’t exist.” He held up the sheaf of papers. “But this group exists. They’re real. Whether there really is a literal devil is irrelevant in this case. These people believe there is a devil, much like Pat Robertson and Oral Roberts believe there is a literal God, and they will do anything to advance their agenda.” He paused for a moment, staring down at the floor of the Saturn.

“What’s their agenda?”

Frank appeared to think about this. “All I know is they seem to be working on something really big. They’re devil worshippers all the way; they not only hold allegiance to the Christian devil, they honor his father in even higher regard. The ancient Sumerian god Hanbi.”

“That name was written on the wall in my mother’s bedroom,” Vince said.

Frank looked at him. “You sure?”

Vince nodded. “Yeah.”

Frank turned away. Vince thought he muttered, “They’re moving fast,” but he wasn’t sure. He quickly regained his composure. “Anyway…they know who I am now. To conduct the kind of background check that revealed my e-mail address would require what O.J. Simpson paid for his defense team.”

“But somebody found out anyway?”

“Yes,” Frank answered, looking more grim. “The day I got that transcript I was away from the house. My wife was at work, and the kids were at her mother’s. Somebody broke into our place and ransacked it. Tore it apart. Nothing was taken, but they destroyed my computer and my office. They started a small fire there—that’s how we found out about it. A neighbor saw smoke pouring out of my office window and called the fire department and managed to track my wife down, who called me out of the meeting I was at.” He paused, as if struggling with that tragedy. “My office was a shambles. I lost everything except a backup tape that I keep in a safe deposit box, and my laptop computer, which I had with me. All the information about the cult, with the exception of the stuff I managed to save on tape, was destroyed.”

He regarded Vince with those deep brown eyes again. “And here I am.”

Chapter Ten

VINCE WALTERS DIDN’T get back to the office until 1:30 that afternoon. When he returned he went immediately to his office, shut his computer down, and checked his messages. There was a call from detective Staley. Vince returned the call, on nervous edge as he was put through to the detective.

“So what’s the news?” he asked detective Staley.

“We don’t think he’s the guy,” Detective Staley said, clearly irritated at this turn-of-event. “Insufficient evidence. The guy has a clear alibi, but we’re holding him on weapons charges.”

“What turned you on to him anyway and who is he?”

“He was fingered by a witness at the airport,” Detective Staley said. “I won’t name the witness, but he related that the guy resembled somebody he knew that had been making terrorist threats at his place of employment. We followed up on it and visited the suspect at his home in Huntington Beach. Turns out the guy is a neo-Nazi and had a pretty good arsenal, most of it illegal firearms. We’re holding him on that charge now without bail until we can build a case against him. But I don’t think he’s the guy that shot at you.”

“Why’s that?”

“This guy claims he was attending a White-Power rally in San Diego,” Detective Staley said, his voice tinged with disgust. “We checked that angle out and found video-tape that supports his alibi. He certainly appears to have been elsewhere.”

“So what happens now?”

“That’s up to you. Have you been to your home yet?”

“I’m planning on going now.”

“I’d be careful. I can’t spare any more resources, so I suggest you lay low and alter your driving routes and habits. We’re doing all we can on this end.”

“Thanks.” Vince hung up. He wanted to call Tracy right away and he glanced at the digital clock on his desk. He had to get going if he wanted to meet Frank at the house. He would call Tracy later.

He quickly packed up his briefcase and headed out. He told his secretary he wasn’t feeling well and was going home. Then he left for the day.

Frank met him at his house. He’d given Frank directions before being dropped off at the mall to pick up his car. Frank told him that he still wasn’t sure if the group was on to him; if they’d wanted him dead, they would have made it look like an accident, not a full-blown assassination attempt. He was going to call Mike from his cell phone and give him the latest news, then he would meet him at Vince’s home. Whoever it was that tried to have him and Tracy killed was probably lying low after Sunday’s aborted attempt. While Vince was fairly confident The Children of the Night hadn’t been making inquiries into him, Frank’s story spooked him. Luckily most of the staff was out at late lunches or still in meetings and he was able to escape the office relatively undetected. If anybody inquired as to his whereabouts, Glenda would simply tell them he’d gone home sick. No problem.

When he arrived home he opened the garage door and pulled the car in, parking as far to the left as possible so Frank could ease his vehicle in. That had been Vince’s idea. If they were on to Frank he didn’t want them to find out where he was living. He made sure he wasn’t followed on the drive home, and he knew Frank would be even more wary. Therefore, when he closed the garage door behind them he felt a great sense of relief as it rattled down. Frank stepped out of his car, a tall silhouette in the darkened garage, long hair flowing down to his shoulders. He was brandishing a handgun. “Turn on the light.”

“Jesus Christ, man!” Vince felt instantly nervous at the sight of the gun.

“Just turn on the fucking lights!”

Vince reached over and turned on the garage lights.

Frank stood still for a moment, weapon ready. It was a two-car garage with no storage space above, but there was a small makeshift closet against the wall. He motioned to Vince with the gun. “Move out of the way,” he said, as he stepped forward and swung the door open.

Vince almost jumped, as if expecting something to leap out at them. Frank inspected the closet quickly. The storage space was empty.

“Okay,” Frank said, motioning for Vince to follow him. “Stay behind me and be quiet.”

He followed Frank into his house, heart racing madly as the formidable figure crept silently through the house, opening closets stealthily, checking out available hiding places. They covered the kitchen, the downstairs bathrooms, the living room, den, and dining room. Then they headed upstairs, Frank looking more like an undercover narcotics agent than a science-fiction writer paranoid that some shadowy organization was about to kill him. He moved with precision and stealth, his body flattened against the wall as he swung open doors to bedrooms, checked under beds, looked in closets. Finally, when all the rooms had been checked and cleared, Frank relaxed. They were in the second floor hallway. He flipped the safety on and stuck the handgun in his jacket. “We’re cool. Now I gotta pee.”

“Me too,” Vince said. He pointed downstairs. “There’s a bathroom downstairs. I’m going to get out of these clothes. Feel free to make yourself at home.”

“Thanks,” Frank said, heading downstairs.

Vince went into his bedroom, relieved himself in the master bathroom, and then shed his work clothes quickly. He left his clothes on the bed and rummaged around in a dresser for a pair of shorts and a tank top. He found a pair, donned them, and gave his appearance a quick glance in the mirror. His face looked flushed, his eyes slightly wild looking, but that was to be expected under the circumstances. He’d just learned some pretty hideous things today. Whether they were one hundred percent true still remained to be seen, but the adrenaline running through his body was a sure sign that Frank’s story had affected him physically. It felt like his nerves were alive, squirming under his skin.

When he went downstairs he found Frank sitting on the cream colored sofa in the living room. Vince headed toward the kitchen. “Anything to drink?”

“Water would do,” Frank said.

“Evian okay?”

“Perfect.”

Vince got two bottles of Evian out of the refrigerator and carried them into the living room. He handed one to Frank, who twisted the cap off and drank deeply. Vince sank into a plush seat by the sofa and twisted the cap off his bottle. They relaxed for a moment, lost in the sounds of peaceful silence. There was a light summer breeze blowing through the living room window, and it felt nice to just chill out for a little bit. If it had been any other day Vince would have just been content to lay here and let his mind drift, letting his body relax limb by limb, muscle by muscle, until he could feel his mind detaching itself from his body. But that wasn’t going to be the case today. His mind was so cluttered with what he’d learned that he didn’t know if he’d be able to sleep.

“So what do we do now?” Vince asked.

Frank didn’t look at him as he answered. “I’ve sent my wife and kids away. I made the arrangements two days ago.”

Vince looked at him, astonished that he’d taken such steps.

“Brandy knew something was getting heavy. She knew it had something to do with my mother, with what Mike and I were investigating. And up until two days ago she was good about giving me my space. She’s what any man who makes his living as a writer can ask for.” Frank smiled. “She’s a good woman.”

Vince sat calmly, waiting for him to go on.

“Two days ago when I knew we were going to contact you, I told her everything I found out. Naturally, she was horrified. Then I called her mother and told her everything. Her reaction was naturally the same as her daughter’s. The three of us talked, and I told them that the best thing for them until this was over was for me to send Brandy and the kids to her mother’s and have Wendy make arrangements to get them out of California. So that’s what we did. We packed up, and I drove them to Wendy’s that night and saw them off. And believe me, it was hard.”

Vince could only imagine. For a moment Laura’s features swam to the surface of his mind again and he saw himself in Frank’s situation. Up against a secret organization that knows you exist, that knows you’re aware of their secrets and can kill you at the push of a button. If he were in Frank’s shoes he wouldn’t be that concerned for himself; he’d be more concerned for his wife.

“I have no idea where they are now,” Frank said. He took another hearty drink of water, set the bottle down on the end table by the sofa and sighed. He leaned back into the comfort of the sofa and crossed his legs. “I know they’re safe. Wendy is keeping my literary agent informed as to what’s happening and I’m getting the news from Peter, who’s sort of acting as a message hub for the whole thing. Peter has no idea what’s going on. He thinks Brandy and I split up.”

“So what do we do tonight?” Vince asked.

Frank looked at him. “We make a plan of action.”

THEY MET MIKE Peterson in the back booth of a Round Table Pizza Parlor, located in the Mission Viejo Mall.

Frank called him from Vince’s living room around four that afternoon and they spoke briefly. Vince busied himself in the kitchen, running last evening’s dishes through the dishwasher and tidying up. When Frank was finished he walked over to the breakfast bar. “Mike wants to meet you. Tonight.”

“Fine.” He wanted to meet Mike Peterson as well.

“He’ll back up everything I’ve told you. And if you’re up to it, we’d all like to fly out to Pennsylvania as soon as possible.”

“What for?”

“To do more checking.”

“On whether my mother was involved with The Children of the Night?”

“No,” Frank said, downing the rest of his Evian. “To find out why they’re trying to get back in touch with you. Mike wants you to tell him what happened at the airport, too.”

“Did you tell him what happened?”

“Yeah, I did. He was just as surprised as I was. He didn’t think they would take such drastic measures. He says what happened to you at the airport isn’t part of their M.O.”

A chill went through Vince’s spine but he tried not to show it as he put the remainder of last week’s dishes in the dishwasher. He closed the dishwasher, flipped the switch, and started the load. “Do you think…that whoever it was that tried to kill me and Tracy wasn’t…that they weren’t part of The Children of the Night?”

“I don’t know.” Frank leaned his tattooed arms on the breakfast bar. “But they’re involved somehow. You’re having these dreams for a reason. And you’re remembering your past for reasons that go beyond the traditional Satanic Ritual Abuse syndrome.”

“You mean there’s a technical term for people like us?”

Frank grinned. “Surprising, isn’t it? Fortunately, ninety percent of those cases are outright frauds. Therapists planting false memories in the fragile minds of their patients to make a quick buck. The sad thing is these people seriously undermine the real threat that’s out there.”

“That groups like The Children of the Night are really involved in stuff like this?”

Frank nodded.

Vince leaned on the opposite side of the breakfast bar, facing Frank. He was beginning to get hungry, and their rendezvous with Mike was only forty minutes away. “You know, I’m glad you said that because for a moment I thought I was caught in a bad dream.”

“What do you mean?” Frank asked.

“Well, I’ve heard stories about Satanic Ritual Abuse before,” Vince began. “And to tell you the truth, I just dismissed it as something unsubstantiated. There was a case here in Mission Viejo in the late eighties when a pair of sisters sued their parents for abuse they claimed to have suffered at their hands when they were forced to participate in satanic rituals. One of the sisters claimed she was a breeder for Satan. She said she bore three children, all of who were killed a few days after they were born in ritual sacrifices. She claimed to have vivid memories of this; both of them did.”

“The case was thrown out of court,” Frank said, with the all-knowing sense of one who has done his homework.

“Right,” Vince said. “At the request of the defense, both women were examined by psychiatrists and other medical experts. The sister who claimed that she’d been a breeder was examined by a gynecologist who testified there were no signs that she’d ever given birth.” He shook his head. “So when you showed up today and started on this thing, I was prepared to chalk your story up to something for the tabloids. But the thing that kept me from dismissing it is that—”

“You remember.”

“That’s right,” The memories flashed through his mind. “I remember. And I know for a fact that nobody planted any memories in my mind. These things started before Laura was killed. Hell, they started intensifying in their imagery before I even started therapy.”

“The question that now remains is the one I posed before,” Frank said. “Why are we having these dreams now, and why does it seem that these people—whoever the hell they are—seem to be coming back for us?”

They looked at each other across the breakfast bar. Finally Vince answered that question with the best answer he could summon up. “I don’t know.”

They left the house five minutes later for their meeting with Mike.

Mike Peterson was already seated in a back booth when they arrived. There were two families seated at tables in the front of the restaurant; aside from that, the place was empty. Mike had already ordered a pitcher of Iced Tea, and as Frank and Vince stepped into the corner booth, obscured by shadows and lit by shaded lamps that hung from the wall, he saw Mike Peterson was a middle-aged man who appeared to be in reasonably good health. He was dressed in blue jeans, a white T-shirt with the words Palm Springs stitched across the chest, and white sneakers. His graying blond hair was swept back over his head, making no effort to conceal the bald spot that had taken root at the cap of his forehead. His eyes were blue and sparkled with a sense of wariness as he regarded Vince.

After introductions were made, the men sat down at the table. Mike got down to business immediately. “How do you feel about all this, Vince?”

Vince shrugged. “Overwhelmed is the best way to describe it.”

Mike nodded. “Frank felt that way, too. So did I. The important thing to remember is that it’s okay to feel overwhelmed. It’s okay to think what Frank has told you is something paranoid, something that couldn’t happen. It’s a normal reaction. You wouldn’t be human if you felt otherwise.”

Vince thought that was a strange thing to say. You wouldn’t be human otherwise. But he kept quiet about it and let Mike continue.

“Before we go on,” Mike said, trading glances between Frank and Vince. “Does anybody want anything to eat?”

“Yeah,” Frank said. He rose to his feet and clapped Vince on the back. “How ’bout we order some chow?”

“Great.” Vince got up and followed the two men to the front counter of the pizza parlor. His stomach was rumbling; he hadn’t eaten all day.

They put in their order—a large deep-dish pizza with pepperoni and olives—and returned to their corner booth. Mike introduced himself to Vince more formally and gave him his background.

He explained that he was a retired high school history teacher. The reason he’d become involved in this was simple: Jesse Black, Frank’s natural father, had been his best friend. They’d grown up together in El Paso, Texas, had even gone to college together, served in the military. Then Jesse had moved to California where the job prospects in computer engineering were in their infancy stages. Jesse had earned his Bachelor’s Degree in Mathematics, and the most he could have gotten on the employment ladder in Texas would have been teaching high school math. “Jesse was more ambitious than that,” Mike explained as they waited for their order. “So he moved to California in 1960, landed a job as a Computer Operator at an insurance company. He met Gladys Silva in 1962, they were married the following year, and Frank was born the year after that.” Frank remained unemotional as Mike gave Vince the brief history lesson. “For the first three years of their marriage, all appeared normal. At least on the surface.”

Mike turned to Frank. “Are you sure you can hear all this?”

“You’re talking to a guy who once wrote a scene in a horror novel about a man who was pulled through a quarter-inch drainpipe,” Frank said, waving for Mike to go on. “I’m fine with it. Really.”

The trouble was, Vince didn’t feel one hundred percent fine with it. It was already gearing up to be grim. Mike Peterson continued: “By this time I was living out here as well, in Anaheim. I was married, and my son was born two months after Frank. In fact, I was in Jesse’s wedding, along with another old buddy of ours who’d also moved out to the West Coast. A guy by the name of John Llama. Anyway, the three of us were so busy back then with raising our families and getting started on our careers; John was a lawyer and had just gotten a job at a pretty prestigious firm downtown; I was teaching; Jesse was working his way up the corporate ladder. Our wives were able to stay home and raise the kids, be housewives. Back then it was financially possible for young wives to stay at home and raise kids while the husbands worked.” He paused, as if coming across the first rocky bump of the narrative that would take him down to hell. “Jesse didn’t tell me anything about what happened between him and Gladys, what caused her to…do what she later did. He didn’t tell me anything until years later. In fact, what I’m going to tell you is what John and I have been able to piece together throughout the years, with the help of Frank’s aunt Diane, Jesse’s sister.” He paused again, choosing his words carefully. “It seems that at some time when Frank was between the ages of one and two, Gladys met a group of people that we can simply call ‘hippies’.”

Vince was nodding slowly through all this, listening carefully. Mike continued: “Gladys had some emotional problems before she and Jesse were married. That was all Jesse confided in me. Her mother had been an alcoholic, her father wasn’t much better; buried himself in his work to escape the mother’s drinking. Needless to say, there’s probably more that went on in that household that Jesse didn’t let on. With what we know about dysfunctional households, there was probably a great deal of abuse that went on. I’m sure Gladys suffered quite a bit of it. How much, we’ll never know. But Jesse loved her, and he was determined to do everything he could to make her life better for her and Frank. He started working longer hours so he could afford to move his growing family to a small house in Hawthorne. It was at this point that John and I assumed that Gladys met the hippies—and I’m sorry to use that term, because that’s the only word I can think of to describe them.”

“They were hippies,” Frank said, taking a sip of iced tea. “It was the sixties. They were fucking hippies.”

Mike nodded, a slight smile on his features creasing his face at Frank’s outburst. “Okay, they were hippies. Maybe they weren’t normal hippies—the kind that were largely benevolent, into the peace and love movement and all that pacifist bullshit. But they surely dressed like them. John and I think they might have lived next door to Jesse and Gladys and were nothing more than college kids. Gladys would have had a lot of time on her hands during the day and through most early evenings.” He glanced at Frank. “Frank himself doesn’t remember any of this period, but from what we’ve been able to gather, the hippies turned Gladys on to LSD and pot. They also introduced her to some weird spiritual stuff that probably didn’t amount to much at the time, but which soon got worse. Did Frank tell you about The Children of the Night?”

Vince nodded.

“We think they may have been early members. Of course, everything they involved her in was drug related and mixed with some of their teachings. Whatever it was, it was attractive to Gladys. She began neglecting Frank, and Jesse noticed quickly. This led to fights between them. Jesse’s mother, who used to fly out from El Paso frequently to visit, tried to help out. She was very troubled by it. At one point, Jesse took Frank to his in-laws during a brief separation.” A slight grin cracked Mike Peterson’s features. “Jesse didn’t care much for Gladys’ folks, but he also didn’t think her mother was that bad. Maybe she wasn’t. He certainly seemed to trust them with Frank more then he trusted his own wife.”

Vince and Frank waited while Mike drank some iced tea. “To make a long story short they reconciled, moved out of the house and bought a place. I remember that house. It was in Gardena, right off Sepulveda and Vermont. It was a small two-bedroom place and the garage had been converted into a den. A nice place for a young couple to get a start. Jesse had been promoted to shift supervisor by then and was still working a lot. But he was doing it to build a nest egg for him and Gladys. He said they wanted another child.”

He stopped at this point, his eyes flicking to Frank as if dreading to go on. Frank nodded at him, encouraging him. Frank’s features were stony, almost cold, with a faint underlying of dread.

“Jesse tried to keep things going as normal as possible, but the influence of Gladys’ friends was strong. They kept showing up when Jesse was working, and it was then that she began having affairs.” He cleared his throat, looking down at the table. “Sometimes she would engage in sex in Frank’s presence.”

Vince looked at Frank, who didn’t meet his gaze. He turned back to Mike. “How could you know this if Jesse never told you anything?”

“It all came out during my therapy,” Frank said softly. He looked at Vince. “Trust me, I went through a lot of regression therapy. My earliest memory was when I was three, which corresponds to around the time Mike is telling you about now. Only my earliest memory is of San Francisco, after we moved there. Not Los Angeles. I had to be taken back through my memories to remember what…I saw my mom doing.”

A worm of unease began to gnaw at Vince’s belly. He took a sip of iced tea.

“Gladys didn’t move to the Bay Area until she left Jesse. I was the first person Jesse called when Gladys left. He was scared and angry; he didn’t tell me anything about Gladys having affairs, or anything else that had been going on. Just that they’d been having problems again and that she left. He tried to get Frank from her, but Gladys won a court order placing Frank in her custody. She was also pregnant.” Mike lapsed into silence for a moment and Vince felt his heart pounding. She was also pregnant.

He glanced at Frank, who didn’t return the look. Frank sat motionless, stony faced. He looked like he’d heard this story many times, but hearing it again was just as gruesome as hearing it for the first time. Vince swallowed a lump in his throat and tuned back in to Mike’s narrative.

“She moved to the Bay Area, taking Frank with her. He’d just turned three.” Mike spoke slowly, his voice lowered. “She went to San Francisco with a group of people she’d met in L.A. They settled into the Haight Ashbury scene quite easily, and it was there they met core members of The Children of the Night, who had infiltrated the hippie scene very successfully.” He paused. “They got Gladys into the group somehow and this was where she met your mother, Maggie Swanson.”

Vince didn’t feel anything as Frank took over briefly. “From what we’ve gathered, Maggie got involved with the group from a guy she met at UC Berkeley, a guy named Tom McDonald.”

The name clicked and Vince placed the name with a face. That smiling Dad Face of his youth in California. “My dad.”

Frank nodded. “We don’t know if he was your real father or not. There were a lot of orgies and love-ins going on at the time. Plus, about a year before you were born your mother and other members of the group went on a spiritual pilgrimage to the Middle East. They were there for almost a year. It’s possible you weren’t even born in this country; we haven’t been able to pinpoint your exact birthplace. If your mom became pregnant with you there, your father could have been one of the male members of the group. But anyway, that’s where our mothers met, at one of these gatherings that was, in reality, a Children of the Night meeting. They encouraged the orgiastic behavior, the drugs. It was hippie heaven.”

Mike picked up the narrative. “Gladys fell in hard for Maggie and Tom. They became lovers, and with her drug use so high she wanted to be a part of them. Maggie and Tom were already pretty ingrained in the cult and they brought Gladys in. They…I don’t know how to say it, but… they had some kind of spell over her. Made her believe that the coming of Armageddon was near and that they were on the winning side.”

Frank nodded. “She was also most likely brainwashed into believing that their dedication and worship of Satan was, in a way, a glorification of God as well. Because if God had this whole scenario planned out beforehand as prophesized in the Bible, then they figured that serving the Prince of Darkness wouldn’t be bad…they’d be essentially doing their part to fulfill Biblical prophecy.”

“But this group took things a step further,” Mike explained just as he was interrupted by a voice announcing over the intercom that their pizza was ready.

Frank rose to get it and after he came back and they’d served themselves and begun eating, Mike continued. “I’d like to focus on another group for a minute. The End Times Church believed that Jesus, God, and Satan should be equally recognized. One does not exist without the other. In time, members began to focus on certain aspects of the religion; some were devoted followers of Jesus, others concentrated on Satan. The hub that connected them was that they believed in the literal prophecy of Armageddon as prophesized in the Book of Revelations. They also saw themselves as playing key parts in it. It was around 1966 or so that the Satanist sect broke off from the original church in an effort to wholly worship evil and bring about the coming of the Anti-Christ. The Black Cross has been credited with being this splinter group that broke away from the End Times Church. There’s no real hard evidence the Black Cross exists now. Through the research Frank and I conducted, we’ve come to learn that the Black Cross was merely a front group for an older organization.”

“The Children of the Night,” Vince said.

“Yes,” Mike said. “The Children of the Night had infiltrated the End Times Church early on. By the time they initiated the break, their goals were more solid thanks to their leader, a middle-aged wealthy business tycoon named Samuel F. Garrison. They didn’t just see themselves as overthrowing Christianity, they now saw themselves as going into battle with God, who they perceived as being not only weak, but also a blind idiot god who was indifferent to his creations. Their goal was to play a key part in the Battle of Armageddon.”

“You mean as in, actually participating?” Vince asked between slices of pizza.

“Yes,” Mike was eating slowly too, and he chased a mouthful down with a swallow of iced tea. “Their goal became clear: the total destruction of the Christian Church and the return of Satan to his rightful domain: earth.”

There was silence for a moment as Vince digested this bit of information. He ate his pizza, mulling it over. Frank didn’t say anything, concentrating more on the food in front of him. After awhile, Vince voiced a question. “Where do Frank and I come in?”

Mike traded a glance with Frank, and Vince thought he caught a faint sign of wariness there. As if an unspoken message passed between them. Do we tell him everything? No, I don’t think so. Vince was about to open his mouth to say something but decided against it.

“We don’t know where you and Frank come in,” Mike said. “That’s what we’re trying to find out now.”

“What happened to Frank’s sibling?” Vince said, already having a feeling what the answer to that would be but wanting to hear it aloud.

Mike glanced at Frank again, who didn’t return his gaze. Frank kept eating, concentrating on his food. Mike leaned close to Vince and whispered: “This is still hard for Frank to deal with, so I’m going to whisper it in your ear. Okay?”

Vince nodded, the dread blossoming in his stomach.

Mike leaned closer to Vince.

Frank didn’t look up from his plate as he ate. His features were stony.

Mike began to tell him.

Vince stopped chewing. He listened to the atrocity. The initiation. The offering ending in sacrifice.

Three-year old Frank being present as his newborn sister was ritualistically murdered on a dragon-shaped altar in a large, dark room. Looking through the eyes of three-year-old Frank Black as the cultists swarmed over the body and tore it apart in an orgy of death.

Vince felt a black wall loom before him. He closed his eyes, squeezing out the pain he felt. When he opened them Mike was back at his spot at the table, pouring himself another glass of iced tea. Frank was still eating, head down, not looking up. Vince stole a quick glance and saw now why Frank had built up such a strong layer of armor around him. His shell was thickened by what he’d seen and experienced as a toddler. Not to mention what he’d went through after he got out of his family situation.

Vince turned to the slice of pizza sitting on his plate. He picked it up and bit into it, chewing slowly, savoring the taste. He felt like the inside of his skull and innards had been carved out.

They ate in silence for a while. As he ate all he could think about were the atrocities that had been described to him. Human sacrifices, satanic rituals, all in the form of black-cloaked adults grouped around an altar in a candle-lit room, chanting softly, their voices rising reverently. The fact that such people would believe such bullshit and follow it was one thing; Vince had always held a low opinion of religion in all its forms, probably because of his own strict religious upbringing. He’d become an atheist early in life, based on his own intellect and reasoning. He found the Christian God just as unbelievable as the Muslim God Allah, the Jewish Yahweh, the Hindu God of Life, and the various sects he’d heard about through word-of-mouth, the occasional television show or the printed word. His knowledge of the occult was minimal. He knew the Christian version of what the occult was supposed to stand for, and who Satan was supposed to be and what his purpose was. As far as educating himself from a layman’s point of view on the Devil, he hadn’t done a very good job of it. Why educate yourself on a segment of Christianity if you felt that Christianity, not to mention all religion, was non-existent, all created by man to fulfill some Jungian need for spiritual belief?

There was one thing that bothered Vince, and that was the extreme nature of the story Frank Black and Mike Peterson just told him. If such an underground organization existed, wouldn’t they have been exposed by now? Surely somebody would have run to the police. Vince wondered why nobody had spilled the beans yet; somebody always talked: mafia hit men, royal family members, mistresses to the stars and high ranking politicians, members of highly organized drug cartels. Somebody always talked and was eventually rewarded richly for their story.

Vince finished his last slice of pizza, reflecting on this. Frank had already finished, wiped his hands on a napkin, and risen to his feet. “Be right back.” He headed out of the booth toward the restrooms.

When he was out of earshot, Mike wiped his mouth with a napkin. “Hearing about what happened to his sister still affects him, even though he only remembers the ritual through his therapy sessions.”

“I can understand why,” Vince said.

“Things got worse later,” Mike said, slipping back into the narrative. “Gladys became deeply ingrained in the cult, and became especially devoted to Samuel Garrison. Frank’s told you about him already, I take it?”

“Yes,” Vince nodded. “The Head Devil.”

“Samuel Garrison comes from pure European stock,” Mike explained. “His father’s family can be traced back to medieval England, his mother’s from Spain, and some of her ancestors settled in Mexico during the Spanish Conquest of Mexico and parts of the Southwestern United States. We have reason to believe his grandmother became involved with a group of devil worshippers in the Yucatan valley as a teenager. When Sam took control and resurrected The Children of the Night in 1966, the nicknames just became attributed to him.” Mike took a sip of his iced tea. “Gladys became a sort of sex slave to Sam,” Mike continued, speaking slowly and softly. “Frank was very well taken care of during these years, I might add. Sam took care to make sure all the children were taken care of.” He eyed Vince. “I don’t know why Sam insisted the children be well taken care of, but one thing we’ve found out is that this wasn’t happening in Frank’s household.” He shot a questioning glance at Vince. “Do you remember your folks ever mistreating you?”

Vince shook his head. “No. Not at all. Except for my dad yelling at my mom and me in the last year we were in California and throwing things around…nothing out of the ordinary.” Vince shrugged. “I just always chalked that up to whatever stress he might have been going through. A young guy with a wife and a kid and a demanding career. You know?”

Mike nodded. “To make a long story short, Frank attended rituals between the ages of three and five, rituals he remembers you being in attendance at as well. Frank stayed with the group until Child Services Authorities took him out of the house in 1973. He spent the rest of his youth in various foster homes and his Aunt Diane’s until he left home at sixteen to move to Hollywood. You know the rest.”

“What’s the purpose of your investigation, though?” Vince asked. “You’re connecting all these dots, gathering information…for what? You plan on writing some kind of tell-all book or something?”

“I have a trusted friend,” Mike began. “A lawyer who used to work for my friend John’s law firm. His name is William Grecko. I’ll get to John’s story shortly, because what happened to him factors into everything we’re telling you. Needless to say, Bill knows I’m researching something that is big. I haven’t given him details for his own protection. He has a vast network of connections with law enforcement at various levels; state and federal, including FBI and CIA, as well as prosecutors across the country. We almost have enough to take to him now. Your mother’s murder has changed things.”

“How?”

“It’s added an element in our investigation that requires further work,” Mike answered. “Finding you was important. If we can gather enough circumstantial evidence based on your memories and whatever physical evidence your mother may have preserved, such as old diaries or photos from those years—”

Vince shook his head. “I don’t remember any old photos from our years in California.”

“She might have kept them hidden from you.”

Vince shrugged. “Maybe.” It was possible, but Vince didn’t believe his mother would have held on to mementoes from her so-called “life as a sinner.” “Do you think this friend of yours, this William Grecko, has the connections to launch a formal investigation?”

“He not only has the connections, he can pull the right strings and do it discreetly,” Mike said. “I have confidence that within hours of turning over everything we’ve uncovered to Billy, key members of The Children of the Night will be in federal custody and this case will be blown wide open in the media.”

“You have media connections too?”

“Frank does. We plan to turn the same information over to his contacts at the LA and New York Times, as well as CNN.”

“Before or after you turn it over to Billy?”

“Simultaneously.”

Vince took a sip of his iced tea, looking up as Frank walked back into the realm of conversation and slid back into his seat. He looked better; his face was less flushed, more alert.

Mike looked up at Frank. “Did you two have anything in mind for this evening?”

Vince didn’t know this evening was in the equation. He figured on going home and learning more about his forgotten past from Frank. Mike’s question suddenly put the older man into the equation, too. Vince shrugged. “Actually, I just thought Frank and I were going to hang out at my place. Are you interested in joining us?”

“If I may,” Mike said. “There’s still more you need to know, and I’d like to see for myself just how safe you and Frank are.”

“We’re safe,” Frank said softly.

“I’ll be the judge of that,” Mike said.

FOR THE FIRST time in his life Vince Walters wished he owned a gun.

He lay in the king-sized bed he used to share with Laura, staring at the ceiling. Mike Peterson was sleeping in the guest-room down the hall in the sofa bed; Frank Black was parked downstairs on the sofa. Frank and Mike were armed. That made Vince feel a little better, but he felt naked without a gun himself, even though he’d never fired one in his life.

The three men had gone back to the house and over iced coffee and bagels they’d talked until one in the morning. Most of the talk revolved around the cult and some more personal history on the mysterious disappearance of Jesse Black.

Vince didn’t think Frank would be so privy to hearing about his father’s untimely demise, but the man had apparently heard it a dozen times. He’d also most likely been able to distance himself emotionally from his father, since he’d never known the man while growing up. It would be as if Vince were to ever hear his own natural father had died of cancer.

It had been a nice evening outside, with a breeze cooling down the heat of the day. Despite that, Mike and Frank insisted that all the windows and drapes be closed. Vince had complied and turned on the air conditioner. Then they retreated to the den, which was at the rear of the house. Vince brought the pitcher of iced coffee in the den and set it on the bar counter for refills where they’d spent the rest of the evening talking.

As it turned out there wasn’t much more to the story of Jesse Black. He’d turned up in San Francisco in early 1968 and managed to track Gladys down to a house on Haight and Ashbury where she was living with several cult members. He’d demanded to see his baby, not knowing the newborn girl’s fate. Gladys told him she’d given the child up for adoption and Jesse had flown into a rage. He’d been restrained by several cult members, who’d forced him into a car and driven him to an undisclosed location. Mike believed it was a location in the Santa Cruz Mountains where cult rituals were common, and where the cult maintained a compound. Whatever the destination the result was the same; while Jesse never told Mike what he’d witnessed, it was evident he was exposed to something terrible. He’d fled in a severe mental state, was picked up by the San Francisco police three days later for vagrancy and when he was released, he disappeared.

He’d severed all ties with his family, his friends back in Los Angeles, his job.

He became one of the anonymous space-cases that wandered Golden Gate Park, sleeping in cardboard boxes, muttering to themselves.

Mike and John Llama had grown concerned when they hadn’t heard from their friend in a few weeks, and tried to track Jesse down. His family in El Paso joined in the effort. Then, almost as suddenly as he disappeared, Jesse reappeared in his hometown.

He showed up suddenly at the home of his parents, on El Paso’s east side, disheveled, wearing a dirty pair of jeans, a tattered shirt, a pair of brown oxfords tied together with duct tape, and a tweed jacket. He hadn’t shaved. He hadn’t bathed. The only thing recognizable about him was his eyes, which his mother recognized immediately. Upon seeing the haunted eyes of her son the woman broke down sobbing and embraced the decrepit man standing on her front porch.

His mother’s sister, Mary, came to the house upon receiving a phone call from Vivian, Jesse’s mother. When she saw her nephew in such a despicable state seated at the kitchen table, eating a bowl of Albondigas soup, his mother clutching his arm and weeping, Mary called an ambulance. Jesse was taken to El Paso County General Hospital and placed under psychiatric observation at the request of his parents. He was transferred to a mental hospital in Las Cruces, New Mexico two weeks later where he spent the next four months. The official diagnosis was a complete nervous and mental breakdown.

Jesse’s family tried to find out what happened to Gladys and Frank, but the court system prevented them from doing much regarding gaining custody of the boy. Gladys contacted Vivian and assured her that she and the boy were fine. It was through Vivian that Mike and John first heard about the adoption of Jesse’s daughter. John was able to visit Jesse in El Paso at the hospital and came away concerned, confused and frightened. John later told Mike that looking at Jesse’s face, into those eyes, was like looking into the bottomless pit of a fear born of hell.

Released to the custody of his parents in the middle of 1969, Jesse took work with his brother-in-law, who owned a cleaning service. He wouldn’t talk of the incident that led to his breakdown, and on the advice of Jesse’s psychiatrist the family refrained from asking him. Jesse was supposed to have continued therapy sessions, but he stopped going after a few weeks, and no amount of persuasion could get him to return. While he appeared to improve upon his release from the hospital, enthusiastically smiling and hugging family members, engaging in conversation, he appeared troubled, as if something had been released inside him that held him back emotionally. Mike saw this on a visit to El Paso that summer with his wife and two children. He’d suggested the trip to his wife as an excuse for her to finally meet his extended family, but he really wanted to pay Jesse a visit. What he’d seen was shocking.

“He just wasn’t the same man,” he told Vince as the three men sat in the den that evening. “He appeared to be the same, he talked the same, we had the same conversations we always had. But there was something missing. Something….some part of his personality that was dead.”

If Jesse showed signs of improvement, those signs were dashed in December of 1969 with the arrest of Charles Manson and “The Family.” Diane later told Mike that Jesse was seated at her kitchen table when it happened. Her husband Carlos had passed the El Paso Times to him nonchalantly as he always did, and Jesse took one look at the front page, Manson’s long-haired, demonic figure grinning evilly at the camera, and he’d lost it right there. He began shaking, the newspaper crumpling in his hands as he gazed down at the story. Diane had asked, “What’s wrong? Are you okay?” Jesse hadn’t replied. He put the paper down and stared out the window into space. His eyes had gained that faraway look of catatonia again.

Carlos had noticed the sudden change and at the time didn’t pay much attention to what could have caused it. Diane rang Jesse’s psychiatrist. Before she could get him on the phone, Jesse rose from his chair and skirted out the side door. Leaving again.

This time for good.

John Llama and Mike Peterson did all they could to search for their friend, but to no avail. They put out missing-person bulletins, scanned newspapers, put out the word of Jesse Black’s disappearance with flyers with his picture on it. None of it helped. The years went by. In 1980 John Llama, who was now the senior partner in the law firm, started up the investigation again. With a wealth of investigators at his fingertips in his law office, he felt he had the resources to make this effort more professional and not the half-hearted attempt he and Mike had tried previously. In the decade that passed they’d kept in touch with Jesse’s family, hoping to gain some kind of insight to their friend’s disappearance and final years in Los Angeles. The closest they’d come was some of the investigations Diane and Carlos had launched in the years following Jesse’s final disappearance. “Gladys was involved with some dangerous people in California,” she told Mike at one time. “People who were involved in a huge underground crime cartel. I don’t know what kind of activities they were involved in, but it was huge. And dangerous. I think Jesse found out about it and they did something to him.”

Diane and Carlos did some minor poking around on their own, contracting the help of a business acquaintance of Carlos’s who was a private investigator. The investigator worked for them for about six months in 1976 and came back one night in December of that year breathless. “You have to take me off this case,” he’d said after they let him in their home upon his return from California.

Why? they’d asked, alarmed.

The investigator laid it all out. While he couldn’t gain solid proof for this theory, he was fairly confident that the people Gladys was involved with were members of a dangerous satanic cult. At least that’s what he learned from the people that would talk to him about it. He’d talked to police officers, detectives, people in the Haight Ashbury district, and while he hadn’t talked to anybody directly tied to Gladys herself, the people he interviewed told him the same thing. A large satanic cult was in operation, had spread nationwide and had members in various parts of the world. The private investigator showed Gladys’s photo to a few of the people he’d interviewed, and the ones that recognized her admitted that the company she kept was cult related. She might even be a member of the group herself. When the investigator tried to learn more about the cult, everybody clammed up. Nobody would talk to him about it. You don’t understand, they all said. These people are bad. They know all, they see all. They have heavily infiltrated modern society and they are everywhere. Especially here. If I tell you anything more about them they might find out and I don’t want to even think what might become of me.

The police hadn’t been much help either, neither denying rumors of a cult nor confirming one. Despite vague rumors of a cult compound in the Santa Cruz Mountains, the investigator wasn’t able to learn much else. He was just about to launch into phase two of his investigation when he woke up one morning to the sound of a knock on his hotel room door. Upon opening it, he’d found a gift-wrapped box in front of the door. Curious, he’d brought the box in and carefully opened it.

Carefully wrapped in tissue paper was a severed human finger. Along with a single note, written in a blocky script on a tattered piece of notebook paper. Cease your investigation, was all it said. The investigator heeded the warning and took the first flight out of Los Angeles back to Texas.

This troubled Diane and Carlos. They’d been in the process of trying to gain custody of Frank, who’d just been released to his parents after the criminal charges against them were mysteriously dropped. Now with the new information that Ray Allman—their private investigator friend—had learned, they were prepared to use it against the couple. But before they could get started, two things happened.

In early January of 1977, two men in ski masks forced their way into the house. Carlos was at work, the kids at school. Diane and the maid were at home, tending to chores when the gunmen broke in. They herded the cowering women into the bathroom and locked them in, telling them that if they didn’t shut the fuck up they would be shot in the fucking head. Diane had quickly quieted Maria down, and the two women sat in the bathroom clutching each other fearfully as the sound of footsteps traveled through the house. The men seemed to know exactly where they were going, for there were no sounds of ransacking as would have been prevalent in most home burglaries. Five minutes later they heard the front door open and close, and then the sound of receding footsteps. The women sat in the bathroom for another forty-five minutes before Diane tried opening the door, which was locked from the outside. It took the women another fifteen minutes to break the lock on the bathroom door and, once they were out, Diane headed for the phone in the master bedroom and called the police.

The only thing that was stolen was twenty-five thousand dollars in cash that Carlos had stashed in a metal box, stored on the upper shelf in the closet. The men had taken the box with them. Nothing else in the house was touched or stolen.

The police questioned them extensively. Were they certain that nobody but Carlos and Diane knew about the money? Had they mentioned the whereabouts of the cash to anybody outside of the family? The answers were no. The police checked out Carlos, thinking he might have hired one of his workers to steal the money for some illicit purpose, but could find nothing to support this theory. The night after the robbery, Diane had turned to her husband in the darkness of their bedroom. “This was a warning, Carlos.”

“A warning?”

“A warning from that…devil group of Gladys’ in California. I can feel it in my bones. Somehow they found out we hired Ray to do that investigating. Gladys must be angry at us for trying to get Frank out of that house.”

“But that’s ridiculous, honey,” Carlos had said in a whispered voice. “How would they know we even had this cash in our house? And how would they have known its location?”

Diane had shuddered. “They knew. The devil told them where it was. How else could those men have gone right to where we kept the money?” And then she’d crossed herself and mumbled a prayer of protection.

Two weeks later they got a call from California. It was Gladys. She told Diane that she and Tom had talked things over and that she was sending Frank to El Paso to live with her and Carlos. She felt it would be better for the boy to have a change of place. Diane didn’t mention the breakin to her former sister-in-law; she merely mumbled thank you and two days later they picked up Frank at the El Paso International Airport.

When John Llama started his investigation, he started where Diane and Carlos had left off. He obtained the files Ray Allman had left with them (securely locked in a safe deposit box at a bank), and started verifying what Ray found. For the first year John didn’t learn much, except that the group called itself The Children of the Night. He learned they were involved in a lot of criminal activity: child pornography and regular run-of-the-mill porn, drugs, white slavery, weapons smuggling, and prostitution. They also had several legitimate business interests, and it was this route that John chose to take. For the first year of investigating he grew frustrated at always hitting dead ends; the cult members went by so many aliases and code names it was hard to tell one from the other. Another thing that hindered his progress was, despite the evidence the group was nationwide, possibly worldwide, there was no evidence to support the theory. It appeared that the group went by different names in different parts of the U.S., with a group in New York meeting as “The Children” and a group in Alabama meeting as “The Children of the Night.” John pressed on, uncovering information about The Children of the Night, eventually making the connection that it was this name that the group was most commonly known by.

During the time John was conducting his investigation, Mike was only fleetingly aware of it. John would call him from time to time to discuss details. He told Mike he was being extremely careful; he’d lifted all of the preliminary duties from his assistants at the office, taking the case on himself. He didn’t trust anybody with any of it. He was also being careful to destroy whatever notes he had and stored other items in a safe deposit box. He gave Mike a key and made him memorize the box number and what bank it was at. Mike was concerned and wanted to help his friend, but he didn’t want to let his wife, Carol, in on it. She would be petrified and would forbid Mike to even lend a hand. So he sat idly by on the sidelines while John did all of the work.

In the end they got to John so swiftly that even Mike was surprised at their skill and deftness. To this day, he still didn’t know how they found out. Maybe the group found out who John was and brought him into the fold secretly, setting up people to meet him at business functions, passing themselves off as businessmen or lawyers John might have met at some meeting or party. Mike recalled John telling him about a few social mixers he’d attended in his off time; he’d surely been attending a lot of them since his divorce from Connie, and Mike was afraid John would start drinking again (he’d developed a drinking problem in college that lasted through the early years of his law career). But John seemed to be doing fine and Mike didn’t press it.

Mike remembered the day in the Spring of 1982—it must have been mid April, or so—when John called him at three a.m. Mike had picked up the phone by his side of the bed, irritated at being woken up at this hour, and at first John’s slurred voice was unrecognizable. “John?”

“It’s me, Mike,” John had said. Mike could tell right away that John had fallen off the wagon. It had been three months since they’d spoken, and John had been doing fine then. Suddenly concerned, he started to ask John if he was okay when John cut him off. “There’s no way we can find out anything else about Jesse, Mike. Better chalk him up as being dead. Dead and gone. No way.”

“John what are you talking about?” Rising fear wormed its way into Mike’s gut.

“They’re everywhere, Mike.” John paused and Mike could hear the tilt of a bottle on the other end of the line. “They’re fucking everywhere.”

Dread filled Mike. He had the sick feeling he knew what John was talking about.

“I don’t know how they found me. I went to a party with an associate of mine, guy who’s president of a big firm downtown. It was supposed to be at the home of an investment banker. I was interested in offshore investing. Paul really sold me on it and he promised me this guy knew what he was talking about.”

“Who’s Paul?” Mike had asked gently. He’d picked up the phone and moved out of the bedroom and into the hall where he wouldn’t disturb Carol, who moaned once and turned over in her sleep.

“Guy I met at a seminar a few months ago.” John seemed to struggle with the memory. “Nice guy…or at least I thought so until Tuesday.”

“What happened, John?”

Another hit off the bottle. “Guy’s one of them,” he slurred. “Fucking devil worshipper.”

Mike felt himself go numb with fright.

“Got to the house for the party,” John said, slurring his words bad now. “Everything was cool for awhile. It was a biiigg house. Fuckin’ mansion in Bel Air. Beautiful. There was this little babe that was so hot for me…ya shoulda seen her, Mikey…fucking tits to die for, a body that wouldn’t quit—”

“I’m listening, John,” Mike had said calmly, trying to quell the beating of his heart. “Tell me what happened.”

There was a pause for a moment, as if John was trying to muster the courage to tell him what happened. He started slowly. “I don’t remember her name. I think it was Susie. She offered me a drink. I thought ‘why not,’ and she went to the bar and brought me one. It tasted okay. But after awhile I started feeling funny. She started flirting with me…little cock teaser. Then I started getting dizzy. I reached out and grabbed her shoulder to support myself ’cause I felt the room spinning. I dropped the drink and then there was a hand on my shoulder helping me up. I remember being led out of the room and a voice…a real big voice, almost hollow sounding, saying something like ‘we’ll begin once it’s taken full effect.’ ” He paused again. “It was then that I realized I’d been drugged.”

Mike didn’t say anything. He listened with sinking dread as John continued.

“The next thing I know I woke up in a big room.” For a moment the slurriness of his speech was gone as John struggled with the memory. “I was naked, laid out in the middle of the room. It was lit by candles. Dozens of them. There were people in the room, still dressed in their suits and dresses. Paul was standing in front of me, looking down with a scary look. I swear to you, Mike, that man had murder in his eyes. And something more than murder. Evil. Corruption. They all did. I tried to sit up, but I felt the room spin. I tried to fight the dizziness and felt myself getting sick. Then I threw up all over the floor. And they laughed.”

The rest of it had been a blur for John. He didn’t remember much and still didn’t realize what had happened to him, or if any of it was simply a figment of his imagination. He thought he was tortured, that hot spikes were being burned into his flesh; he recalled figures standing above him and jabbing long sharp objects into his body as he writhed and screamed on the ground in excruciating pain. He thought at one time he awoke over a steaming pit of filth, his face held over a cauldron of human excretions. He felt a hand grip the back of his head firmly and push him into the steaming mess, feeling the texture of the warm wetness; lumpy, damp, mixing the stink of piss, vomit and shit. He felt it ooze into his nostrils and throat and he gagged. His stomach churned and he threw up again, the warm steaming mess joining the mixture in the bowl and he was forced to lap at it until he threw up again, he kept throwing up until his stomach muscles convulsed, wrenching his guts dry. He’d dropped to the floor in exhaustion, breathing heavily, and then he felt the searing pain as the red hot lances stabbed into his flesh again.

This continued for a long time. How long, John didn’t know. At one point, he woke up to see the group of people stripped naked, hovering over a lone nude figure on the floor. The figure was a female and very dead. Her chest had been cut open and the woman that had been flirting with him reached into the corpse’s chest and pulled out her heart. She took a bite out of it and then John felt strong hands grip his arms and herd him over to the body. He was pushed toward the corpse, a hand clutching a bloody hunk of meat was thrust in his face and before he passed out again he saw one of the men, his erection hard and sticking up stiffly, move the corpse’s buttocks up into position for penetration.

The next thing he remembered was being thrown out of a moving car. He hit the pavement hard and rolled toward the curb, covering his head with his arms. When he came to rest he scrambled to his feet. The car he was thrown from was already receding in the distance and he looked around. His clothes were on; his tie unknotted and hanging limply from his neck, shirt unbuttoned, his suit coat rumpled and dirty. He was in a ritzy neighborhood, probably somewhere near Bel Air where the party was held. For a moment he didn’t remember what he was doing there, but then suddenly the memory came screaming at him. He yelled and began running down the moonlit, quiet street.

The Beverly Hills police picked him up that night for disturbing the peace. But when he blurted his story out to them, they chuckled in disbelief. “There’s nothing wrong with you except you’re drunk as shit,” one of the cops told him. They’d put him in the drunk tank and he made bail the next day, called for a cab and came straight home. He tried calling the man he met at the social mixer, Paul.

It was answered on the third ring by a woman who spoke Spanish. John had hung up, redialed the number, and got the same woman. “Who is this?” she demanded, this time switching to English effortlessly.

With a shaking voice, John asked her: “Is this 965-3948?” He’d read the number carefully from the business card Paul had given him.

“Yes?” Deep suspicion in the woman’s voice.

John sighed. He’d dialed the right number. “I’d like to speak to Paul, please.”

“There’s nobody here named Paul.”

“But…” John had fumbled for the card again, verifying the number. “I called this number just yesterday and spoke to him. I’ve been calling this number for the past three months and have reached him here!”

“I’ve had this phone number for ten years,” the woman said, clearly in no mood for John. “You sound drunk.” She’d hung up on him.

John hadn’t been drunk, but getting there proved to be no problem. He’d driven to the liquor store and stocked up. He’d spent the next two days drinking. Then he called Mike.

Mike didn’t know what to make of John’s story. John swore by it, and when Mike stopped by John’s house the next morning he calmly asked him to take off his shirt. John glowered at Mike with red-rimmed eyes. “You don’t believe me.”

“I believe you,” Mike said. “I just want to see how badly hurt you are.”

John seemed to brood, as if he were ashamed of something. Then he muttered “oh hell,” and took off his shirt. “There’s nothing, see? I looked at myself the minute I got home. I don’t have any bruises, any wounds from what they did to me.”

He was right. John’s pudgy flesh was unmarked by bruises and didn’t bear the faintest hint of trauma except for a few scrapes that could have been caused from his tumbling from the car. In fact, the wounds that exhibited this were the only ones that matched John’s story.

“So there was nothing physical to support John’s story?” Vince asked mid-way through the narrative.

“None at all,” Mike said. He poured himself a second cup of iced coffee and took a sip. “I tried to take him back to the spot where he said the party was held, but he couldn’t even remember what house it was at. We ended up driving around in circles through Beverly Hills and Bel Air.”

“So what happened?” Vince asked.

What happened was John went downhill. He stopped his investigation. He told Mike that if he wanted to tackle it that he was more than welcome to. But as far as he was concerned, he was out of it. He gave Mike all his notes and the master key to the safe deposit box and turned his attention to drinking. He married again, meeting his second wife at a bar in Huntington Beach, and got divorced again two years later. By this time his business was gone, taken over by one of the lesser partners who took the reins when John began to devote more time to the bottle. John didn’t care. He took a job as a lawyer with another firm and tried to control his drinking. He sold his share in his former law office to his successor, not wanting to waste the time or drinking energy it would take to go to court. For the next ten years he made a meager living practicing law and drinking. He retired in 1994 and died in 1996 from liver failure.

“That’s when I decided to get into it,” Mike said. Frank remained sitting in the easy chair, sipping his iced coffee and listening to the story, not offering comments. “I made the decision at John’s funeral as a promise to him and Jesse. I told them I would find out who was behind this complete destruction of two beautiful lives.” He looked at Frank briefly, as if seeing his old friend Jesse in the younger man’s face, and then turned back to Vince. “I still keep in contact with Diane. In the years since her…warning, I guess you’d call it, she’s become increasingly religious. Jesse and Diane came from a Catholic Family, and Diane really got into her faith more and more. She’s pretty much a complete religious nut now. A real loony.”

Like my mother, Vince thought.

“Not too long after John had his little incident, Diane got word from the Miami Police Department that Jesse had been found dead. He’d drank himself to death and was found in an alley in a bad section of town. He was identified through fingerprints, which turned up the arrest in San Francisco, along with a host of others through the years, mostly for vagrancy and public drunkenness. The body was shipped back to El Paso, and Diane said that when she and her sister Arlene viewed it they barely recognized him. He…” Mike licked his lips. “He’d really let himself go, to say the least.”

Vince nodded, visualizing what over fifteen years of continuous drinking and living on the streets would do to a man’s physical appearance. Not to mention what the mental breakdown could do as well.

Mike started his own investigation a year after John’s death. He did it discreetly. Retired from teaching and living quietly with Carol in Huntington Beach, California, the kids all out of the house and starting families and careers of their own, Mike first indulged in the pleasures of retired life. Waking up leisurely, catching up on his reading, traveling with Carol, visiting the kids. After a few months he began reading books on the occult and true crime. Carol didn’t object to the reading material at all—she was an avid Stephen King and Dean Koontz fan herself. Mike didn’t tell her his reasons for delving into such subject matter. As much as he loved his wife, he didn’t want to scare her. If she knew the truth, she would be mortified with fear.

Carol already knew some of the details. She couldn’t help but hear some of it when Jesse originally disappeared. Mike shielded her from the grisly aspects of it and told her that Gladys had left Jesse and taken their son Frank up to San Francisco. Jesse had started drinking and…she bought it. Hook, line and sinker. From then on, Carol simply assumed Jesse had turned into a deadbeat dad.

The first thing Mike did was to set up another identity. He found a book in an odd little bookstore in Hollywood called How to Disappear Successfully. This book gave detailed tips on dropping completely out of sight and avoiding creditors, former employers, friends, families, lovers. It also gave detailed information on how to hide from the IRS and the government, which was what Mike was especially interested in. If The Children of the Night were as sophisticated as he thought, they most likely had an intelligence system that ranked with the FBI’s. Mike read the book, and over the next six months he began setting up a second identity.

It was fairly easy. He set up a mailbox at Mail Boxes Etc. Then he answered an ad in the back of a magazine that promised authentic-looking state issued identification cards. The book suggested going through one of these services rather than a street hustler. Mike sent the firm his information and a photograph he had taken at a photo booth along with the requested fee. A month later he received a very authentic looking California Driver’s License identifying himself as David J. Connelly. Using the Connelly name, he was able to get a Social Security number from the Social Security Office, being careful to bring another set of documents that he had another outfit prepare for him certifying that he was a victim of amnesia. With no recollection of his full name or previous life, he needed to start over. Social Security provided him with a new number and he was on his way.

The next thing he did was to rent a small office in Huntington Beach. He bought an old desk and chair from a goodwill store and installed a phone in the building. And it was from this little office that he conducted all of his investigations into the group known as The Children of the Night.

“I also picked up a pretty nice tracking device that attaches to your phone line,” he explained. This tracking device alerted you if your phone was being tapped, or if the line was being traced. He also bought a computer and had a second line hooked up for a modem. He began doing his research on-line and by making phone calls when necessary.

“I found out a lot that first year,” he said. “I found out where Gladys and Tom live. I scoped the placed out myself. I obtained background information on them, found out that they’re living very legitimate, respectable lives on the outside. Tom is CEO of Metropolitan Inc., a large offshore company. Gladys is an executive at Digitalis, a computer hardware firm in Newport Beach. They live in Newport Beach in a gated community, Tom drives a Mercedes, and she drives a BMW. The perfect picture of a nice life, right?”

Vince nodded.

Mike found out everything about the companies they worked at. How many employees worked there, how long the companies had been in existence, their ranking in their respective industry, who the stockholders were. From there, Mike began investigating the corporate angle, keeping an eye peeled out for anything about the respective companies in the trade journals. As far as the information John had found, it didn’t help him much. The most John had been able to get on that was that somebody in the organization was very high up with a firm called Corporate Financial. Using that information, Mike researched Corporate Financial.

Because Mike wanted to assume as normal a profile to his wife as possible, he was only able to devote a few hours a week to his research. When he left the house for his office, he told Carol he was going to the library or the mall. He paid the rent and utilities from a checking account he opened under the David Connelly name. All bills came to the mailbox he had set up for David Connelly.

“Diane called me at the end of ’97 out of the blue, told me about Frank and where he was living,” Mike said. “I made a note of it, but didn’t contact him immediately.” He glanced at Frank and grinned. “He’s still a little pissed about me for this.”

“He thought I was like my fucking psycho bitch mother,” Frank said.

Vince couldn’t help but chuckle. Another thing he had in common with Frank; not only did they grow up together, they both hated their mothers.

“I didn’t want to take chances, that’s for sure,” Mike said. He took a sip of iced coffee and launched into the rest of it. His investigation of Corporate Financial led to a man on the board of directors who also sat on the board of a major computer firm as well as several other firms. He got the man’s name, ran it through the computer, and the background that spit out was promising indeed. It seemed to link a billionaire businessman named Samuel F. Garrison with the shadowy figure said to be the leader of The Children of the Night. Their backgrounds were similar. A trip to the library and an afternoon rifling through business journals yielded a few photographs of Mr. Garrison. When Mike finally did contact Frank and showed him the picture of Sam Garrison, Frank’s face had turned white.

“I checked Frank out before I contacted him,” Mike finished the long narrative. “I made double sure he wasn’t involved and it turned out he was having the dreams we spoke of earlier. He’d already started his own investigation, and with my help we tracked you down at his suggestion.”

“It was also around this time that a woman claiming to be my father’s wife contacted my aunt Diane,” Frank said from his spot on the easy chair. He sat up from his slouched position, leaning forward. “She claims she was married to my father in Miami, that they were alcoholics who spent a lot of time on the streets. She’d sobered up, found God, and tracked my aunt down. She told Diane that my dad had witnessed something…pretty bad in California back in the sixties. Even she never learned what it was. The most he ever told her was that he’d seen the Devil himself do vile things to infants, to women and children. She was very vague, but apparently felt compelled by my father’s story to believe it. She contacted Diane because she wanted to…offer belated condolences of his death, I suppose.” He chortled. “She said that whatever it was my dad had experienced in California, that’s what drove him to drink, what drove him out of his mind. She wanted to know what it was.”

Vince paused. “Your aunt didn’t tell her?”

“No,” Frank said. “She gave the woman some excuse. Told her dad had a history of mental illness, that she should put whatever it was my father told her out of her mind. To forget it.” He sighed. “The problem is, how can anybody put something so terrible out of their mind?”

Which was something Vince was trying to do now as he lay in bed, staring at the ceiling. It was a warm night and even with the air conditioning on he still felt warm. Every time he closed his eyes, all he could think about was what Frank and Mike had told him. His mother involved in a satanic cult; human sacrifices, ritual murder, a secret organization with stealth, cunning, and predatory skill. Vince closed his eyes and tried to sleep, but those images kept pushing at the forefront of his mind, like waves breaking on the shore of a rocky beach.

Indeed, how do you wipe something so terrible out of your mind?

Somehow, Vince wound up doing just that. He wasn’t sure when, but at some point in the night, he fell asleep.

Chapter Eleven

MIKE PETERSON PROVED to be an exquisite cook. He prepared Denver omelets the next morning as Frank sat at the dining room table hunched over a cup of coffee and Vince perched on the sofa making his morning calls. They’d had a great talk last night and he’d learned a lot about what was happening. He still didn’t understand where he fit into all this—and indeed, Mike and Frank were still trying to figure out why this shadowy organization would want to kill him—but now he wanted to help them get to the bottom of this. But first he had to tie up some last minute business deals, then he had to call Brian Saunders to tell him he had to take a few weeks of vacation time. He was still formulating in his mind how he was going to broach this to his friend when Mike called out to him. “Breakfast’s ready. Dig in, boys.”

Vince put the phone down and headed to the dining room. He was hungry. The pizza they’d had yesterday afternoon was a distant memory as he sat down and began eating. The three men sat in silence for a moment, digging in to their morning meal. Frank broke the silence after draining his coffee. He rose to pour a refill. “So what’s the plan?”

“We tie up our loose ends here,” Mike said, chewing thoughtfully. “And we take the next available flight to Pennsylvania. I’m pretty sure we can arrange to be out there by this afternoon or evening at the latest.”

Frank raised an eyebrow as he rejoined them at the table, a fresh mug of coffee in hand. “I don’t know if I have that kind of money to spring for a last minute plane ticket back east.”

“I’ll pick up the tab,” Mike said. “Don’t worry about it.”

“What do we do once we get back there?” Vince asked. He poured himself a glass of orange juice from the carafe sitting on the table.

“We get in contact with your mother’s minister, Reverend Powell,” Mike said as he ate. “In fact, we should probably give him a call to tell him we’re coming.”

“Maybe we can stay with him,” Vince said.

“That’s out of the question,” Mike said, wiping his mouth with a napkin. “I’d rather we stay in a motel and remain anonymous. If they’re watching Reverend Powell and they see us, we could be in for some trouble. And there’s still the possibility they’re following you anyway. You’re going to have to disappear for awhile.”

“How am I going to do that?”

“We’ll find a way,” Mike said, digging into his food. “We’ll have to do something cheap, probably head into Philly to get the right fake ID, but we can manage.”

“If they’re watching Reverend Powell how are we going to pay him a visit?” Frank asked, finally digging in to his breakfast.

“We’ll think of a way to hook up,” Mike said.

“Why visit Reverend Powell anyway?” Vince asked.

“To find out if he found the material your mother hid. If he has, we gain access to it. If she has the smoking gun, we turn it over to my friend William Grecko and he does the rest.”

“And if he hasn’t found it?”

“We help him look for it.”

When breakfast was finished, Vince gathered up the dishes and deposited them in the dishwasher. Mike nodded to Frank. “You’re packed, right?”

“Got most of my stuff in the car. Got the rest in the living room.”

“Good. Why don’t you hang here for an hour or so while I head to my office and try to get us some flights? Then I’ve got to dash home quick and tell Carol I’ll be gone for a while. I’ve already given her the hint that I might be going out of town on a consulting job, so hopefully I won’t upset her too much. I think she’s starting to suspect something’s up.”

“I’ve got some more calls to make myself,” Vince said, joining the men in the living room. “What time do we want to meet back here?”

“I’ll call you from my office,” Mike said. “I’m going to assume you’re okay to leave this afternoon, okay Vince?”

“Fine.”

“Let’s plan on meeting back here at two. I’ll try to get us flights out of John Wayne Airport.”

That sounded fine to Frank. Vince voiced the concern that maybe they should fly out of another airport; wouldn’t whoever had tried to kill him be watching John Wayne Airport? “You’re right,” Mike said. “I’ll try LAX instead. It’s bigger, more security. We’ll meet here and drive up there together. Frank, when we get to the airport, we’ll pack our firearms in a single suitcase. I have paperwork for both of them. We’ll have to declare them at baggage.”

“Of course,” Frank said. “I know the drill.”

That was a much better plan of action to Vince. After Mike Peterson left, Vince nodded to Frank. “Make yourself at home. I’m going to take a quick shower and make some phone calls. You can use the shower downstairs if you want to freshen up.”

“Thanks.” Frank picked up his duffel bag and headed toward the bathroom.

Vince headed upstairs to his bedroom. He closed the door and picked up the phone, still dreading the call and wondering how he was going to broach the subject. Mike and Frank had been pretty adamant last night when they made the decision that they weren’t to say a word to anybody what they were doing. They’d told Vince to let his people at the office know that he simply had to take more time off to deal with his mother’s affairs. They didn’t need to know anything else. Vince agreed, but even last night he was dreading the calls he would have to make. Brian would be curious and would want to know what was going on—hell, the man was his best friend and he would know something was up. Likewise, Tracy would want to know what was happening. They’d made plans to spend the upcoming weekend together at her place, and she would be shocked to hear that Vince was suddenly breaking those plans to jet back to Pennsylvania to deal with his mother’s affairs.

Might as well get to it, he thought as he dialed Brian’s number.

The line on Brian’s end rang three times then went into voice mail. Vince relaxed. Now he wouldn’t be faced with actually talking to Brian himself. “Hey, Brian, it’s me,” Vince said, letting his thoughts spill out in his message. “Hey, listen, I’m going to have to take some more time off. I can’t really explain it to you now, but…um…some things have come up regarding my mother and her estate and everything, and they have to be dealt with now. So…um, I’m hoping you can cover for me and explain things to Jim for me when he gets back from vacation. I’m probably leaving this afternoon for Philly and don’t really know when I’ll be back. I’m guessing right now that I’ll need two weeks. Plus, considering what happened Sunday at the airport, it might be a good idea for me to get out of town for a while. If this looks like it’s going to drag on for longer, I’ll call back within the week. I’ll let Glenda know what’s going on too, so she can head Jim off at the pass.” Beat. “Um…I guess that’s it. I’ll be here till two I guess if you want to call me. See ya.” He hit the hang-up button, released it to get an open line, then dialed Glenda’s number and gave her a similar message on her voice mail. When he was finished he hung up and sat on the bed for a moment, finger still pressed on the hang-up button, debating on what to tell Tracy.

You’ve got to tell her, he thought, as he flipped through his phone book for her number. Might as well catch her at the office. At this time, she’s probably already in the office and taking calls. Besides, wouldn’t it be nice to hear her voice before you leave?

Yes, it would. He smiled, relaxing a little as he started dialing her number.

There was a knock on his bedroom door and then it opened. Frank stood in the hall, peering in at him questioning. “You need towels? They’re in the linen closet right at the head of the stairs.”

“Who you calling?”

“My girlfriend.”

“Uh uh.” Frank shook his head and walked in the bedroom as if he owned the place. He looked displeased. He reached out and took the receiver from Vince’s hand. “Sorry, buddy. No calls to girlfriends.”

Vince looked up at Mark, flabbergasted. “I thought you guys were a trifle paranoid, but I didn’t realize that—”

“Yeah, we’re paranoid all right.” Frank set the receiver down on the cradle. “And until this thing is over, we’re playing it safe.”

“But…shouldn’t Tracy know what’s going on? I mean, she was there when that guy tried to kill me! She could’ve been shot herself!”

“I know, but we gotta play by the rules,” Frank said. “The less she knows, the better.”

For a minute Vince didn’t think he would be able to speak. Finally he sputtered, “Doesn’t she know enough after what happened? All I’m going to do is tell her I’m leaving town for the weekend. Why keep anything further from her? “

“For the reasons I told you yesterday, and what Mike and I told you last night at dinner.” Frank sighed wearily. “Look, Vince, I don’t like playing the crazy conspiracy theorist. I really don’t. But until this thing is over, we need to keep a close knit on this thing. You don’t want to endanger Tracy further, do you?”

“No.” Vince saw Frank’s logic, but he still didn’t understand the paranoia. If Tracy wasn’t one of them, what was the harm in telling her he wasn’t going to be able to see her this weekend? He voiced this to Frank. “We already made plans,” he said.

Frank appeared to struggle with this, and then relented. “All right,” he said. “But quickly. Tell her your flight is leaving in an hour and you have to head to the airport.”

Vince picked up the phone and started dialing Tracy’s work number again, wondering if Frank was going to give him privacy. Frank stood beside him, waiting. Vince listened to the phone ring on Tracy’s end, trying not to let his displeasure toward Frank’s eavesdropping show.

“Tracy Harris.”

“Tracy, it’s Vince.”

“Vince!” Her voice brightened instantly and Vince’s heart warmed at the sound of it. Yes, he was definitely beginning to develop feelings for her. “You coming in today?”

“No, I’m not,” he said, feeling the pressure of Frank standing over him, listening to every word that was being said begin to intrude on him. “In fact, I won’t be in for probably the next two weeks. I’m leaving for Philly in about an hour, and I just wanted to let you know. I’m sorry that spoils our weekend, and I’m sorry I can’t explain more, but—” He detected a faint nod of disapproval from Frank and continued on. “—I’ve got more stuff to take care of regarding my mother. I’m sorry.”

Tracy was silent for a moment. Vince could picture her in her cubicle, holding the receiver to her ear, looking stunned at this sudden news. “That’s okay, Vince,” she said. It was evident from her tone of voice that she was shocked at the sudden news. “I know you…have to get through all that’s happened with your mother and…what happened Sunday, but… I just…wish you would have told me sooner.”

“I wish I did, too,” Vince said. “But then all this has happened so suddenly.” He detected movement out of the corner of his eye and looked up at Frank, who was making a slashing motion across his throat. Time to cut this conversation off now. Vince nodded. “I’m sorry about the suddenness of all this and I promise to make it up to you. I’ll call you when I get back, okay?”

“Okay.” Her voice still sounded surprised; he didn’t know her well enough yet to detect whether there was a trace of hurt feelings, but he supposed that under the circumstances there was. “When will you call me?”

“As soon as I can,” Vince said, and now Frank was making the cut-off gestures more frantically now. “I gotta go honey, my shuttle is here. I love you.”

“I love you, too,” Tracy said, and then Vince hung up.

He sat on the bed for a moment, still stunned at how sudden and awkward the conversation had been. Frank sighed. “I’m sorry I had to be so abrupt with you, Vince, but I hope you understand.”

“I hope someday I do understand,” Vince said as he stood up and, not looking at Frank, headed to the master bathroom for his shower.

Lititz, Pennsylvania

REVEREND HANK POWELL carried his Colt Python with him everywhere he went now.

Even when he was in the house.

Especially when he was in the house.

If they could only see me now, Reverend Powell thought to himself as he trudged warily down the stairs to his finished basement. While he was dressed in his usual attire—a pair of clean, fresh jeans, a short-sleeved cotton shirt, blue tennis shoes—he hadn’t shaved or showered in three days. His thinning hair was heavy with grease and dandruff. His stubble was thickening, and Hank paused occasionally to scratch his itchy cheeks. Most prominent were his eyes, which were red-rimmed and haunted, dark circles and bags prominent under them. What little sleep Hank Powell had been able to get had been in fits and starts, in two hour snatches.

He always had the Colt within easy reach, even when sleeping. Most of the time he fell asleep with it clutched in his hand.

Reverend Powell’s finished basement had been built into a very comfortable living space. The stairs to the basement led to a comfortable den with a plush sofa and easy chair and a twenty-seven-inch Minolta TV on a polished oak stand. To the right of the den was a separate room that Reverend Powell had converted to a guestroom. Beyond the den was a recreation room flanked by a bar. Three barstools at the bar, and the glass shelving behind it housed an impressive liquor cabinet. An impressive looking pool table took up most of the space in the recreation room, and perched on the far wall was the head and shoulders of a buck he’d taken down ten years ago in Berks County. He headed past the pool table to a door that led to a small storeroom, the only space in the basement that wasn’t completely finished.

He opened the door and turned on the light from the string that hung down from the bare sixty-watt bulb in the ceiling. The room was small, twelve by fifteen feet perhaps, with wood shelving and a concrete floor. Reverend Powell kept what few tools he had and various odds and ends down here; old books, photo albums, things he couldn’t bear to throw away. He stepped further into the room and reached into a shelf space and felt around the bare concrete wall to a spot that was a natural cubby-hole, his groping fingers brushing against what he’d stashed in there three days ago since finding it. Now he brought it out with shaking hands, wondering why he was looking at it again when he knew it was just going to make him more afraid and paranoid.

He found the box the day Vince left for California. He’d headed over to Maggie Walter’s place that evening very late, hoping to avoid the curious speculations of the few neighbors who lived in the area. He’d parked his truck behind her home, and headed to the backyard where he sat on her porch for awhile, letting his eyes get adjusted to the dark. It had been a clear night, with a half-moon riding high in the sky providing all the illumination he would need. He’d looked out at the backyard, noticing a few of the marks in the ground he’d dug then covered up, not giving a damn if it would attract the attention of the authorities if they decided to come poking around again. He decided it wouldn’t matter. If anybody decided to ask him he would suggest that it was probably animals digging around in her backyard.

The first time he’d come to the yard in that first futile attempt at locating the box he counted off the ten paces just as Lillian had told him. That first dig yielded nothing, so he tried to the immediate left and right of that first attempt. Then he’d tried a foot ahead, again to the left and right. He’d left that evening, not wanting to arouse too much suspicion.

The next trip had proven to be a charm, though. He counted ten steps again, this time taking to mind Maggie’s smaller stature. He wound up two steps behind his original ten from his first attempt and started digging. Five minutes later he hit pay dirt.

He’d brushed the dirt off the box, covered up the hole, then climbed in his Explorer and driven home. The key he’d lifted from Lillian’s home on the day she died was in his bedroom drawer. He’d gotten it, then opened the little silver lock that held the box closed.

He carried the box into the basement den, trembling as he sat down and fitted the key in the lock again. He remembered how nervous he’d been the first time he’d unlocked the box, and he was just as nervous now as he opened it again. He supposed he would get this feeling no matter how many times he opened the box and poked through its contents. But sifting through it also had its benefits. It was helping him to understand Maggie Walters and the events that had transpired in the past week. It was helping him to build his armor up for the battle against Satan.

He opened the box. He’d left the items as he found them, and as he lifted them out he looked through each again, one by one. The first things were the birth certificates. One for Margaret Harris, born in Sacramento in June of 1946. The second was for Andrew Harris, a boy, born June 5, 1966, in Los Angeles, California.

Margaret Harris…Maggie Walters…Andrew Harris…Vince Walters.

The items that followed helped to make that identification. There were old photographs of Maggie as a young woman and there were baby photos of Vince. There was a small photo album also, with handwritten captions making identification easier. The woman he knew as Maggie Walters was identified in the photographs depicting a young Maggie as Margaret Swanson, while those of the young boy were identified as Andrew Swanson. The resemblance between the boy identified as Andrew Harris and the young man named Vince who’d introduced himself as Maggie’s son were unmistakable.

Most of the photos in the album were the depictions of normalcy in the 60s: mother and son playing together, what looked like family gatherings, trips to the park, the zoo. There were a section of photos that looked like they were taken in San Francisco. And as the years went by in the collage of photos, so did the dress and hair change with the times. Maggie began to look more hippie-like, as did the other people in the photographs. And even though they all looked to be smiling and happy, there was something about them, some underlying presence that bothered Reverend Hank Powell.

When he first came across this photo album and the birth certificates, his first impression was what he’d told Lillian Withers that day ten years ago. The box contained nothing but mementos of her former life as a sinner. When he saw the birth certificates and made the connection with the photos, he’d thought it was a bit drastic to change your name and identity just to escape from a former life of sin. But as he dug deeper into the box he’d uncovered the reasons for why Maggie Walters had taken such drastic measures.

He took a deep breath and composed himself as he brought those items out now. Thank God there were no photos. Newspaper clippings were bad enough.

It was the newspaper accounts that had disturbed him deeply; they still disturbed him. They were arranged in chronological order, the first dated June 1968. They were brief clippings cut from newspapers in San Jose, Santa Cruz, and Los Gatos, all concerning the discovery of canines skinned and drained of blood in various parts of the city. There had been no known motives for the crimes.

There were similar clippings from August of 1968, then in November of that year there was a single news clipping from the San Francisco Chronicle. It concerned the disappearance of a local teenager, a sixteen-year old boy with a history of drug abuse. The boy had apparently disappeared on his way home from school, and it was assumed he’d simply run away.

Reverend Hank Powell believed otherwise.

Starting in April of 1969, newspaper clippings from the Los Angeles area—The Herald Examiner, the Los Angeles Times, the Orange County Register—began appearing with the Bay Area newspapers. They detailed more of the same; brief, four paragraph news items on the discovery of mutilated animals, primarily dogs, and news briefs on missing persons, most of them teenagers.

In August of 1969 the clippings got bigger. The minute Reverend Powell saw the headline his mind went back to when he first saw those headlines: Five Slain in Los Angeles Home of Film Director Roman Polanski…Actress Sharon Tate among those dead. When Reverend Powell saw those headlines again among the other clippings his first thought was this couldn’t be. Surely Maggie couldn’t have had anything to do with the Manson case. As he flipped through further clippings of the case—the discovery of the LaBiancas, the capture and arrest of Charles Manson and his ‘Family,’ the pre-trial hearings, the convictions and interspersed with those, more of those same four paragraph clippings, now coming from other states, all dealing with dogs found skinned and drained of blood.

Reverend Powell had flipped through the rest of the clippings with bated breath, coming across the other cases of atrocities and murder, already panicking. But then last night he caught something that he missed that first time, and it was this, which had made him proceed with more caution. He’d given a quick prayer to the Lord for letting him see this, because it not only gave him more insight to what he was dealing with, it made him less likely to panic the next time he came across some other shocking bit of news.

The item he’d missed was on the first headline of the Manson case, the discovery of Sharon Tate and the five other people found butchered in Topanga Canyon. The headline was circled in blue ballpoint pen with a question mark scribbled over it. The words, “Did Sam order this?” written in a script the Reverend recognized as Maggie’s was so faint that it was easy to miss. He’d found similar markings in the faint script on other newspaper clippings on the Manson case. Most of them bore that faint question mark. One article, regarding the murder of Hollywood stunt-man “Shorty” Shea, had an inscription that said, “This sounds like it could be the work of the group—not sure.” The clippings on the Manson case were not the only ones that bore such little notes and jottings.

There were other clippings equally ominous. One from 1970 regarded the capture of a man named Stanley Baker, who’d killed a businessman in Montana and confessed to eating his victim’s heart. There was vague speculation that he’d committed murders on the command of a cult, but there’d been no information forthcoming. Smaller clippings followed the Stanley Baker case until October of 1974, when a young Stanford University student named Arlis Perry was found murdered. She’d been found in the campus chapel, nude from the waist down, beaten and choked unconscious. She’d been killed with an ice pick, which had been driven into her brain behind her left ear.

The last newspaper clippings had come from the Toronto Sun, dated July 1977, regarding the capture of David Berkowitz in the Son of Sam killings, and from the Orange County Register from October 1988 regarding the capture of serial killer Edwin Groose. Like the Manson clippings, Maggie had stored newspaper accounts of the Berkowitz and Groose case until their conviction.

Interspersed with the newspaper accounts of the two well-known murder trials and the smaller, lesser-known crimes, were clips from various business journals. Some were from the Wall Street Journal, others were from magazines like the Business Weekly. At first Reverend Powell wasn’t sure of the significance of these clippings, but upon going through them a second time a few nights ago he began to see some sort of thread. All of the clippings had to do with the business activities of one man, Samuel F. Garrison. All of the clippings depicted Samuel Garrison’s slow but steady rise to power in the business world.

He hadn’t taken the time to read all of the clippings, but now he did. He sat in his easy chair with the lamp on, reading through each one. When he was finished with the last one—dated July 4, 1984, regarding the business transaction of a small, private college in the Los Angeles area—he sat back and arranged the papers and clippings in order. He sighed. He still didn’t know what to make of the clippings and Maggie’s relationship with them. He had some ideas, of course, but he wasn’t entirely sure if he was correct in them. He was under the impression that Maggie had some knowledge of something sinister and very dangerous, that she may have been a part of it in the late sixties and early seventies. He replaced the items in the box and closed the lid, snapping the lock shut. Then he placed the box on the oak end table and leaned back in his easy chair for a moment, hands crossed over his stomach, and thought.

The photos corresponded exactly with what he knew about Maggie and Vince. The last photo in the album was from the summer of 1974, judging by the dates printed in black along the white edges. That corresponded to the time Maggie had told Lillian and a few others of when she left California. Her original story, one she stuck with for years and hardly talked about, was that she was involved with a bad crowd in California that was into drugs and she’d left with her son to escape that life. She’d taken Jesus into her heart a year later, in Buffalo, New York where she was trying to start a new life with Vince. Looking through those photographs for the first time, Hank’s first impression was that she’d been a hippie, one of the countless love children who flocked to California in the 1960s and blew their minds on drugs. The newspaper clippings changed his view on that.

He was pretty certain of one thing, though. He was fairly confident that Maggie wasn’t involved in the Manson case. He was also pretty sure she wasn’t a member of the infamous Manson Family. He’d gone to the Lititz Public Library and spent the day on the Internet, reading through various web pages on the case until he grew disgusted with the outlandish theories and stories posted. He’d finally asked a librarian for help and went home with a paperback of Ed Saunders’s Helter Skelter. He’d combed through the book, trying to find any mention of other family members. He was unable to find any reference to neither a Maggie Walters nor a Margaret Harris. Likewise, the names that were scrawled in the photo album—Tom and Gladys Black, Paul and Opal Johnson, among many others, weren’t found in the book either. Nor was there any mention of a Samuel F. Garrison.

But the few group shots in the photo album with the names of the various parties identified in black ink sure gave him the impression they were part of that whole counter-culture scene. They certainly looked like they could have belonged to the Family, with their long hair and love beads, their halter-tops and bell-bottom jeans. Their smiling faces bore striking resemblances to the smiling faces of those that had butchered all those people during that hot, sweltering summer of 1969.

Okay, so maybe Maggie wasn’t involved with Manson. But she was either really interested in the case or had some kind of knowledge of it. Maybe she’d known some of the people involved. Maybe she had other suspicions. She also had some knowledge of the Son of Sam killings. Maybe they were just speculations. Who knows? Personally, I don’t know what to make of it. Maybe in her drug-addled mind she developed some crazy conspiracy theory. Maybe some of the people in these photographs—Gladys and Tom, Paul and Opal, maybe this Samuel Garrison person—knew something about the Manson and Berkowitz cases. Maybe they know something and because she knows that they know, she hid this stuff in the box. Maybe all those clippings about dead dogs and missing kids have something to do with it. Maybe this Samuel Garrison character has something to do with it—after all, she did make mention of a Sam in that scribble ‘did Sam order this?’ Maybe this Sam is the ‘Sam’ of Son of Sam. It seems even she wasn’t entirely sure, but it seems likely that she had reason to believe that the people she was involved with could have been capable of having something to do with both cases. Look at the murder of Shorty Shea; she basically speculates that it looked like something the group could have had something to do with, as if they’d participated in similar crimes. Shea’s murder was solved—a few of the Manson henchmen confessed to that particular killing because the poor guy knew too much. Knew too much of what, though? And why would Maggie believe the people she associated with would have anything to do with the Manson family?

It was puzzling and frustrating. The more Reverend Powell tried to come up with a suitable explanation, a thousand more questions popped into his mind to create more questions that needed answers. What had Maggie been involved with? Why had she gone through such pains to change her identity and the identity of her son? What kind of danger had she been in? And why? Did she witness some crime? Did she have knowledge of some criminal organization?

Did that criminal organization finally find her and come out here after more than twenty years?

Reverend Powell shuddered as his hands rested on the box. He had a sinking feeling that whatever it was, the answer lied in how Maggie Walters had died. Her torture, the plucking out of her eyes, the ripping out of her heart, the occult-like symbols written on the wall in her blood. Chief Hoffman and the Lancaster detectives were chalking it up to a robbery by some deranged kid. And while he hated to lay the blame on the most convenient scapegoat—Satan himself—he couldn’t help but come to those conclusions in this case.

Because let’s face it, he thought. Maggie was very much at war with Satan in the last ten years of her life. It was so bad she was a little embarrassing to be around. She saw the devil everywhere; in the bar codes at the supermarket; in the invention and proliferation of debit cards; in the Internet; in popular culture; even in the government and large Christian organizations like the Christian Coalition. She saw the devil the way some Catholics saw the Virgin Mary in the bark of a tree.

In the wake of all that happened the past week and what he’d found, was her paranoia justified? Reverend Powell thought about this as he rose to his feet and headed back to the storeroom to replace the box. He didn’t know. He wanted to find out more. He wanted to speak to somebody who had knowledge of such things. He knew of an occult expert, a fellow brother in the Lord, who had been called to go out to battle against Satan and all his allies. This friend ran a ministry in Philadelphia and Reverend Powell very much wanted to talk to him and tell him everything. Maybe Alex could help him put the pieces together.

But for now, he would keep his fears and suspicions to himself. He replaced the box in the cubby, turned off the light in the storeroom, and then closed the door.

He picked up the Colt .45 from the end table, checked it, then headed upstairs. Even though his rational mind told him that he was safe, that there was no way that whoever killed Maggie would have any knowledge of what he knew, would probably have no knowledge of the box, he still felt scared. He double checked all the locks, made sure the blinds were drawn, then went to his bedroom where he sat up in bed till one a.m., still too afraid to fall asleep.

Chapter Twelve

HE HATED LYING to Carol, but he’d just told her a dozen lies as he was packing his bags in their master bedroom. Carol Peterson stood at the threshold of the bedroom, looking worried and concerned. She was wearing a pair of denim shorts and a white blouse, her auburn hair falling about her shoulders in curls. She’d been lounging on the sofa in the family room watching a soap opera when Mike came home, and now all she could do was pace back and forth between the den and the bedroom. “This has something to do with John, doesn’t it?”

Mike zipped up his duffel bag. He had packed bare essentials; underwear and socks, two pairs of jeans, some T-shirts and some more sporty shirts, and toiletries. He sighed. “What makes you think this has to do with John?”

“Because he was acting just as strange as you are right before he went downhill again,” Carol said, hands on her hips. “He was being evasive and now you are, too. You don’t have any consulting job lined up. You can’t fool me anymore, Mike.”

Mike stood up and tried to walk past her, but she blocked his path. “Carol!”

“Mike!” Her tone was stern. She glared up at him, fire in her eyes.

“What do you want from me?”

“I want you to tell me the truth! The past month you’ve been acting like…like you’re on some goddamned spy mission! Every time we go out you’re always looking in the rearview mirrors like some paranoid freak! Like you’re afraid we’re being followed. And you’ve checked the phone lines outside the house half a dozen times, and don’t tell me that whatever it is you’ve been scouring the floors for is your high school class ring. I found it in your junk drawer the other day. You think somebody’s bugged the house. You can’t keep lying to me, Mike. This has something to do with John and what happened to Jesse, doesn’t it?”

Mike felt torn; he wanted to tell Carol everything he’d discovered, but he also wanted to protect her. And he couldn’t keep lying to her. Perhaps the best thing to do was to give her a little bit of the truth. He nodded reluctantly. “You’re right, honey. It does have to do with Jesse. His son, Frank, recently contacted me. He’s trying to find out what happened to Jesse, and I’ve just been helping him out a little. That’s all.”

“That’s what drove John crazy!” Carol said, her cheeks flushing red.

“I’m not John, honey.”

“No, you’re not, but…” Her lips trembled as she tried to muster the sentence out. “For God’s sake, Mike, I know you kept me in the dark on a lot of what happened to John, but you can’t do it anymore. I know something is up. I know something terrible happened. Exactly what, I don’t know, but I know something bad happened.

“Listen,” Mike said. He took Carol by the shoulders and sat her down on the bed. “I’m sorry I haven’t been telling you the whole truth. But…well, I felt bad for Frank, and he’s doing most of this on his own. I’m just pointing him in the right direction. I’m just—”

“Then why are you leaving town if all you’re doing is pointing him in the right direction?” she asked, accusation in her eyes. “Surely Frank’s a big boy now. Can’t he take care of himself?”

“Yes, but he asked me just this once to fly back east with him. His mother recently passed away and she left a lot of papers behind and he asked me to help him sort through them and provide some sort of explanation.” The lie slipped easily through his lips and he hoped Carol bought it. “That’s all I’m doing. That’s all I told him I would do. He seems satisfied with that.”

“Are you sure you even want to do that?”

“What do you mean?”

“All John did was do a little checking, too,” Carol said. “He even had other people doing the work for him. And what about Jesse’s sister and her husband? They had a private investigator and look what happened to them.”

Mike nodded. “Yes, I realize that, but all that happened a long time ago. And I’m not getting close to it the way they did, either. Frank is the one getting his hands dirty. All I’m doing is making suggestions.”

Carol appeared to think about it. Her eyes were worried and scared. “Why didn’t you tell me all this sooner?”

Mike took Carol’s hands in his. “Because I didn’t want you to worry like this, that’s why.” He leaned forward and gave her a kiss. “I promise, I’m not getting too involved. I’m being careful. I’m only going to be back in Pennsylvania for a week tops, and all I’ll be doing is going over paperwork and photo albums with Frank and answering his questions, giving him some background. That’s all. Anything Frank wants to pursue on his own, that’s his problem.”

“I just hope it doesn’t become our problem, too,” Carol said.

“It won’t. I promise.”

Carol looked at him, as if trying to read his thoughts to see the lies floating there. Finally she looked away. “God knows I want to believe you,” she said. “But…”

“You still don’t believe me.”

She shook her head reluctantly. “No.” She looked at him. “I—I don’t know what to think.”

“I’ll be fine.” He rose to his feet and helped her up. He picked up his duffel bag and together they walked out to the garage where the car was parked. “I’ll be gone a week. I’m just going to help Frank get a good start and be there to answer any questions he has. That’s all. Once he’s settled in, I’ll come home.” He opened the rear door and stowed his bag in the back seat. He turned to Carol and smiled. “Okay?”

Carol had that pleading look in her eyes again. She grasped his hands. “I still don’t feel right about this, Mike. Please don’t go!”

“I’ll be fine,” he said, kissing her again. “I promise. Okay? I don’t intend on getting into this as deep as John did.”

Something on Carol’s face seemed to change; her eyes clouded over, her features became grave, dark. “Somehow I don’t know if I can believe that.” Then she turned and walked out of the garage back into the house.

“Carol!” Mike called out as she slammed the door to the laundry room that opened off into the garage. For a moment he almost sprinted after her. She was clearly pissed off about not only his evasiveness, but leaving for a week to work on this. He also sensed she knew that what he was telling her wasn’t the entire truth. They’d been together long enough to know when one or the other wasn’t being entirely truthful. Carol had obviously sensed that Mike was bullshitting her with his story, and that pissed her off. He started across the garage, intending to go into the house to apologize and tell her everything but then he stopped. He was already behind schedule, and if he stayed and apologized and offered a truthful explanation to Carol that would take hours; she would no doubt argue her point even more. He would miss his flight, and it was imperative that he, Frank, and Vince be on the same flight. He couldn’t miss it.

What if she’s right, though? he thought as he stood at the driver’s side of the car. What if something happens to me when I’m out there? With all the trouble I’ve taken to conceal my identity, my work will disappear along with me. What if something happens to all of us?

He was just about to head back into the house to tell her about his David Connelly pseudonym, to tell her where the key to his safe deposit box was, the whole truth to what was happening. But that would simply result in another argument. And he couldn’t be late for this flight.

He opened the door to the car and slid behind the wheel. He started the car, opened the garage door, and then backed down the driveway. I’ll call her tonight, he thought as he cast one quick glance at the house before closing the garage door and heading out of the neighborhood. I’ll call her from the airport, tell her I’m sorry, and tell her where I’ve left the key to the safe deposit box. I’ll tell her that everything she wants to know is there, that if something should happen to me she’s to make sure the information gets out. She’ll probably be curious and open the box anyway but that’s fine. Let her read through it and come to terms with it. We can talk about it when I get back.

Still, he wasn’t entirely satisfied with that decision. But it was the best he could do.

Mike Peterson drove to LAX, wishing Carol hadn’t been so snoopy, hoping it didn’t come back to hurt either of them.

THEY WOUND UP not staying in Lititz after all. Instead, Vince directed them to an out-of-the-way motel in Ephrata. They’d already made the decision prior to take-off in Los Angeles that they would stay overnight in Philadelphia. Mike asked a travel agent at the gate for a list of hotels near Philadelphia International Airport and succeeded in getting a room at one with a late checkin. This way they had a room waiting for them when they arrived at 2:30 a.m., East Coast Time.

Snaring a rental car in Philadelphia, Vince drove the three of them to the hotel, a Marriot near the airport. The room price was steep considering its proximity to the airport, but Mike paid for it with the credit card he had secured under his David Connelly pseudonym. As Vince stood in the lobby with Frank, Mike signed them in. They’d met at LAX and traveled together without talking much. Mike had spent a considerable amount of time on his cell phone, back turned to the two of them some twenty yards away while they waited to embark on their plane. Judging from the animated conversation, Mike was probably arguing with his wife. Frank had watched through mirrored shades, his features grave. When Mike came back, Frank nodded. “Trouble?”

“No trouble,” Mike had said, sitting down, his features pensive. “Everything’s fine.”

Things didn’t look fine to Vince, though, but he kept silent about it.

After checking into their room, Mike had suggested they get some sleep so they could wake up early for the drive to Lancaster County. The room had two queen-sized beds. Mike and Frank shared one after flipping coins for dibs on the beds, and Vince wound up the winner.

After an eight a.m., wake-up call they showered in alternating shifts, dressed hurriedly, and then checked out. After stopping at a restaurant for breakfast and coffee, they made their way to Lancaster County.

They were heading south on Route 222 when Vince suggested the Ephrata Motel. “It might be a good idea to be outside of Lititz, just in case,” he suggested. Mike felt that was a good idea. He pulled off at Main Street in Ephrata at Vince’s directions and they pulled in front of the motel within five minutes.

The motel was an L shaped building with twelve cabins facing a small parking lot. It reminded Vince of the Bates Motel in its simplicity. Mike went to the office and came back a few minutes later. “We’ve got a room that sounds pretty cramped. It has one queen sized bed and one single rollout cot. Best I could do.”

“That’s fine,” Vince said. They carried their luggage down the short walkway to cabin number 5 and waited while Mike got it unlocked.

The room was small, with the bed, the cot, a small dresser, a small television mounted on a stand bolted to the wall, and nothing else. There was a small bathroom off the entrance. “What do you expect for thirty bucks a night?” Mike said, flipping the light on.

It was just after twelve-thirty in the afternoon. Vince flopped down on the bed. “Well, what do we do now?”

“How far is Lititz from here?” Mike asked.

“About ten, fifteen minutes maybe,” Vince said.

“Does Reverend Powell have any other job outside of ministering to his church?” Frank asked.

“When I lived out here I remember he used to be a general contractor,” Vince said. “I think he’s still doing that.”

“So if we call him at home he might be there,” Mike said. “Unless he’s off at a job site.”

Vince nodded. “Yeah, I guess so.”

“Why don’t you give him a call? Tell him you’re in town and see if he’s willing to meet with us. Is there a library around here?”

“Yeah, there’s one off 272,” Vince said, motioning outside. “It’s probably about a half-mile walk or so.”

Mike turned to Frank. “If the Reverend is in, why don’t you head over to the library and do some research? Check out back issues of area newspapers and see if there are any stories of unusual crimes that have occurred in the past few years or so. You know what to look for.”

Frank nodded. “Sure thing.”

“You have your cell phone with you?”

Frank nodded, patting his hip pocket.

“Keep it on. I’ll call you from the Reverend’s home if anything happens. Otherwise, let’s plan on meeting back here in three hours.”

“What are we going to tell Reverend Powell?” Vince asked.

“We’ll tell him the truth,” Mike said. “Surely as a man of God, he’s going to have to believe what we have to tell him.”

Vince picked up the phone and began dialing Reverend Powell’s number from the business card he’d given him last week.

WHEN MIKE PETERSON and Vince Walters pulled up to Hank Powell’s house he was waiting for them on his front porch. He looked paler than the last time Vince had seen him and his eyes had a haunted look. He kept looking out at the cornfield across from his home. “Come in,” he said, ushering them in the house. “I’m glad you could get back here so quickly.”

Vince introduced Mike to Reverend Powell and the two men shook hands. Vince had explained to Hank on the phone that he’d just arrived back at Lancaster County with two friends who were helping him unravel the mystery of his mother’s death. He’d told Reverend Powell that Mike had information on his mother’s background and upon hearing this, Hank had told Vince in a breathless tone that he’d found the box Maggie buried. “I’ve made some startling conclusions that I hope and pray to God aren’t true,” he’d said. “Perhaps your friend can help me understand it.” Excited by the fact that Reverend Powell had found the box, Vince told Mike, who suggested they head over to Lititz immediately.

Reverend Powell closed and locked the front door. It was ninety-five degrees outside with high humidity, making it feel like the tropics. The house was cooled by central air conditioning. Reverend Powell patted the butt of a handgun he had tucked into his belt. “Don’t mean to startle you with this, but ever since finding…what I’ve found out, I’ve been a trifle scared.”

“That’s understandable,” Mike said. “We’ve been taking our own precautions as well.”

Reverend Powell nodded, then turned to Vince. “It’s downstairs.”

They followed Hank Powell downstairs to the basement. Reverend Powell motioned to the sofa and chairs in the den. “Have a seat. I’ll go get it.” He headed toward the storeroom.

Reverend Powell unlocked the door to the storeroom and Mike and Vince waited by the pool table as he rummaged in the cubby and pulled the box out. They retreated to the den and sat down. Reverend Powell opened the lock with a key and looked at Mike Peterson. “I’m hoping you’ll be able to make some sense of this. I…I have my own suspicions based on…what I’ve seen here, but…I don’t know if I’m just being paranoid or what.”

Hank handed the box to Mike, who positioned it on his lap. Vince was sitting next to him on the sofa and the minute he saw the pictures, a thousand memories exploded in his mind. They came as a kaleidoscope of images; playing on the back porch of an apartment building somewhere in a big city; sitting quietly at the feet of his mother as her and daddy’s friends gathered at the house (but was it really daddy or was it Tom?), their dress and hair counter-culture-like; the long-haired bearded man trying to kill him as his mother screamed and the others made a mad grab to save him; sitting on a raised dais in a darkened room as black robed adults bowed before him.

“Oh my God,” Vince whispered.

“What?” Mike said, pausing from his perusal of the photo album.

“Looking at these brings back so many memories.”

“Good,” Mike said, turning back to the photo album. “That’s what we’re here for.”

Reverend Powell was watching them from his perch on the easy chair. He looked nervous. He rubbed his mouth with his left hand, glancing up the basement stairs every so often as Vince and Mike went through the photo album.

“That’s Gladys,” Mike said, tapping a photo that Vince remembered from when they’d lived in Orange County. The photo showed a woman in her late twenties or early thirties seated at a table with a man around the same age. They were smiling into the camera. The perfect picture of early seventies normalcy.

“I remember her so well now,” Vince said.

When they got through the last photo album, they turned to the clippings. At first the clippings held no significance for Vince, but Mike seemed to recognize something. He began nodding. “Yes, just as I thought,” Mike said. Vince tried to draw some kind of correlation to what he was seeing—clippings about dead dogs, missing people. He didn’t remember anybody he or his mother knew going missing.

When Mike came to the clippings on the Manson family, Vince felt no particular kinship there, either. “I don’t get it,” he said, looking at Mike.

“This all corresponds to what John and I dug up,” Mike said, flipping through the clippings quicker now, nodding along. “Everything she saved here is stuff I’ve already connected.”

“Then it’s true then?” Reverend Powell said in a fearful, trembling voice. Vince felt his stomach plunge down an elevator shaft as he looked at the man. He’d never felt the aura of fear so much as he did that minute when he looked at Reverend Powell. Hank fidgeted on the chair, his hands moving nervously, licking his lips. “I have been praying to the Lord ever since I found this box that it wasn’t true.”

“Does all this stuff mean that the cult my mother was involved with had something to do with Charles Manson?” Vince asked.

“No,” Mike said. He got to the end of the clippings and put them back in order carefully. “They didn’t have anything to do with the Manson family, although there has always been speculation that they might have crossed paths.”

“I don’t understand.”

Mike closed the lid to the box and snapped the lock shut. “There have been a lot of theories about the reasons Manson ordered the Tate-LaBianca murders. One of the most vague and outlandish is that Manson had volunteered to have the murders carried out for somebody else. Somebody who was a powerful member of a satanic cult. Of course, Manson himself denied this, as did those convicted of the murders. They’re right, of course.”

“So you are saying that Maggie was involved with Satanists!” Reverend Powell asked, his eyes wide with fright, almost pleading for this to be a cruel hoax. His voice rose in a shrilling crescendo. “Is that it? Were Maggie and Vince exposed to Satan and—”

“Calm down, Reverend,” Mike said. He set the box down on the sofa beside him. “I’ll explain everything.”

“I think I’m going to need a drink,” Reverend Powell said. He rose to his feet and headed to the bar. He didn’t offer Mike or Vince anything; he merely opened a bottle of Jack Daniels, poured himself a shot and drank it down. Then he poured himself another and slammed it down. His face reddened. He sighed. “Okay. Lord forgive me for this weakness, but I can’t bear to hear another word without taking some of this to calm my nerves.”

Mike headed toward the rear of the basement, carrying the box. He placed it on the pool table and approached the bar. “I think we could all use a drink.”

Vince joined Mike at the bar as Reverend Powell stood behind it, leaning against the polished wood surface. Hank handed them each a shot glass and asked if they wanted something to chase it with. When both men nodded, Hank opened a small refrigerator under the bar and pulled out two bottles of Budweiser. He opened them and set both bottles on the bar and went for a third. Mike set them up for a shot and the three men pounded them back. Vince felt the bourbon scorch his throat, warming him up. He took a sip of beer, which felt good as it went down his throat.

Then Mike told Reverend Hank Powell what he, Vince, and Frank had discussed the past three nights.

Reverend Powell listened, his eyes riveted on Mike as he drank silently. Listening to the narrative again was just as frightening as it had been the first time around. For some reason it brought him closer to the series of events that had fallen into place. For Vince, listening to Mike retell his side of the story, how his best friend had been waylaid and destroyed by the cult, hearing it again from his own lips, brought the horror to shuddering realization. This was a man who had lived it, who knew the parties involved. He had met Gladys and her husband; he’d possibly known Gladys when she was living her secret life as a bloodthirsty devil-worshipper. This wasn’t just another sensational story cooked up by rabid Christian fundamentalists. This was the real thing, spun with plain truth by a man firmly grounded in the secular world.

When Mike was finished Vince saw that Reverend Powell had already finished his first beer and was reaching for his second. Despite the shots he’d pounded down—four by Vince’s count, he didn’t appear drunk. “I knew it,” Reverend Powell said. “It was just as I thought. Maggie was involved with Satan and broke away. Praise the Lord that she saw the light and was saved.”

“That still doesn’t explain the Manson clippings,” Vince asked.

“The group Maggie and Gladys were involved in, The Children of the Night, was an offshoot of an apocalyptic cult called The End Times,” Mike explained. He nursed his beer as he spun the narrative. “They were formed in the mid 1800s in England by a fanatical Church of England minister named Graham Peters and his common-law wife Sally. Their belief system was based on the theory that it was God’s will for Satan to fall from grace and that following Satan was part of God’s will since it was all part of his plan for us humans.”

“In other words, both are working for the same goal—the coming of Armageddon.” Reverend Powell understood loud and clear.

Mike nodded. “That’s the short end of it. The End Times preached that Armageddon wasn’t far off. And that the quicker it came, the quicker it would be for God to take his chosen people up in the great tribulations. But in order for that to happen, there had to be an Anti-Christ born as prophesized in the Bible. So what happened was that the group split—one part remained devoted to the Christian side of the sect, the God part, if you will. The other half formed an alliance with the dark side and became The Children of the Night. Over the next hundred years they rubbed shoulders with many infamous occultists and killers, finally evolving into the current group headed by Sam Garrison.”

“The group my mother was involved with,” Vince said.

“Exactly.”

“How did Maggie get involved in such…in such wickedness?” Reverend Powell looked like he couldn’t believe that somebody he had known, somebody from his own church, could have been a blasphemous devil-worshipper.

“By all accounts, it appears that Maggie got involved through the original cult,” Mike continued. “When The End Times Church came out to California in late ’64, the counter-culture scene was already in full swing in the Bay Area. They were the first to capitalize on recruiting the flower children. At first their recruitment efforts weren’t successful. After all, this was the beginning of the hippie-movement, and people were experimenting with mind-altering drugs and alternative eastern religions. They were frustrated by the hypocrisy and failures of religious and political institutions that preached a Christian tolerance while supporting the ecology-destroying practice of big business, racial intolerance and the war in Vietnam. The End Times was rooted strictly in the prophesies of the New Testament. That was a little too close for comfort for those that had run away from home to explore religious beliefs anathema to their parents. But the End Times weaved their dogma in with a kind of mysticism that appealed to some of the dropouts. They encouraged sex, love, free will, and a communal type of living. And they also encouraged a dual acknowledgement to two gods—Yahweh and Satan. Yin and Yang. Graham Peters prophesized that in order for the biblical prophesizes to come true, the Lamb and the Goat must come together—pure love from Heaven united with hate from the depths of hell. Armageddon would begin. Those committing to either path would achieve salvation when the battle was over because those involved would be fulfilling God’s word. Everybody else—primarily every other religion—would be swallowed up in the great battle and destroyed.”

“That is the…” Reverend Powell sputtered. He was so flabbergasted he couldn’t finish.

“I know how you feel,” Mike said. He took a sip of beer. “It sounds insane. And in 1966 and ’67 it probably sounded no more insane than the dozens of other crackpots out there proselytizing among the counter-culture crowd at Haight and Ashbury. But they’re also the kind of ideas which would have been easy to find a receptive ear.”

“And they found it with my mother,” Vince said.

“They did,” Mike said, nodding. “One of the things I found out about Maggie was that she came from a very repressive background. Her father was a rabid fundamentalist minister and he was very strict. From what Frank’s father told me, Gladys came from a similar background. They would have been eager to embrace such ideas since they corresponded with belief systems they had grown up in. It would have made them feel powerful, that they felt they belonged to something far greater than anything they’d ever experienced. It would have allowed them to be manipulated more easily. In fact, shortly after your mother joined the group, they made a pilgrimage to the Middle East. From what I gather, they participated in several archeological digs in what is now modern day Iraq. It’s also suggested they performed several rituals there, possibly a soul-cracking ritual on your mother.”

“Soul-cracking?”

Mike explained. “It’s a ritual designed to literally crack the soul of the intended victim with the goal of letting elemental forces out into our world. Think of it as being used to provide a gateway, a door.”

Vince thought about this, trying to wrap his head around it. Everything was coming at him so fast.

“We aren’t certain of this,” Mike continued. “But one member who defected from the group shortly after they returned to the states told a source I was able to talk to. The soul-cracking ritual is very rare, and is only performed by extremely experienced magicians.”

“Why would they do this?” Vince asked.

“We don’t know,” Mike said. “You were conceived around this time, and it’s possible you were born in Iraq, not in California as your birth certificate states. When the group arrived back in the states in July of 1966 they came home with you and several rare artifacts dating back to ancient Summer. One of the members had a permit to bring the items into the states—he’s a well-known archeologist with a major university on the west coast.”

“Do you suppose this soul-cracking ceremony later drove my mom crazy?” Vince asked. It made sense to him. The emotional trauma they would have inflicted on her could have been suppressed for years until it eventually manifested in her extreme shift to Evangelical Christianity.

Mike nodded. “Yes, it’s very possible.”

“So if this ritual worked, what would they have let out into the world?” Vince asked, mostly to himself.

“We’re not sure, and keep in mind we’re only going by second-hand information,” Mike said. “The cult member who spilled this all to my source later disappeared.”

“So Maggie somehow wound up with this splinter group,” Reverend Powell mused. “This Children of the Night group?”

Mike nodded. “Yes, because unlike what mainstream Christianity teaches, serving Satan ultimately serves the will of God. As to what led her to…join this splinter group, I still don’t know.”

“Could it have been Tom?” Vince asked.

“Possibly.”

“That still doesn’t explain the Manson family aspect of this thing,” Reverend Powell said.

“By 1969 The Children of the Night were a very powerful, very secret satanic organization,” Mike continued. “They’d been around since the 1920s, but in the 1960s they’d experienced a resurgence of sorts. They were headquartered in San Francisco, and Samuel Garrison led them. Part of their goal was to spread total chaos in order to aid in the breakdown of society. They promoted the total worship of evil. They became so secret that contact between them and The End Times was completely severed. Because there are some vague connections between Manson’s group and The End Times when the Family was in the Bay Area, it is believed they remained in contact with select cult members, including the satanic faction—The Children of the Night.” Mike Peterson looked grave. “The theory is that Garrison ordered the bloodbath in August to stir things up and that Manson’s group not only did it, but took the fall.”

“The same with Son of Sam?” Vince asked.

Mike nodded. “Berkowitz admits to belonging to a satanic cult in New York, but crime experts have denounced that as the ramblings of a man trying to cop an insanity plea. Berkowitz maintains this story to this day, especially after having converted to Christianity in prison. He claims he was a member of a satanic cult when he committed the murders, and that the purpose of the murders was the spread of chaos. Again, in full accordance with the beliefs of The Children of the Night.”

“And all these murders,” Reverend Powell said, his fingers drumming along the bar. “They were committed for the same reason?”

“Some,” Mike said. He finished his beer. “Others, like the murder of Arlis Perry, were committed because the victim knew too much. Berkowitz apparently had inside knowledge of the Perry murder.”

Vince thought about all this, his mind whirling with the craziness of it. “What did mom tell you when I left home?” he asked Reverend Powell. “I…I always thought she had become a real…religious fanatic in the last ten years and…she used to tell me I was…the spawn of hell. I wouldn’t have been surprised if she thought I was the Anti-Christ himself.”

“Your mother always feared for you, Vincent,” Reverend Powell said, his features grave. “She always prayed for you. In all the years I knew her, I never knew her to reveal much about her past, although I used to guess that she was involved with some sinful people in California. She always seemed…as if she were running away from that past.”

“Do you think that’s it?” Vince said, turning to Mike. “Do you think this devil group Mom was involved with thought I was their Anti-Christ? Do you think that’s why they’re trying to kill me?”

“If they thought you were the Anti-Christ, why would they want to kill you?” Mike asked.

“Somebody wants me dead.”

“It couldn’t be them,” Mike said. “And it couldn’t be the original group, The End Times. Besides, I think you’re letting your emotions get a little carried away. They’re obviously trying to get to you for something—perhaps to bring you back into the fold—but they’re not trying to kill you.”

Vince was livid. His blood was boiling in his veins. “Look at the facts! My mom joins this group in 1965 shortly before learning about the two opposing sides of the cults’ beliefs—darkness and light. She chooses darkness. They take her to Iraq, do this soul-cracking thing on her or whatever it’s called, I’m conceived there and am born there. If I were a paranoid, fanatical zealot with an Armageddon complex, I’d sure think I was the Anti-Christ. Fuck!”

The room grew quiet as Vince seethed. Reverend Powell appeared to visibly flinch at the sudden expletive, but remained silent. Vince took a long drink from his beer and set the empty bottle down on the bar with a thud that almost cracked the bottle. Reverend Powell opened a fresh one for him. Vince took it and downed half of it.

Mike shook his head. “I…I don’t think that…”

“You don’t think these psychos think I’m the Anti-Christ?” Vince shouted. “Use your head, Mike, c’mon! Mom joins an apocalyptic satanic cult that believes the end times are a good thing. And hell, why not? It’s all according to God’s big plan for us, right? And everything that comes from God is good, right? Even a little destruction and doom and pestilence. In fact, why not help God along? Why don’t we just call up ’ol Scratch himself during a satanic ritual, get him to impregnate some impressionable teenager and bam! You have your Anti-Christ. Me!” Vince slapped his chest and took a pull from his beer. He felt high but he wasn’t drunk. He was scared and angry.

“Vince,” Mike said, his voice low and calm. “I think you’re rushing to conclusions. We don’t know why they’re—”

“Cut the bullshit, Mike!” Vince said, loudly. “He’s probably thinking the same goddamned thing!” He gestured to Reverend Powell. “Why else would mom suddenly pull stakes and leave California without saying a word? Why else would she become such a religious lunatic and believe the devil was hiding behind every corner? Why else would she curse me for walking my own path? Why else would she say I was spawned from hell and that—”

“Vince, I agree that your mother had some very extreme views but—”

“—she never wanted to have anything to do with me!” Vince was almost screaming now. His face felt hot and flushed with anger. “She told me time and time again, ‘I won’t have anything to do with that which isn’t Godly,’ and goddamnit, the minute I told her I was leaving for college she began to not have anything to do with me. She told me that I was turning my back on God, that I was walking down the path of darkness, that—”

“Vince,” Reverend Powell began.

“—if I left her I’d be damned to hell. And it only got worse after I married Laura.” Vince paused briefly, heaving with exertion. He could feel his emotions rising and he felt his throat constrict. “Why else,” he muttered, trying to keep his voice from cracking. “…would some…psycho come along over twenty-five years later and kill mom like that and…leave all that shit at the crime scene? Why else would somebody try to kill me?”

Mike laid a fatherly hand on Vince’s shoulder. “I don’t know, Vince,” he said softly. “I honestly don’t know. But that’s what we’re here to find out.”

And then, unable to control himself now because the pain of it all was so great, Vince Walters collapsed into Mike Peterson’s arms and broke down in heart-wrenching sobs.

THE DESK CLERK at the Ephrata library had a smile on her face when she looked up as Frank approached but the minute she looked at him, the corners of her mouth turned down in a frown. Frank ignored the look—he was used to it to some degree—and cut to the chase. “I was wondering if you could help me with something,” Frank said, launching into his rehearsed spiel immediately. The minute he entered the library he’d headed straight for the speculative fiction racks and searched for his titles. He found his latest novel in hardcover, and with the knowledge that he was being read by Ephrata’s finest, he sauntered over to the reference desk. “I’m an author, and I’m setting my next novel here in Ephrata and I was wondering if I could have access to the microfilm of the local newspapers.”

“An author?” The woman still looked suspicious.

“Yes.” Frank smiled and held up the title he’d pulled off the shelves. “You guys even carry my books. See?”

He handed the book to her and she looked it over, then turned to the back cover, which bore an author photograph. She looked from the back jacket to Frank. In the author photo he was leaning against a graffiti-stained wall in North Hollywood looking the same as he always did—black leather jacket, mirror shades, badass biker pose.

The librarian’s smile returned and her demeanor changed. “Well, I surely wasn’t expecting a literary celebrity to be visiting us so soon,” she said. “What can I help you with?”

A few minutes later Frank was seated in the corner of the reference area, a microfilm machine in front of him and spools of fiche from the past three years in a metal tray on his right. The librarian had been helpful from then on, ferreting microfilm at Frank’s command. Frank spooled through the paper, his eyes peeled for anything that might catch his fancy. The librarian—Nancy Koja—had turned out to be a nice lady once Frank started talking books with her. She’d even agreed to help him out on his project, and was currently at her desk on the telephone with an editor at the Lancaster Intelligencer asking for the information he was seeking. Hopefully the two of them would come up with something fairly quick.

When Frank told her what he was looking for she didn’t seem particularly disturbed. Maybe it was because she trusted him—after all, he was a ‘celebrity author’ visiting this little hamlet deep in the Amish Country. “Sounds like your next book is going to be a thriller,” Nancy said, jotting down notes. “I just love thrillers!”

So far Frank hadn’t found a thing. He started scanning headlines beginning in late January of this year, a few weeks before February 2, the day of Candlemas, which was an important day in most magical circles. The next important days were the Spring Equinox and Walpurgisnacht—April 30. He was now scanning headlines for the week of March 15, one week before the Equinox, and so far he hadn’t come across anything resembling what he was looking for.

Nancy Koja returned to Frank’s side. “I think there might be something in the Lititz paper for the date of April 30,” she said. She approached a file tray, opened it, and began rummaging through. “We just had these converted to microfilm, too. We only keep area newspapers for a month.”

Frank stopped and turned to her. “What did you find?”

Nancy found the box of film she was looking for and handed it to Frank. “My friend at the Intelligencer told me to call the Lititz Record. He’d heard about a crime involving dead animals that this friend of his in Lititz reported. Isn’t that what you’re looking for? Dead animal cases?”

“Yes,” Frank nodded, slipping the microfilm in the spools and fast-forwarding to April 30. “Specifically dogs.”

Nancy leaned forward, peering into the screen as Frank scanned through the April 30 issue slowly. Finally, he found what he was looking for.

It was a very brief article:

DEAD DOGS FOUND IN FIELD BELIEVED TO BE FOUL PLAY

By Richard Harsh, Lititz Record Staff Writer

Two adult male dogs, one a Doberman Pinscher, another a German Shepard, were found yesterday morning in a field bordering Mill Lane.

The discovery was made by Greta Jones, 73, of 87 Mill Lane, a semi-detached home that sits on the corner of Mill Lane and Meadow Lane. Ms. Jones had just ventured outside to water her plants in a flowerbed when she noticed a flurry of activity in the field across the road. “A bunch of crows,” she said, flocking about and picking at something. It’s not unusual to see them eating road kill, but there was an awful lot of them in that field and I caught a glimpse of something that looked a lot bigger than a gopher, so I went inside and called Alan Pierson to take a look.”

When Pierson, who owns the land, investigated, he discovered the two dogs, who had been skinned of their pelts.

Lancaster County Animal Control officials agree that somebody with knowledge of canine anatomy killed the animals. They report that both animals were skinned alive and then killed with precise cuts to the throat and dumped in the field.

Lititz Police are investigating the matter and are urging anybody with information to come forward.

Frank read the article twice, then hit the COPY button. “Thanks,” he said. “Did your contact at the paper mention if there were any other similar cases since?”

“None,” Nancy Koja said, looking pleased. “Is there anything else I can help you with?”

“None right now,” Frank said, glancing at his watch. He had an hour and a half left to spend at the library before heading back to the motel. “If you don’t mind, I’m going to look through the rest of this microfilm. Where do you keep the hard copies of the paper you were mentioning?”

“In the periodical room,” Nancy said, motioning to a room on the other side of the building. “Local newspapers are along the north wall. Feel free to help yourself.”

“Thanks.”

Frank read through the rest of the microfilm and followed up his research in the periodical room. And despite a careful analysis of the local newspapers, he didn’t find anything else, save the local reporting of Maggie Walter’s murder.

Chapter Thirteen

IT WAS ONLY eight-thirty in the evening, and even though it was still sunset it felt like night had fallen fast.

Hank Powell, Mike Peterson, Vince Walters, and Frank Black were gathered in Reverend Powell’s basement. Hank had set up a card table and some chairs in the den, and the four men sat around the table eating take-out pizza that Frank and Mike had brought back from Caruso’s. Vince had called Frank as he was walking back to the motel from the library and told him the latest plan: they were joining forces with Reverend Powell and would be spending the rest of their time at his home. Frank expressed concern at first, but Vince assured him that Mike had made the call. Vince was still reeling from the emotional turmoil of the past few hours and had come to rely more on Mike’s judgment. “We talked about it upstairs out of Hank’s earshot,” he’d told Frank over the phone. “Mike did some checking on him before you even contacted me. He came out clean. He has no prior contact with any cult member except for my mother, and he’s expressing all the classic symptoms of shock at what he’s hearing. Mike’s checked the house out, and once Hank found out the extreme nature of this group, he even pitched in to help. The guy’s an ex-cop and knows quite a lot about surveillance. He says he would have known if somebody had been following him, so he’s just as paranoid as you two are.”

“I guess that’s good to know,” Frank said.

Mike had driven over to the motel to pick Frank up and gather their things. As a precaution, he hadn’t checked them out of the room. They’d picked up two large pizzas at Caruso’s after Hank phoned the order in, and now they were gathered around the card table, a half-eaten pizza and empty beer bottles on the table. Frank had gone through two cans of Coke already. They’d brought Hank Powell up to speed on everything that happened since Maggie’s murder—including the murder attempt on Vince and Tracy—and Frank’s own background. Hank had nodded solemnly, casting a sympathetic glance at Frank. “You’ve been through a lot, my friend. Thank God you lived through it.”

“There’s a well-known quote by the German philosopher Frederick Nietzsche,” Frank said. He was sprawled comfortably in one of the fold-up lawn chairs Reverend Powell had set up around the table. “‘That which does not kill me makes me stronger’ That’s how I look at what I went through.”

Hank Powell looked at his guests and sighed. Vince had watched the man pound down no less than a six-pack of beer and numerous shots of Jack Daniels and the guy wasn’t even the least bit wobbly. Perhaps it was true about ex-cops and preachers—they could hold their liquor. “Well, I’m with you on this,” he said. “As Maggie and Lillian’s friend and minister, and as a soldier for the Lord, I feel compelled to work with you to fight Satan. I know that’s who we’re up against and I thank God for your courage.” He nodded at each of them, his nod lingering longer on Frank. “Especially you, Frank, after finding out what you’ve gone through.” He nodded at Vince. “And you, Vince. As an unbeliever, I know this is hard for you to accept. But I also know you loved your mother, even though the two of you had problems. Despite what you may feel, I refuse to accept that this group feels that you are the Anti-Christ. They want you for something else. Satan hates to lose, and it’s obvious that he feels he lost two great souls when your mother took you and hightailed it out of that den of iniquity. He’s trying to get you back. And he will fight hard for you.”

“So you don’t think I’m the Anti-Christ?” Vince asked. He asked this half-jokingly. He really felt no different physically since coming to these wild conclusions. He imagined that if he were some sort of supernatural being he would have been aware of it long before now.

“No, Vince,” Hank Powell said. “You’re not the Anti-Christ. Confused and scared maybe, but not the devil’s imp.”

Frank chuckled. “You weren’t bad luck to people whom you’ve known the last twenty-five years, were you?”

“No.”

“And you haven’t noticed any unusual marks, right? No six-six-six tattoos or markings on your scalp?”

“No, but then I’ve never looked, either. I could shave my head and we can solve this all right now.”

“That’s unnecessary,” Mike said, bringing the seriousness back to the tone of conversation. “Vince, you’re not the Anti-Christ, so stop thinking such nonsense.”

“Why else would they be after me?”

“It’s like I suggested,” Reverend Powell said, rubbing his jaw. “Satan hates to lose. He wants you back.”

“If that’s the case, why do you claim it’s outlandish that they might think I’m the Anti-Christ?”

“Vince!” Mike’s tone sharpened.

Vince turned to Mike. “Hank believes the devil is pissed off about losing me and Mom. He’s placing this belief in a supernatural entity. If you believe Hank, why can’t you believe they see me as the Anti-Christ?”

Mike fidgeted. He cast a glance at Frank, who remained stoical. Finally, Frank said, “I don’t believe you’re the Anti-Christ, and to tell you the truth, I don’t believe in the devil either.”

“What do you believe in, son?” Reverend Powell asked.

“I believe we’re dealing with a group of fanatics,” Frank said. “I believe we’re dealing with a group of people that’s just as fanatical about their beliefs as the most rabid, fundamentalist Bible-thumper.” Hank Powell’s expression darkened at that description, but Frank ignored him. “To tell you the truth, I think organized religion is a crock of shit. I think Pat Robertson is just as dangerous as Louis Farrakhan and that nut that lives in that cave in Afghanistan, Osama bin Laden. I think these guys are operating on the same delusions as all your television evangelists, only they—”

“The Lord God is not an illusion,” Reverend Powell said, sternly.

“—believe in the devil. Frankly, I think the whole concept of Christianity, Judaism, and Islam is a fraud. I think they’re all based on a bunch of old myths and the early churches and mosques and synagogues forced this crock of shit down people’s throats as a power trip. They made people believe this shit—”

“That’s enough!” Hank Powell thundered. His face was beet-red.

“—and they had the power to either make people pay lip service or they’d kill them. Haven’t you ever heard of the Crusades or the fucking Inquisition?”

“I will not have you curse in my house!” Reverend Powell said through gritted teeth.

“Frank,” Mike said, sternly. “That’s enough.”

“It’s true!” Frank turned to him. “You told me the same thing. Or have you forgotten about that?”

If this embarrassed Mike, he didn’t show it. “Our personal spiritual beliefs are not the issue. The main focus of our discussion is the various crimes perpetrated by this organization, and their threat on Vince’s life.”

“And that’s all based on their spiritual beliefs,” Frank said. “Their belief that they are somehow aiding in God’s plan by helping to bring about the end times as described in the Bible. What they’re doing is no different than some Christian wacko who blows up a Planned Parenthood clinic because he says God told him to kill the abortion-providers.”

They were silent for a moment. Reverend Powell was glowering with anger. “You may not believe now,” he said, his gaze fiery, “but as we go deep into battle you will believe. I pray to God that you believe before it’s too late.”

“The bottom line is this,” Mike said, leaning forward, addressing them all in a clip, authoritarian style that must have worked wonders in the classroom. “Whatever our personal beliefs may be, we need to agree on some basic things that are very much real. One, this group exists and they’re extremely dangerous. Two, they’re responsible for the murder of Maggie Walters. Three, she was involved with them to some degree in the sixties and early seventies and she may have had some knowledge or participated in criminal activities. Four, she wised up and fled with Vince and went completely underground and was successful in changing her and Vince’s identity. And five—”

“They killed her and want Vince for the same reason,” Frank said. “Whatever Vince and Maggie were exposed to, whatever they might have witnessed, The Children of the Night want to silence them.”

“And you,” Vince said, nodding to Frank. “You told me yourself that you were having similar dreams. You don’t think they’re after you, too?”

“My guess is they think I’m too much trouble,” Frank said. He took a sip of Coke. “Besides, I think those dreams are finally just coming to the surface of my subconscious because they have no place else to go. As to them wanting to silence me, I really doubt it. I was a rebellious son-of-a-bitch to my mom, and I haven’t caused them any trouble since she booted me out when I was twelve. I haven’t been in touch with her since, and back then I was a fuck-up and a drug addict. She probably still thinks that. But I haven’t completely ruled out them coming after me. That’s why I’ve taken the precautions I have.”

“Well, it makes more sense for them to try to kill me if they think Mom and I witnessed something or had some knowledge of their activities,” Vince said.

“I still don’t believe The Children of the Night were the ones responsible for your assassination attempt,” Mike said. “What happened at the airport was too brazen, too out in the open.”

Frank nodded. “The Children of the Night are secretive. They’d rather make it look like an accident.”

“Or like Maggie’s murder?” Reverend Powell asked.

“Yes,” Frank said. “In fact, that’s one of their strengths. Making select murders appear to be the work of some deranged lunatic, sprinkle some occult-like symbols in the mix and that just stirs things up. These guys feed on this kind of chaos.”

“They feed on it,” Mike continued, “because it diverts attention away from them. The authorities go after their own pre-conceived notion of what a Satanist is supposed to be and that’s why you always hear about them arresting heavy metal teenagers. And while so-called ‘occult-experts’ are training law enforcement and church officials to be aware of Satanists by the kind of music kids are listening to, or the way they dress or wear their hair, or the kind of jewelry or tattoos they may have, the real culprits are right in front of them.” Mike cast his gaze across the table, like a professor sizing his class up. “They’re wearing the cloak of respectability. They’re the lawyers, the police officers that are drumming up these so-called ‘facts.’ They’re the businessmen that are funding their operations. They’re the ministers who are working for the light during the day, but when night falls they take off their clerical collars and bow before the Prince of Darkness behind closed doors.”

Reverend Powell appeared to think about this. “What you’re saying is…”

“Crazy?” Mike grinned slightly.

“Not in the least bit,” Reverend Powell said. “In fact, it’s something that I can believe very easily.”

Mike nodded. “Let me give you a little crash course in the Black Arts, or at least as they pertain to The Children of the Night.” He reiterated what he’d told Vince a few nights ago about The Children of the Night fostering the urban legends about Satanists infiltrating popular music and taking over the day care centers. “And the Christian community has bought right into it.”

Reverend Powell nodded, still looking angry, but appearing to calm down from his sudden outburst at Frank. “I can see what you mean. I’ve always held the notion that the devil would do everything he could do to spread lies and false witness among the body of Christ. I’ve never subscribed to many of the urban legends surrounding Satan’s influence on the world. But when you put things in this perspective, I see that his influence is working in the world in the same powerful way. It’s just…more subtle.”

“It’s a form of psychological warfare,” Frank said.

“I thought you held to the notion that all this was a bunch of gobbledy-gook?” Hank said, turning to Frank with a frown.

“I do,” Frank said with a smile. “That these people believe their theology is true.”

“Well,” Hank said, “no matter what you believe, perhaps it’s a good thing we’re joining forces. I think we need somebody to fight them on a spiritual level. You, obviously, feel otherwise, although I do not for a moment disagree with that method. I think it’s good to work on both levels.”

“We think so, too,” Mike said, quickly. “That’s why we decided to approach you.”

Hank Powell nodded. “So I guess we need to talk strategy now.”

They talked strategy for nearly an hour. Vince sat back and listened as Mike and Frank talked to Hank about the various ways to approach this. Mike and Frank were very well versed in the background of the cult, and listening to them talk was like listening in on a well-planned strategy for battle. They discussed turning all of the evidence they’d collected, including the box containing the photos and news clippings, over to William Grecko. Reverend Powell asked if they were confident a proper Federal investigation would be started. Mike revealed that William had very strong FBI contacts who were unconnected to the group; they could pull the right strings that would result in arrests. Frank sheepishly admitted that similar federal investigations had always blown up. “Basically you need somebody to infiltrate them to get the proper evidence,” he said. “Everything we’ve collected is circumstantial. But it’s a lot more than what other people have collected. In fact, it’s pretty goddamned solid.”

“What kind of a risk do you suppose there is for one of you infiltrating the group?” Reverend Powell asked, his features serious and penetrating.

“Pretty great,” Mike said.

“Not to mention impossible,” Frank said.

“You couldn’t contact your mother?” Reverend Powell asked, turning to Frank. “Sort of in the guise of a reunion type thing?”

Frank shook his head. “No way.”

“Why not?” Vince asked.

Frank turned to him. “You think I can crack her? Forget it. If what Mike’s found out is true, she and Tom are so high up in the organization they’d be impenetrable.”

Mike nodded, brow furrowed in concentration. “There’s also the possibility that making Frank’s presence known would make them aware of us.”

“Fuckin’ A,” Frank said.

Reverend Powell glowered at Frank.

“Still,” Mike said, rubbing his jaw, thinking. “It might work.” He turned to Frank. “You haven’t been in contact with your mother and Tom for almost eighteen years now, right?”

“Yeah, and I ain’t calling her sorry ass now,” Frank said, his voice rising with a hint of annoyance. “So you can forget it.”

Reverend Hank Powell’s features had softened, becoming concerned. He looked at Frank pensively, as if he were a doctor treating a patient. “What is it you’re afraid of?”

“I’m not afraid of anything,” Frank said quickly. Vince could tell that Frank was afraid of something just by the way he responded so fast. “It’s just that I don’t think contacting my mother is going to help. She’s going to wonder why I would want to see her after eighteen years. She’ll be suspicious.”

“That might be true,” Mike said, nodding. “But then again, you said yourself that the last she knew of you, you were a drug addict. You’re clean now, and that will come as a surprise. That could provide reason for your wanting to contact her.”

“Forget it!” Frank said, hissing the sentence through gritted teeth.

Reverend Powell was watching Frank with a different look; compassion. “Are you afraid of physical violence? Of some kind of physical harm coming to you?”

Frank fidgeted. “No. I…I don’t know. It’s just…”

“You’re afraid of their power,” Reverend Powell said softly. “You’re afraid of the power they have over you. You think it’s a psychological power, and I’m not going to debate that now. But you are afraid of something malignant happening to you, something that you can’t see or feel, correct?”

Hesitating for a moment, Frank nodded.

“Frank,” Reverend Powell leaned forward, staring directly into Frank’s eyes. “Do you really believe these people have supernatural powers?”

Frank looked like he was going to bounce off the walls. He cast nervous glances at Vince and Mike, and then turned to Hank. “I don’t know,” he said, his voice cracking slightly. “All I know is that…their power scares me. I’ve seen what they can do. And I’m…I’m just scared of it happening to my family.”

Hank regarded Frank solemnly. “Are you afraid they will…somehow find out what you’re up to?”

Frank nodded. “Yes.”

“And how will they find out?”

“I don’t know!” Frank yelled, now animated with worry and fear. He rose from his chair and began pacing the den. “I don’t know how they’ll find out, but they will, I just know it! I can feel it. It’s like…an instinct, my inner voice telling me that the minute I show myself they’ll be able to look into me and see my motivations. Then that will lead them to you, to my wife and kids! Christ!” He ran a hand through his long black hair, visibly shaken.

Reverend Powell remained calm. “Perhaps that’s exactly what you need,” he said.

“Whatever,” Frank said, heading to the bar. He retrieved a Coke. The others remained seated around the table, waiting for something to be said. Vince felt nervous, like everything that was happening, the bad vibes, the mixed emotions, were his entire fault.

Vince thought Reverend Powell would have sought this opportunity to proselytize to Frank but he didn’t. Instead, the preacher said, “Perhaps we should plan another method of attack. Have you thought about talking to the Pennsylvania State Police to see if they’ve discovered any new information on Maggie’s death?”

“That’s a strong possibility,” Mike said. “But that would have to be something Vince will have to do.”

“I can do it tomorrow,” Vince said.

“We can analyze whatever they tell us then,” Reverend Powell said. “If no new information is forthcoming, I wouldn’t be surprised.”

“I wouldn’t either,” Mike said. “Any clues they would have left would point at somebody else. Or nowhere at all.”

“What about the attempt on your own life?” Reverend Powell asked Vince. “Have you heard anything more from the detectives investigating?”

“Nope.” Vince shook his head. “That’s something I can follow up on as well.”

“What kind of research will it take to connect the attempt on Vince’s life to this cult, The Children of the Night?” Hank asked Mike.

Mike sighed. “I really don’t know. It will be almost impossible until we hear what kind of leads the police in Irvine find.”

Reverend Powell remained silent for a moment, as if deep in thought. Frank Black remained at the bar, sipping his Coke.

“I still think a contact with Gladys Black is our best bet,” Reverend Powell said. “At least from the secular level of our investigation.”

“I’m not contacting that bitch,” Frank muttered.

“I’m no longer considering using you for that option,” Reverend Powell said without turning around.

“I’ve got an idea,” Vince said.

Mike and Hank turned to him. Vince could feel Frank’s eyes light upon him too. “We could…or I could…get in touch with her somehow. I could go on the notion that…I’m contacting mom’s old friends and family to…tell them mom is now deceased.” He looked at Mike for some kind of approval.

“It might work,” Mike said, turning to Frank who remained silent behind the bar. “But it would have to be done with a phone call. We don’t have the time to communicate by mail.”

“How are we going to get her phone number?”

“I’ve got it,” Mike said.

“You want to contact her so fucking much,” Frank muttered from the bar, “you guys contact her. Leave me out of it.”

“And what will you do, Frank?” Reverend Powell turned toward the imposing figure who, despite his physical appearance, looked like he was scared to death. “If we contact your mother—if Vince does, rather—what will you do?”

“I could ask you the same question?” Frank shot back, defiant.

“I’ll be praying for guidance and strength for all of us,” Reverend Powell replied. “The Lord hasn’t failed us yet and I don’t believe He will. And God forgive me for this hint of self-righteousness, but I believe we need somebody who is a Christian in this battle. Because, my friends, while you see this battle as a secular one, I see it as a spiritual one first and foremost. And while I join you in the physical aspects of this case with as much vigor as you, I have the spiritual background to arm ourselves against the forces of darkness.” He cast his gaze across each of them, turning to Frank who met his gaze with equal determination. “I can sense your fear. And I can sympathize. We are dealing with the forces of darkness, there is no doubt about that. Our enemy is great, both in spiritual prowess but in physical strength as well. They have their agents of destruction, their assassins, and they have the uncanny ability to work like the mafia.”

Frank huffed. “You can say that again!”

“I will do everything physically to help the three of you,” Reverend Powell continued. “And I will act as a spiritual advisor in the fight and work at breaking down the forces of darkness through prayer. If you’d like, I can even make the call to Gladys myself. I can do so on the grounds that as Maggie’s friend, I came across her name and phone number and wanted to inform her of her sudden passing.” He looked at Mike pensively. “What do you think?”

“It might work,” Mike said, turning to Frank. “It just might. As long as you…”

“I’ll keep my occupation a secret from her,” Reverend Powell said, nodding. “Deception can work for the Lord, too.”

“Why don’t we sleep on it,” Mike suggested. “Tomorrow is Thursday. We’ll have three hours tomorrow morning to finalize our plans by the time the west coast wakes up.”

Vince nodded. Frank looked like he agreed with the plan, as did Reverend Powell. “Agreed,” Reverend Powell said. “We can talk more about what the rest of our plans will be for the day. I think one of those things will be for Vince to contact Tom Hoffman. I can go with him to the Warwick Township Police Station as well.”

“What about us?” Frank asked.

“Perhaps you can come with us,” Reverend Powell suggested. “There is the matter of those dead dogs to deal with. I’m sure Tom can provide you with information that wasn’t leaked to the press. We can reconvene on strategy tomorrow by noon.”

“Sounds good,” Mike said, standing up.

Vince felt better now that they had some kind of plan. As he helped clean up the basement, he couldn’t help but wish that this would be over soon. Perhaps the end was drawing near. He felt that it was.

As they ascended the stairs to the main floor of the house, Reverend Powell said, “One of you will have to sleep in the living room. I’ve got linens in the closet.”

“I can do it,” Frank said.

“Maybe we should rotate shifts,” Mike said, pausing in the living room. “One of us stay awake in the living room as a look-out for a few hours.”

“That’s a sound idea,” Hank said.

“I’ll go first,” Frank said, planting himself in an easy chair, well out of sight from outside. “It’s a little after ten o’clock now. How does three hour shifts sound?”

“Three hours is fine,” Mike said. “I’ll go next. Be sure to have a pot of coffee brewed before you wake me up.”

“Of course,” Frank said.

“I can bring a bottle of whiskey up from downstairs if you want a shot or two to help you sleep,” Reverend Powell said.

“That’ll be great,” Mike answered.

When Reverend Powell headed back downstairs for the whiskey, Mike turned to Frank and Vince. “Whatever we do tomorrow, we stick together. Even if we do meet with Sheriff Hoffman.”

“What’ll we tell him?” Vince asked.

“Leave that to me,” Mike said.

Reverend Powell returned with the Jack Daniel’s bottle and handed it to Mike. “Now I think we’d better turn in. I can take the third watch. Vince, you luck out tonight.”

“Get a good night’s sleep because tomorrow you get to be up at two in the morning,” Frank said. Vince grinned as he caught a glimpse of a smirk on Frank’s face.

“I’m in the bedroom at the end of the hall,” Reverend Powell told Frank. “And I’m armed. I know you and Mike came well armed, but is there anything else you may need?”

“I have my nine and an extra clip,” Frank said. He took the gun out of his waistband and laid it on the arm of the chair. “I’ll be fine.”

“I will, too,” Mike said.

“Okay.” Reverend Powell looked at his guests. “The beds are ready, there’s fresh towels in the linen closet and you can have the hallway bathroom. Mike, get me up at four.”

“You got it,” Mike said.

With a curt nod, Reverend Powell retreated down the hallway to the master bedroom.

“Well, I’m turning in, too,” Mike said. “Will you be alright, Frank?”

“Yeah.”

“Okay.” He turned and headed toward one of the bedrooms.

Vince turned to Frank and shrugged. “I don’t feel tired yet.”

“You’re welcome to hang out with me.”

Vince thought about it for a moment. What he really wanted to do was call Tracy, but he knew Mike would probably be able to hear him in the next room. He knew there was no way he would be able to get out of Frank’s sight long enough to steal downstairs and use his cell phone. He sat down on the sofa reluctantly, facing his old childhood friend in the darkened living room.

They remained seated in the darkness for a minute. The outside shadows were long and dark and the only sounds were those of the crickets chirping in a rhythmic susurration. The toilet in the bathroom upstairs flushed and then the door opened to the sound of padding footsteps making their way to one of the bedrooms. There was the sound of a door closing and then silence.

Except for the crickets.

Vince looked out the window. The curtains were drawn, but there was a thin line between them that he could see out of. What he saw wasn’t much; he tried to see into the darkness, but he knew there wasn’t much beyond the front porch except the long driveway that led to the lonely two lane country road and beyond that a vast corn field.

“I’ve always wondered what it would be like to live in a place like this,” Frank said.

“Yeah?”

“Yeah,” Frank replied. Vince’s vision had adjusted to the darkness in the living room, and he could make out Frank seated comfortably on the chair. The handgun was on the arm of the chair, Frank’s hand inches from it. Frank was looking out the window, too. He turned to Vince. “I’ve always lived in cities. Never lived in a place like this before. I’ve always dreamed of escaping from the noise and the shit and just…hiding out here.”

“It’s definitely a great place to get away from the city,” Vince said.

“Yeah.” Frank’s voice had taken on a reflective tone. “Maybe…when this is all over I can…come out to a place like this. Just pack up Brandy and the kids and bring them out to a place somewhere far away from all the shit big cities breed. Violence, despair, poverty, pollution. You know…?”

“With the work you do, you could make a nice living quite easily out here,” Vince said.

“Yeah.” Frank nodded. He turned to Vince. “What was it like for you growing up out here?”

Vince thought about it. When he’d first come to Lititz last week he’d been instantly transported back through time to when he was young and innocent, ready to face the world. He remembered driving by his old friend John’s house, seeing the family car that he remembered from those long ago days and resisting the urge to get out and walk up to the front porch and knock on the door. He remembered hating Lititz when he first moved out here. He’d been plucked out of his junior year in high school in Toronto without warning and whisked almost five hundred miles away, to a place in the middle of nowhere. He’d missed his friends in Canada terribly, but adjusted to life in the country fairly quickly. He told Frank this in quiet tones as the two men sat in the darkness, Frank’s fingers caressing the handgun. He told Frank how he kept expecting to run into people he’d gone to high school with and how that hadn’t happened yet. “Do you want it to happen?” Frank asked, interrupting Vince’s monologue.

“I don’t know,” Vince said. “I guess part of me does because…it would bring me back to those days to when…I was innocent, I guess.”

“You think that coming in contact with some element of your past will bring the innocence back,” Frank said.

Vince nodded. “Yeah. But I know that most of the friends I made here left for college when I did. I kept in contact with some of them, but I haven’t heard from a lot of them in years. They probably don’t live here anymore.”

“You’ve talked to me about your mother and her friend Lillian before,” Frank said. “Do you remember anything that stands out from the time you were living here?”

Vince thought about this. There really wasn’t anything that stuck out as particularly strange or odd. There was nothing in mom’s behavior or what she said that would have suggested to Vince even then that she’d lived the life of a deranged cultist in the late sixties. “No. I can see why mom became such a Christian fanatic, though. The things she was into in California were—”

“Pretty evil?” Frank chuckled. He leaned back in his chair. “Yeah, even though I don’t believe in all this heaven and hell bullshit, I still don’t see the attraction of worshipping a deity that represents evil.”

They talked some more, mostly trading stories of what they remembered from those times. “All I can really remember is when you used to come over,” Vince said, sitting back on the sofa. “And some of the others came by with their kids as well. I don’t really remember many of them.”

“You remembered Nellie.”

“Yeah, I remember her.” The image that came to Vince of Nellie was one of a little blond haired girl around his own age with fair skin, always happy and laughing, always willing to play whatever it was the boys had in mind. “She seemed…I don’t know…she seemed kinda normal.”

“What do you remember about her parents?” Frank asked.

Vince thought hard to remember. “Her dad wasn’t around much. I…I want to say that he was a truck driver because I remember her talking about that.”

“That’s what he told Nellie and her mother,” Frank said. “Nellie was one of the lucky ones. She wasn’t subjected to the group in any way. Her mother wasn’t a member, but her father was. He was a contract killer. The truck driver ruse was just a cover. He’d leave for the road in truck driver garb, and he’d call in to home on the CB frequencies truckers used to checkin. He was set-up so that by outward appearances he was a truck driver. He was incorporated as a carrier and everything. He even worked with a dispatching service to field messages.”

“Shit,” Vince whispered. He’d never known, had never suspected. “Did my mom know?”

“I suppose she did,” Frank said. “Mine sure as fuck did. Their job was to keep the wool pooled over Lucy’s eyes. Lucy was Nellie’s mom. Remember her?”

Vince’s memory of Lucy was even more vague. He shook his head. “No, I’m afraid I don’t.”

Frank was pensive from his spot on the sofa. “Lucy eventually filed for divorce from her husband. Even Mike and I could never get his real name. He went under a lot of aliases.”

“You’ve…done some checking on Nellie? What…what ever happened to her?”

“She’s married with four kids,” Frank said. “Her husband’s a mechanic. She goes to church every Sunday with her husband and kids. Her husband is part owner of the garage he works out of and she manages the business end from home. By outward appearances, she appears to have a good life.”

“Appears to have a good life?”

Frank was silent for a moment. “You’ve got to understand, Vince. These people are really good at blending in. They’re like fucking chameleons. That’s why we didn’t want you blabbing everything to your girlfriend, Tracy. She appears normal too. So do the rest of your friends. Brian Dennison and his wife, the people you hang out with at the office. Your late wife. The truth of the matter is, they’re really good at concealing their true selves.”

“Now you’re just being paranoid.”

“We’ve identified some of them,” Frank continued. “By outward appearances, the ones we’ve identified seem on the up-and-up too. Community service leaders, doctors, lawyers, respected business people. We were able to ID them as cult members due to some stealth investigation into their background and matching their known associates. I also did some light surveillance on a few. We did the same thing with your friends, as well as people Mike and I know. They all checked out. But then, we did the same kind of investigation on acquaintances and friends of the folks that know us…that know you…and do you know what we found?”

Vince shook his head.

“We went back two and three degrees of separation on all known acquaintances and friends of everybody involved. On the surface, they checked out fine. But we found an anomaly in one. He almost passed with flying colors, but there was something about his background that seemed a bit off, so he merited further scrutiny. And…well, to tell you the truth, it’s still inconclusive as to this guy being a member of the cult. It could go either way. And his outward veneer is rock solid, just like everybody else.” Frank paused. “That’s what I mean by when I say we can’t be too sure about anybody. Dig?”

Vince didn’t know what else to say. Frank was silent as they sat, looking toward the window out at the little sliver of darkness between the curtains. Finally, Vince said, “What do you think will happen?”

“With us?”

“Yeah.”

“I don’t know. But I know what I want to do.”

“What’s that?”

Frank turned to Vince, fixing him with a piercing gaze. “I want to kill my mother and I want to kill my step-father. And then I want to kill Samuel Garrison. I want to blow all those motherfuckers to hell.”

Vince shuddered. Frank’s tone of voice suggested he meant everything he said.

Vince wound up staying up until one a.m. with Frank, mostly talking, their voices lowered so they wouldn’t wake up the rest of the house. Vince tried to keep the conversation away from the topic of why they were here, instead focusing on what he’d been up to the last twenty years, trying to coax Frank to tell him more of the same and letting the conversation run from there. Because they’d led such rich, varied lives, they talked about a wide range of subjects: music, politics, literature, economics, travel. Vince could have stayed up all night talking to Frank. When Frank rose from his chair and went to the kitchen and began preparing a pot of coffee, Vince glanced at his watch. “My God, it’s almost one!”

“Yeah,” Frank said, looking through the cupboards for coffee filters. “Time flies when you’re having fun, doesn’t it?”

And with that, Vince decided to call it a night and headed for his bedroom.

Chapter Fourteen

REVEREND POWELL WOKE Vince up at eight a.m. “Rise and shine,” he said, opening the door and poking his head in. “Frank’s making breakfast. Come out and join us. We got a lot to talk about.”

Vince groaned and rolled over. He rubbed his eyes and glanced out the window. He could tell by the sunlight streaming through the curtains that it was going to be a warm day.

He shuffled out of bed, pulled on a pair of jeans, and padded to the bathroom. He splashed water on his face, finger-combed his hair, and reached for the toiletry bag he’d left on the counter last night before turning in. He brushed his teeth hurriedly, wondering what happened in the last seven hours or so that he’d been asleep.

When he emerged from the bathroom the scent of sizzling bacon and freshly brewed coffee greeted him. Frank was standing at the stove, cracking eggs into a skillet. “How do you like your eggs, Vince?”

Vince rubbed his eyes again. Frank was standing in front of the stove wearing a pair of shorts and nothing else. In addition to his heavily tattooed arms, his chest and back were tattooed as well. So was his right thigh; some kind of design snaked down below the hem of his shorts, stopping just shy of his knee.

“Well?” Frank was waiting for an answer.

“Over-easy, I guess.” He entered the kitchen, honing in on the coffee. “You can cook, too?”

Frank snorted. “What, you don’t think that I can cook? Shit!” Frank cracked two more eggs into the skillet and turned to another skillet, turning the bacon over with a pair of tongs. “I’ve been on my own since I was twelve years old, dude. I can probably cook Emeril or Wolfgang Puck out of the kitchen.”

“I can vouch for that,” Mike Peterson said. He was seated at the dining room table, a newspaper spread out before him. He was wearing a pair of wire-rimmed glasses. He took a sip of coffee. “The man can make a mean casserole.”

“No shit?”

“No shit,” Frank said. He put two slices of bread in the toaster. He turned to Vince, looking more awake than Vince felt even though he’d gotten less sleep. “That’s the trouble with people like you, Vince. You take one look at me and figure because of the long hair and all the tattoos that the only thing I can fix is my motorcycle. I’ve never owned a motorcycle. What they don’t know is that I can cook any damn thing I want to, can brew a great pot of coffee, and can write most best-selling authors under the table even though I’m not being paid to do it.” He grinned. “I’m also the best husband and father in the world!”

“Of course you are,” Reverend Powell said, returning to the kitchen from the master bedroom. He’d changed into fresh clothing—clean blue jeans and a white cotton T-shirt. Reverend Powell looked to be in a better mood this morning, too. He poured himself a cup of coffee. “Frank, what you’re preparing smells wonderful. Vince! Have some coffee and join us at the table. We have a lot to talk about.”

Vince sat down at the table with his coffee and took a glance through the Sports page of the Lancaster Intelligencer. Frank puttered in the kitchen, tending to the eggs and bacon, serving them up as they were finished. By the time he seated himself at the table Vince was already halfway through his breakfast, which also consisted of a glass of orange juice. “This is great,” Vince nodded, wiping his mouth with a napkin. “Thanks, Frank.”

“Don’t mention it,” Frank said, digging in.

“I’ve already told this to Frank and Mike,” Reverend Powell said, pausing from his breakfast. “I spoke to Tom Hoffman this morning. He wants to meet them.”

Vince glanced at Mike as he chewed on a piece of bacon. Mike nodded. “I think it’s a good idea.”

“Tom Hoffman is a brother in the Lord,” Reverend Powell said, returning to his breakfast. “And he’s a solid law enforcement man. He also has first-hand knowledge of the crime scene at Maggie’s home, so he’s seen what we’re up against. I didn’t tell him everything we discussed last night, but…he seems to have a feeling for what’s going on.”

Vince looked at Mike. “Are we going to tell him?”

Mike shrugged. “I don’t know. I want to meet him first.” He looked at Frank. “Right?”

Frank nodded as he dipped his toast in egg yolk. “Yeah, I think it’s a good idea. But I still say we play our cards close and don’t reveal too much. I want to check the guy out.”

Mike turned to Reverend Powell. “Do you have a personal computer?”

“Yes. In my office.”

“Mind if I use it?” Frank asked.

“No, I don’t see why not. Can I ask why?”

“Just some things I want to do,” Frank replied, taking a bite of egg-yolk dipped toast.

“You want to check out Tom Hoffman, is that right?” Reverend Powell sounded both surprised and slightly angry at the idea.

“Hank,” Mike said in a soothing tone. “We have to make sure—”

“Make sure of what? I can assure you that Tom Hoffman is a man of good standing. Why, he’s a deacon at First Presbyterian Church here in Lititz!”

“I understand that and I apologize,” Mike said. “But we have to check. Please respect our cautionary approach to this, Hank, but—”

“No, you’re right,” Hank Powell said, holding up his hand. He attacked his breakfast, spooning eggs and bacon into his mouth. “You guys have been in this battle longer than I have. You know what we’re up against. I won’t say anything.”

They were silent for a minute. Vince could tell that Hank Powell was irritated at the thought of Tom Hoffman being checked out. Vince would have felt the same way last week, but now he felt glad they were taking such extreme measures. They had to.

Mike broke the brief silence as he finished his breakfast. He took a sip of coffee. “Okay, here’s the plan. We meet briefly with Tom Hoffman. Where did you say we were to meet him, Reverend?”

“The Family Cupboard Restaurant and Buffet on Newport Road at ten-thirty,” Hank said, still eating his breakfast. “He has an early shift today. Ten-thirty is his break-time. I told him we’d meet him there for coffee.”

“Fine,” Mike said. “That gives us enough time to grab quick showers and head over. When we get there, Vince will have to ask about the investigation. I’ll be acting as his lawyer and Frank will act as a body guard.”

Frank snorted. “Falling back on that cliché again, I see.”

Mike ignored Frank’s wisecrack. “Naturally, you’re interested as a friend of the family. If Tom Hoffman refers us to the state police or a homicide detective, we go from there. If he has information he’s willing to share, we listen and take notes. If he tries to solicit information from us, we don’t tell him anything we discussed last night.”

“What do we tell him?” Vince asked.

“We tell him we have reason to believe that the people responsible for your mother’s death may be trying to kill you, too,” Mike said. “We don’t want him to find out on his own. He can learn this easily himself. And if he finds out we’ve been withholding information, he may not cooperate.”

“You’re damned right he won’t want to cooperate,” Reverend Powell muttered. He’d put away his breakfast in less than two minutes. He scooped up the rest of the egg yolk with the last remaining piece of toast and finished it off.

“Tom Hoffman needs to know Vince may be in danger because it might help him give us more information,” Mike continued. He took a sip of coffee. “If it does, and if it feels right, we can talk later about sharing more information with him. We can discuss that after our meeting with him at the Family Cupboard. Then we’ll come back here, Frank will do some checking on the computer, Vince will call the Irvine P.D., then we’ll take a look at the report on Tom that comes up and decide whether or not we want to meet with him again.”

“Report?” Reverend Powell asked. “You guys have access to some secret database or something?”

Frank Black finished his breakfast. He took a hearty drink of orange juice. “Mike developed a complex database that has all the available information on Children of the Night cult members and their affiliates, including photographs, physical descriptions, aliases, that kind of thing.”

“Plus, Frank has a way to access certain computer systems and files on known cult members,” Mike said. “It shouldn’t take long to run a check on Tom Hoffman.”

“Well, you won’t find anything,” Reverend Powell said.

“All right,” Mike said, standing up. “Let’s get a move on!”

FRANK BLACK STUCK out like a sore thumb as the four men entered the Family Cupboard Family Restaurant and Buffet on Newport Road. Mike Peterson, Hank Powell, and Vince Walters looked like the kind of men that would frequent the place—farmers, real-estate agents perhaps, or maybe salesmen. But Frank Black, with his black Levi jeans, his Anthrax T-shirt, his black leather jacket and gloves, snakeskin cowboy boots, his dark sunglasses and his long black hair, looked like a biker from hell.

At Mike’s insistence, all four men were armed. Reverend Powell had given Vince a Kahr K9 compact 9mm handgun and an extra seven round magazine. Vince had started to tuck the gun into his waistband the way he’d seen Frank do it, then had second thoughts. Suppose the gun accidentally went off and blew his balls off? Instead, he put the gun in his right front hip pocket and the extra magazine in his left pocket. He transferred his wallet to his back hip pocket.

He knew Frank was carrying his handgun in his waistband, and he probably had a second firearm somewhere in his jacket. Mike was carrying some kind of semi-automatic handgun in his waistband, and he’d watched as Reverend Powell slipped a gun similar to the one he’d given him in a shoulder holster then drawn a vest over it, concealing it.

If Tom Hoffman saw that they were packing heat he didn’t indicate that he cared. He was seated in a back booth and he nodded at them as the four men approached him. “Good morning, gentlemen,” he said.

Introductions were made and Frank drew up an extra chair. A waitress approached and Tom Hoffman asked for a pot of coffee. Once coffee was served and the small talk was out of the way, Tom got right down to business. He looked at Vince. “Reverend Powell tells me you ran into a little bit of trouble out in California when you got home last week.”

Vince nodded. He told the cop a simplified version of the attempt on his life. “That’s why I called Mike,” he said. “I thought he’d be able to help, and he did. He hired Frank as my bodyguard until this thing blows over and that’s why we’re out here, to see if any progress has been made on my mother’s murder.”

“Plus, the Irvine P.D. suggested to Vince that he might want to get out of town as soon as possible while they continue their investigation on that end,” Mike reiterated.

Tom Hoffman listened, rubbing his chin as he nodded. “Do you mind if I call Irvine P.D. to verify your story?”

“Go right ahead,” Mike said.

“I’m asking Vince,” Tom Hoffman said, not breaking his gaze from Vince.

“No,” Vince said, feeling under the pressure of scrutiny from Tom Hoffman. “I don’t mind.”

Tom Hoffman turned to Mike and Frank Black. “And what do you hope to gain by coming out here, Mr. Peterson?”

“Some more information on Maggie Walter’s death,” Mike answered. “And for Vince and Reverend Powell to go through the rest of Maggie’s belongings to try to uncover some part of her background that might give us some answers to what’s happening.”

“And what exactly is happening, Mr. Peterson?” Tom Hoffman looked both wary and on the defensive.

“Somebody is trying to kill Vince,” Mike said. He took a sip of coffee and met the law enforcement officer’s gaze. His features were set in grim determination. “Maybe the same person or persons who killed his mother. I’d like to find out why.”

“The person who killed Maggie was a deranged drug addict,” Tom Hoffman said, practically spitting the words out. “Probably broke into her house to find money for drugs and she surprised him. It’s an open and shut case. Even the state police think so.”

“Who’s investigating her death?” Mike asked.

“Why do you want to know?”

“Tom,” Reverend Powell said gently. “They’re only trying to help.”

Tom Hoffman turned to his friend. “And I’m trying to get to the bottom of this, Reverend! I don’t know this man from Adam. And I’m not going to give him an ounce of information until I call California and verify Vince’s story.”

“Why would you think I would lie to you about somebody trying to kill me?” Vince asked.

“You tell me,” Tom Hoffman said. He leaned forward, jabbing an index finger at Vince. “You think the wacko who tried to kill you and your little girlfriend are the same people that killed your mother? What basis do you have for that? For one, your mother was cut the hell up! Some deranged weirdo tortured her, then cut her up and painted satanic symbols on the wall in her blood! That’s a hell of a lot different than some guy taking a shot at you in a crowded parking lot. And believe me, the State Police, even the FBI, are going to agree with me.”

“That may be true,” Mike said calmly. “But we would like to investigate all of our options. All we’re asking for is a little bit of cooperation so we can at least rule that out.”

“What makes you think I can help you?” Tom asked, still looking defiant.

“You’re close to the investigation,” Mike said. “And we may be able to help.”

“If you’re withholding information, I’d like to know,” Tom said, gripping his coffee cup tightly. “Withholding information on a federal crime is a criminal offense.”

“We’re not withholding information,” Mike said. “We’re just as baffled by all of this as you are. We’re just—”

“Then why did you say you might be able to help?” Tom sneered.

“Tom,” Reverend Powell said, his voice soothing. “Please. For my sake, if you can help us in any way, please…all we’re asking is for a little cooperation.”

Tom glowered at them. “If it weren’t for Reverend Powell I’d haul all three of you to the station,” he said. “I’d turn you all over to the state police. You know that, don’t you?”

“Yes,” Mike said, his voice calm. “But you wouldn’t get anywhere. We don’t know anything about Maggie’s murder. That’s why we came to you.”

“We need your help, Tom,” Vince said, hoping a word or two from him would make a difference.

Tom shot Vince a glare that pinned him to his seat. It looked like he was just about to say something when Mike interrupted him. “I’d like to ask you a question about a crime involving a pair of skinned dogs that were found a few months ago. Is that okay?”

Tom whirled back to Mike, a look of surprise on his face at the sudden change of subject. “Why? That doesn’t have anything to do with Maggie’s murder.” Vince caught the look on Tom’s face and could tell that the mention of the skinned dogs had registered something: a look of stark fear.

“Humor us,” Mike said. “And if it’s what we think it might be, I’ll tell you why it might relate to Maggie’s murder.”

Tom’s eyes were narrowed in suspicion. He licked his lips nervously, glanced behind them and around the restaurant as if to see if they could be overheard. He hunkered down over the table and the others leaned forward. “Okay, I’m just going to spit it out. You’ll probably think I’m crazy, but I know what I’ve seen, and I trust the people I’ve heard this from. I also trust that Reverend Powell will believe what I have to say, too.”

Reverend Powell nodded and encouraged Tom Hoffman to continue.

“Okay, here it is then,” Tom Hoffman said. He took a sip of coffee. “Those dogs that were found skinned to death in that field this past April? Well, I was the first officer on the scene when the call came through. Now, I’ve seen dead animals before. Live around here, you get used to seeing road kill and such. But these dogs…they looked like they were definitely killed by humans. Someone had not only skinned them, but their blood was completely drained from their bodies.”

“How do you know that?” Frank asked.

“There wasn’t a drop of blood at the scene,” Tom Hoffman answered, looking at Frank briefly before turning his attention to the rest of them. “One of the veterinarians said that he couldn’t determine where the dogs were killed, but that didn’t matter. We didn’t find any blood at the scene. The vet, he thinks whoever killed them drained it with a syringe or something.”

Mike and Frank nodded. Hank searched their features. “Does this mean anything to you?” he asked.

“It might,” Mike said, nodding at Tom. “Go on.”

“The lady that lives across the road from the field the dogs were found in claims she didn’t hear anything the night before,” Tom said quietly. “Neither did her neighbors. I had a list of possible suspects, kids in the area that I thought might have been responsible. Misfit gothic kids, Marilyn Manson fans. I paid them a visit, questioned them. They claimed they didn’t know anything about it. I asked some of them if they knew anybody that could have done something like this. They wouldn’t talk. One of these kids, a high school dropout named Clint Jackson, has a history of domestic battery against his mother. He’s also the suspect in some vandalism at the local high school where he painted occult symbols on some lockers. I told him I had him dead to rights on the vandalism charge, told him he could be facing some serious charges if he didn’t tell me what he knew about the mutilated dogs. At first he wouldn’t talk. Then he got kinda scared and he and one of his other friends kept giving each other these side-glances. His friend, a kid named David Lindsey, told Clint, ‘We can tell him. Those guys aren’t here anymore. Besides, they ain’t gonna know.’ I asked who ‘those guys’ were, and Clint finally told me what happened. He said that a few weeks before, a couple older kids he hadn’t met before started hanging around Nino’s on Main Street, where these kids like to gather. Clint and his friends started talking to them, and were invited to their car to smoke some grass. Well, they had lots of dope with them, and Clint and David thought this was just great. They spent the next few weeks with these guys. Said they were staying in a motel on Route 772, that they were sorta passing through town. They’d go to their room a few times and hang out, get high, watch TV, shoot the shit, that kind of thing.”

“Who were these guys?” Mike asked.

“I’m gettin’ to that,” Tom Hoffman said. He took a sip of coffee. “Well, Clint said these guys gained their confidence by telling them they were into the same thing they were into: heavy metal music, drugs, sex, all that shit. Even told them they knew a lot about the occult. Naturally, Clint and David ate it up. Clint and his buddies started bitching to them about Lititz, about the church, telling them they felt that they were outsiders and their new friends exploited that. They asked Clint if he and his friends wanted to get back at the people that were persecuting them. Clint said he did. Then the guys started asking them questions about certain people in the community, nothing too personal, just stuff like, who has a lot of land, where they could get certain things—”

“Did Clint give you names?” Mike asked.

Tom Hoffman looked irritated at being asked this question a second time. “Yes, he did. Said the names they gave him were Mark Lancaster and Glenn Wilson. That they were in their early twenties and looked pretty normal, like your average jock-type guy. The Glenn Wilson fella had some tribal tattoos on his arms and a diamond studded earring, and the other guy, Mark Lancaster, he looked pretty normal. No discerning marks.”

Mike and Frank nodded, absorbed in the story. Vince and Hank Powell leaned closer.

“A few nights later Mark Lancaster asked Clint where they could get pure-bred German Shepherds,” Tom continued. “Clint told him there was a breeder in Manheim and gave him directions. Apparently Glenn checked it out. Then a few nights later they held some sort of satanic ritual in their motel room.”

Hank Powell gasped. Vince held his breath in anticipation. Frank and Mike looked like they’d heard the story before. Mike nodded, encouraging Tom Hoffman to continue.

“That’s how Clint described it, a satanic ritual,” Tom Hoffman said, licking his lips. He said these guys used some kind of white powder to make a pentagram on the carpet, then they burnt some candles.”

“What color?” Frank asked.

Tom shrugged. “I don’t know. The kid didn’t say.”

“Does it matter?” Reverend Hoffman asked Frank.

“It might.” Frank nodded for Tom to continue.

“Clint said that he and his friends had an informal coven, but that they’d only held one ritual.” He took a sip of coffee, his voice low. “He said…well, basically he sounded embarrassed when he told me about it. Said that they kinda fumbled through the ritual and that they were stoned out of their minds on weed. He and David and the other kids they hung out with weren’t that serious about it, and he also admitted that they didn’t know what they were doing. Clint wound up improvising to make it sound authentic. But when they held this ritual with these guys, it was different. It was like…they were in the presence of somebody who…who actually knew what they were doing. And that they…were actually harnessing…conjuring a power.”

Reverend Powell looked grave. Vince felt his heart pounding. Tom Hoffman continued. “So they held this ritual, which basically consisted of this Mark Lancaster character calling a benediction to Satan, then instructing Clint and David to invoke their loyalty to the devil. Then they were asked if they wanted to go further. When Clint asked what they would have to do, Mark said they would have to sign a piece of paper in blood, giving up their souls. Well, David and Clint were scared, but Clint is a sharp kid. He may be a screwed up kid, but he knows right from wrong even if he has gotten into trouble before. And he thinks fast. So what he did was he shook his head and told these guys that he wanted to think about it before he made such a big decision of faith, and he asked if they could respect that. And Mark and Glenn said, yeah, they could respect that. And they concluded the ritual.”

“What happened then?” Mike asked.

“They hung out, did some partying,” Tom Hoffman drained his coffee cup. “Clint told me that even though he felt better about declining the offer, he still felt that he had taken a part in something that was both big and dangerous. He said that David later told him he felt the same way. They actually left the motel early that night but before they left, Mark pulled them aside, said that they would be coming to town later this year and he’d give them a call. Well, Clint and David hadn’t given these guys any clue as to where they lived. The only places they’d gone to together were the motel, Nino’s, and driving around various parts of Lititz, mostly by the town square or the library. Clint started rattling off a fake phone number when Mark kinda grinned at him and said, ‘you can’t fool me, Clint. Your number’s 626-7367.’ And Clint, he said he couldn’t help it, but he felt himself go faint. Said he probably looked as pale as a ghost. He said Dave was literally quivering beside him with fear.

“They kinda stood there for a minute, facing each other. Then Clint somehow got his composure and said, ‘yeah, that’s right. What was I thinking?’ And he and David started backing out of the motel. Mark just kinda stood there grinning at them and told them that when they came back he would know where to find them. And then he rattled off their addresses and Clint and David just kinda nodded along and said, ‘yeah, come look us up,’ and then they got out of there.”

“So in a very subtle way, these two characters were threatening Clint and David,” Reverend Powell mused.

“Yes,” Tom Hoffman said. He looked at Mike, some of the hardness in his features creeping back. “Clint said he and David left the room and wouldn’t speak about the incident again. Clint tried to bring it up to David when word got out that those skinned dogs were found, but David refused to speak of it. He said he didn’t want to hear about it again. Said he was waiting for school to end so he could get out of Lititz for good.”

“Did he?” Mike asked.

“Yeah, in a way,” Tom Hoffman said. “Two weeks ago he got picked up in Lancaster on a B&E. His family hasn’t been able to raise bail, so he’s sitting in Lancaster County Jail.”

“And Clint?” Mike asked.

“He’s gone,” Tom Hoffman said. His lips were pressed together in a thin, bloodless grimace. “For a while there after I questioned him, I thought he’d skipped town, but I stopped by his house and checked on him a few days after I talked to him. He hadn’t left his house. And he refused to talk to me. I had to talk to his father through the screen door. His father actually sounded pleased at Clint’s behavior and saw no cause for alarm. He seemed to think his son has turned over a new leaf.” His lips turned upward in a slight smile. “Says all the boy does is sit in his room and read the Bible.”

“The Lord is working on him,” Reverend Powell said. “May He protect Clint in His loving grace.”

“He’s afraid to run into these characters again,” Frank said.

Tom Hoffman nodded. “That’s what I think.”

“Did the behavior get worse with the news of Maggie Walter’s death?” Mike asked.

“I asked Mr. Jackson that a few days after Maggie’s body was found,” Tom Hoffman said. “Don’t ask me why, but I had a hunch. Ben Jackson said that when Clint heard about Maggie’s death he went straight to his room and closed the door. He said he heard his son in there talking to himself, like he was crying or pleading with somebody. He said he tried knocking on Clint’s door to see what the trouble was but Clint wouldn’t come out. Said he was too scared. When Ben asked what he was scared of, Clint mumbled something. Ben thought what Clint mumbled was, ‘all my fault.’ ”

“Would Ben Jackson be the type of man to think this to mean that his son was implicating himself in Maggie Walter’s murder?” Mike Peterson asked.

“That’s what I thought,” Tom Hoffman said. “But I didn’t ask him that. I asked Ben what he thought this meant and he just shrugged and said, ‘aw, you know kids. He’s probably thinking I’m bugging him for something and he just snapped. He’ll get over it.’ ”

“Did he?” Mike asked.

“I don’t know.” Tom Hoffman looked at all four men gathered around the table. “I headed over there the next day and Ben told me that his son had suddenly packed a few days worth of clothes, took all the money in the house, and skipped town. He and his wife were just debating whether they should phone the police and report a theft when Mrs. Jackson realized it was probably their son that had taken the money.”

“Has Clint been in contact with his parents since he left?” Frank asked.

“No.” Tom Hoffman looked grave again. “He hasn’t. But get this.” He leaned forward. “Clint’s girlfriend comes up to me later that day. She tracked me down at the station actually, and told me she had some information she wanted to share. She said she was worried about Clint. I asked her if she knew where Clint was, and apparently she didn’t even know he’d skipped town.”

“He was still seeing her the whole time he was taking a sabbatical from his friends?” Frank asked.

“Yes,” Tom Hoffman nodded. “Apparently she used to sneak into his room through the window. I asked her about Clint’s sudden change in behavior and she told me everything I just told you. And what she told me was pretty much what I was suspecting. Clint was scared to death of Mark and Glenn, and felt his life was in danger. He said that these guys, whoever they were, had been the real deal when it comes to this devil stuff. Clint and David and Mary Ann and these other kids, they weren’t really cult members or anything. They were just a bunch of stupid kids looking for something to offend their parents and the community with. And the occult and satanic trappings are the way to do it. They knew this, and they flaunted it. It made them feel important and powerful, like they were apart from society. They didn’t really believe in it.”

“But Mark Lancaster and Glenn Wilson did,” Mike said.

“Exactly! And Clint could tell the minute they held the ritual that these guys weren’t fooling around. They were serious about it, and that scared Clint and David. And I think what scared them even more is that Mark displayed his powers to them. Hell, the guy knew Clint was lying when he rattled off that fake phone number. Clint said there was no way for the guy to know his phone number—his parents’ number is unlisted. And they’d never been by his house, he hadn’t even told Mark where he lived. They always met on neutral ground. There would have been no way for Mark to know anything that personal about him. But when he recited Clint’s phone number and address in that smug way of his, Clint knew he was up against something. And it scared the hell out of him.

“So he told Mary Ann everything. He told her not to tell anybody, that he was afraid of what might happen to her. Mary Ann, she knew that Clint was from a troubled background, knew he was moody—”

Mike Peterson interrupted. “What kind of troubled background did he have?”

“Ben Jackson is an abusive tyrant,” Tom Hoffman said. “Man has a rap sheet a mile long for various offences in that house. He’s been knocking Clint around since he was three years old. Helen stays with him, though. Says it’s her Christian duty to stay married to him.”

“Lord,” Reverend Powell rolled his eyes.

“That’s what I say,” Tom Hoffman said. “Mary Ann didn’t want to believe what Clint was telling her at first, but when he disappeared she knew it had to be true. She’s scared. They’re all scared.”

“Are the kids they hung out with afraid?” Frank asked.

Tom nodded. “Yeah.” Tom gripped his empty coffee cup. “Mary Ann says that she thinks these guys not only had something to do with those skinned dogs, she thinks they may have had something to do with Maggie Walters’ death.”

“How so?” Mike Peterson asked.

“Mary Ann doesn’t know,” Tom says. “She just feels they had something to do with it. She says Clint wouldn’t have run off like that so soon after Maggie turned up dead.”

Mike Peterson and Frank Black appeared to think about this. Vince’s mind was racing. He had the feeling Tom Hoffman wasn’t telling them everything. “So…you’re saying Clint’s girlfriend was spreading rumors of cult involvement just based on…their own fears?”

Tom Hoffman sighed. He looked shifty, his eyes flicking back and forth. “Listen, Mary Ann told me more, but…”

“For God’s sake, spit it out, man!” Reverend Powell hissed.

“Okay, look,” Tom Hoffman leaned forward, his voice lowered to a whisper. “I can’t tell you anymore here. We’ll have to go somewhere else, more private. Mary Ann did tell me more, and I checked it out and…and this shit is big. Real big, okay? Mary Ann doesn’t know how big it is, and I’m not going to tell her. Ignorance is bliss, right? The less she knows, the safer she is. When she told me certain things, though, I got curious and did some checking and found out shit that will blow your mind.”

“Tom,” Mike said, his voice just as low, his tone gentle and understanding. “We understand. We’re working on the same thing and we know how big this is. We understand the need for secrecy. Our plan is to gather and verify as much information as we can and take it to a trusted law enforcement official who has the power and authority to stop it. Why don’t we resume this discussion at Reverend Powell’s when your shift is over? We’ll show you some of the documents we have that will support what you’ve probably found out, and you can tell us more of what you came up with. Okay?”

Tom Hoffman nodded. He wiped his mouth with a paper napkin. He still looked nervous but he was trying very hard to rein it in. “Yeah. I’d really feel better if I knew more about what was going on.”

Reverend Powell leaned forward. “Tom, trust in the Lord and you will be safe. Nothing can hurt you if you put on the armor of God.”

“Yeah, I know.” Tom Hoffman said. He glanced at his watch. “Listen, I gotta go. My shift ends at two. I’ll meet you at Reverend Powell’s.”

“We’ll be there,” Mike said.

They rose from the table and Mike threw down some bills for the tip. They meandered to the cashier’s and Tom insisted on paying the bill. They said nothing of the topic at heart until they were outside, walking down the front steps of the restaurant.

Reverend Powell was walking next to Tom Hoffman. “Trust me, Tom. You’re safe in working with us on this. With our combined spiritual strength, and the wisdom Mike and Frank have on this dangerous cult, we will no doubt prevail. But we need your help. We’re prepared to share all available information we may have if you’re willing to work with us.”

“Count me in,” Tom said. They walked out to the parking lot and Vince saw that Tom’s patrol car was parked a few cars down from Reverend Powell’s mini-van. Frank Black was walking behind them, with Mike staying beside the Reverend and the law enforcement officer. An elderly couple was hobbling toward the restaurant; Mennonite couples with five children in tow were in the parking lot talking to a middle-aged couple. A woman with short blond hair and a man with shoulder-length black hair and a mustache were walking up to the restaurant holding the hands of a two-year old girl. The sky was cloudless and still, blue as the sea. A blond haired man in his early twenties stepped out between two parked cars in the row on Vince’s right and began walking toward the restaurant. Vince didn’t even know what was happening until he heard Frank shout just as he barreled into the blond man. “Mike!”

Mike whirled around, reaching for his weapon. Vince jumped at the sound of Frank’s voice and for a minute the images he received were a jumbled mass: a handgun clattering to the ground; Frank struggling with the blond man on the ground; the sound of slamming car doors and running footsteps and Mike yelling “Vince, duck!” Vince turned and saw two more clean-cut young men brandishing handguns cutting through the parking lot and he caught a brief glimpse of Mike raising his handgun and firing as he felt bullets whiz by, striking the car behind him.

Vince reacted on pure instinct. He slid underneath the nearest car and reached into his pocket for the semi-automatic handgun Reverend Powell had given him. He heard a volley of shots, heard shouts and screams and running feet as people ran for cover. He heard Reverend Powell cry out in pain, followed by another volley of shots and then excited shouts: “Get him, Joel, get him, get him, get hiiiimm!”

Then the scramble of running feet stopped and Vince saw a guy peering under the parked cars. The guy was two cars down from him. The man’s eyes blazed with hatred as he looked at Vince. He pointed a black handgun at him and Vince didn’t even think about it, he just pointed his own weapon and fired. He fired his weapon even as he was scrambling backward, trying to escape.

The guy squeezed off a shot of his own, then suddenly stiffened. He slumped down, eyes glazed open in death. Another sound of running feet and Vince was backing out from under the parked car, weapon held out, the cacophony of noise and panic enveloping him and then Mike was looming in front of him, his features panicked, out of breath. “Come on, let’s go!”

Vince followed Mike, still keeping his head low. They rounded a corner and came to the next lane in the parking lot. Vince nearly stopped right there, frozen with fear and panic. There were two men that Vince didn’t recognize lying on the asphalt. One of the men had been shot in the back twice; he was still clutching a nine-millimeter pistol. The other guy was lying unconscious a few feet away, bleeding from his nose and ear. The guy that had been shooting at Vince was lying on his stomach, part of his body underneath a Buick, still holding his weapon. Mike expelled the spent clip from his firearm and slapped another one in place. His face was dotted with sweat. “We’ve got to get out of here.”

Vince followed Mike a few feet to where the others were. Tom Hoffman had been caught by surprise but had managed to draw his weapon. He was slumped on the ground by his squad car, moaning loudly, his hands pressed against his stomach to staunch the flow of blood. “Motherfuckers shot me!” he wheezed. “Motherfuckers…shot me!” His mouth sprayed a mixture of spittle and blood.

Frank Black loomed in front of them. “Are you okay?” His eyes were wide with fright.

“Where’s Reverend Powell?” Mike barked.

“They got him,” Frank said. “We gotta get the fuck out of here!”

“Where did he go?” Mike yelled, grabbing Frank roughly.

“He went to the van,” Frank said. He turned and began running to the van and Vince and Mike followed, not even caring that they were being seen by witnesses, not even noticing the screams and cries of shock and surprised outrage that were now emanating from the restaurant.

When they reached the van Vince saw that Reverend Powell had managed to get the sliding panel door open and climb in. He’d also taken the keys out of his pocket. He was lying on his side in the middle seat, his torso covered with blood. Frank grabbed the keys and leaped into the driver’s seat as Mike and Vince jumped in and shut the doors. Frank started the van and pulled out of the slot, speeding out of the parking lot onto Newport Road.

“Slow down!” Mike barked. “Slow down or you’ll get us killed.”

“You’ll get the cops on us, too,” Vince breathed. He kept looking at the road ahead of them and down at Reverend Powell, who was gasping for breath.

“Drive…” Reverend Powell gasped.

“He needs a doctor!” Vince said, feeling sick with dread. “We gotta get him to a hospital, he’s gonna bleed to death!”

“Negative,” Frank said as he headed up Newport Road.

“No,” Reverend Powell wheezed. “No…get me…”

“We can’t take him home, either,” Mike said, turning back to Vince in the rear. “Somebody had to have recognized him at that restaurant.”

“Get me home,” Reverend Powell said quickly, gritting his teeth. He was trying hard not to cry out from the pain. “Just get me to the house so you can retrieve your vehicle and get out.”

“I’m sorry,” Vince Walters said, feeling anguished at what had happened. “It’s all my fault.”

“None of this is your fault,” Reverend Powell said with a hiss. “It’s the Lord’s doing.”

“Bullshit,” Frank said from the driver’s seat.

“We’re deep in battle,” Reverend Powell said, gasping for breath. “I don’t take what happened to me personally. Our adversary is the most cunning, most dangerous being in creation. He will stop at nothing.”

“But why?” Vince felt like screaming in his anguish. He hadn’t asked for Reverend Powell to be shot, hadn’t asked for any of this. He had nothing to do with The Children of the Night cult even if his mother was involved with them. He didn’t want to be involved in it. So why was he being targeted for death?

“It’s—” Reverend Powell paused as he closed his eyes in pain. Frank was driving well despite the seriousness of the situation. They were approaching Meadow Lane Road and Frank signaled for a left hand turn into the narrow country road. “It’s the will of God,” he finally said through gritted, blood stained teeth. “If it’s His will for one of us to die in battle for Him, so be it.”

“We’ll dial 911 for you when we get to the house,” Mike said. He took off his shirt and knelt down beside Reverend Powell and pressed the garment against the wound to staunch the flow of blood. “You’ll be okay.”

“We can’t just leave him!” Vince shouted.

“You can, and you will,” Reverend Powell said, gasping for breath. “Help me into the house, then get your stuff and Maggie’s box and go! And do it quickly!”

“It isn’t right!” Vince said. He felt like crying from the frustration of their situation. He was kneeling beside the wounded man. “It just isn’t fair!”

“No, it isn’t fair,” Reverend Powell said, looking directly into Vince’s eyes. “But sometimes when you obey the will of God, that may not seem fair to you either. Abraham didn’t think it was fair when God asked that he sacrifice his only son for him. And he would have done it, too.”

“Which way do I go?” Frank Black barked. They had come to an intersection. To their right lay a farmhouse; to the left was open fields.

“Right,” Vince said.

“Do as I say,” Reverend Powell said from the rear of the van. “For your sake, for the sake of the world, take your stuff and the evidence Maggie collected and leave.”

“And do what with it?” Vince asked. He felt that they were losing a war that was already lost. “What’s the point?”

“We have to find this Mary Ann girl,” Mike said. He was sitting next to Reverend Powell, patting his shoulder and keeping another hand pressed on the shirt that he held over the gunshot wound. “Maybe she’ll talk to us.”

“Yes, find her,” Reverend Powell said. “And if you can…” He coughed violently. Mike Peterson held him back so he wouldn’t tumble out of the seat. “If you can, take this information to your contact. Take the information to the press. This group must be exposed.”

Frank swung the mini-van into Reverend Powell’s driveway. “What if nobody believes us?”

“Just do it,” Reverend Powell said. His eyes glazed over, then refocused again. “I’ll…pray for you.” Then he blacked out.

Chapter Fifteen

WHEN THEY GOT to Reverend Powell’s home they operated like a well-oiled machine. Vince and Mike helped Hank inside while Frank dashed in ahead of them and quickly gathered their belongings. Mike lowered Hank onto the sofa in the living room while Vince headed downstairs to the basement for the box of evidence in the storeroom. By the time he was back upstairs, Frank had emerged from the bedrooms with their overnight bags. Frank looked nervous. “Okay, let’s get going.”

Vince still felt ashamed and guilty for the trouble that had exploded around them. “I’m so sorry,” he told Reverend Powell.

“It’s okay,” Reverend Powell said. He’d just regained consciousness and Mike had brought him a glass of water. Mike’s bloodied shirt was still clamped to his belly. “Just….call me an ambulance. And…who has my keys?”

Frank rushed to the kitchen and began dialing 911 as Mike held up the keys.

“The little gold key…” Reverend Powell said, his face strained with great pain. “It opens the lock on the box. Take it.”

Mike Peterson quickly took the key off and pocketed it, then changed into a fresh shirt. “I’m sorry to have to be so abrupt about this, Reverend but….you’ve never seen us.”

Reverend Powell nodded, wincing. “No….I haven’t…”

Frank rushed back into the living room. “There’s a rescue unit on the way. Let’s go.”

Vince had only a few seconds to look back at Reverend Powell as he headed out the door. He said, “I’m sorry,” again and joined Frank Black and Mike Peterson in the rented Pontiac. Mike drove and the rest of the afternoon became a quick blur.

THROUGHOUT THE DRIVE to Ephrata, Mike kept barking at Frank to duck down below the windows. “Your description is going to be all over the police broadcasters and if a cop sees us we are dead meat,” Mike said. “Stay the fuck down!”

Frank stayed down during the drive to the Ephrata motel as Vince sat in the front seat silently, staring out the window. When they got to the motel, Mike headed to their room first to get some wet towels. When he came back he wiped down the steering wheel and front seat. “We don’t have time to shower and change clothes,” he said, looking at Vince. “There’s no blood on you. What about you, Frank?”

“I’m fine.”

Mike wiped his bloodied hands and arms with the towel, getting most of the blood off. “Let’s consolidate these bags,” he said. “Frank, empty your bag and put your stuff in Vince’s.”

Frank did as he was told. When he was finished, he handed the empty travel bag to Mike, who tossed the bloodied towels inside. Mike zipped up the bag. “Okay,” he said. “I’m going to check us out. How do I look?”

“Nervous as shit,” Frank said.

“Okay.” Mike closed his eyes and took a deep breath. He remained that way for a moment, taking deep breaths, and when he opened his eyes again he looked a little calmer. “Now?”

“Less stressed,” Frank said. He peeked out the window. “I don’t think you have a lot to worry about, dude.” He motioned toward the end of the motel. “I think the people that run this place are used to seeing nervous looking guys.”

Vince followed his gaze. A thin woman wearing blue jeans and a tight halter-top was standing at the side of the motel, talking on a pay phone. She had shoulder length brown hair that looked like it was microwaved dry and she was wearing high heels and too much make-up. “Besides,” Frank said, “didn’t you notice that this place also rents by the hour?”

“Good point,” Mike said. He headed to the office to check them out. He returned a moment later. “Okay, let’s get out of here.”

Mike piloted the vehicle back onto 272, then onto 222. Fifteen minutes later they were on the Pennsylvania Turnpike, heading to Harrisburg. “Just stay cool,” he said as he drove at a cautious sixty-five miles per hour. He’d put on a pair of wire-rimmed glasses that Vince retrieved for him. “All the activity is back in Lititz now and probably at Reverend Powell’s.”

“I hope he’ll be okay,” Vince said.

“So do I,” Mike said.

They were silent as they made their way into Harrisburg. Mike stayed on the expressway. “Do you know Harrisburg?” he asked.

Vince shook his head. “Not really.”

“Where’s the airport?”

“There,” Frank said from the back seat. He was lying down across the back seat and he pointed up at one of the exit signs. The sign read HARRISBURG AIRPORT EXIT, 2 MILES.

“Great,” Mike said, switching lanes to get onto the right expressway.

“Don’t you think the cops will think to look for us near any airports?” Vince asked.

“We’re not flying out of here,” Mike said. “We’re just going to stay overnight in a hotel that’s within close proximity to the airport, that’s all.”

“The bigger, the better,” Frank said.

“Why?” Vince couldn’t think straight. As far as he was concerned, they should be trying to get the hell out of Pennsylvania, not stay in Harrisburg near the airport.

“Frank, did you bring any long-sleeved shirts?” Mike asked.

“Yeah, I brought one.”

“Put it on, and tie your hair back in a pony tail. Are you adverse to getting it cut?”

“No. In fact, maybe one of you can cut it for me in the room and I can find a barber or a stylist at whatever hotel we’re staying at.”

“Good plan.” Mike took the next exit.

“Why the hell are we talking about Frank getting a haircut?” Vince said. “Why aren’t we getting the hell out of here?”

“In case you haven’t noticed,” Mike said as he came to a stop at the end of the exit ramp, “Frank is going to be the one person that sticks out in the minds of all those witnesses back there in Lititz. You and I look pretty normal, but they’ll remember Frank pretty easy. They’ll probably say some kind of biker-looking guy was involved, and that’s who the cops will be looking for. We need to change his appearance as quickly as possible, and that means a drastic change. You and I are going to have to do a little bit of altering of our appearances as well.”

“Like how?”

“I hear shaved heads are real popular,” Frank said from the back seat.

“New hairstyles, new clothes.” Mike was driving through downtown Harrisburg. The airport was a mile away. They were approaching the business district of Harrisburg. “Our first order of business should probably be outfitting ourselves in new clothing and lopping off as much of Frank’s hair as we can. We can do that in the car, in one of those big parking structures. Then we can check in to our hotel wearing our new duds.”

“As different people,” Vince said.

“Exactly.”

Three blocks later they came upon a ten story parking structure. Mike pulled up to the entrance, took a ticket, and swung the car in. He drove up five flights before he found a parking slot and pulled in and turned off the engine. He turned around in the back seat. “Okay, I’ve got a pair of scissors in my toiletries bag. Why don’t I do the honors?”

“Be my guest,” Frank said. He quickly peeled off his shirt as Mike exited the driver’s side and slid into the back seat.

Vince watched as Frank brushed his hair back. He couldn’t help but grin as Mike began cutting Frank’s hair. Mike’s tongue stuck out a little bit in concentration as he worked. “I’m sorry if this comes out looking half-assed, but—”

“Too bad you don’t have an electric razor,” Vince said, grinning. “You could shave his head.”

“Fuck you, Vince,” Frank said. He was trying to shoot Vince an angry look but he was also grinning. Vince grinned back.

“Boys, boys,” Mike said, grinning. “Come on now, let’s not have any of that.”

Mike snipped at Frank’s hair, cutting the length off from his shoulders. He proceeded to cut the length from the top, gathering hair in his hands the way hairstylists do when engaged in their trade. Mike was doing a pretty good job.

When Mike was finished, Frank looked like a beefier version of Tommy Lee with a bad haircut. “Okay, so it’s not the greatest,” Mike said as Frank checked himself out in the rearview mirror. “You can get it fixed at the hotel.”

“Exactly,” Frank said, donning a black long sleeved shirt.

Their first order of business was exiting the parking structure and walking two blocks to a Men’s Warehouse on Main Street. They spent thirty minutes trying on and having minor alterations done on suits. The suits came with white shirts and dark slacks. They each bought a pair of shiny dress shoes to go with the new clothes. When they emerged from the store clutching bulky bags containing the clothes they had worn into the store they looked like three businessmen out on a lunchtime shopping errand. Frank’s hair didn’t look as bad now that he was wearing a suit. They walked back to the car, transferred their clothes to their overnight bags, and then headed to the Marriot to check in.

Mike pointed at a bulletin board where the events the hotel was hosting was posted. “We’re in luck,” he said. “There’s an audio convention going on here. Perfect.”

The name of the convention was the Stereophonic Association’s East Coast Trade Show and Convention. Mike casually approached the front desk. “Hi. I was wondering if it’s not too late to get a room for the convention.”

The desk clerk was a young guy in his early twenties. He checked the computer. “We had one cancellation. Are you with the convention?”

“Yes,” Mike said. “Our company sent us out at the last minute and—”

“Convention rate is one hundred and twenty dollars a night,” the desk clerk said, typing away at the keyboard. “Will there be three of you in the room?”

“Yes.”

Mike paid for the room with a credit card bearing his real name. When they got into the elevator, Vince asked, “Why are we using our real names now?”

“Just in case the police in Lancaster County run checks on motels in the area,” Mike said. “We don’t want them to track us with the pseudonym I used in Ephrata.”

Once they were in the room, Vince put his bag down on one of the two queen sized beds. “What do we do now?” he asked, flopping down on the bed.

Frank found the hotel directory. “Now I get this fucked up haircut fixed up.”

“And you and I get a new look as well,” Mike said.

There was a hair salon on the main floor of the hotel. Frank called and managed to secure three appointments. They headed downstairs for their respective haircuts and spent the next hour at the salon. Frank got his hair cut in a more traditional style. Mike’s hair, which he had allowed to grow a little long at the top and sides, was cropped short. Vince’s hair, which had been cut in a very short and conservative business style, was cut in a style similar to Frank’s. When they were finished they looked very different from the men that had been at the Family Cupboard in Lititz. Especially Frank. “It might be a good idea for us to dress rather conservatively until we get back to California,” Mike said as they rode up in the elevator. “And I’ll start growing a mustache. Shouldn’t take long at all.”

Once they returned to their room, Vince checked his watch and was surprised to see that it was almost two-thirty. “Time flies when you’re having fun.”

“We need to talk,” Frank said, heading to the desk. “We should probably get something to eat, too.”

“Let’s get something from room service,” Mike suggested.

Frank ordered angel hair pasta and a salad for himself, a hamburger and French fries for Mike, and a Turkey sandwich and potato salad for Vince. He also ordered three bottles of Evian water and a Pepsi. Mike and Frank took off their jackets and draped them over one of the beds. Vince kept his sport coat on. When the room service bellhop arrived with the tray, Mike gave him a five-dollar tip. Then they gathered up their respective lunches and gathered around the room, Frank reclaiming his spot at the desk.

“We need to find Mary Ann,” Mike said.

Vince shook his head. “No way. I’m not going back to Lititz. Not after the shit that went down. I don’t think you guys should go, either.”

“Mike has a point,” Frank said, twirling pasta around on his fork. “We gotta get her. I’m pretty sure we can get her to talk to us if we can find her.”

“Tom Hoffman said she hangs out at a place called Nino’s,” Mike said, nodding to Vince. “Where’s that?”

“It’s on Main Street in Lititz. Across the street from the post office.”

“How far is the police station from Nino’s?” Frank asked.

“Around the block.” Vince frowned at them. “It’s a stupid idea. There’s gonna be cops crawling all over Lititz, not to mention Lancaster County. What happened back there is going to be talked about for the next twenty years. It was like something out of a Quentin Tarantino movie.”

“Or John Woo,” Frank added, eating pasta.

“Who the hell is John Woo?” Vince asked.

“Don’t you ever watch movies? The Killer, Hardboiled, A Better Tomorrow?”

Vince had no idea what Frank was talking about. Frank sighed and rolled his eyes. “Chow Yun Fat? Face Off with Travolta and Nick Cage?”

“I remember that one,” Vince said.

“Did you ever see The Replacement Killers with Mira Sorvino? That one had Chow Yun Fat in it.”

Vince shook his head and took a bite of his sandwich. “No, I didn’t.”

Frank looked disgusted. “Dude, when this shit is over, you and I are going to sit down in your house and we’re going to do some serious movie watching! Even my daughter knows who John Woo is!”

Mike attempted to change the subject as he chewed his hamburger. “We can drive down to Lititz this afternoon. We’ll go down there dressed the way we are now. It’s a workday so we won’t look too out of place. I have a fake badge somewhere in my bag. I can use it to try to coerce the kids we run into at Nino’s to lead us to Mary Ann.”

“Impersonating a police officer is a federal offense,” Vince said, a trickle of sarcasm creeping into his voice.

“Yeah, and if we don’t find Mary Ann we’re left right where we started,” Mike said.

“Suppose she doesn’t know anything, though?” Frank asked, spooning pasta onto his fork. “Seriously. I think we should find her, but what if she doesn’t know shit?”

“We’ll have to take that chance,” Mike said. “She obviously knows enough to have scared Tom Hoffman so bad that he was afraid to tell us what she revealed to him. Maybe she found out something about this Mark Lancaster fellow and his friend.”

“Like what?” Vince asked.

“Like what group they belonged to,” Mike said. He took a bite of his hamburger and chewed, frowning. “I think Clint told Mary Ann more than Tom let on. It’s obvious from his story that Clint spent more time with these guys than Mary Ann did. I’m guessing they don’t know about her. Or if they do, they don’t consider her a threat.”

“What makes you think she’ll talk to us providing you do locate her?” Vince asked.

“She’ll talk to us,” Frank said. He was almost finished with his pasta. “She’ll be freaked out over what happened at the Family Cupboard. Especially when she finds out that Tom Hoffman was shot.”

Mike nodded. “If the police haven’t picked her up yet, she may be willing to talk to us. I think it’s worth a chance.”

“And what if we get caught?” Vince asked. This was the forefront question on his mind. If they got caught, they were screwed. “Why can’t we just go to your friend Billy with what we have now?”

“Because if we can find Mary Ann and get her to cooperate, we’ll have somebody that is removed from us who can verify everything,” Mike said. “As for getting caught, that’s a chance we’re going to have to take.” He glanced at Frank, then back to Vince. “Plus, I think we’re going to have to do something equally as risky.”

“And what’s that?”

“Leave you here.”

Vince almost laughed. “Oh. So you guys are paranoid that I’ll get you shot at again, huh? You’d rather leave me alone and let the assassins get me while you’re not around, right?”

“Not at all,” Mike said. He turned around so he was facing Vince. He was almost finished with his burger but he made no attempt to eat. “Frank and I know what we’re looking for, we know what questions to ask. Besides, somebody at the Family Cupboard might have recognized you, too. You were once a local boy, you know.”

“Yeah, and I haven’t been back here in fifteen years.”

“Doesn’t matter. There might have been an old teacher or neighbor back at the Family Cupboard that you forgot about. We can’t take that chance. If somebody recognized you, the police will know about it. They’ll be able to go to the local high school and pull your old class photo out and have it in every squad car by now. If you show up with us, you might be spotted. There’s less chance of Frank and me being recognized the way we look now. We’ll drive over and we’ll be quick about it. It should take no more than a few hours.”

“And what if they recognize the car?” Vince asked.

“We’ll rent a car here in town,” Mike said. He looked at Frank, who nodded. “We’ll leave the other vehicle here. Frank and I will drive to Lancaster County in a new vehicle. We’ll make an attempt at finding Mary Ann. If we find her, we’ll get her to come with us and talk. We won’t go armed, and we’ll go under our real names. We’ll be less likely to run into trouble in Lititz should we get picked up by the police.”

“I don’t think we will, though,” Frank said. He finished his pasta and began attacking his salad.

“No, I don’t either,” Mike added.

“And what am I supposed to do?” Vince asked.

“Stay here,” Mike finished his hamburger and wiped his mouth with a napkin. “Seriously. Lay low. Watch TV. Whatever you do, don’t leave this room.”

“Don’t you think it’s a bad idea?” Vince asked. He felt nervous about the prospect of being alone. “I mean, splitting up like this?”

Mike shrugged. He rose to his feet and set his plate aside. “I don’t know what else to do. It shouldn’t take too long for Frank and me to go to Lititz and do some poking around.”

“We could try to bring Mary Ann back with us,” Frank suggested.

Mike opened his wallet and began rifling through it, purging it of all the documents that contained his alias. “We could,” he said. “We’ll have to play it by ear, though.”

“What if those guys come here and try to kill me again?” Vince asked. This is what Vince feared the most. He’d been thinking about the routes they’d taken in Lancaster County, and he didn’t recall seeing anybody tailing them to the Family Cupboard. It was almost as if the men that shot at him had known he was going to be walking out of the Family Cupboard and they’d positioned themselves accordingly. He mentioned this to Mike and Frank. “Think about it,” he said. “They were waiting for me. They came right at me. I was their target, not Tom Hoffman, not Reverend Powell, not you. They were after me.”

“I know, but I don’t think they’ll make a third attempt so soon,” Mike said, replacing his wallet. He put his sport coat on. “We managed to kill the men who attacked us today, Vince. That had to have been a tremendous set-back for them.”

“Yeah, I’m sure they weren’t expecting it,” Frank said. He hadn’t finished his salad yet, but he began setting his plate aside. “Did you recognize any of those guys today?”

“No.” Vince shook his head. Their faces flashed in his mind, and he felt a twinge of guilt. He hadn’t wanted to kill anybody but he had, and he felt sick about it.

“The guy that shot at you in Irvine wasn’t one of the three today?” Mike asked.

“No,” Vince said, trying to remember. “The guy in Irvine was older. He had darker hair, was a little taller.”

“These guys looked young.” Frank put his coat on.

“They did,” Mike agreed. He reached into his bag and brought out his Glock. He looked at Vince. “Just in case.” The implication was obvious.

Vince nodded. Mike set the gun on the nightstand by the bed.

“We’ll find our way back to Lititz,” Mike said. He pocketed a room key and stood with Frank. “Give us until nine p.m. I have my cell phone with me. If we’re going to be late, I’ll call you. You’ll be fine. Frank and I won’t take any unnecessary risks. We’ll be in and out of there as quickly as possible.”

“And what if you aren’t back by nine and I haven’t heard from you?” Vince asked.

“Take the first flight back to Irvine,” Mike said. “Leave tonight. Don’t even check out, just leave.”

“You have enough cash?” Frank asked.

Vince nodded. “Yeah.”

Mike buttoned his coat. “Get back to Irvine and wait. Take our stuff with you. If you haven’t heard from us in three days, call my wife.” He rattled off the number. “Tell Carol about the safe deposit box.”

“Then what?”

Mike’s features turned grim. “Then, we wait to see what happens.”

VINCE DOUBLE LOCKED the door when Mike and Frank left. Then he changed out of the suit into a fresh pair of jeans and a T-shirt.

He flopped down on the bed and turned the TV on. He channel-surfed idly for twenty minutes. Daytime TV was all soap operas and talk shows. Vince grew bored with it after awhile and turned the TV off.

I need a shower, he thought. He rose to his feet and headed to the bathroom.

Twenty minutes later he felt refreshed. As he finger-combed his hair, his mind recapped the confrontation at the Family Cupboard parking lot. He’d been going over the events in his mind since it all happened, and he still didn’t know how they’d been tracked down. It was obvious the way those guys had suddenly come out of nowhere and began casually walking toward them that they’d been watching the place for a while. We were probably followed there. I wonder if that means they watched us last night at Reverend Powell’s. It was a distinct possibility. If that was the case, why hadn’t they stormed Hank’s house last night? Maybe they knew we were armed.

That didn’t make sense, though. If they knew that Frank and Mike and Hank were armed, why did they bother with the attack at the Family Cupboard? The more Vince thought about it, the more confused and scared he got. It was as if they’d just sprung out of the ground, guns in hand, bent on killing. Thank God Frank had been aware of what was happening. He must have noticed something was going amiss. Vince hadn’t been aware of anything until Frank’s body slammed the first assassin.

As Vince exited the bathroom the fight replayed in his mind. He hoped they hadn’t been recognized. The shootout at the Family Cupboard had happened so fast that the few people that witnessed it were probably too scared to remember faces. He hoped Tom Hoffman and Reverend Powell were all right.

He also wondered if they would talk.

They won’t say anything, Vince thought, sitting on the bed, his back against the headboard. Especially Reverend Powell. He sees this as a spiritual crusade. He might have been able to convince Tom Hoffman to be quiet, but suppose he wasn’t? Tom might talk. If he does, the police will be looking for us. And if that’s the case, they might eventually find us here.

Vince felt his throat grow sore. It felt as if he’d swallowed a medicine ball that had lodged in his throat. He always felt like this when he was scared. He remembered feeling this way Sunday afternoon at the Irvine Airport when that guy shot at him and Tracy. His stomach felt leaden; his head woozy. They could be here any minute. He debated staying put or leaving altogether. If he left, he might be able to put some distance between himself and police but they would catch him eventually, wouldn’t they? He wouldn’t know what to do in flight. They’d be on to him quickly.

He thought of the possible ramifications of what might happen if he were caught. They could trace him to the Marriot here in Harrisburg. If they did, he wouldn’t put up a fight. He’d go with the police willingly. And he’d talk. He’d tell them everything, beginning with the news of his mother’s murder and the attempt on his own life in Irvine. He’d tell them about Frank and Mike, tell them about The Children of the Night and how the three of them believed the cult was bent on killing him and was responsible for the shootout at the Family Cupboard. He’d urge them to find Mike and Frank. Once in custody, Mike would be compelled to call his lawyer friend Billy Grecko and finally tell him everything, right? And if so, Billy’s connections could go to work. And if they found Mary Ann and even Clint, all the better. They would have corroboration between their stories.

But then suppose the police don’t believe me? Suppose after all is said and done, Mike and Frank and I are arrested and charged with murder?

As frightening as the possibility seemed, Vince didn’t see it as very likely. Surely the police would be able to identify the three dead men at the Family Cupboard. Their guns would be traceable and that should lead the police to The Children of the Night. Even if the trail didn’t immediately lead to the cult, it would help cast suspicion away from Vince, Mike, and Frank. The police would have to believe them.

The more Vince thought of the possible ramifications of what might happen if the police found them, the more nervous he got. He wished Mike and Frank were here. It would help calm his fears. It would bring him a much needed reality check on the whole thing.

I need to talk to somebody, Vince thought. He looked at the phone as Tracy popped into his mind. I need to call her. She knows part of what’s going on. Besides, she’s got to be worried now. Vince reached across the bed and picked up his cell phone.

Frank’s warning from a few nights ago against contacting Tracy rose briefly as he dialed Tracy’s work number. What Frank doesn’t know won’t hurt him.

The phone was picked up on the second ring. “This is Tracy.”

“Tracy, it’s Vince.”

“Vince!” Tracy’s voice cracked with surprise. She paused, as if she didn’t know what to say.

“Listen, I’m sorry about a few days ago. I didn’t mean to cut you off so short, but—”

“That’s okay,” she said, her voice lowered and cautious. Vince knew that she was probably lowering it because it was the middle of the workday in California, and she wanted to keep the conversation private. “I know you’ve been under a lot of stress lately.”

“That’s not the worst of it.”

“Are you okay? Where are you?”

“I’m in Pennsylvania,” Vince said, bursting at the seams to tell her everything. “Are you busy right now? I really need to talk.”

“I’m okay,” Tracy said quickly. There was a short beat, then: “Listen, maybe it’ll be better if I wasn’t here at work. Why don’t I call you in thirty minutes.”

“Okay. You going home?”

“Yeah. There’s not much going on here anyway. I’ll call you back, okay?”

“Okay. I love you.”

“I love you too.” They hung up.

Vince sat on the bed and channel surfed again, thinking about what he was going to tell Tracy. If Laura were alive he would have told her everything. He and Laura never kept anything from each other. They’d always discussed their problems with each other. He needed that back again in his life, and Tracy had grown to be more than a lover. He felt he could trust her. After all, she already knew a lot of what was going on, and she’d almost been killed herself. She deserved to know.

Talking with Tracy would keep his mind off of what was happening with Mike and Frank.

His cell phone rang thirty-five minutes later. Vince picked it up on the first ring. “Hello.”

“It’s me,” Tracy said.

“Good. I’m glad you called. You home?”

“Yeah.” He could hear her puttering in the kitchen. “So tell me what’s going on.”

Vince didn’t know where to begin. “I hope you aren’t too busy tonight. This could take awhile.”

“Indulge me,” she said. “I don’t have a very busy social calendar anymore. Especially after meeting you.”

Vince smiled. “Neither do I.”

“Why don’t you start with the morning you called and told me you were leaving for PA again?”

Vince began with the phone call from Frank telling him to meet him at the restaurant in Irvine and the sudden revelation that they’d grown up together, to Frank’s story about The Children of the Night and his knowledge of his mother’s murder and Laura’s death. He continued with their meeting with Mike Peterson and the background story of the cult. Tracy gasped several times during the narrative, as if she were reacting to the stunning news. When Vince got to the morning they left for Pennsylvania, he apologized again. “I’m sorry I was so short with you, but Frank was standing right there. He kept insisting that I tell you nothing even when I told them you were okay. He was acting like…like some damned paranoid conspiracy theorist.”

“That’s okay,” Tracy said, her tone of voice displaying her shock and surprise at the story. “I guess I can understand his caution under the circumstances.”

Vince continued the narrative, taking her through their arrival in Ephrata, their meeting with Reverend Powell and sifting through the box his mother had buried in her backyard. He told her about the newspaper clippings, the photo albums. “My mom was definitely a member of this cult,” he told her. “She was a bona-fide devil worshipper. I don’t know what prompted her change-of-heart, but something must’ve triggered it. She was afraid of something, and that’s why she took me and fled to California twenty-five years ago.”

“Do you think she knew about these murders?” Tracy asked, fascinated with the story now. “The Manson case and those others?”

“I don’t know,” Vince said. “She may have suspected something. I don’t think she had first-hand knowledge of them, but she wrote notes in the margins of the clippings. Something like, ‘did Sam order this?’”

“And who’s Sam?”

“Samuel F. Garrison,” Vince said. “Some big tycoon. Sits on the board of several major U.S. corporations, including our employer.”

Tracy gasped.

“I know,” Vince said. “It surprised the hell out of me, too.”

“I’m…stunned.” Tracy’s voice sounded like she was surprised, shocked by the allegations. “And the other crimes…the Son of Sam case. You think the Sam in that case was related?”

“I don’t know. I doubt it, but…”

“No, I mean, think about it,” Tracy said. “David Berkowitz was the Son of Sam, right? He originally claimed that ‘Sam’ was a guy actually named Sam, who was a neighbor of his in Yonkers, New York. This guy Sam, his sons were involved in some shady activities themselves, and it was speculated they knew Berkowitz and were involved in a satanic cult with him. It was also believed they may have participated in the Son of Sam killings.”

“How do you know about all this?” Vince asked.

“It was on Frontline last week.” He detected a grin in Tracy’s voice.

“Well, that sounds plausible,” Vince said. “Mom had newspaper clippings on the Son of Sam case in that box.”

“Do you think the ‘Sam’ in the Berkowitz case might be Sam Garrison?”

“Maybe.” Vince suddenly felt thirsty and he reached for a plastic cup and headed to the bathroom to fill it with tap water. “I don’t know what to believe. All I know is that this cult found mom and killed her. And they want me for something.” He told Tracy about the conversation with Reverend Powell last night, then their meeting with Tom Hoffman this morning. When he got to the shootout at the Family Cupboard Tracy gave a startled gasp.

“You’ve got to be kidding!”

“No,” Vince said. He took a sip of water then wrapped up the story, ending with their arrival at the Marriot. “Frank and Mike are probably in Lititz now trying to find this Mary Ann chick. They think this Clint guy may have told her more than Tom Hoffman let on to us at the restaurant. They think she may know more about this Mark Lancaster guy and his sidekick.”

“What about the guys who shot at you?” Tracy asked. “Tell me more about them.”

“There’s not much to tell. They looked young. It happened so fast.”

“They just came out of nowhere and started shooting at you?” It sounded like Tracy still couldn’t believe the sudden violence had erupted a second time.

Vince described the shootout again. “They were definitely after me,” he said. “I crawled under cars to hide from them, and one of them knelt down and tried shooting at me under the car I was hiding under.” He paused, trying to remember. “It was like the minute we stepped out of that restaurant they came out of wherever it was they were hiding and started weaving their way through the parking lot toward me. Luckily Frank caught on early, or the guy he body slammed would have met me between two parked cars and killed me right there and they would have been gone.”

“You’re probably right,” Tracy agreed. She took a deep breath, as if composing herself. “Wow. It just…it’s just so scary to hear about all this. I’m glad you’re okay, though.”

“So am I.”

“So they were young guys? In their twenties, maybe?”

“Early twenties,” Vince remembered. “Blond hair, blue eyes. One of them had brown hair. They were around my height, very slender, in good shape. There was nothing about their dress or mannerisms that really differentiated them from anybody else you would see.”

“In other words, they blended in well,” Tracy said.

“Yes.”

“Did you see a car they might have come out of?”

“No.” Vince tried to remember. He couldn’t remember them exiting a vehicle.

“Are you sure you killed them?”

“Yeah.” There was no doubt in his mind that the three would-be assassins were killed.

Tracy sighed in relief. “Do you think one of them was the guy that shot at us at the airport.”

“I don’t know,” Vince said. He felt better talking to Tracy. “Everything happened so fast, I couldn’t tell.”

“My guess is there might be more of them. You have to be careful.”

“I am. But…I’m also afraid that the police might catch up to me.”

“They won’t. You did the right thing in getting out of Lititz and holing up in Harrisburg. You’re also lucky this happened in a rural community. The cops back there are probably chasing their tails.”

Tracy was probably right. Of course, the Pennsylvania State Police would be involved in the investigation, but he and Mike and Frank were already long gone.

“I just hope Frank and Mike can find out more from this Mary Ann girl,” Vince said. “If they can find her.”

“Maybe they will,” Tracy said. “I do think you shouldn’t mention to them that you called me. They’ll only get mad.”

“And paranoid.”

Tracy laughed. “That, too.”

Vince felt a thousand times better; he relaxed. “I’m so glad I called.”

“I am, too.”

“I still don’t know what I’m going to do,” he said, looking at his reflection in the mirror across the room. “Talking about this helped bring it all in perspective.”

“I think you should come home,” Tracy said.

“I will. Probably tomorrow.”

“You need to come home and stay with me. I’ll take care of you. I’ll hide you from anybody that dares threaten you.”

Vince laughed. The way she had said that was both melodramatic in a corny way, but also serious. She’d sounded so cute to him in that brief minute that he just wanted to reach right through the telephone lines and hug her.

“I won’t be able to call you again until I get back,” Vince said. “Will that be okay?”

“Yes,” she said. “Call me the minute you get home. Cut and run from your friends if you have to, but call me. I need to know you’re safe.”

“I will.” Vince paused. “I love you.”

“I love you, too.”

They said goodbye and hung up.

Chapter Sixteen

FRANK CALLED FROM Mike Peterson’s cell phone at eight-thirty. “We’re on the turnpike,” he said. “We should be back in about twenty minutes.”

“What happened?” Vince asked. He’d spent the past three hours watching a movie called Grosse Point Blank, which was hilarious. It was about a hired hit man attending his ten-year high school reunion.

“We’ll talk when we get back,” was all Frank would say.

Vince tried to get back into the movie after the phone call, but couldn’t concentrate on it. Finally, when Mike and Frank stepped into the room Vince turned the TV off. “Okay, I’m bursting at the seams here, guys. Talk to me.”

Both of them looked frustrated and disappointed. They were still in their suits. Frank took his jacket and tie off. Mike headed to the wet bar and broke the seal on it. “I need a drink.”

While Mike made himself a drink, Vince turned to Frank. “You didn’t find her.”

“We didn’t find her,” Frank said. Aside from the look of frustration on Frank’s mug, there was also a look of worry. “But we found stuff out. Boy, did we find shit out.”

Mike took a sip of his drink—Jim Beam straight—then sat down at the desk. “Where to start?”

“The beginning,” Vince said. “You went straight to Nino’s right?”

“We went to Nino’s,” Mike said, nodding. “There were a couple of kids there. Frank and I identified ourselves as FBI agents. It was easy, considering what happened there today. Everybody in town had already heard about what happened at the Family Cupboard.”

“I bet,” Vince said. He was beginning to yearn for a drink himself. He could make out the distinctive label of a Rolling Rock beer in the refrigerator.

“We asked them where we could locate Mary Ann, and one of the kids directed us to her friend Jackie. They gave us Jackie’s address. We went over there and Jackie proved to be very cooperative. She told us that Mary Ann was gone.”

“Gone?”

“She split,” Frank said. He took his shirt off and looked at Mike. “If you don’t mind, I’m taking these off. I never was used to wearing this suit and tie shit.”

Mike nodded and Frank stripped down to his underwear and began rummaging in his overnight bag. Vince turned to Mike. “So Mary Ann skipped town, too?”

Mike nodded, sipping his drink. “Jackie said Mary Ann called her this morning from a bus stop in North Carolina. She said that she was afraid of those guys coming back to Lititz to finish what they started.”

“What did she mean by that?” Vince was listening with bated breath.

“I don’t know,” Mike said. He sighed. “Fortunately, we were able to talk to Jackie at length. Her parents were at work, so we sat in the living room and talked. She was quite the chatter box.”

“I got the impression that she was standing on the sidelines when this shit happened,” Frank said, pulling a pair of black jeans over his legs. “She and Mary Ann were friends, but she didn’t hang out with this other gang of kids much.”

Mike chuckled. “Yeah. She said that she felt she was much better than Clint and his crowd. I caught a whiff of contempt.”

“More like an air of superiority,” Frank said, pulling a T-shirt over his lanky frame. His tattoos gleamed in the light.

“The basic story is that Jackie confirmed to us that Clint and his friends were dabblers in a devil worship group,” Mike said. He took a sip of his drink. “She admitted quite freely that they were into it for the shock value. She didn’t hang out with them, but Mary Ann did. She said Mary Ann usually went along for the ride whenever Clint and his friends were out on the town.”

“They were a bunch of your usual Marilyn Manson fan boy, pot smoking losers who thought it was cool to worship the devil,” Frank said, sitting down on the second bed. “Twenty years ago they would have been Black Sabbath fans.”

Vince nodded. He remembered the stoner scene very well from high school.

“Anyway,” Mike continued, “she said she never met Mark Lancaster and the other fellow, but Mary Ann did. And Mary Ann was scared of them the instant she met them. She told Jackie that Mark and Glenn were definitely serious about the occult. Jackie says she warned her friend to stay away from them, and luckily, Mary Ann heeded her advice. But she was still loyal to Clint; after all, they were dating. She loved him. So most of what happened comes directly from Clint telling Mary Ann, and Mary Ann later telling Jackie. It sounds like pretty reliable third-hand information, though. Jackie struck me as a very smart girl. She did some research of her own and found out some disturbing things.”

“What kind of disturbing things?” Vince asked.

“In a minute,” Mike said. He took another sip of his drink. Frank got himself a Coke from the refrigerator. He looked at Vince and resumed the narrative. “According to Jackie, Clint wanted to impress these guys. He was thrilled that a pair of older guys was into the same things he was. Clint and his friends felt they were respected when they were with them. So they started hanging out. When Mary Ann told Jackie the name of the cult these guys claimed they belonged to, Jackie grew even more concerned and scared. She’d already done a lot of reading on the occult, and some of the things Mary Ann said about them bothered her. So she did some more research. There was one bit of information that kept nagging at her—the group Mark and Glenn claimed they belonged to. Apparently they told Clint they belonged to an organization called The Children, and that they were based out of New York City.”

“Another name for The Children of the Night?” Vince asked.

Mike nodded. “Yes and no. I’ll get to that in a minute. What Jackie did, was she went on the Internet and did some intense research on the occult and Satanism for three days, asking people on various newsgroups about the Children. She got one response. The only thing the person said was that The Children was supposed to be a secret, sinister devil cult based in New York. That was all the correspondent would relate. The correspondent even went so far as to admit that the group itself was only rumored to exist. Jackie did some more checking and was able to confirm evidence of the rumor in a book linking the Son of Sam murders to a secret, underground satanic organization.”

“So what did she do?” Vince asked, entranced by the story.

“It scared the hell out of her,” Mike said. “And rightly so.” He traded a glance with Frank. “The Children are the New York State counterparts of The Children of the Night. There are factions in other parts of the country that go under other names as well. There’s a group in Alabama called ‘The Children of the Black Cross,’ for example. Another group in the Midwest calls itself ‘The Children of Darkness.’ They’re all connected with the main group in California.”

The bottle of Rolling Rock was weighing heavily on Vince’s mind, and he finally dashed over to the refrigerator and pulled it out, opened it, and took a drink.

“Jackie claims she told Mary Ann to stay away from Clint,” Mike continued. “She told her friend everything. She didn’t know if Mary Ann related all this to Clint. She claimed Mary Ann told her she would find a way to tell Clint without revealing the source. She seems to think that Clint already knew he was over his head and was staying away from Mark and Glenn out of his own fear. When the dead dogs turned up in that field she knew something big was going to happen, but she didn’t know what. She said Mary Ann avoided her in the next few months. Like she was ashamed that she was still seeing Clint, who by now was regarded as the Black Sheep of Warwick County. Then Maggie Walters was murdered, and at first the newspapers weren’t reporting the occult symbols found written on the walls at the murder site. But for some reason, Jackie had a feeling there was a connection. Then last week, the Intelligencer ran an in depth article on the case, and for the first time all of Lancaster County learned about the mutilation and the Satanic symbols found in Maggie’s house. And then Clint disappeared, followed closely by Mary Ann.”

“Does she have any idea what might have happened to them?” Vince asked.

“Not really, but get this. Jackie came to the same conclusion Frank and I have been coming to. Maggie may have been killed by these guys for some kind of revenge ritual. The killing of the dogs on April 30—Walpurgisnacht—is significant. It’s a day that is said to provide great power to the black magician for certain rituals. The murder of the dogs was done in conjunction with a preliminary ritual for something bigger in Lititz. That something bigger was probably the murder of Maggie Walters.”

“I don’t think I follow,” Vince said.

“The first ritual opened the gates,” Frank said. He was sitting on the couch, holding his can of Coke. “They probably invoked the names of whatever demons they have working with them. It was all done in preparation for the murder of your mother, which was designed to be both a revenge killing and to lead them to something bigger.”

“In other words, they’d already staked her out?” Vince asked. “They’d found her months before they actually killed her?”

Frank and Mike nodded. “Yes,” Mike said.

“Why didn’t they just bump her off then?”

“You still don’t understand these guys,” Frank said, looking grim. “The ritual they performed was also probably one of protection. They didn’t want to get caught. They wanted to throw confusion and chaos among the local population. And it worked.”

Vince was about to open his mouth again and blurt out another question, then stopped. He had to keep reminding himself that he was dealing with religious nuts. Religious nuts did all kinds of wacky things like perform suicide bomb missions for this or that jihad, or self flagellate themselves for whatever purification purposes. Or they killed abortion providers for God, or killed dogs to summon up demons from hell.

I can’t believe I’m dealing with this bullshit, Vince thought, nodding at Mike and Frank to continue.

“Jackie doesn’t know what will come next,” Mike said. “But she said that she was pretty convinced that was the group’s purpose. That Maggie’s murder was both an act of revenge and a ritual designed to go after somebody else.”

“Me,” Vince said.

“We don’t have solid proof of that,” Mike said.

“What about what happened today?”

“I admit that what happened today and last week in Irvine are disturbing,” Mike said. “But I really believe they aren’t related to the group responsible for your mother’s murder.”

“How can you say that? They tried to kill me!”

“Mike’s right,” Frank said. “Whoever tried to kill you today are not cut from the same mold as The Children of the Night. Those guys were operating more like hit men than deranged cult members.”

Suddenly, it hit him. The revelation sparked in Vince Walter’s mind so great that it was as if fireworks went off in his head. “Oh my God,” he said, feeling faint.

“What?” Mike looked worried. “Vince, you okay?”

“You’re right,” Vince said, his voice hoarse as his throat constricted. He could feel his heart pound in his ribcage. “The guys who tried to kill Tracy and me, the same guys who tried to get me today back in Lititz…they’re not part of this Children of the Night group.”

“About time you started listening,” Frank said, drinking his Coke dismissively.

“They’re part of an opposing group,” Vince said. He looked at Mike and Frank with dawning revelation. “A Christian one. And they’re trying to kill me because somehow they know.”

Mike appeared to catch on. “Goddamitt, Vince, I’ve told you that—”

“They’re trying to kill me because they know I’m the Anti-Christ.” Vince licked his lips nervously. “And this…this Children of the Night group…my mother took me all those years ago because she knew. And they’re trying to get me back.”

THEY ARGUED ABOUT it all night. Mike quickly changed into a pair of shorts and a T-shirt during the debate. The chilling revelation remained with Vince, yet part of him still couldn’t believe the accusations he was coming up with about himself. I don’t feel any different, he thought as Frank glared at him from across the room. I’ve never felt any different…like I was a god, or a demigod, or a demon, or whatever. I’m a blood and flesh human being. I don’t have supernatural powers. If I were the Anti-Christ—or the Messiah for that matter—wouldn’t I have some kind of supernatural power? Wouldn’t I have known before now?

Mike even verbalized this in the debate. “If you’re the Anti-Christ, Vince, prove it. Make something move with your mind.”

“Yeah,” Frank sneered, lounging on the bed. “Make that glass over there levitate.”

“Take a hike,” Vince said. He felt like a jerk for even bringing it up.

“I’m serious,” Mike said, stepping in front of Vince, looking at him sternly. “If you feel you’re the Anti-Christ, you should be one of the most powerful men on the planet. You should have some kind of magical powers. Let’s see you do something. Come on, hotshot, let’s see your stuff.”

“You’ve made your point,” Vince said. He was getting angry, and while he wanted that anger to be directed at Mike and Frank, what he felt was anger toward himself.

“Come on!” Mike was pressing the point. “Just try. Here.” He walked over to the other side of the room and picked up a plastic glass. “Focus on this glass. Try to tap into your psychic energy and push it off my hand.”

Vince rolled his eyes. “You can’t be serious.”

Frank nodded. “Go ahead. Try it.”

They were dead serious. He briefly considered retreating further into the shell he was beginning to build around himself, then decided to take the test. This would be proof positive. If he could move the glass by the sheer power of his will, and do it easily, then he would have the proof that he possessed supernatural powers. He knew that there were people that possessed telekinetic power, but this was different. Telekinetics usually had to summon up their power from some deep well within themselves. They had to work at it. If Vince were a supernatural being, he should be able to topple that glass over as easily as if he were doing it with his hands.

Vince focused on the glass, than willed his psychic energy toward it, not even knowing what he was doing or where to tap into it. He simply willed himself to push the glass off of Mike’s hand.

Nothing.

He concentrated harder. The skin of his forehead furrowed in concentration. He pictured the glass in his mind, visualized himself toppling it off of Mike’s hand with a single mental push.

It remained on Mike’s hand.

He relaxed and looked up at Mike. “I can’t.”

Mike grinned. “See? You don’t have supernatural powers, you dimwit.”

Vince relaxed. Mike’s jovial tone put him at ease. Maybe Mike and Frank were right. He was taking this much too seriously. He had to look at this from a logical angle. He’d never felt different around other people, and he surely didn’t feel any different now. He was not the Anti-Christ. He was simply a man. A man who was being stalked by two groups of crazed religious fanatics for whatever insane reason they may have.

“Okay,” he said. “I’m sorry we had to argue about this, but…” he ran his hand through his hair. “What else could they be after me for? I mean, think about it.” He looked up at Mike and Frank, silently imploring them to at least consider his original reasoning for his crazy idea. “True, I don’t feel any different, and I don’t have supernatural powers. Fine. But these two groups are after me for some reason, and the only thing I can think of is that I must be important to them. I have a feeling that this Children of the Night group isn’t responsible for trying to kill me today. I don’t think they were involved in the botched attempt in Irvine, either. I think you guys presented some very logical explanations regarding this fact. And if you consider your own theories, you have to consider the possibility that if The Children of the Night is a group of crazed devil worshippers with an Armageddon complex, there has to be a Christian organization focusing on the same thing.”

“Of course,” Mike said. “That would be the host church from which The Children sprang from.”

“Yeah, but even those guys wouldn’t be involved in what happened this morning,” Vince said. He rose to his feet and paced the room. “They wouldn’t want me dead. They’d want me alive.”

“Which makes your theory fall to pieces,” Frank said.

“What if there’s another renegade Christian group out there?” Vince said, whirling to face Frank. “Some other underground group that thinks I may be the Anti-Christ?”

“Vince,” Mike said, his eyes closing in frustration. “We’ve gone over this time and time again and—”

“Wait a minute, just hear me out here,” Vince said. He regarded the two men calmly. “I’m not the Anti-Christ. I’ve accepted that. But suppose this other fictional group I’m talking about really thinks I am. For whatever…strange reason they might have.”

“Why would they think this?” Mike asked.

Vince didn’t have an answer. “I don’t know.”

“That’s the stupidest reason for them wanting to have you killed,” Mike reiterated.

“But let’s suppose it’s true. Suspend your disbelief for a moment. Use your imagination. Apocalyptic Christian sect splits into two opposing groups. One sect worships the devil. The other remains Christian. Their sole purpose is to bring about the Anti-Christ to usher in Armageddon. They want to fulfill the prophesies in the Book of Revelations. I think it’s insane, and so do you. These guys don’t, though. They’re dead serious about it. Okay, still using your imagination? Great. Let’s pretend my mother and your mother,” he looked at Frank as he said this, “are really into this group, for whatever reasons they may have. They’re stoned, they’re really fucked up, whatever. My mom gets knocked up and has me. I don’t know who my father is, but I know he’s not the guy that I remember growing up with. I know my mother never talked about him. Now, still in make-believe land? Great.” He stepped toward them, really absorbed in the narrative now. “Let’s say with a combination of all the drugs and the mysticism and all that went on back then, that my mom is brainwashed into believing I may be the Anti-Christ. In reality, she probably fucked some guy at a love-in and got knocked up, had me, joined this group around the same time. She’s young, she’s confused, she’s lonely, and they provide all the support and comfort she needs at the time. She also meets a man she falls in love with. He’s a member of this cult. She joins up with them right when they make this split and she’s so happy that they accept her, and the drugs are just blowing her mind that she gets really sucked into their spiritual beliefs. She buys the crap they’re pushing. You still following me?”

Mike and Frank nodded. Frank said, “Yeah, I can buy that. Keep going.”

Vince was on a roll. “Okay, let’s pretend they convince my mother that I really am the Anti-Christ. The key word is they convince her. Maybe they brainwashed her into believing that she really fucked the devil or something. Maybe they were all tripping the night she got knocked up and they used this to their advantage. I don’t know. What’s important is this: they need their Anti-Christ in order to feed on their own religious hysteria and support their theology. They need this…this figurehead to legitimize their creed. The Christian side of them knows this, but they aren’t aware of me. They may know that the devil side of the sect has, quote unquote, conjured up the Anti-Christ, but they don’t know who he is or where he’s living. Remember, this is a war for them, even though they’re really fighting for the same thing. They’re still playing it out as if one side or the other is going to win. So they convince my mother I’m it, I’m the son of the devil, I’m the one that’s going to lead them to victory and glory and they’re going to rule the world. They bring me to a bunch of rituals and pray to the devil and all that other happy horseshit that I’m now starting to remember. And they brought Frank and some of the other kids to the ceremonies, too, simply because they were still too stupid and too caught up in the drug scene to know any better.”

Mike was listening to the narrative with interest. Frank was nodding along, his features impassive as Vince took him down memory lane.

“So things proceed along as fine as can be. Oh, they need to spread a little mayhem every now and then. Perform some satanic rituals, kidnap and sacrifice a few runaway kids, that sort of thing. They’re Satanists, remember, and even though we think they’re completely bugfuck, they believe this horseshit. They really believe they’re performing some divine rituals when they do this stuff. So the years pass, and we move into this nice suburban home, and my mom and who I think is my dad try to protect me and shield me from the world as any good normal parent would do. Mom is pretty much zoned out because maybe her husband keeps her that way. But she wises up somehow. She gets off the drugs, and within a year or two she begins to wise up even more. She begins to think that maybe this crap she’s been led to believe is nothing but crap. Maybe she begins to look at me in a different light. After all, I’m just a normal, eight or nine-year-old boy. I don’t have horns growing out of my head, I don’t have a tail, I don’t smell like brimstone or have fangs. My mother has inspected every inch of my body from the time I was a baby and she knows I don’t bear the mark of the beast.” He sniggered. “And forget about that shit about the numbers being on my head. I was as bald as Telly Savalas when I was born. She would have been able to see it.

“The point is that she wises up. She sees them for what they are. Religious fanatics. And during her brief period of rationality, she plans her escape and makes good on it. She takes me in the dead of night, when dad is out of town, and whisks me away. I have vague memories of traveling with her through Arizona, New Mexico, maybe Texas. We were on the road for a long time. Next thing I know, we’re in New York. We move to Buffalo. Mom finds us a small motel room and a few days later she tells me we’re changing our names. She asks me what I want to be called. I’d always hated my name so it was no wonder I almost forgotten about it until you called me that day. I picked Vince as my new name. So my mom had our names changed. I’m guessing that she got us genuine fake identifications, with new birth certificates. Whatever it was she did, it worked for twenty-five years. We lived under our new names, moved to Toronto, mom got really religious, and that was all I knew from then on. We came to Lititz in 1983, when I was sixteen turning seventeen. By then I’d almost forgotten about my early life.

“The point is this.” Vince hunkered down, sitting in a chair. “During this time the group, the Children, they were freaking out. They probably embarked on this huge search for me, but mom was so good at changing our identities, she eluded them for twenty-five years.”

“One would think that if there really were a devil, he never would have allowed you or anybody else to escape the cult,” Frank said. “I can dig what you’re saying. They’re religious nuts. They’re not working with reality. They may be great at skip tracing and eventually tracking people down and getting rid of them, but they never would have been able to anticipate you and your mom’s defection.”

“Exactly! They’re just people. They’re not supernatural bogeymen. But regardless, they’re as fanatical about the devil as Jerry Falwell is about God. They’re also as fanatical as this other group is. This group I’m alluding to, the one that tried killing us this morning and tried to kill me Sunday afternoon. Sometime during the period The Children of the Night was looking for me, this other group found out about me. It is this group, which I am using fictitiously now, which is trying to kill me. Maybe they started off as a genuine church group. Maybe they were already comprised of fringe members of the Christian far right. Who knows? What matters is they somehow found out about not only me, but also The Children of the Night. Maybe it was an ex-member.”

Mike spoke up. “It could be possible. There have been defectors, although most of them usually die in so-called accidents, or disappear.”

Frank rubbed his chin. “Let’s suppose somebody does defect though. It’s possible they could have remained hidden very much the way Maggie did. Maybe they started this other church and their sole purpose was finding you,” he nodded at Vince, “and, once finding you, killing you.”

“See?” Vince exclaimed. “How many times do I have to spell things out before you start believing me?”

“Granted, it’s a good theory,” Mike said. Now Mike was pacing the room. He went to the window and peeked out between the blinds. He was silent for a moment. “It’s possible. The more I think about it, the more plausible it sounds.”

Frank appeared to be accepting the theory more, too. “Whoever this group is, they wouldn’t have to be very big. It could be as little as half a dozen members.”

“And they wouldn’t necessarily have to have been together for very long,” Vince said. “Just long enough for whoever knew enough about The Children to preach Children theology to his new congregation, and come up with some kind of tactical plan in finding me.”

“Do you think it’s possible that if this is true, that this renegade member might be a member of both sides?” Frank asked Mike. “You know, a member of The Children of the Night and a secret member of this other group?”

“I don’t know,” Mike said, shaking his head. “I find that hard to believe, but anything’s possible.”

They were silent for a moment, Mike returning to the other bed. Frank remained reclining against his bed, Vince in his chair. Finally, Mike broke the silence. “Let’s see what the news says.” He reached for the television remote control and turned it on.

He flipped through the channels. It was closing in on ten p.m., and they had to endure another ten minutes of Law and Order before the local news came on. When the broadcast started, the shoot-out in Lititz was one of the top stories.

They watched spell-bounded as the facts were revealed. There were four dead, with another—Reverend Powell—listed in critical condition. Only one of the dead had been positively identified—Lititz Borough patrolman Tom Hoffman. Vince felt a stab of guilt as he learned this, then quickly fought to push the emotion down. Dozens of people had witnessed the gunfight, which erupted shortly before the lunchtime rush. Three of the gunmen had gotten away and were being sought. Police sketches came across the screen and Vince fought the urge to laugh. Frank did laugh. “What a joke! How the fuck do they expect to find people with sketches like that?”

The sketches in question were rendered with stiff brushstrokes of heavy pencil. Even though the caricatures didn’t resemble any of them remotely, Vince was able to pick out who was supposed to be who. Frank was easy to pick out—his sketch showed a longhaired man with a puffy face and squinty eyes and a stubbled beard. Good thing they’d all gotten haircuts. As far as a puffy face went, Frank never had one to begin with. So much for witness descriptions.

Mike and Vince’s sketches were crude, and if presented side by side with their actual photographs, one would be hard pressed to find any resemblances. The one Vince guessed represented Mike’s depicted a guy with less hair than Mike really had, also with squinty eyes. Vince’s own sketch revealed a guy that looked like Timothy McVeigh; stony-faced, cold, emotionless.

The broadcaster finished by saying that the State Police and the FBI had been brought into the case and that a manhunt was now underway. And, of course, anybody seeing anybody resembling the sketches was urged to call a special hotline that had been set up.

Mike turned to Vince and Frank. “Good thing we parked our first rental car in a public parking garage. Let’s leave it there. We’ll drive the other one to Pittsburgh and turn it in and catch the first plane we can get tomorrow.”

“Sounds good to me,” Frank said.

“You think that’ll be enough to throw them off?” Vince asked.

“You don’t see them breaking down the doors to get to us now, do you?”

“No.” That wasn’t the point, though. There was still the possibility the authorities would eventually catch up with them.

“We’ll see what’s in the paper tomorrow,” Mike said. “And check out the news on the major networks. That should give us some clue as to how the investigation is progressing. Maybe they’ll ID the other guys by then. For now, I think we should get some sleep.”

That was easier said than done. They shed their clothes for T-shirts and boxers, and they all took turns in the shower. They flipped a quarter for the sole bed and Mike won. Vince lay down beside Frank in one of the beds, facing the window, thinking about all that had happened and wondering when the nightmare was going to end.

EVERYTHING WENT SMOOTHLY the following morning, Friday. After waking up, they washed up, brushed their teeth, dressed into the suits they’d purchased the day before, packed their things, and exited the room. Mike turned the TV on while they changed, hoping for more news on the shoot-out but there was nothing else forthcoming. They meandered downstairs to check out. Mike signed the bill and they were off.

Vince was nervous as they headed through the hotel’s parking garage to the vehicle Mike and Frank secured yesterday. He kept expecting federal agents to pop out from behind cars and black SUV’s brandishing weapons yelling, “Freeze! You’re under arrest!” Or, worse, another assassin popping out from behind a parked car and letting loose with more automatic gunfire.

Of course they were armed again, but Vince didn’t feel any safer. Mike unlocked the car—an Audi—and they stowed their luggage in the trunk and Vince slid into the front seat. Mike drove. Vince watched to see if they were being followed as they exited the garage and headed up Broad Street. “We aren’t being followed,” Frank said fifteen minutes later as Mike headed west out of the city limits.

“How do you know?”

“Because I know. I’ve been on alert like this for a year now. I’d know if we were being followed.”

Vince almost responded with, if you’re so good at telling if we’re being followed, how come you didn’t know we were followed to the Family Cupboard yesterday? That only would have sparked a fight and he didn’t want to fight with Frank.

They made the drive to Pittsburgh in silence. Vince fiddled with the radio, then stopped at a rock station playing the Red Hot Chili Peppers. Mike turned the air conditioner on, and Vince sat back and watched the scenery flash by.

It was a four-hour drive. Once they got to the Pittsburgh city limits, Mike pulled over to a gas station to fill up the car’s tank. Frank went into the station’s kiosk and emerged with bottled water, sodas, and a map. They consulted the map over their refreshments after the gas tank was filled up and ready to go. “Pittsburgh Airport looks to be a twenty minute drive,” Mike said. “Let’s go.”

Thirty minutes later they were at the Pittsburgh Airport parking garage. Mike turned to Frank. “Let’s get these in the suitcases,” he said, taking out his gun and the spare clips from his coat pocket. They packed the weapons securely in the suitcases then, carrying their luggage and looking very much like normal, upper-middle class businessmen, they made their way to the rental car agency where they turned in the keys to the Audi. Mike led the way to a United Airlines terminal. He walked to the ticket counter and talked with the agent for fifteen minutes. When he came back he was holding three tickets. “I got us stand-by seats on a flight that leaves in two hours,” he said. “Let’s go to the gate and hang out.”

They walked leisurely through airport security, then past various gates. Frank nodded toward a newsstand. “Let’s see if there’s anything in the paper about us.” Vince and Mike followed him.

Vince spotted the New York Times with a headline story about the shoot-out. “Here we go,” he said, picking it up. One of the sub-titles read Victims Identified.

Frank paid for the paper and they sat down near one of the gates, passing the paper around. Most of the article covered what they already knew. What was new to them were the identities of the three dead assassins: they were being identified as Matt Newberry, Hank Warner, and Andy Duncan, members of an apocalyptic Christian church called Soldiers of Christ. Information on the group was sketchy and a church spokesman, speaking on a condition of anonymity, said the church had no statement other than the three dead men were acting alone and that they had no knowledge of their criminal intentions.

“This is proof,” Vince said. “Soldiers of Christ. On a mission to wipe out the Anti-Christ. Me.”

Mike folded the paper. His features were stern. “When we get back to California we’ll do some research on the Soldiers of Christ.”

“Don’t worry, bro,” Frank said, patting Vince’s shoulder. “We’ll get to the bottom of this.”

Vince tried to take assurance that Frank and Mike would take care of things, that now that the proof had been presented to them they would have to take extra precautionary measures. When he read that the gunmen were members of the Soldiers of Christ he’d experienced a feeling of immense dread as his fears were confirmed. “We might not need to do anything,” he said. “I’ll bet right now a bunch of journalists are all over this and by tomorrow, information about these guys will be all over the news wires.”

Mike didn’t say anything and Frank nodded. Vince checked his watch. “Guess we should head to our gate.” They stood up and began walking down the gateway, and even when Vince was strapped in his seat in the DC-10 two hours later he still didn’t feel calmed by the knowledge that he now knew who it was that was trying to kill him. If anything, it only made him feel more in fear for his own life.

Chapter Seventeen

WHEN THEY EXITED the plane at Los Angeles International Airport, Vince couldn’t help but be nervous. He kept expecting to be arrested by cops waiting for them to get off the plane. He scanned a sea of faces that didn’t acknowledge him as he, Frank, and Mike set off down the terminal. There were no plainclothes detectives lying in wait to ambush them. In short, they’d made it home undetected.

It was almost seven p.m. in Los Angeles; they’d had to wait for over three hours in Pittsburgh and by the time they’d taken off it was four p.m. The flight had been unremarkable and they managed to take seats near each other. They’d spent the five-hour flight in silence, reading magazines and newspapers, pausing only occasionally to talk about things unrelated as to why they’d really been in Pennsylvania. Once they reached Mike’s car in the parking structure they let their guards down as Mike unlocked the door and they slipped inside.

Vince sighed in relief as he set his bag down on the floor by his feet. “God, I’m glad that’s over with. I kept expecting somebody to pop out behind a car with a gun.”

“I gotta admit, I was kinda nervous, too,” Frank said. He loosened his tie and unbuttoned the top button of his shirt.

Mike started the car. “We haven’t talked about what we’re going to do next. Any ideas?”

“Not yet,” Frank said. “But we definitely need to stay on this.”

“We do,” Mike said, letting the car warm up. “I’ve got to get home and see how things are there. Carol’s probably worrying to death. I think we should use tonight to tie up whatever loose ends we may have and then reconvene late tomorrow morning at Vince’s.” He looked back at Vince. “That sounds okay to you?”

“Fine.” Vince’s mind was racing; maybe he could see Tracy tonight and have her out of the house before Mike and Frank came over.

“We’ll meet tomorrow morning at Vince’s to talk more strategy,” Mike said. “Say ten-thirty?”

Frank and Vince nodded that ten-thirty was fine with them.

“Where are you going to go?” Vince asked Frank as Mike backed out of the parking space.

“After Mike drops us off at your house, I’ll get myself a motel room,” Frank said. “I gotta call my agent and see how Brandy and the kids are doing.”

“Whatever we do, we lay low,” Mike said as he steered the car down the parking garage toward the tollgates. “I’ll try to get some information on the shootout in Lititz and give you all an update tomorrow morning. If I hear of anything vital, I’ll call you.”

“Think you can hold off calling your girlfriend for another day or so?” Frank’s question was directed at Vince but he didn’t look at him. He was looking out the window at the passing scenery of South-Central Los Angeles as Mike drove down Century Boulevard toward the 405 Freeway.

“Oh, I think so,” Vince said, playing casual. “I’m so damn horny though, I don’t know how much longer I can hold out.”

“If you behave tonight and all goes well tomorrow, maybe you can see her tomorrow night,” Mike said. “How’s that sound? I’d like to meet her.”

“Yeah, me too,” Frank said. He turned to Vince, his features impassive.

Vince shrugged. “Sure.”

They made the rest of the drive to Orange County lost in their own thoughts.

VINCE WASTED NO time. The minute he walked in his front door he headed to the phone in the living room and dialed Tracy’s phone number at home.

Tracy picked up on the third ring. “Hello.”

“Tracy, it’s me. Vince.”

“Vince!”

Hearing her voice again melted his heart. Knowing that she was so close now, merely blocks away, added to his growing need to see her. “I’m home,” he said. “And I don’t know how much longer I’ll be home. We’re supposed to get together again tomorrow. Can you come over?”

“I’m leaving in five minutes,” Tracy said.

She arrived thirty minutes later.

When he opened the front door she rushed into his arms. They held each other close; Vince kissed her and when Tracy kissed him back he felt tingles run up and down his spine. He closed the door and took her hand. “God, I missed you,” he said.

“Not now,” she said, melting in his arms and kissing him again.

Somehow, they made it to the bedroom.

AFTERWARD, VINCE TOLD Tracy everything.

He’d already told her what happened in Lititz while he was holed up in the Marriot at Harrisburg last night. Understandably, she’d been shocked. Now he filled in the details, as well as what Mike and Frank found out last night and his own discoveries and feelings as he read newspaper accounts and learned the identity of the men involved. “Soldiers of Christ,” he said, leaning against the pillow. “Ever heard of ’em?”

“No,” Tracy said, her mouth set in scowl. “Should I?”

Vince shook his head. “I guess not. I surely never heard of them until today.”

Tracy was reflective. “So you really think that…because these guys were part of a cult called the Soldiers of Christ that they were trying to kill you?”

“I don’t know,” Vince said, sighing. “I know it sounds stupid, but…everything that’s happened has just been so…chaotic and…just imbued with secrecy. Like why did my mother have all this information buried in a box in her backyard? Why was she afraid to talk about it? Why did she pull stakes twenty-five years ago and take me, change our names, tried to bury our past? Was she hiding from something? Running away from something, or somebody? I don’t know.” He looked at her. “And Frank. He just suddenly pops into my life, telling me I’m in danger and he knows all this stuff that’s happened. He knows my mom was murdered, he knows about Laura’s death, he’s been spying on my friends—”

“That’s the scary part,” Tracy said, looking concerned. “The fact that this guy actually poked around in your life. My life!”

“Exactly! I mean, he seems to be a pretty nice guy and all, and considering the circumstances of what he and Mike have told me and what I’ve found out, I don’t blame them. In fact, I feel good that you came up clean.”

“What do you mean?” Tracy frowned.

Oops. Vince tried to dismiss the blunder with a shrug. “Nothing. Just that Frank said that you and Brian and some of my other friends came up with clean records. You aren’t part of the all-sinister Children of the Night.” He chuckled, trying to make everything a big joke.

Tracy looked serious. “What if he’d told you that I was a member?”

Vince’s laughter dried up. “You’re kidding, right?”

Tracy shook her head. Her features had taken on a grim, stony-faced appearance. “No, I’m not. Suppose Frank had told you that I’m a member of The Children of the Night.” She cocked her head. “What would you have done?”

All the spit seemed to dry up in Vince’s mouth. His stomach turned into a ball of lead. “Um…I don’t know…”

“You don’t know?”

“I…” Vince was at a loss for words. Tracy waited for him to answer. Her persona had taken on a tone of deadly seriousness; she was no longer the flirtatious, laughing, sexy woman he’d met and fallen in love with. Now she resembled a dangerous, sly, secretive woman who was holding a winning hand.

“You don’t know what you’d do…isn’t that right?”

Vince nodded. “I guess not.” He searched her face for some tell tale sign of the Tracy that he knew.

Finally, she smiled. “Scared you, didn’t I?”

Vince relaxed, feeling as if a sudden weight had just been taken off his shoulders. “Jesus, Tracy, you scared the hell out of me!”

Tracy laughed. “I got you good, didn’t I? You didn’t know what to think!”

Slightly embarrassed by having scared the crap out of him, and slightly imbued with playfulness, Tracy didn’t resist as Vince wrestled her onto her back. She squealed. “Hey, wait a minute, I was only kidding!”

“Only kidding?” Vince tickled her sides. Tracy howled with laughter. “Only kidding? How’s this for kidding, huh?”

Vince tickled Tracy’s side and under her chin as she laughed and playfully slapped his hands away. The tenseness that had been present between them when Tracy suggested that she was a cult member was gone now. Vince caught her flailing wrists and pinned them down to the mattress above her head. Tracy’s eyes flared. “Oh, you domineering man, you!”

Vince laughed and kissed her.

The kiss led to other things. When those other things ended thirty minutes later they reclined again against the headboard. They lay atop the sheets, the sweat cooling from their bodies amidst the air conditioning. Vince swallowed some water from the bottle of Evian on the nightstand. “Can I ask you something?” Tracy asked. He looked at her. “Seriously?”

Vince nodded. He capped the bottle and replaced it on the nightstand. “Sure.”

“Suppose Frank did come back and say I was a cult member? Suppose he did it to keep you away from me due to his…his paranoia?”

Vince thought about it. She had a point. “I don’t know if I would believe him.”

“I would hope not.”

Vince laughed. “Really, Tracy, I’d have to make him see the error of his ways. I mean, if you were a cult member why would you seduce me and lead me on like this?”

“As part of some grand scheme to get you back into the group?”

Vince shook his head. It was bullshit, but in a way it made sense, too. It would be the kind of answer Frank would give him. “There’d be no arguing with him I guess,” he said, regarding her calmly. “Then I’d know he’s a nut. Especially if he claimed Brian was a cult member, too.”

Tracy rolled her eyes. “Oh yeah, Brian Denison, mister atheist. Guy who has no time for religious lunacy in any way, shape, or form. That would be a big giveaway.”

Vince chuckled. “Of course you and Brian are pretty similar. If Frank thought you were a cult member I’d know he was full of shit. I know you; he doesn’t.”

“And you don’t think your theory is full of shit?”

“What theory?”

“The one you just told me,” Tracy said, looking serious. “That you think you’re their Anti-Christ.”

So this was where Tracy’s tactics were leading. Suddenly Vince saw his theory for what it was worth. A fragile notion perpetuated by his own rising sense of fear and confusion over the chain of events that had taken place over the past few weeks. A notion helped along by good old-fashioned paranoia. “Well, now that you put it that way,” he said.

Tracy’s mouth was set in a smirking grin. “See? You can see the error of your ways!”

Vince laughed. “I guess I can.”

Tracy smiled. She took his hand in hers. Vince smiled back at her and the look in her eyes told him that she supported him and believed in him. And in knowing that, he began to believe in himself.

FRANK WAS TYPING the week’s diary entries into his journal when his cell phone rang.

He’d spent thirty minutes on the phone with his literary agent, Peter, who reported that everything was fine with Brandy and the kids. Naturally they were worried and missed him, and Frank had assured Peter that what he was working on was almost finished. He’d been assured his family was safe (“not even the IRS knows where they are, Frank,” Peter had said. “You’ve got nothing to worry about.”). Frank had given Peter a message to relay to Brandy and the kids, then hung up. He’d been detailing the weeks’ events in his notes on his Compaq laptop when the phone jarred him out of his thoughts.

He groped toward it automatically. “Yeah.”

“Frank!” At first Frank didn’t recognize the voice. Whoever it was sounded panicked, frantic. “Ah, thank God you’re there Frank.”

“Mike?”

“Carol’s missing!” It was Mike and he sounded scared to death. His voice wavered on panic. “The place is a mess and…and there’s blood everywhere!”

Frank felt himself grow light headed with shock and he had to force himself to stay calm. “Okay, what happened?”

“I don’t know.” Mike panted, as if he were out of breath. “I got home and saw that Carol’s car was in the driveway so I figured she was home. And when I got in…” His voice strained, on the verge of trembling into sobs. “…the place was…was trashed! And it…it…” He began to stammer.

“Calm down,” Frank urged.

“She just wasn’t there!” Mike cried, and now he was crying. He didn’t heave great wracking sobs, but Frank could hear the tears in the man’s voice. “The place was ransacked and she’s gone!”

“Where are you now?”

“I’m here, at home.” Mike whined. Frank could tell that Mike was trying to keep his emotions under control and was having a hard time doing it.

“You need to get out of the house, Mike.”

“There’s nobody here. I went through the house already.”

“Are you sure?”

“Yeah.”

“Have you called the police?”

“No.”

“Stay where you are. I’ll be there in ten minutes.”

“They got her, Frank.” Mike began to cry again. “They got her, I know they got her.”

“I’m leaving now,” Frank said. He hung up, grabbed wallet, keys, jacket, made sure his nine and extra clips were in the jacket, and then he left.

THANK GOD EVERYBODY in Southern California drove like maniacs. Frank drove like one on his way to Mike Peterson’s home in Huntington Beach, and as he rounded the corner to the development off Beach Boulevard he saw the older man leaning against his car in the driveway. His face was buried in his hands and Frank pulled in front of the house and killed the engine. He was out of the car in a flash. “You okay?”

Mike nodded, his eyes closed. The man trembled and he wouldn’t look up. Frank reached out and gripped his shoulder. “Mike,” he said softly but forcefully. “Come on man, I know…this is hard.” Frank imagined himself in Mike’s shoes. He’d be going through the same kind of hell now if something happened to Brandy or the kids. Hell, he’d be a fucking basket case. Mike seemed to be handling it well in spite of the situation. “Mike, I’m here.”

Mike finally looked up at Frank. His eyes were red, his cheeks damp with tears. He took a deep breath. His features looked haunted, as if he’d just seen a ghost. “I shouldn’t have taken them for granted,” he said. “I was so careful in setting up my other identity. And I was so careful with all of us. If they know about me, they know about you and—”

“You haven’t called the police yet?”

Mike shook his head. “No…I…I almost did…”

Frank looked up and down the quiet neighborhood. It was an upper-middle class neighborhood, similar to the one his aunt Diane and Uncle Charlie resided in El Paso where he’d lived for five years. All two-story tract homes with BMW’s and Mini-Vans parked in the driveways. Nobody was watching them. “I take it we haven’t attracted the attention of the neighbors yet, otherwise the cops would already be here.”

Mike took a deep breath. “I…I tried to control myself as much as possible.”

“I’ve got to go in,” Frank said, looking at Mike. “Do you want to stay out here?”

Mike shook his head. “I know it sounds crazy, but I can’t. I have to find out what happened to her.”

“Then let’s go in,” Frank said, his hand still resting on Mike’s shoulder gently.

They went into the house together.

The first thing Frank noticed when they crossed the threshold was the heat. It felt stale and musty, as if the house had been closed up for an extended period of time. Then he noticed the smell. It was the faint, coppery scent of dried blood.

Mike seemed a little more prepared for the destruction that followed than Frank was. The older man led him into the living room and Frank gasped at the sight. The room was in shambles. The couch was ripped open, the stuffing from the cushions strewn about. The television was bashed-in, books were toppled to the floor from the built-in oak bookcase. Carol’s fragile china was shattered, the cabinet they’d been housed in broken, destroyed. “This way,” Mike said, heading for the stairs. “The minute I saw…what you’re seeing now, I headed up the stairs and started calling Carol’s name.”

Frank followed Mike up the staircase, feeling himself tense up. There was something about this, some sixth sense that was telling Frank that something wasn’t right. How could they have found him? he thought. Mike was more careful than any of them, more careful than his Aunt Diane and Uncle Charlie, more careful than John Llama. His false identity was foolproof. So what happened?

“This was what I saw,” Mike said as he stepped aside and allowed Frank entry into the master bedroom.

Frank stood in the doorway to the bedroom. The room was destroyed; the furnishings were in the same slashed and broken state as the furniture downstairs. Framed pictures that had hung on the walls were on the floor, now shattered. Frank took a step into the room and Mike turned on the light. Frank saw the dark maroon splotches on the white carpeting right away.

Carol had bled quite profusely.

Mike hung back in the hallway as Frank stepped further into the room. He wasn’t a homicide detective, but it was obvious from the spilled blood and the destruction in the room that a struggle had taken place. A splash of red caught his eye; it was a streak of blood on the wall leading into the bathroom. Frank ventured inside, dreading what he would see.

Blood had splashed into the sink. The mirror was shattered, smears of blood dotting its surface. Bottles of soap and shampoo had been spilled onto the floor along with combs, brushes, a hair dryer, and a box of curlers. One lone blue towel had been pulled off the metal towel rack and lay on the floor amid the toiletries. More blood dotted the tiled floor and a bath mat that ran the length of the bathroom. Frank cautiously avoided stepping in the blood and leaned over to peer into the bathtub. It was empty.

He made his way carefully back into the bedroom. “Did they take anything?”

“I don’t know.” Mike looked shocked and haunted.

“Did you guys keep cash or jewelry here?”

Mike shook his head. “Not on your life.”

Frank glanced back in the bedroom. There was a television mounted on a small entertainment unit; its screen was gutted. “Whoever did this is not your usual junkie who wants to hock your shit to score a fix.” Frank turned back to Mike, his mind racing. “They were after something. Are you positive you didn’t keep anything about the investigation at the house?”

“I’m positive,” Mike hissed, seeming to perk up a little under the interrogation.

“Are you sure?” Frank pressed him on the issue. “Think! Why the hell would they chance such a bold breakin if they didn’t know something was—”

Mike’s eyes lit up. “The key!”

Frank felt his heart stop. “What key?”

“The key to the safe deposit box.” Mike looked anguished. “I…I called Carol before you guys met me at LAX and told her what I was working on. I told her where the safe deposit box was. She knew what happened to John. She didn’t want me to poke into this again. I told her I wasn’t doing anything, that all I was doing was helping you out in some family stuff.” He looked at Frank. “I swear I didn’t tell her anything else. I don’t know if she believed me or not, but—”

“You better not have mentioned my name,” Frank said. At the mention of Mike telling Carol that Frank was involved, he felt angry.

Mike ignored him. “I put all the files I’d accumulated and a zip disk of my investigation into a safe deposit box I kept under my pseudonym. I…I told Carol that if I wasn’t back by Friday to open it and do something about it.” His eyes were wide at the implication. “They—”

Frank tore into the bedroom. “Let’s start looking.”

They began searching for the key to the safe deposit box. Mike pulled out drawers and rifled through them, but it was obvious that whoever destroyed the house had already gone through them. Whatever clothes weren’t spilled onto the floor had been thrown or pushed aside. Jewelry and knickknacks had been spilled onto the floor. Frank began going through clothes in the closet. “Where would she have kept it?”

“In the bedroom on the dresser somewhere,” Mike said, searching frantically. “It’s not here!”

“Maybe they missed it,” Frank said. Yet the more they searched, the more he realized that whoever had broken into the house and taken Carol by surprise had probably also gotten the key.

Fifteen minutes later they abandoned the search. Mike looked frustrated and scared. “Oh my God what are we going to do?”

Frank felt just as frantic and stressed but he was trying not to show it. “Okay,” he said, running a hand over his dark hair. “Let’s think about this for a minute.”

“She’s gone, the key’s gone, they got her and they know about us!” Mike said, poking through the rubble again.

“They don’t know about us.”

“Yes, they do!” Mike whirled around, his face red with tears. “Look at this place! They knew what they were looking for, and they got Carol in the process. Now we’re fucked! This whole thing is just fucked!” Mike breathed heavy, his features showing his anger and frustration.

“First things first,” Frank said, trying to be calm. “We’ve got to get the hell out of here.”

“Suppose they have it?” Mike asked, looking at Frank frantically. “What are we going to do? Suppose they came here….the evening we left and—”

“Stop it!” Frank grabbed Mike’s shoulders and shook him. Mike flinched, as if afraid the bigger man was going to throw him against the wall. Frank leaned his face close to Mike’s. He could have kissed him if he wanted. “Calm the fuck down. If we panic, that’s going to expose our weakness. So just calm…the fuck…down!” Frank interjected menace in the command, punctuating it by shaking Mike as he enunciated each word. Mike got the message.

“Okay, okay,” Mike said, the anger and frustration deflating a moment. “Okay, we gotta do something, though.”

“First we gotta get the hell out of here.”

Mike looked up at Frank, his eyes wide. “You think we should call the cops?”

“Fuck no!”

“But what about…”

“I’m sorry, buddy,” Frank’s resolve was strengthening him, empowering him to take charge. He grabbed Mike by the shoulders again and spun him around, marching him out the door to the bedroom and down the stairs. “But right now we’re getting the hell out of here. And I’m leaning very strongly in favor of going to Billy Grecko with this shit as soon as possible. Like tonight.”

“But Carol—” Mike protested, starting the merry-go-round of grief again.

“We’ll find Carol,” Frank said, herding Mike outside. He closed the door behind him, made sure it was locked, and then led Mike to his car. “We’ve gotta get back to my room and think about this, talk a new strategy. Where’s the shit we brought back from PA? The box Maggie Walters had all those newspaper clippings in that Reverend Powell gave us?”

“Still in my car.”

“Get it.” Frank steered Mike to his car and waited while the older man fumbled to disarm it with his key fob. He rummaged in the backseat and grabbed it as Frank stood guard, watching the neighborhood silently. Nobody was observing them.

Once the back door to Mike’s sedan was closed and the vehicle was locked, Mike turned to him. His face was ashen. “We’ve got to find Carol,” Mike said. The shock was finally settling into his system. He was limp, hollow-eyed, haunted.

“That’s part of the plan.” Frank helped Mike into his car, then got in and drove away from the house. As he got on the 405 Freeway heading south to Irvine, he thought about calling Vince but decided against it at the last minute. I’ll call him later if we have to. Right now I’ve got to get Mike the hell out of here.

And as he drove to the motel, taking back roads, driving in a way to shake-off pursuers, Frank kept checking his rearview mirrors to make sure they weren’t being followed.

TWO HOURS LATER, Mike Peterson was asleep. Thank God for Valium, Frank thought.

Frank was seated at the small table by the bed. A lone sixty-watt bulb lit the room, providing enough illumination for him to work by. He’d been writing notes to himself since he got Mike to sleep. The Valium Frank had slipped into his soft drink was enough to put him out all night.

He picked up a can of coke and drank from it. He needed the caffeine to keep himself going. He would get some sleep later. Right now he needed to think.

The minute he got Mike to his motel room he’d told him to lie down on the queen sized bed. Mike had protested at first, repeating the same mantra. “Carol’s gone, they’ve got her, my God I’ve got to call the kids, the police, I’ve got to do something—”

Frank knew he had to knock Mike out. The guy was driving him bugfuck and he couldn’t think while Mike was wigging out. He couldn’t afford to have Mike bring everything crashing down. One call to the cops and everything would be destroyed—their investigation, their secrecy, their security. The cops would automatically suspect Mike in Carol’s disappearance and would haul him in for questioning. Without Mike, Frank and Vince would be sitting ducks. The Children could then move in and do whatever the hell they wanted…kidnap Vince maybe, kill Frank. And in the meantime, whatever information Mike had gathered on the cult would be locked away. Anything he or Frank told the police would be met by healthy skepticism. They’d be damned lucky if they could get anybody to take their story seriously, even Mike’s friend Billy.

He couldn’t have that.

So Frank told Mike to lie down and chill out for a minute. He was going to get him a drink, then he could call his kids and the two of them would call the police. Mike seemed to accept this and while he lay down, Frank had gone to the soft drink dispensing machine outside the room and bought a Coke and bottled water. He’d let himself back in the room, poured Mike a small glass, then searched through his overnight bag for his box of pills where he kept aspirin and Valium. He’d poured a glass of water, dropped a Valium in it and waited while it dissolved, then had taken a tiny sip to make sure it couldn’t be detected. He’d watched while the former high school teacher drank the water down then lay back down. Ten minutes later he was asleep.

Now Frank had to figure out what the hell to do.

The first thing he thought of doing was calling his Aunt Diane. He hadn’t seen her or Charlie in over ten years and hadn’t spoken to her in at least a year. In the years since the breakin at their home twenty-three years ago—an obvious warning to cease their investigation into the disappearance of his father—they’d been reluctant to talk to Frank about his background. They’d shared some information with him when he brought it up, but it was like pulling teeth. It had taken them five years to open up enough to start talking about it. He’d stopped asking them about it, and then one day when he was visiting he’d started asking again. This was shortly after he’d gotten sober and was working on what was to become his first horror novel in five years, Things Inside. He’d tried to bring the subject up gently and they answered his questions in the same way, not offering any more than they’d given him the first time around. It was obvious they weren’t prepared, nor did they wish to revisit painful memories.

Which was why he couldn’t go to them now. As much as he would have liked to pick up the phone right now and call Aunt Diane, he couldn’t. He didn’t want to get her involved again. She’d been through too much already. And besides, what could she do about his and Mike’s situation now? How could she help them?

Vince was the next person he thought of calling. He supposed it was time to get him involved more deeply. Frank picked up the phone and dialed Vince’s phone number.

The phone rang three times before it was picked up. “Hello?” Vince sounded cautious.

“It’s Frank.”

“Yeah?” Now Vince sounded even more overly cautious. Nervous, even.

“We’ve got trouble.”

“What happened?”

“Not over the phone. It’s serious, though. We’ve got trouble.”

Frank could hear Vince on the other end of the line fumbling with something and muttering.

“I don’t think we should be separated any more tonight,” Frank continued. “Can you get over here?”

“Yeah, yeah, sure. Where are you?”

Frank gave him his location and the room number. Vince said he was going to get some clothes on and he’d leave in ten minutes. Frank replaced the receiver and leaned back in the chair, his mind running with a thousand thoughts. I don’t know what the hell we’re going to talk about, or what kind of plan of action we’re going to take but we’ve got to do something. And we’ve got to stay together. No telling what could happen and it’s better to have strength in numbers tonight.

Frank picked up the Coke and drank while he waited for Vince.

“I’M SO SORRY,” Vince said for the tenth time since Frank called. He slipped into a T-shirt and rooted around in a dresser for a pair of jeans.

“It’s okay,” Tracy said. She was sitting up in bed watching as Vince dressed. “These things happen.”

“No they don’t,” Vince said, fastening the buttons on his jeans. “Normal boyfriends don’t have secret pasts that wreak havoc on their current relationships in the guise of kidnappings and attempted murders and—”

“Vince!” Tracy’s tone was sharp and Vince paused. She was looking at him. “It’s okay. I understand.”

Vince turned away and reached for his shoes and socks. “Well I’m glad somebody does, ’cause I sure in the hell don’t understand what the hell’s going on.”

“I’m sure pretty soon you will,” Tracy said. She leaned forward, the sheets slipping down her breasts. “For what it’s worth, I think you need to stop listening to this guy Frank and not even go over there. In fact, maybe you should call the cops.”

“I don’t know why he didn’t think of doing that himself,” Vince muttered, tying his shoes.

“I’m serious,” Tracy said. Vince stopped dressing and looked at her as she continued. “Really, Vince, just look at yourself. You’re tired, you’re jumping at shadows, you’re getting just as paranoid as you say this Frank Black guy is. He’s almost gotten you killed already, and the police are after you in Pennsylvania. I think you’re in way over your head and you should just—”

“Give up?”

“Yes.” Tracy looked at him. They stared at each other for a moment, Tracy’s features stony, immobile. “Just…I’m sitting here watching as you…as you…just…I don’t know, this is just crazy!” Tracy threw her arms up in the air in defeat, her voice taking on a tone of frustration. “I hate seeing you like this, and I hate what Frank’s been doing to you!”

“This isn’t just Frank’s doing,” Vince said, sitting down on the bed to pull on his shoes.

“Then what is it?”

“It’s what happened to us when we were kids.”

“And what happened to you?”

Vince looked at her. Her questioning was starting to piss him off; she very well goddamn knew what happened to him. “What’s the point?”

“The point is,” Tracy said, swinging her legs over the side of the bed. She reached for her clothes on the floor, “I’m going with you.”

“What?” Vince sat up in surprise.

“You heard me.” Tracy started getting dressed. “I’m going with you. What’s your problem is my problem.”

“But Tracy—”

“Vince!” She looked at him with a stern gaze. Vince felt something stir inside him. As serious as she looked, there was something in her eyes that he hadn’t seen in another woman since he was married to Laura. It was a sense of undying commitment and love.

“You’re serious?”

Tracy pulled the shirt she’d worn earlier in the evening over her head. Her hair, slightly ruffled from their bed-play, tumbled to her shoulders. “You bet I’m serious.”

Vince briefly debated the implications this would raise if he brought Tracy to Frank Black’s motel room. He’s gonna have a fit, he thought. He’s gonna blow his fucking stack.

As if reading his thoughts, Tracy said, “I know your friend is gonna be pissed the minute he sees me, but I don’t give a shit. He may not understand, but I care about you, Vince. These people almost killed me, too, and that makes it more than just your problem. It’s our problem.” Now fully dressed, she stood in the bedroom waiting for him to get up. Her eyes blazed with a fiery intensity. “Got me?”

“Yeah, I guess so,” Vince said. He watched Tracy for a moment as she got dressed, his mind racing. There was no use in stopping her. He could tell she’d made up her mind. Tracy was going with him and she was just as involved in this as he and Frank and Mike were. He was going to have to find some way to convince them that Tracy was okay, that she wasn’t a threat. Besides, hadn’t Frank said that Tracy already checked out? That she had no ties to the cult?

Tracy was dressed and waiting for him. “Let’s go,” she said. And with rising trepidation, Vince followed her out of the house to his car.

FRANK LOOKED THROUGH the peephole of his motel room door at the sound of the knock on the door. When he saw Vince he almost opened the door automatically. But when he saw that he was with somebody it felt like he’d just been body slammed. He blinked and tried to focus in on the woman standing with Vince. He didn’t recognize her, had no idea who she was, but she was staring right at him through the peephole.

“Shit,” he muttered. He threw back the bolt, unlocked the door and opened it. “Get in here.”

Vince and the woman stepped into the room but Frank held her back. “Just you,” he said, glaring angrily at Vince.

“Bullshit,” the woman said, shouldering her way past Frank.

“Not so fast.” Frank tried to restrain her from entering and she pushed his arm away. A flush of anger poured through him as she shoved past. Frank darted after her as Vince followed her inside. “Who the fuck do you think you are to just walk in here and—”

The woman whirled around, her features blazing with an anger to match his own. “Who do you think you are? Calling my boyfriend anytime you want to, calling him away on your goddamned—”

“Now wait a minute!” He wasn’t even aware he was yelling.

“No, you wait a minute!” The woman stepped up to him, thrusting her finger at him. He didn’t know who she was, but she was a bold little thing. He vaguely recognized her as Tracy Harris, Vince’s current fuck bunny; he and Mike had run a background check on her and some of Vince’s other friends a month or so back and had come up with nothing overtly suspicious. Still, he wanted Vince to steer clear of her for a while until this shit blew over. “I’m getting sick and goddamned tired of you ordering him around like he’s some puppet to your paranoid delusions of…of…”

“Yeah?” It was taking all of his willpower to keep from screaming back at her. “You gonna spit it out or what?”

It was obvious she was infuriated with him. Her green eyes blazed with anger. “I’m tired of all the goddamned secrets and acting like everything is like some fucking spy mission!”

“Tracy!” Vince had closed the door and was trying to calm Tracy down. He took her shoulders, trying to hold her back. “Chill out, okay?”

“Yeah, chill out,” Frank said. He turned to Vince and glowered. “And you!”

“What?” Vince didn’t even look at him; he was trying to get Tracy to move further into the room, perhaps to sit her ass down.

“You just don’t fucking get it, do you? After all we talked about, after all the shit we’ve been through.”

“Cut the crap, Frank,” Tracy said, breaking away from Vince. “What about the shit I’ve been through. I was almost killed too! What about me?”

Vince looked at Frank. “What about her, Frank? Don’t you think she deserves to know what’s going on?”

“No,” Frank said, moving into the room. Mike was still conked out in dreamland. He crossed the room and peered out the window into the night beyond. “This has nothing to do with her. I don’t know why you had to make it her business.”

“Because she’s my girlfriend and I love her,” Vince said. The tone in Vince’s voice made Frank turn around. Vince was standing with Tracy near the dresser. His arm was around her waist. Tracy had her hands on Vince’s hips, their bodies facing each other, faces turned to Frank. “They almost killed her that day at the airport. She’s known everything about what’s been going on since the day my mother died. She knew that my mother’s murder has something to do with all this. She was worried about me. When we left for Pennsylvania I wanted to call her; she knew I was planning to go back anyway. I called her from the hotel room the night you and Mike went back to Lititz.”

“Shit,” Frank muttered. All the trust he’d felt for Vince, all the camaraderie, was crumbling away.

“I didn’t do this to cause any trouble,” Vince continued, his voice steady. “She already knew something was going on even before you showed up. What else was I supposed to do?”

“Lie to her the way Mike lied to his wife,” Frank muttered. He couldn’t look at Vince.

Vince was silent. He looked at Mike, who lay in bed conked out. Frank felt the weight of the world crashing on his shoulders. Suddenly the idea of lying to the one you loved the most didn’t seem like such a hot idea. Look where it had gotten Mike and Carol.

With that came the thought of Brandy and the kids. They didn’t know anything. Oh, Brandy suspected, but he’d purposely kept her in the dark. Had that been the right choice? Would not knowing what to expect make her as vulnerable to the Children as it had made Carol?

Shuddering, Frank reached for the chair behind him and sank into it. He felt so tired and angry and frustrated. He wanted to scream, he wanted to smash something. And for the first time in years he wanted a drink.

“Frank,” Vince said. He approached warily. “What’s going on? You said something was wrong…”

“It’s Mike,” Frank said, not even looking at Vince. Part of him was still fighting the urge to throw Vince and Tracy out of the room, but another part simply told him to let it go. So what if she knows? What the hell is she going to do?

“What’s wrong with him?”

Frank told him what happened. He spoke slowly, at first not looking at Vince as he began the story. But as he told it Vince sat down on another chair and Tracy sat on the desk next to Vince. They held hands, listening calmly and patiently as Frank told them about getting Mike’s frantic call, his arrival at the house, and Mike’s panicked state. He told them about the condition the house was in, the blood on the floor in the bathroom, the signs of a struggle. He told them about their search for the second key to the safe deposit box, about Mike’s frantic grief. “I brought him back here and put Valium in his drink so he would chill out,” he concluded. “And then I called you.” He’d straightened his posture around the middle of the narrative, but now that he concluded it he slouched down a little bit. “I didn’t think we should be alone tonight. Plus, I thought maybe we should go to Mike’s friend Billy with what we have now. We have enough documentation to take to him. It’s all circumstantial, but…” He shrugged. “I’m hoping it’ll be enough.”

Tracy looked concerned; Vince looked alarmed. “This is getting too big.” He looked at Tracy, his eyes wide. “The more this goes on the scarier this shit is getting. It’s like everywhere we turn something else is just hitting us.”

“Okay, let’s put some of this in perspective,” Tracy said. Whatever anger she had had upon entering the room seemed mostly gone as her tone of voice became serious. She still ignored Frank as she spoke mostly to Vince, but Frank could tell she was including him in her observations as well. “You haven’t called the police yet, which is a good thing. I’ve got a feeling that if you did they might have put two-and-two together and hauled you in for the shooting back in PA. Two, there is the shooting investigation to still think about. Have either of you been watching the news since you got back?”

Frank shook his head. “Not much. I scanned CNN a few hours ago and went online to see if there’s anything new and there’s nothing.”

“Okay, so I guess we have to assume they’re still looking for you.” Tracy turned to Vince.

“What about Mike?” Vince asked.

“My first concern was getting him out of his house,” Frank said. “Far as I knew, they could have been waiting for us in there. It looked like whoever hit the place did it a few days ago. The house was locked up and had that stuffiness a house gets when it’s been closed up for awhile.”

Tracy nodded. As much as Frank didn’t want to admit it, she was very much a part of the equation now. “So you think they broke in when his wife was home? You think they kidnapped her or something?”

Frank shrugged. “Something happened. There was blood all over the bathroom and the master bedroom.”

“No sign of forced entry, right?” Vince asked.

“No.” Frank frowned. “Mike said he let himself in, just like always. The minute he walked in he saw the place was trashed.”

“I wonder if she let them in,” Tracy mused. She leaned against the desk. “You know, maybe they knocked on the door and she answered it and they forced their way in. They chased her upstairs and got her in the bathroom.”

“It’s possible.”

“You’re sure they took the key to that safe deposit box?” Vince asked Frank.

“Yeah.” Frank nodded, glancing at Mike. “We looked all over for it. Mike’s pretty sure they took it.”

“So they knew he was working on this, that he’s been keeping information on the investigation,” Vince continued. “That means they know about us.”

“That’s why I thought we should be together tonight,” Frank said. “You know, safety in numbers.”

“What do we do with him in the meantime?” Tracy motioned to Mike.

“Fuck if I know. I know the first thing we should do is go to his bank tomorrow and see if we can get to that safe deposit box. He has another key. Besides, I think he wigged out a little too hard about that thing. If his signature was the only one on file, nobody else can access it, even his wife. The bank would need some kind of death certificate or something for them to allow anybody else access to it.”

Vince nodded. “That’s true.” He looked down at Mike’s sleeping figure. “How long you think he’ll be out.”

“Till tomorrow morning.”

“So there’s nothing to do ’till then,” Vince said.

“Nope.”

“And we’re not going to the police,” Tracy said, addressing the statement to Vince and Frank.

Vince glanced at Frank, who shrugged. “No. I don’t think we should. Not yet. Going to the cops is going to cause a bunch of shit.”

“I still think we should seriously consider going to William,” Frank urged. “Tonight, if possible.”

“Who’s William?” Tracy asked.

“That’s not your concern now,” Frank said, dismissing her question. He was looking at Vince. “I went through Mike’s shit after I called you and found William’s phone number. Haven’t gotten around to calling him yet.”

“It’s pretty late,” Tracy said, her voice low, soft. “It might be best to wait to call him in the morning.”

“She has a point,” Vince said. “What time is it?”

“Well after midnight,” Frank said. “Okay, we call him at eight o’clock sharp.”

“What do we do next?” Vince joined Tracy at the desk.

Frank regarded the couple. As much as he didn’t like having Tracy Harris here, he was stuck with her. He sighed. “I guess we crash here tonight and wait for tomorrow.”

Mike was sprawled on one side of a king-size bed. “You guys want to sleep on the floor, you can have some blankets and an extra pillow.” Frank picked up a pillow from the bed and threw it at Vince. “We should probably get some sleep.”

Which they did after a few hours of lying in the darkness. Frank lay down on his side of the king sized bed staring up at the ceiling. He’d checked the lock on the door and the windows, and they were secure. Vince and Tracy settled down on the floor in the clothes they were wearing. They were using one of the pillows from the bed, a cushion from one of the chairs, and a sheet. Frank didn’t look at them and made no attempt at starting a conversation as they lay in the darkness, waiting for sleep to come. He was still angry with Vince for breaking their pact and bringing Tracy into the fold. The fewer people who knew about their investigation of the Children, the better. Especially now that their security appeared to be breached.

He thought about the breakin at Mike’s. As much as he tried to tell himself that it could be a random act, that Carol might have been the victim of a crime unrelated to the cult, something told him that wasn’t the case. Something had happened there. And it had happened when the three of them were flying to Pennsylvania. Frank wondered if Mike and Carol’s kids knew their father was leaving town; he wondered if they’d tried calling their parents or stopping by in the past few days. How many kids did Mike and Carol have anyway? Frank tried to remember. Two sons, maybe a daughter. They were all within his age range, so they were probably married with families of their own now. Surely one of them had to still live in the area. Even then, it might still be a day or two before one of them got suspicious and decided to drop by mom and dad’s to pay an unexpected visit.

The rasping sound of snoring made Frank turn his head to the floor. Vince was asleep. Tracy’s eyes were closed but Frank didn’t think she was asleep yet. He turned back and closed his eyes, thinking of Mike and Carol and their kids, his own wife and kids, and hoping that letting Tracy into the fold wasn’t going to do any more damage than was already being done, and then he was asleep.

Chapter Eighteen

WHEN MIKE PETERSON woke up he did so slowly. It felt like he was trying to swim to the surface of a lake that was heavy with sludge. He heard Frank’s voice, caught a glimpse of light in the room and opened his eyes, blinking. Vince’s voice cut through the din. “He’s waking up.” He opened his mouth, tasting sour spit in the back of his throat. He raised himself up on his elbows, trying to shake the drowsiness from his system. Frank and Vince were hazy silhouettes, and as they became more refined he made out a third shape as well.

“How do you feel?” Frank came into focus. “You okay?”

Mike shook his head and cast his gaze around the room. Vince was standing at the foot of his bed with a woman dressed in blue jeans and a wrinkled white blouse; she gave him an encouraging smile. He focused on the woman, confused. “Who are you?”

“This is Tracy Harris,” Vince said, stepping forward.

“It’s a long story,” Frank said, waving his hand in front of Mike’s face. “How you feeling? Woozy? Sick to your stomach?”

Mike turned to Frank, confused for a moment. “No.” Last night’s events swam back into focus and he felt a sudden emptiness in his stomach. Then it hit him suddenly, like a Mack Truck hurtling at eighty miles per hour. “Carol…”

He sat up, the room coming into focus now. He swung his legs over the edge of the bed and stood up. “Where are we, what’s going on?”

“Easy there, fella,” Frank said. He took Mike’s shoulders and eased him back on the bed. “We’re in my motel room.”

“Frank called me last night and told me what happened,” Vince said hastily, looking nervous. “This is Tracy Harris…my girlfriend…”

The implications of what happened became implicitly clear to Mike; he’d flipped out over Carol’s disappearance, Frank had acted quickly and gotten him the hell out of there and slipped something in the glass of water he’d offered last night to knock him out. In the meantime, Frank had called Vince at home and—

“Hi, Mike, sorry to barge in like this,” the woman said, positioning herself in front of Vince as if shielding him from a potential verbal assault. “I know you guys had this agreement to keep all that was going on between yourselves, but I kinda got tired of being left out of everything, especially since the people you’re dealing with tried to kill me too. I think I have every right to know what the hell is happening, so I kind of invited myself along for the ride. Sorry to shock you like this, but that’s the short version. Want to hear the long version?”

Mike regarded her for a moment. She was standing in front of him, arms folded across her chest, waiting for his response. Her posture, her facial expression, the way she carried herself told him that she was strong-willed and wasn’t going to take no for an answer. On the other hand, Vince looked like somebody was going to hit him at any moment; he refused to meet his or Frank’s gaze. Mike sighed. “Christ.”

“Thanks for bringing Mike up to speed,” Frank said, his tone of voice suggesting to Mike that sometime last night the two of them had sparred verbally. Frank didn’t look too happy and he looked bone tired, too. “That’s it in a nutshell, man. She’s in.”

“Great, just great,” Mike muttered.

“I’m sorry,” Vince said, still looking sheepish.

Tracy ignored Vince’s meek demeanor. “This affects me as much as it affects Vince. I’m not trying to jeopardize anything. All I want is the truth.”

The truth. And what was that? Mike looked up at Frank, not even caring that Tracy Harris was in the fold now. Only wanting to know what had happened to Carol. And his family—hell, his son and daughter-in-law and granddaughter lived a mile away. What if the cult got them, too? “I don’t care,” he said. “I just want to know where Carol is. I’ve got to find her.”

“We will,” Frank said, clapping him on the shoulder. “We’re gonna get started on that this morning.”

“What time is it?’

“Almost eight-thirty,” Frank said.

Mike nodded. He felt tired, drained, but that was most likely the effects of whatever Frank had given him to help him sleep last night. Strangely, he didn’t feel that over-powering sense of panic when he discovered Carol had been kidnapped. He felt a strange sense of calmness. Thank God Frank had been thinking quickly last night when he came to the house to get him; he’d been acting on pure emotion and there was no telling what might have happened if Frank hadn’t been there to restrain him from doing something stupid.

“Okay,” he said, closing his eyes to stave off the tension headache he could sense was coming. He pinched the bridge of his nose. “You didn’t call the police, right?”

“Nope,” Frank said.

“Tracy knows everything?”

“I know everything,” Tracy said.

“Welcome to the club, Tracy,” Mike said. Despite his words, he felt bothered by Tracy being in the circle. Nothing suspicious had come up in her background when he had run a check on her a month or so back, but he always had the belief that the fewer people who knew what was going on, the better. Obviously that theory was shot to hell now that Tracy was in the fold. It looked like they were going to have to do the best they could with what they had.

“I’m trying to be as calm about this as I can,” Mike said, still closing his eyes. “I’m trying very hard not to completely lose it, so I am going to need all the help I can get. Okay?”

Tracy, Vince, and Frank nodded. Frank said, “Yeah, man, I hear you.”

Mike opened his eyes and looked up at them. His eyes burned; he supposed they were red with irritation. “I know this is going to sound shitty, but I have to go to the bank and check on that safe deposit box. That’s the only way I’m going to know if…if what I’m afraid has happened…”

“I understand, man,” Frank said. “We’ll get you there, pronto. And just to put your mind at ease, I think it’s safe. Bank regulations would not have allowed Carol or anybody else to access it if you’re the only signatory.”

“I know that,” Mike said. “But I panicked last night.” Mike looked around the room, still feeling a little disoriented. “Where’s my wallet?”

“In your pocket,” Frank said.

Mike felt his hip pocket, the reassuring bulge creating a calm feeling. He turned to Vince and Tracy. Vince still looked nervous but it appeared he was trying to live with the situation. Mike guessed he hadn’t been too happy about bringing Tracy into this, either.

“I think we should call William Grecko today,” Frank said. “Put the last part of our plan into action now.”

“I think that’s a good idea,” Mike said. “But first, I want to go to the bank. Humor me on this, okay?”

Frank nodded as Mike swung his legs over the bed.

“I think we need to get out of this room and find another location,” Mike said. “Preferably somewhere busy, with lots of people around and a lot of cops.”

“Venice beach?” Frank suggested. The slight inflection of jovialness in Frank’s tone suggested he was joking, but the location was exactly what Mike was looking for.

“Perfect. Does everybody have their cell phones?”

Vince nodded. “Yeah, I got mine.”

“Turn it on,” Mike said. “Take Tracy and get a room in Venice. Then sit on the boardwalk and wait for us. Frank and I are going to my bank to check on my safe deposit box. Then I’m going to call—”

“Do you really think we should separate again?” Frank asked, concerned. “I mean—”

“We’ll be fine,” Mike turned to Frank. “We don’t even know if they’re responsible for what happened at my house. If they are, that means they’re going after our families, not us. Tracy, your family is from Huntington Beach, is that correct?” He dredged that information up instantly. He turned to Tracy.

“Yes,” she nodded, looking a little surprised. “My mother is. My dad’s from Monrovia.”

“If you’re in this, you’re in all the way. Do you understand?”

Tracy nodded. For the first time Mike detected a hint of nervousness in a face that, up till now, had been bold and defiant.

“Be honest with us and yourself if you want in,” Mike continued. “This isn’t some bullshit game. If I’d had any inclination that I was putting my family in danger six months ago, we wouldn’t be having this conversation now. I wouldn’t have even gone through all the bullshit of setting up a false identity and investigating all this under a pseudonym. I erred on the notion that if I put that kind of distance between my real self and personal life and this other identity, that my family and I would be safe. I was wrong. If you want to get involved, there is the very strong possibility that you may be placing your family in danger. Do you understand?”

Tracy nodded, suddenly looking worried. She glanced at Vince, who put his arm around her shoulders in an encouraging hug. She turned back to Mike, straightening herself up. “Yes. I understand. And I want in.”

Mike nodded. “Okay.” He looked at Frank. “You got a tooth brush I can borrow? My mouth feels like a septic tank.”

“Go for it,” Frank said, motioning to the bathroom. “My stuff’s in there.”

“Thanks.” Mike stepped past them and paused briefly. “We’ll call you in a few hours and discuss what we’re going to do next. If you don’t hear from us by the end of the day, do what you can to drop out of sight completely. Disappear.”

Vince and Tracy nodded. They left the room as Mike brushed his teeth and freshened up quickly. Then he and Frank left the room for the Bank of America in Fountain Valley where he kept his safe deposit box.

THEY ONLY HAD to wait a few minutes for the bank official to wait on them. She was a small woman with porcelain features and waist length black hair. “Can I help you?”

Mike presented his pseudonymous identification. “I’ve got a safe deposit box I’d like access to.”

The woman smiled and typed into her computer. “Box number?”

“1356,” Mike replied.

The woman typed the number in the computer and waited. “Identification?”

Mike pushed his wallet across the desk. The woman looked at it, looked at Mike, then smiled. She reached into her desk for a set of keys. “Come with me, Mr. Costello.”

Mike motioned for Frank to stay seated and followed the clerk towards the vault.

The woman opened the vault with a key and escorted Mike in where the safe deposit boxes were. “Box 1356?”

“Yes,” Mike said. He reached into his pocket for his copy of the key, which he’d attached to his key ring. The woman took it, slid it into the lock, and opened it. She took out the box and handed it to Mike. The moment Mike took the box, he felt a sinking sense of despair. This should be heavier than it is, he thought.

“There’s a room around the corner.” The woman said. “Call me when you’re finished.”

“Thank you.” Mike followed the woman out of the vault and went to the room where he closed the door.

The box he’d gotten was the largest the bank had to offer. It was three feet long, four inches deep and seven inches wide. It was large enough to fit manila file folders and manuscripts in. Mike had stored two zip disks of information as well as three file folders of affidavits, notes, and photographs, among other things. His heart hammered in his chest as he opened the box.

For a minute it felt like his heart was going to stop. He stared into the box, not believing what he was seeing. He pulled the plastic top all the way off, running his hand inside. This can’t be, he thought. I was just here last fucking week!

The safe deposit box was empty.

Mike Peterson felt the room spinning. His stomach lurched, doing slow flops. He took a deep breath and closed his eyes. It felt like he was going to be sick. Good thing he hadn’t eaten yet; still, it was probably his empty stomach giving him the jitters. But no, the box was empty; that was a cold, hard fact. He opened his eyes again, hoping his vision had been deceiving him but it wasn’t.

“Miss.” His voice sounded shaky, trembling. He stepped outside the room and caught the teller’s eye. “Miss?”

“Yes, Mr. Costello?” The woman approached him, a smile on her face.

Mike stood aside, conflicting emotions of fear and surprise and anger battling for position. “My box is empty. Who emptied my box?”

The woman looked puzzled. “Excuse me, sir?”

“I said my fucking box is empty!” Mike yelled. He suddenly had the irresistible urge to slap this woman, this bank drone, to take her by the shoulders and shake her, demand that she tell him who she’d let in here to take his stuff. He closed his eyes and took several deep breaths. Calm down, he told himself. It’s not her fault, just calm down, calm down—

The woman was stunned. She opened her mouth, looked behind her towards the line of tellers, as if debating on whether she should sprint to safety then turned back to Mike. “I’m sorry, sir, I’m afraid…um…”

“The last time I was here,” Mike said, forcing himself to be calm and not go ballistic, “I deposited two zip disks and a file containing important documents. I also had several other files containing other documents. That was last week.”

“Do you share this account with anybody else?” the bank clerk asked.

“No.”

“And this is your box?” The clerk looked at the box, probably to verify for herself that, yes, Mike did have the correct key.

“Yes, this is the right box.” It was taking all of Mike’s willpower to not go crazy.

“Wait here a moment please.” The clerk left, heading across the bank.

Mike could only look into the empty box, his mind swimming with a thousand questions. Carol wouldn’t have been able to have access to this box even if I gave her a key. She’s not a signatory. If something had happened to me, it would have taken weeks for Carol to gain access to this box. That means somebody knows, they’ve known who I am for months, maybe even years, and—f

“Mr. Costello?”

Mike looked up. An overweight balding man with glasses wearing a white shirt, black slacks, and a dark blue tie had approached him. The man bore the official look and demeanor of the branch manager. “Can I help you with something?”

“Yes,” Mike said, holding the empty safe deposit box. “My box is empty and it wasn’t empty last week when I came in to deposit something inside it.”

“I see,” the bank manager said, taking a quick look at the box. “And you don’t have a co-owner or an executor to this—”

“No!” Mike said through gritted teeth.

The bank clerk returned with the sign-in card. The bank manager nodded at Mike. “The sign-in sheet should tell us something. Let’s see.” He ran his finger down a column. Mike placed the empty safe deposit box down on a shelf and joined them. “Ah, here we are. Three days ago.” Mike looked at where the bank manager’s pudgy finger was pointing and his heart leaped in his chest. This can’t be, he thought. This just can’t be.

“It appears you were in three days ago,” the bank manager said, his voice sounding far away. “There’s your signature.”

Mike stared at the sign-in sheet. Sure enough, the signature he used to sign his pseudonym, Matthew Costello, was identical to the one he had used all the other times. This signature was scrawled on a line halfway down the page, with a date of July 13, 1999, three days ago. Box number 1356.

“But that’s impossible,” Mike muttered. “I wasn’t here three days ago. I was back east.”

“Are you sure?”

“Yes, I’m sure!” His mind reeled. Three days ago he was traveling to Philadelphia with Frank and Vince. He’d placed items in the box a day or so before, and sure enough, there was his signature verifying that. But three days ago—

“Sir?”

Mike looked up. The bank manager and the clerk were looking at him with worried, concerned expressions. The bank manager exuded the false concern, business-as-usual. “May I ask what you were storing in your box, sir?”

“No,” Mike said. He turned toward the empty box, his mind spinning crazily. “No, it’s…” They’d been here. They had gotten to his wife, had probably gotten to his family, and then they’d come to the bank and taken all the evidence. He’d thought that by adopting another identity he’d shield his personal life from them. Obviously they were more powerful than he’d thought. If there was any doubt as to the validity of this group now, those doubts were now gone entirely. There was nothing else to do. They had to go to Billy Grecko with what they had now. “…it’s nothing,” he said, as the sudden urge to get out of the bank propelled him out of the vault. He shouldered his way past the startled bank employees and threaded his way through other bank patrons, catching a glimpse of Frank still seated by the bank teller’s desk. Frank looked up with a startled expression on his face as Mike approached. “They’re onto us, we need to get to Billy, I need to find Carol,” he said, repeating the mantra to himself, feeling the blind need to find his family, to find Carol, to find Jimmy and Cathy and baby Kimberly and his other son up in Lake Tahoe. Oh God, suppose they’d gotten to his kids and his granddaughter too—

“Mike!” Firm hands gripping his shoulders. Mike started, looking up into Frank’s worried countenance. “You okay?”

“No,” Mike said, the need to get out of the bank strong. He looked behind his shoulder, saw the bank manager and the clerk looking toward them. “No, I’m not okay,” he turned to Frank. “Let’s get out of here.” And then he started walking toward the double-glass doors that spilled out onto Talbert Avenue.

“Mike!” Frank rushed after him, keeping pace with him. “What the hell is going on?”

“The Children of the Night is not some urban legend,” Mike said, heading to Frank’s car. “They’re very real and we under-estimated them.”

THERE WAS NO clear destination in mind. Frank simply got behind the wheel and drove the hell out of the bank’s parking lot.

Mike seethed beside him, part fury, part fear. “I should have been looking for Carol last night. I should have done something! Why didn’t I see this coming?”

“It’s not your fault,” Frank said, heading down Talbert toward the beach. “Neither of us knew this would’ve happened.”

“Well, we should’ve,” Mike snapped. He glanced at Frank briefly, then turned back to look out the window. “My adopting a separate identity wasn’t enough, and I thought it would be. They took everything. My files, all the backups I had saved to the zip disks, everything.”

Frank listened. This new development bothered him as much as it did Mike. Hell, it scared him. All the evidence they had was on those zip disks, contained in those manila file folders. All that was remaining was Frank’s laptop, which now resided in a secret compartment in the trunk of Frank’s car. Frank had sent Mike copies of documents via e-mail, and while he still had them on the hard drive, that wasn’t the point. For Mike’s safe deposit box to have been breached meant somebody knew about their investigation and had been following them for months. Maybe they’d known the whole time. Frank gripped the steering wheel, his mind racing. If they’d gotten to Carol, what about Brandy? If he and Mike had been followed this whole time, couldn’t it be possible that—

“I don’t know what else to do,” Mike said, breaking Frank’s thoughts. He was shaking his head, his features crumbling. “Carol’s gone and they’ve got the stuff, they’ve fucking got it! We’ve got to call the police.”

“For all we know the police might be in on this,” Frank responded.

“Well, what else are we going to do?”

Frank sighed. “I don’t know.”

They rode on in silence for a moment. “I’ve got to find Carol,” Mike said. “How…how are we going to do that unless…”

“If the police are in any way involved, the minute you call them they could alert whoever was responsible for abducting Carol,” Frank said, his eyes on the road. “Then they’ll get you. Then me. Then Vince.” He turned to Mike. “Then it really is over.”

“You fucking hypocritical piece of shit,” Mike muttered, his green eyes blazing with anger. “What about your family? Don’t you think they might not have already—”

Frank pulled the car over. They’d just crossed Adams Avenue and even though he pulled the car into a No Parking zone, he didn’t care. He put the car in park and turned to Mike, his own panic and anger rising. “I’ve put in a lot of time and I’ve risked my own life to get to the bottom of this shit. I don’t need you to jeopardize it by—”

“Oh, so now I’m the weak-link, huh?” Mike sputtered, his face red, leaning toward Frank. “You just want us to forget about our families, forget our loved ones and keep going so we can find out what happened over twenty and thirty years ago—”

“It’s not just about that!” Frank thundered, his voice so loud that it even surprised him. Mike stopped, eyes widening. Calm down, Frank told himself. Don’t blow up now, you need him, you need each other if you’re going to get through this, so just calm. The fuck. Down. “We knew what we were getting into when we started this,” he said, his voice straining with anger. “We knew the risks involved in not only our own lives, but our families. We went into this together knowing those risks. It was your choice to keep your wife and kids in the dark.”

“Bullshit!” Mike started again, looking like he wanted to leap out of his seat and throttle him.

“I’ve already sacrificed my own life,” Frank said, ignoring him. He tried not to think about this as he continued. “I know I’m never gonna see my wife or kids again. I took measures to protect them. Brandy knows something is going on, but she doesn’t know the specifics. Oh, she suspects, I’m sure she does. But I went out of my way to prepare for the worst. It kills me knowing I’ll never see them. I know that if I go back to my family I’ll be followed and they’ll be at risk and it doesn’t matter how many times I change my name to throw them off my trail. They’ll find me no matter what. They found Vince and his mother and they’ve found others. I don’t want to live like that the rest of my life, knowing they could strike anytime, anywhere, anyplace. That’s why I made the decision myself. That’s why I’m not going back to my family. As much as I want to see my kids again, to hold my wife in my arms…” Frank stopped, trying to control his emotions. He wanted to break down and cry. He wanted to smash something. He felt like he was going to explode. “I can’t go to the police,” he said, reigning his emotions in. “I don’t trust the cops more than I can throw them. If there’s even the slightest chance that even one cop is an insider—”

“Oh, and what are the chances of that?” Mike exclaimed.

“You know as well as I that they’ve infiltrated law enforcement,” Frank said. He heard his voice rising and he fought to control it. “Okay, maybe they’re not everywhere, but we can’t take that chance. Even if you get lucky and get cops that aren’t aware of the Children, they’re not gonna believe you. I mean, what are you gonna tell them?”

“What do you think I’m gonna tell them? I’m gonna tell them somebody broke into my house and kidnapped my wife!”

“Sure,” Frank said, on a roll now. “And you won’t say anything about us, right?”

“I’m not going to say anything about us.”

“And what’s going to happen if they get a detective that’s got half a brain, they’re eventually going to connect you with me and that’s going to lead them to what happened in Pennsylvania. And then what are you going to tell them?”

“I’ll figure that out if it happens,” Mike said. He slumped back in his seat, wearing a mask of defeat.

“Bullshit,” Frank said, leaning forward. “You’re gonna think about this now. You’re gonna come up with something more solid than that, because you are not gonna implicate me in this at all.”

Mike turned to him, the spark of anger still in his eyes. “Changing your mind then?”

“No. I don’t want you to go to the cops, but I can’t stop you, either.” Truth was, the more Frank talked and bluffed, the more he was putting himself in Mike’s shoes. If it were Brandy and his kids that had come up missing, he would want to call the police too. “If you go to the cops you don’t know me, and we’ve never met each other. You go to the cops and I am fucking out of here, you got me? I’ve not only never seen you, I’m not only over-the-hills-and-far-away, I don’t even fucking exist.”

“I don’t think that’s going to be too hard to fake,” Mike said. “They’ve got everything. There’s nothing at the house that’s going to lead to you, and even phone records aren’t going to turn anything up. I was careful of that.”

Frank regarded Mike for a moment, his demeanor cracking. The more he thought about it, the better calling the police was starting to sound. Worst-case scenario: even if they were caught for the fiasco in Lititz, maybe they could plead self-defense and expose these bastards. In the meantime, while Mike was contacting the police, Frank could contact Billy Grecko and turn what was left of their investigation over to him. Hopefully it would be enough for Billy to go to his FBI contact with.

That wouldn’t be enough, though. In fact, their best plan of action was to avoid the police. And Frank had to convince Mike that avoiding the police was the best course of action.

“You’re still going to need some kind of alibi,” Frank said, thinking out loud. “The police are going to want to know why you waited until today to call them.”

Mike glanced at him, looking wary. “Yeah, I suppose they are.”

“Let’s think about this a minute,” Frank said, forcing himself to stay calm and focused on the matter at hand. “If you’re going to contact the police, we still need each other. We also need to move the investigation into Billy’s hands. You got me?”

Mike nodded. “Yeah.”

“Here’s why going to the police would be a bad idea,” Frank said. “If you had booked our tickets under your name we could have come up with an excuse for you being out there pretty easily. Because we can’t do that, every other excuse you give them, like deciding you wanted to go camping or you took a drive out into the desert, are going to be suspect. How often do your kids drop in to see you or call?”

“Sometimes we can go a whole week without hearing from my son Jimmy,” Mike said. “My other son, Brad, lives up in Lake Tahoe. He calls about once a week. He usually calls on weekends.”

“When is the last time you saw Jimmy?” Frank asked.

Mike shrugged. “Four, maybe five days ago.”

“If Jimmy had decided to call or drop by between then and now, the cops would already be trying to get a hold of you. In fact, it’s very likely they would consider you a suspect in your wife’s disappearance should your kids get the police involved. Had the police shown up at your house before you got home, you’d probably be in an interrogation room now being grilled as a suspect in your wife’s disappearance and probable murder.”

Mike gasped at this obvious realization. Frank pressed on. “But your kids haven’t been in touch recently. Therefore, it’s possible we have anywhere from a few hours to a few more days before they do decide to call or drop by. We need to make the most of it.”

“But how?” Mike moaned. He buried his face in his hands, the frustration painfully obvious to Frank.

“That depends on where we want to go with this,” Frank said. “They’ve made their move, but they don’t hold all the cards. At least not yet. We have documents on my hard drive. My suggestion is we deliver my laptop to your friend Billy pronto and have him turn it over to his FBI contact.”

“But what if Carol is still alive? What if they’re holding her somewhere?

“Do you really think they would keep her alive?”

Mike’s face brimmed with tears. “What if they go after one of my kids…or my granddaughter…”

“Gimme their numbers,” Frank said. “I can check into that quite easily.”

“How?”

“Leave it to me.” Frank pulled a scrap of paper and a pen from the compartment between the front bucket seats. Mike rattled off two sets of phone numbers for his adult children, both work and home. Frank jotted them down. “Do either of them have Caller ID?”

“I don’t know,” Mike said. He looked haunted. Defeated. “Maybe.”

Frank’s mind was racing. “Let’s find a phone booth. It’ll be better if I place those calls from someplace anonymous. Once I can verify they’re safe, we need to deliver my laptop to Billy and then you and I really need to disappear.”

“Yeah.” Mike’s face was worn. It looked like he’d aged ten years.

Without another word, Frank waited until it was safe, then he pulled back onto the road and headed for a convenience store in search of a phone booth to place the calls.

“DID YOU TALK to them? Are they safe?”

Those were the first words out of Mike when Frank returned to the car. He climbed in and shut the door. Mike immediately began to pepper him with more questions. “You talked to them, right? What did you say? How did you—”

Frank cut him off. “I called Jimmy and your daughter-in-law at work and got their voice mails. I was able to zero out and get a secretary, who told me they were in meetings. So they’re safe.”

“What about Kimberly?” Kimberly was Mike’s granddaughter.

“I called the day care. Cathy dropped Kimberly off this morning. I assume Kimberly, Jimmy, and you and Carol are the only ones who have the authority to pick her up?”

“Yes!” Mike nodded. At the news that Cathy had dropped Kimberly off this morning, Mike looked visibly relieved. “What about Brad?”

“I was able to talk to him,” Frank said. “The minute I verified it was him, I told him I was a telemarketer trying to sell him insurance and he hung up on me.”

Mike rubbed his face. He still looked worried, still appeared scared, but hearing the news that his sons and granddaughter were safe had taken the bulk of the worry out of his mind. “So what do we do now?”

“I tried calling Jimmy and Cathy on their cell phones but my calls went straight to voice mail. Cathy must have a busy schedule. Her secretary said she had a meeting, then had to leave early to take Kimberly to a pediatrician appointment at ten o’clock. She must have left early for that because when I called the day care, they told me Cathy had already picked her up.”

“At least she’s safe,” Mike said. He looked at Frank. “I’m tired and I’m hungry. I know this sounds horrible, but I need something in my stomach. I’m fucking starving.”

Frank started the car. “Let’s grab a quick bite to eat and some coffee. We can lay out a plan over breakfast.”

Five minutes later, shortly after ten o’clock in the morning, they entered a Coco’s restaurant on Talbert Avenue and were escorted by a twenty-something female hostess to a table where they refueled.

And made plans.

Chapter Nineteen

“THE PARTY YOU have called has turned their phone off or is not in the service area. Please try again—”

Goddamn! Frank hit the disconnect button on his cell phone and shot a look at Mike. “Let me try again,” he said.

“What’s the matter?” Mike asked. He was standing near the doorway of the cramped motel room, waiting for Frank to finish collecting his things.

“Vince isn’t answering his goddamn cell phone,” Frank said.

Mike frowned. It was a quarter till one in the afternoon. They’d spent an hour at Coco’s eating breakfast, drinking coffee, and talking in low tones. Mike had called Billy Grecko and given him the Cliff Note’s version of what was happening and made plans to meet at his office at 1:30. Once Mike had a cup of coffee in him and put away half his breakfast—scrambled eggs, hash browns, and pancakes—he became more rational, more level-headed. He agreed with Frank that they couldn’t call the police even though his emotions begged him to simply drop everything and do so. Frank had taken his laptop in the restaurant for safe-keeping and it sat between them in the corner booth he’d requested. Mike had mostly listened as Frank quickly outlined a hasty plan: the first step was to get the laptop to Billy Grecko; the second step was to contact Vince and make coordinated steps to disappear again; the third was subject for debate. Frank needed to gather his things, then make like a leaf and blow. He suggested Mike disappear too. Mike insisted on being dropped off at his home first. “I’ve got to get a few things—”

“We’ll do a drive-by the house first,” Frank had said. “Make sure the police aren’t there. Then we’ll leave.”

That had been the plan. As they’d talked over breakfast, they ruminated over where the course of their actions would take them. Frank was confident that Bill Grecko’s FBI contact would produce results. The agent in question had broken up a large snuff-film ring last year that had been the result of Bill’s own hard work. According to Mike, Billy still didn’t like to talk about it.

Once they’d finished breakfast and paid the bill, they’d headed straight to Billy Grecko’s office in Santa Ana. The drive was made in funereal silence. Mike had placed a call to Billy on the way over and the lawyer had met them in the lobby of the building his law office was housed in. It was the first time Frank had met the lawyer; he appeared to be around Mike’s age, with graying, curling hair that was balding along the crown, with a somewhat slim figure and weathered features that told Frank he was an ex-drinker. They’d shaken hands quickly, and then Billy had escorted them to the elevator and whisked them up to his office.

Where behind closed doors they’d handed the laptop over. Billy had quickly summoned an IT tech into his office who began to promptly image Frank’s hard drive onto another laptop while Billy and Mike made small talk. Frank had sat on the sofa, trying not to fidget. When the IT tech was finished, he left both laptops in Billy’s office and exited the room. Billy nodded. “I take it this is everything?”

“Most of it,” Mike said. He handed Billy the box that contained thirty years of secrets along with the key. “This is the box Vince’s mother kept. I told you about it a few days ago. You should be able to match the clippings and photos with the documents from Frank’s laptop.”

Billy nodded. He held the box, his eyes never leaving Mike’s. “I can’t promise you anything,” he said. “But I know Hank, my Bureau friend, is very eager to see this.”

“Thank God he is.”

“Do either of you need any kind of professional surveillance or security?”

Frank had perked up at this. “Can you help us out in that?”

“I can arrange something. Pull a few strings. It might take me a few hours to get everything lined up.”

“If you can do that, yeah,” Frank said. “That would be great.”

“I’ll make some calls.” Billy looked at Mike. “You haven’t called the police yet?”

“No.” Mike shook his head.

“Don’t call them,” Billy said. “Hank and his team will take over once I get this material to him.”

“What should we do now?” Mike asked.

“I’d prefer if you stay here until I can arrange for you to go into hiding,” Billy said.

“What about Vince and Tracy? We told them to go to the Venice Beach area and wait for our call.”

Billy nodded at Frank. “You need to call them. Have them come here.”

“I have stuff at the motel room I’m staying at,” Frank said. “I should really head back to get it.”

“I’d like to get some things from the house too,” Mike said.

“I don’t think that’s a good idea,” Billy said.

“Why not? I’ll be in and out in three minutes.”

“Because they know who you are now.”

“He has a point, Mike,” Frank said.

Mike turned to Frank. “Why haven’t they come after us then?”

Frank shrugged. “I don’t know.”

Billy Grecko spoke up. “Is it absolutely necessary for you to go back to your house?”

For a moment, Mike was silent. Then, in a soft whisper, he said, “If I’m going to live the rest of my life in some kind of witness protection program, I want…I want pictures of my kids. My wife…” He looked at Billy, at Frank, his soft blue eyes imploring them to understand. “If I have to spend the rest of my life away from them, I need…I have to—”

Frank sighed. “I can go in the house with him. I’m armed and I’ll shoot first and ask questions later.”

Billy Grecko appeared to think about it. Frank knew the lawyer had deep reservations about this, but he’d finally relented. “I want you both back here in an hour. If you aren’t back, I’m getting the police involved.”

Frank rose to his feet. “We’ll be back.”

And now they were in Frank’s motel room.

It hadn’t taken long for Frank to pack the rest of his stuff into the single duffel bag. Once packed, he’d paused quickly to call Vince. He even tried Vince at his home number and got the answering machine. He looked at Mike. “I’ll keep trying.”

“We should have gotten Tracy’s cell number,” Mike said.

“Yeah,” Frank agreed. He checked his bag, checked the handgun he had strapped to a holster around his waist, his T-shirt concealing it. He was ready to go.

He didn’t even bother to formally check out. He’d checked in under his real name. The electronic trail of Frank Black would end there, in that little dive-motel on the border of Costa Mesa and Huntington Beach.

On the drive to Mike’s house in Huntington Beach, Frank’s thoughts drifted to Brandy and the day he told her he was changing their identities and moving them to New England. He’d given her the barest glimpse of what he was working on—he’d told her the basics years before, when they first met—and when he told her he was moving her and the kids out of the state, under assumed names for their own safety, she’d finally lost it. “You’re going to risk our lives because you’re digging around in a past you don’t even remember much of? Because you think your parents might have been drugged out hippie-freak devil worshippers? I don’t believe you! Why do you need to find out what happened to you as a kid now? Why can’t you just let it go? You haven’t so much as given a shit about your mother in over twenty years? Why are you letting her freak you out now? Why don’t you just let her go?”

“Because I can’t” he’d bellowed at her. He’d flinched as she drew back at the ferocity of his voice. He’d told her the same thing the afternoon he handed her the plane tickets—and the doctored identities he wanted her and the children to live under. That had been three weeks ago, when he told her that he and Mike had stumbled onto something big, something that could very well threaten their lives. “The people my parents were involved in weren’t just another hippie cult; they’re fanatics. I think the things I was exposed to as a kid weren’t unintentional. I think it meant something, and I’m going to find out what it is, and who they are.” That was all he would tell her. As much as she’d begged and pleaded for him to tell him everything, as much as she’d tried to get him to tell her exactly why they were in danger, he’d insisted on sending her away to New England.

Thinking about Brandy and the kids now made him miss them more than ever. He felt his chest ache, his throat constrict. A tear ran down his cheek as he tried to keep his pain from spilling out. He could very well join them. He’d created his own new identity back then, too, in the event he had to slip away. That new identity was now waiting for him in a safe deposit box in New Hampshire.

When they reached Mike’s development, Frank cruised slowly, keeping a steady watch for anything suspicious—police activity, people sitting in vehicles parked at the curb. Mike was on the lookout too; he seemed more alert, more aware of his surroundings than he’d been since last night.

They approached the street Mike lived on and drove slowly. “Look okay?” Frank asked.

“So far, so good,” Mike answered.

They drove past Mike’s house. Mike’s car was still parked in the driveway. The front door was still shut. To all intents and purposes, everything looked okay.

Frank drove around the block, still keeping with a steady speed so they wouldn’t attract unwanted attention. “Do you know what you want to get out of the house?”

“Yes.”

“Where is it?”

“Upstairs, in my bedroom.”

“What is it?”

“My wedding album and the scrapbooks Carol made. Jimmy and Doug’s baby albums. And Kimberly’s baby album too.”

“Okay.” Frank couldn’t fault the man for wanting family heirlooms like that. “But you’re going to make it quick. I’ll go in with you.”

“Don’t you think you should stand guard outside?”

Mike had a point. “I’ll walk you to the front door and make sure you get inside. I’ll leave the car running. Anybody comes to the house, I’ll take care of them.”

“What if it’s the police?”

“I’ll take care of them.”

“You’ll shoot them?”

Frank shot a quick glance at Mike. “If that’s what it takes.”

Mike remained silent as they drove around the block and began heading back up the street his house resided on, in the center of the quiet, middle-class, tree-lined residential neighborhood.

Frank pulled the car into the driveway next to Mike’s car. He took one more quick look around, and then opened the driver’s side door. “Let’s do this.”

Both men exited the car and headed to the house. Frank drew his weapon as they approached the door. Mike fished inside his pockets for the keys. He inserted the key in the lock, gripped the doorknob, turned it.

Then they both stepped inside.

Chapter Twenty

WHEN THEY ENTERED the house, Frank stepped in front of Mike, gripping the handgun in front of him in classic shooter’s stance. Mike hesitated a moment, the destruction of the house bringing him back to last night when he’d first encountered the sudden horror of what had happened. He took a deep breath, feeling his adrenaline rise as Frank quickly made a sweep of the living room and kitchen. He hustled back to Mike and looked up the stairs. Go!

Mike headed for the stairs and was startled when his cell phone rang.

He stopped halfway up, glancing at Frank, who ushered him to keep going. Mike held a hand up and unclipped his cell phone from his belt. He gasped. “It’s Jimmy,” he said. He answered the phone and began heading up the stairs. “Jimmy?”

“Dad!” It was Jimmy. He sounded frantic. “Thank God! I’ve been trying to call you for the past couple of hours and—”

“What’s the matter?” Mike said, his alarm rising.

“Kimberly’s missing,” Jimmy said, and then his voice broke. Mike felt his heart freeze up. Kimberly was his and Carol’s only granddaughter; she was three years old. “Cathy left the office and went by the daycare to pick her up for her doctor’s appointment and one of the aides turned white. She said that Cathy had been in an hour earlier to pick Kimberly up and now she’s gone!”

“What are you talking about!” Mike had yelled into the phone. His heart was racing.

From the foyer, Frank: “Mike, let’s get going!”

“Somebody took Kimberly!” Jimmy was yelling, his voice panicked. “They took her and we can’t find her!”

“Oh my God,” Mike said, and he felt the world spin. The air seemed to thicken, he felt his limbs grow heavy as the nightmare crashed down. He was at the top of the stairs and he leaned against the hallway, unable to continue any further.

Frank called out from downstairs. “Mike! What’s happening?”

“We’ve tried calling you, and we’ve been with the police since, oh I don’t know, since ten-thirty, eleven maybe,” Jimmy said, crying. “I even went by the house earlier and you weren’t home.”

“When were you by the house?” Mike asked, feeling his throat constrict.

“Around noon maybe,” Jimmy said. “Dad, I don’t know what to do!”

“When did this happen?” Mike wasn’t thinking clearly as he resumed his walk down the hallway to the master bedroom. From behind him, he dimly heard Frank tell him to hurry it up, to get back down here now.

“Cathy…Cathy tried to pick Kimberly up at a little after ten,” Jimmy stammered, “and…and they said that Cathy had been in at nine and gotten Kimberly. They said that Cathy had already been there! How could she have already been there? She was in a meeting at that time!”

“I don’t know, son,” Mike said, feeling his heart freeze up as he suddenly stopped just shy of the master bedroom—

—where there was a large splash of fresh blood staining the carpet.

From downstairs, Frank called up to him. “Mike! You okay? Talk to me or I’m coming up.”

“No,” Mike said as he took another step closer to the master bedroom, Jimmy forgotten, everything else forgotten now, even Frank as he stepped to the threshold of the bedroom he’d shared with Carol. From behind him and down the stairs, he dimly heard Frank say, “No, what?”

There was a light on in the master bedroom.

He heard Jimmy’s voice coming through the cell phone as he stepped into the master bedroom, his muscles tense. The blood spatters became more pronounced, more evident in its coppery scent as he entered the master bedroom and when he saw the new destruction in the bedroom his mind rebelled. It was so sudden, so ugly, so wrong, that his mind took it in as jumbled images: melted candles, still lit; the crude symbols written on the wall, painted on the carpeted floor, the bloody piece of meat in the center of the symbol that was strangely satanic in look and design but which did not resemble anything remotely satanic in any of the research he’d uncovered. Then he saw who was there and the shock was so great that Mike thought he was going to scream.

At first he didn’t recognize them. There were six of them, three standing around the strange symbol, the other three seated on the floor. They all turned around at the sound of his entering and smiled at him, as if awaiting a long lost friend. Mike stood frozen in shock, trying to force his voice to unlock from the grip of fear. Who the hell are you and what the hell are you doing in my house? he wanted to say. What came out was a parched hiss.

Then one of them stood up. He was tall, with black hair that was turning gray. He was dressed in tan slacks and a white polo shirt, and looked trim, muscular, and powerful, like he might be a banker or a corporate CEO. He had that aura of power. He smiled, his green eyes a blaze of fire. “Mike! So good of you to join us.”

Recognition set in and Mike felt paralyzed. He hadn’t heard that voice or seen that face in over twenty-six years. “Tom,” he said.

From below, dimly, he heard Frank Black yell that he was coming up the stairs.

Tom Black smiled. “Yes, Mike, it’s me. Remember Gladys?”

Mike’s eyes rested on the woman seated next to him. She was middle-aged, but she wore it well. She was dressed in a tan business suit, her stylish hair settled on her shoulders in a perfect wave. She nodded at him, her make-up expertly applied. Mike noticed a gold necklace around her neck that glimmered. “Gladys.”

“Dad…dad?” Jimmy’s voice sounded tinny, far away. The connections fell into place as he cast his eyes around the room and when it was made he thought he was going to scream.

Kimberly Peterson, three years old, the perfect age, innocent, pure, just what they used, the blood was so pure, so thick, so sweet, they used the blood of children in their most important rituals, he knew that, it was in all the research he’d done on them, it was in all the interviews he’d conducted with the few witnesses that had gotten away and were locked up in mental institutions or were homeless, just another crazy living on the outskirts of society and they all said the same thing. They used the blood of children, of innocents, and the sweetest sacrifice was one in which the child came from your own blood.

His eyes locked with Carol Peterson’s from across the room. The Carol Peterson that looked across at him looked the same, but she was not the same woman he’d known and loved for almost forty years. She smiled at him. “How could you have guessed?”

Mike started, confused. “Carol?” Did she just read my mind?

“You’re right,” she said, as the others rose in unison and took a step forward. “The sweetest sacrifice, and the most powerful, is one where the child comes from your own blood.”

From behind him, he felt Frank Black approach, heard Frank’s voice. “What the fuck?” Felt the rush of air as Frank stormed into the room, gun drawn.

Mike didn’t even have time to scream before they swarmed over him and the shooting began.

Chapter Twenty-one

VINCE WALTERS AND Tracy Harris waited at a little café on Venice Beach for almost three hours.

They spent most of that time talking, looking out at the boardwalk and the ocean. The boardwalk was crammed with joggers, roller-bladers, people walking dogs. There were street vendors hawking everything from bootleg designer clothing and perfumes, to ice cream and hot dogs. On the beach, sunbathers caught the last rays of the sun, and scratch volleyball games were underway. The cry of seagulls blended in with the hum of traffic, and the steady bass thumping of rap music that boomed from large boom boxes carried on tattooed shoulders. Vince and Tracy sat at their table and talked, their eyes hidden by dark sunglasses as they finally ate a light dinner of salads and chicken sandwiches.

Vince tried to call Mike at two-thirty with his cellular phone. He got no answer. “Try Frank,” Tracy suggested. They had ordered drinks and were nursing them in the warm afternoon sun.

Vince tried Frank and got a busy signal.

“Well?” Vince said, pushing the antennae down.

“Well,” Tracy said, looking out at the ocean.

“What do you think we should do?”

“You can’t get in touch with them?”

“Nope.” Vince shook his head.

Tracy frowned. “Hmm. Well…they did tell us to get a room nearby.”

“And we have one,” Vince said. Before they stopped at the café, they’d secured a room at a Best Western half a block away.

“We could go back to the room and keep calling,” Tracy suggested.

Vince felt nervous. “What if we still can’t get in touch with them?”

Tracy pursed her lips, thinking. “Mike did say that if we don’t hear from them, we should drop out of sight.”

“Drop out of sight?”

“Or we can go home.”

Vince couldn’t believe what he was hearing. “Aren’t you afraid of…of what might happen?”

“What might happen, Vince?” Tracy looked at him. “You tell me. We’ve come here at Mike’s request, now he and Frank don’t show up. They fed us this bullshit that this spooky devil cult is on to us, and they can’t even so much as show up and—”

“Suppose they got them?

“And who is they?”

Vince looked at Tracy as if she’d gone crazy. He didn’t know what to say; his mind was a jumble of emotions, all fighting to the surface. “You bug the shit out of me last night to get you involved and…and…”

“Listen,” Tracy rested her hand on his forearm, her features softened. “I’m sorry. I know I was a pest last night, and I really was angry at being left out. I really did want to be included. But…what else can we do? We were given explicit instructions. Now things haven’t gone according to plan. They may have gotten to Frank and Mike, and if that’s happened we have to know about it. And the only way to know is to go back and—”

“No!” Vince was adamant. He wasn’t going back to his home.

Tracy’s grip on his wrist tightened. “Hear me out for a minute, okay?” She glanced around quickly and Vince looked around, too. Nobody was paying attention and he felt the tension slacken.

Tracy leaned forward, her voice lowered to a whisper. “If they’ve gotten to Mike and Frank, we don’t know about it, right? So we go to our places and get our stuff, okay? We tell Brian we’re taking time off from work and we go into hiding. We go somewhere we know they won’t even think of looking for us. Montana or something. Hell, we’ll go to Alaska. Surely you’ve got to have enough money in savings to tide you over for a few years, right?”

Vince nodded. Along with stock options, he was worth a couple of million dollars if he cashed out on everything.

“Then we shack up together, live under a different name, whatever it takes to be far away from this place,” Tracy continued. “Maybe we’ll learn the truth and find out that Mike and Frank really just decided to drop out of the investigation.”

“And not tell us?”

“Why not?” Tracy took her sunglasses off. Her green eyes were reflective. “Maybe they tried contacting us. It doesn’t matter. Maybe they just decided the best way was to…just run away.”

“Frank….run away?” Vince shook his head. Tracy Harris didn’t know Frank Black.

Tracy ignored him. “And if they did, maybe that’s for the best. You know?” Her touch became soft now; her hand caressed his arm. “Maybe it’s best to leave things alone. What happened in the past is the past.”

Vince wanted to argue the point, but for every argument he had, Tracy had a counterpoint. They continued the discussion on their walk to the Best Western. Once behind locked doors, Tracy slipped out of her clothes. “I’m done discussing this. Try calling them again and see if you get an answer. I’m taking a nap.”

Vince watched her for a moment, sitting on a chair near the bed. Then he pulled the cell phone out and tried both numbers again. Neither man picked up.

Vince closed his cell phone, but kept it turned on. Tracy slipped into bed. She fluffed a pillow and lay down on her left side, her back to him. Case closed.

Vince sat in the chair for a while, watching her. Maybe Tracy was right. Maybe it was time to stop this mad chase. Where had it gotten him? Nowhere. He was no closer to finding out what had happened to his mother than he’d been last month.

Besides, he thought, we were supposed to turn everything over to Mike’s friend, Billy something. This afternoon. So why haven’t Mike and Frank been in touch?

Vince tried calling Mike and Frank again. Once again, neither man picked up. The calls didn’t even go through to voice mail, which Vince found odd. He sat in the chair and looked out the window, worry gnawing his gut as Tracy dozed in the king-size bed behind him.

VINCE PULLED THE Volvo up to the curb in front of Tracy’s sprawling condominium complex the following morning at nine-thirty, feeling a weight settle in his chest.

Tracy turned to him, looking radiant. “Well, this is it, I guess.”

“Yeah, this is it.” He felt funny about doing this, but it had been decided this morning. They really were going to do it.

Vince had dozed in the chair yesterday afternoon while Tracy napped. When they woke up, they got dressed and ventured out onto the boardwalk again. Vince tried calling Frank and Mike again. Tracy looked concerned and asked Vince what they would have wanted Vince to do should anything happen to them. Vince had shrugged. “They’d probably want me to go to that lawyer friend of Mike’s,” Vince had said.

“Do you know his name?” Tracy had asked.

“Billy something. Greck or Greek or something like that.”

They’d spent the evening walking the boardwalk talking, debating what to do. It was obvious something was going on. Vince was positive that one of the first things Mike would have done was to take what they had to Billy. “What then?” Tracy had asked. Vince put forth the idea that maybe they would have all gone into hiding. Tracy countered that maybe Mike and Frank had already gone into hiding; maybe they’d taken their cumulative evidence to Billy, who had immediately put them into a safe house or something. “And nobody would have tried getting in touch with us?” Vince asked. He’d checked his cell phone, something he’d done all day and into the evening. “I don’t know if I buy that.”

“Well, Mike did tell us that if we didn’t hear from them that we were to go into hiding,” Tracy had reminded him. “If you ask me, I think we should.”

Vince had agreed, and after snagging dinner at a fast food restaurant, they’d headed back to the Best Western and remained inside for the remainder of the night.

This morning they’d gotten dressed and packed, then checked out of their room. They had a quick breakfast at a Denny’s restaurant, and then drove home. Vince had tried calling Mike and Frank again and still got no response. Tracy suggested they head back to Vince’s home again, just on the off chance they might have stopped by. Vince agreed, and they’d made his house the first stop. There’d been no messages at home, and it was while they were sitting in the kitchen at the breakfast nook that last night’s discussion came up. “We’ve been here for thirty minutes and nobody’s tried to kill us yet,” Tracy had said, her voice bearing the faintest inflection of humor. “What does that say about your paranoia?”

“That they’re waiting for you at your place?” Vince couldn’t help but grin.

“You coming with me to scope it out?”

“Of course!”

They agreed on the plan of action on the five-minute drive to the condo. Walk her to her condo, check the place out, and once she was safe, he would go home and start making preparations to leave. In the meantime, she would pack as well. They agreed to meet up that afternoon at two, at her place. “In the meantime, do whatever you have to do,” she’d said. “Convert cash to traveler’s checks, take whatever you need. Pack lightly, but pack essential stuff. Anything you may have to further your research, take it. If you have to call somebody to look over your house, get that taken care of as well.”

That had sounded fine to Vince. Now as he followed her along the manicured path to her condominium, he felt his heart racing. The summer day was warm; a perfect, Southern California day. He could hear people splashing in the pool. They walked up the steps to her condo and Vince surveyed the complex as Tracy unlocked the door. She stepped in cautiously, and then glanced back over her shoulder. “Looks like the coast is clear.”

Vince stepped inside ahead of her and took a quick inspection of the place. He quickly checked the kitchen and both bedrooms, opened the closets, and looked in the bathroom. “Looks like everything’s cool,” he said.

Tracy looked relieved. “Good.” She held out her arms. “C’mere.”

Vince went to her and they held each other for a moment. Her body felt warm and comforting against his and he kissed the nape of her neck, inhaling the scent of her hair. He didn’t want to leave her.

“You should go,” she said, as if reading his thoughts.

He kissed her again and squeezed her hands. “I’ll be back at two.”

She nodded, mustering a smile. “Two.”

“Okay. Bye.”

“Bye.”

Once in his car, Vince felt a sense of urgency come over him. He glanced at his watch; it was almost ten a.m. That left him with less than four hours to get things rolling. Where to start?

He started his car and thought about what he had to do; go home, call Brian and tell him he had to take an unexpected leave of absence—he would explain everything in a week or so. Hell, he might even be back home in a few weeks. He just had to get away from everything; the stress of his mother’s passing, dealing with her affairs, it was all taking a huge toll. Surely Brian would understand.

He decided the best thing to do would be to head straight home. Maybe he would swing by the motel that Frank Black had stayed at, just to see if he was still there. It was very weird that both men would simply cease communications. It was almost as if they’d dropped off the face of the earth.

Vince frowned. Maybe Tracy was right about getting out of dodge as soon as possible. Whoever it was that had tried to kill them back in Pennsylvania, as well as attacked him and Tracy at the airport last week, operated with stealth. Suppose they had gotten Mike and Frank? And if that was the case, suppose they were after him now?

While Vince was stopped at a red light at the intersection of Adams and Harbor Boulevard, he dialed Frank’s cell phone again. He got no response. The light turned green and he continued east, pausing only once more at the next stop light to look up Mike Peterson’s number on the notebook he had on his dashboard and dial the number. Again, nothing.

His thoughts darkened as he drove home. Even if The Children of the Night were a bunch of crazed lunatics, they were obviously very well connected and crafty ones. They were most likely behind his mother’s murder, as well as the crimes Mike and Frank had connected to them. It was obvious his mother had been involved with them, as were Frank’s parents. And it was also obvious his mother had fled with him unexpectedly twenty-five years ago in an attempt to flee the madness. As to why they were after him now, he was beginning to formulate some educated guesses, none of them based on paranoia, either. They’d finally tracked his mother down and had her killed. That much was evident. They’d also performed some kind of ritual around the same time—its end purpose still unknown to Vince. Next, somebody tried to kill him as he was arriving back home from his mother’s funeral, at John Wayne Airport. The fact that Tracy Harris had been with him was entirely coincidental. Then Frank Black pops into his life, claiming to have done extensive research on his own childhood, on Vince’s childhood, and tells him point blank that their parents had been Satanists. Mike Peterson supports Frank’s story, and tells him what happened to Frank’s father. And then they fly back to Pennsylvania and meet with Reverend Powell, go through the contents of his mother’s safe box and find additional supporting evidence that hints at other horrific crimes. Then while meeting with the local sheriff about other cult activity, they’re ambushed by strangers armed to the teeth. They get away, killing their assailants in the process, and manage to get out of the state. In the meantime, Mike and Frank find out more information about cult members that had been in Lititz prior to Vince’s mother’s murder, and they fly back to LA two nights ago to regroup. Meanwhile, Mike’s wife has gone missing while they were gone, and it’s obvious that the cult was getting closer on their trail, and now Mike and Frank were incommunicado.

So now what?

It was imperative that Vince and Tracy leave California immediately. If Mike and Frank had been waylaid by the Children, it meant they’d been followed. And if that was the case, somebody might be on Vince’s tail this very instant. Vince didn’t think they were—he’d been checking his rearview mirrors constantly—but he still wasn’t taking chances. When he got home he would pack quickly, gather whatever important evidence he had, make some quick phone calls, and then he was leaving. But first he would check the house out carefully and make sure it was secure. He still had the Glock that Mike had given him last night—he’d packed it in his luggage in Pennsylvania and had taken it with him to the house—so he felt somewhat better about having it. Now he had to get through the next few hours.

When he entered his development he was on the lookout for anything suspicious. He inspected everything, taking in every car, every person he saw in his neighborhood. People that he was familiar with, that he had known for years, now came under close scrutiny as he passed by. When he pulled into the driveway of his home his heart was pounding. He killed the engine, reached to the seat next to him for his bag, and got out of the car. His senses were on heightened alert as he unlocked the door. He entered the house and closed the door softly behind him. All was silent.

He set the bag down on the floor carefully. Then he reached for the Glock in his inner coat pocket and pulled it out. He felt sweaty and hot and he took a deep breath to calm himself down. Then, he took a step further into his house.

He inspected the house with a sense of rising alarm, expecting danger at every step. The first time he threw a closet door open and pointed the gun inside, he felt like he was going to scream—he really expected somebody to jump out at him. But as he went from room to room checking under beds, behind furniture, in closets and cabinets, he felt his paranoia ease. It took fifteen minutes to inspect the garage, and when he was finished he checked out his backyard, looking at the space between his home and the fence that bordered his property with his neighbor’s. His yard was small anyway, and there was really nowhere for anybody to hide, but he checked it out regardless. He even stepped all the way out in his backyard and looked up on the roof and in the trees. Nothing there. When he went back in the house he felt somewhat relieved, but he was still nervous.

He checked his answering machine and saw that there was one message. He rewound the tape and played the message. “Vince, it’s me, Frank.” Vince gasped at the sound of Frank’s voice; he detected a faint hint of fear in his voice. “Where the hell are you? I’ve been trying to call you for three hours now, man. Turn your fucking cell phone on!” Then there was a click and a dial tone. End of message.

Vince frowned. Frank must have tried calling him yesterday, but… what was this about asking Vince to turn his cell phone on? He’d had it on all day yesterday.

Vince unclipped his cell phone from his belt and inspected it. Sure enough, it was on, and the juice was at the halfway mark; he’d recharged the battery last night, right before he went to bed. He remembered it being almost down to zero when he’d hooked it up because he’d had it on all day. And Frank was telling him to turn his phone on? It had been on!

When it rang Vince almost dropped the cellular. He felt his heart shoot into his throat, and for a moment he actually felt the cell phone fly from his hands, as if its ringing had sent it zinging out of his grip. Vince fumbled with it, almost dropped it, then got a firm grasp as it rang again. He held onto it, heart thumping in his chest as he tried to catch his breath. The phone rang again, spiking through his nervous system. Okay, already, I’m coming.

He pulled the antennae out and hit the send button. “Hello.”

For a moment, there was nothing, then a hiss of static. “Hello?” Vince raised his voice a little. It sounded like a bad connection.

“Vince?”

There was something recognizable about that voice. “Yeah?”

“Vince…” A pause, a crackle of static. “Vince, it’s Frank.” It sounded like Frank was out of breath and calling from far away.

“Frank!” Vince felt a wave of relief wash over him. He sighed, felt his body ease up as he started to sink into the sofa. “Man, I’ve been trying to call you and Mike for the past twenty-four hours. What’s—”

“I don’t have much time, Vince, listen to me.” Frank’s voice was suddenly loud and direct, as if the connection was suddenly re-established. Vince frowned; there was something in Frank’s voice that gnawed on him. Something tha— “I’m hurt, Vince,” Frank said, and now Vince recognized the heavy breathing in Frank’s voice. He was panting, his voice tinged with an inflection of pain. “I’ve been…it fucking got me, man.”

“What?” It got me? What got him?

“Listen carefully,” Frank said, and now Vince detected the urgency in his voice. He felt his stomach roll in his abdomen. “They were one step ahead of us. I don’t want to get into it now, but I got away. I’ve…managed to elude them at least for a little while, and I had to call you…to warn you…”

“Where are you?” Vince heard his voice, panicked, frightened.

“I’m at a phone booth, somewhere in Fountain Valley…maybe Huntington Beach.”

“Listen,” Vince said, thinking quickly. “Hang up now and call 911. I’m leaving for the hospital now—”

“No!” Frank’s voice was a hiss of pain. Vince cringed; his nerves were on edge. “Listen to me…I know everything now…I put it all together and…I know why…why all that happened to us…happened…why we had the same dreams…why we…why we went through what we did when we were kids…”

“Frank,” Vince muttered, feeling the dread rising. He didn’t want to hear this. He just wanted to find Frank, find him and help him, but he felt powerless to do anything except listen.

“You were wrong, Vince,” Frank said, gasping, breathing heavily now. “I was right…about most of it. Our parents…The Children of the Night… it’s all real…”

“Frank, I know they’re real,” Vince said, trying to inject an inflection of authority in his voice, a sense of reason. “I know these people think they’re performing some—”

“They don’t think anything, Vince!” Frank barked. “They know! It’s the real thing. The Children…they’re the real deal. They put us through those rituals…they exposed us because it was all part of the plan. And…” A wheeze in his breathing. “…and our minds suppressed it…it’s like those Vietnam vets that bury the memories of the war in their subcon-scious…they carry it with them and then it starts coming out…just a little bit…at a time…”

“Frank!” He did not want to hear this, he DID NOT—

“…they brought us to the rituals because…because it was part of the plan…and you…” his breathing grew heavier, as if he were struggling. “You…”

“Frank you don’t have to say this,” Vince begged. “Please, just hang up and call—”

“…you’re important to them,” Frank said, ignoring him. Vince wasn’t even sure if Frank was listening to him, if what he was telling Frank was even registering. “You’re important to them because they’ve worked at bringing you into the world for so long. And then your mother almost ruined their plans by taking you from them—”

“Frank!” Vince shouted. He closed his eyes, not wanting to hear this, knowing what Frank was going to tell him, but not wanting to hang up either.

“—but they found you, they actually found you almost ten years ago! Can you fucking believe that!”

And what Frank said about the Children finding him ten years ago stopped him. He opened his eyes, suddenly frozen. “Ten years…”

“Yeah? Can you believe that?” A hiss of pain. Vince could dimly make out the background noise of traffic. “They’ve been working at you, prepping you for ten years now.”

“Prepping me for what?”

A soft gasp, a hiss of pain. “I can’t get it to stop bleeding.” Frank’s voice broke. He began to sob. “Oh God, it really got me…”

Vince felt his chest tighten up. “What are they prepping me for, Frank?”

“You’re it,” Frank said, and Vince could barely make out what he was saying through his tears. “Just like you said…I know you weren’t serious about it at first, but in a way you were right, Vince. They didn’t bring you into this world to be the Anti-Christ, Vince…they brought you here to be the Red Opener—”

“What?” Was Frank kidding him with this shit?

“You are the Red Opener,” Frank continued. “You’re not the Anti-Christ. You’re the doorway that will allow Hanbi entry into this world.”

Suddenly, Vince’s mind went back to that day when he’d walked into his mother’s bedroom for the first time in over twenty-five years. His mind flashed on those symbols drawn in thick blood on the bedroom walls, those strange words that looked to be indecipherable gibberish and one of those words now leaped out at him. Hanbi. “I don’t know what that means,” Vince said.

“I don’t have a lot of time,” Frank began, his voice tinged with pain. “I learned some of this in my research, but I didn’t think the Children were that heavily into him. In ancient Assyrian myth, Hanbi is the father of Satan; he’s also the father of the demon Pazuzu.”

“Father of Satan? I don’t understand. How can Satan have a father? I thought he was originally an angel—”

“No! He wasn’t an angel because there’s no such thing as angels! There’s no such thing as God, either! Just shut up and listen!”

Vince held his breath and listened, his heart hammering madly in his chest.

“Hanbi is its oldest name,” Frank continued. “He’s known as Hanpa in Western Civilization. Throughout ancient history he’s been known by many names. Ancient Mesopotamia has a myth about a being called Hanbi, a creature that was mentioned in numerous oral stories. A few archeologists believe he was actually worshipped by primitive man, by Neanderthals. The Assyrians and the Sumerians had numerous gods and demons. Pazuzu was known as an evil god of the wind who brings disease to man. Belial was an evil underworld deity who became Satan in Judaism. He was also known in other Middle-Eastern cultures as Shaitan. He’s mentioned in the Book of Enoch as Satanael, the leader of the Grigori, or the Watchers…the so-called angels that became enamored with human women and came down to earth to mate with them. The ancient people of the South Pacific islands called him Dagon. The original Native Americans had a name for him too; I can’t pronounce it, and I can’t pronounce the name given to him by the ancient Europeans. Despite the different names within the different cultures, he’s the same thing.”

Vince’s mind was rebelling at the information. He tried to say something, tried to interject a word of reason, but he couldn’t.

“Hanbi’s name faded and died out as man evolved and developed a system of religion and government. In time, the religious scholars of the time took those old myths and assigned them to the evil spirit of the thing he spawned: Satan, Lucifer, Pazuzu, Behemoth, Melek Taus. The list goes on. Satan became the ultimate bogeyman for all the Abrahamic religions that sprouted up for one specific reason. To divert attention from Hanbi.”

“You’re not making sense,” Vince finally said.

“There’s a book called the Liber Daemonorum,” Frank continued. “I thought it was bullshit when I first stumbled on this thread. Thought it was a bunch of Lovecraft crap, but apparently even H. P. Lovecraft built his mythos and his fictional book The Necronomicon off the mythos of ancient Mesopotamian myth and legend. The Liber Daemonorum is the oldest and most rarest book on black magic ever compiled. There’s a French translation from 1328 or so, by Protassus, but it’s based on fragments from ancient Mesopotamia and Sumeria…in the ancient Sumer language as well as another language…one that is still unknown to modern man. The Liber Daemonorum is the most recent reference to Hanbi we have. Protassus claimed to have had access to older manuscripts, including one in Arabic, which had been translated from Sumerian. The Children of the Night…they went back there in ’65…went to Iraq and came back with ancient Sumerian artifacts. Those artifacts were probably those missing fragments!”

“This is crazy,” Vince said.

Frank coughed and Vince could sense he was struggling, but he continued on. “Long story, short, The Children of the Night have reached all the way back from beyond the Dark Ages. Yes, they’re descendants of the old Devil cults of medieval Europe, but they used their reach and their influence to locate a copy of the Liber Daemonorum and the missing Sumerian fragments. They used these to set things in motion…to bring Hanbi back into this world. And the only way to do that is through a half-demon half-human hybrid.” Frank’s voice became a parched croak. “You.”

“I thought you said I wasn’t the Anti-Christ!”

“And like I said, you’re not. Remember the soul-cracking your mother went through? You were the reason for that…to bring something through…so it would inject a bit of itself into the child that was growing in her womb.”

“Where’s Mike?” Vince asked.

“He’s dead,” Frank said. “They’re going to make it seem like he went crazy, raped and killed his granddaughter, then killed himself.”

“What?” Vince’s stomach plunged down an elevator shaft.

“Turn on the news. It’s already starting.”

Vince went into the living room and snatched the television remote. He turned on the TV, still talking to Frank. “What got you, Frank? How badly are you hurt?”

“Pretty fucking bad, buddy,” Frank wheezed.

Vince switched to a local news channel and for a moment was confused by what was on. He was watching a live feed from somewhere in Huntington Beach. A middle-aged woman with blond hair and pleasant features was weeping. “I never thought,” the woman sobbed, tears streaming down her face. “I never thought he’d be capable of this…of doing this to a little girl!”

The camera cut away to the newscaster in the studio who updated the viewing audience that a man authorities were identifying as Michael Peterson had killed himself by slicing his throat open with a broken mirror shard after killing his three-year old granddaughter. Vince gasped. “He what??”

“Don’t believe a word she says,” Frank said. “She did it. She orchestrated it. She was one of them the whole time and Mike never knew it.”

Mike’s wife Carol one of them? How was that possible? Had she been a cult member this whole time? A sort of sleeper-cell-like cult member waiting for the right time to obey the commands of the unknown shadowy figures of the organization? “What happened to you guys, Frank? Tell me.”

“We dropped everything off with Billy and went to Mike’s house to get…to get pictures of his kids,” Frank said, his voice wheezing. “We were going to disappear. Billy was going to help. But they beat us to it. They were at the house, waiting. They’d just performed a ritual and… something came out…something came out and ripped me open.”

“Listen to me,” Vince said. “Stay where you are, I’m coming to get you.”

“It came so fast,” Frank continued, babbling now. “It ripped me open and I laid there on the floor and watched as it possessed Mike, made him cut his throat and then…I don’t know how, but I got away. They were still performing the ritual as I crawled away. I saw the book…the Liber Daemonorum saw the words they’d written on the wall and that’s when I knew. I should have paid attention better! Should have…realized what they were up to.”

“Tell me where you are,” Vince begged. “I’m coming to get you.”

“Don’t let yourself be led to them, Vince. Don’t let them find you. They’ve got…something horrible in store…for…” Frank’s voice grew weak.

“What? What do they have in store for me?” Vince was agitated. Now he was on his feet, ready to go.

“Not for you…” Frank’s voice trailed to a weak whisper. “…the… world…”

“Frank?”

The hiss of an open line.

“Frank?”

With panic rising, he jabbed the hang-up button. His nervous system was on edge. He hesitated, frozen, not knowing what to do. Not knowing what he could do. The only thing he could think of doing was calling 911.

He hit the 911 button on his cellular, then Send. When the 911 Operator got on the line, Vince got right down to business. “I just got a call from a friend of mine who says he called me from a phone booth in Fountain Valley. He told me he was hurt, but before he could tell me exactly where he was, I lost the connection.”

The sound of fingers typing on a keyboard. “And your friend called you at this number?”

“Yes.”

“Is this a cell phone, sir?”

“Yes.”

“I can’t trace cell phone calls, sir, but one of our 911 operators just took a 911 call from somebody reporting an injured man lying in a phone booth on the corner of Brookhurst and Talbert.”

Vince checked his pockets to make sure his wallet was there, then headed outside, locking the door on the way out. He got in his car, keeping the phone to his ear as he started his car. “That’s it. He said he was hurt and that he was bleeding. Can you send—”

“We’re sending a unit right now,” the 911 operator said.

By the time Vince zoomed out of his cul-de-sac his heart was racing, and his mind was clouded with a thousand thoughts and images, all careening madly from the past and racing towards the present.

Chapter Twenty-two

IT TOOK HIM twenty minutes to drive from Newport Beach to Fountain Valley; there had been a traffic jam on Harbor Boulevard from a three car accident, and Vince found himself boxed in, unable to move forward. By the time he was able to inch his way around the accident along with everybody else, he realized that by now Frank would be at the hospital. As he raced up Harbor Boulevard toward the 405 Freeway, he wondered what hospital Frank would be taken to. The only hospital he could think of was Fountain Valley General, which was just across the street from the phone booth he’d called from. How convenient for Frank to have called within close vicinity to an Emergency Room.

When Vince pulled into the parking lot of Fountain Valley General, he squealed to a stop and rushed out of the car toward the Emergency room. He was panicky and out of breath, but he was also worried.

He was standing at the Emergency room entrance, not even paying attention to the traffic of patients and doctors and orderlies moving back and forth past him. He came out of his semi-trance-like state and moved over to the registration desk. An overweight black woman glanced up at him with wide eyes. “Help you?”

“I’m looking for a patient,” Vince said. “He would have been brought in by paramedics. Big guy, covered with tattoos, black hair. He was hurt…stabbed, I think.”

The black woman shrugged. “Dough’no. We just got an Emergency run ten minutes ago. You family?”

“Yes,” Vince said, the lie springing to his lips easily. “I’m his brother.”

“Lemme see.” The woman ran her finger down a roster, and Vince looked out at the Emergency Room waiting area. It was half-full of the usual—people nursing cuts, broken bones, women consoling children. His mind refused to let what Frank told him die a quiet death. Maybe there was some truth to it, no matter how crazy or how wrong it all was. Vince a half-human, half-demon hybrid? It was absurd. Maybe The Children of the Night believed he was, but it was ridiculous. There was no God? Vince had long believed that, but if there was no God, there couldn’t be an evil creature named Hanbi that was the father of Satan and Pazuzu and all the other demonic creatures that had sprung from the spiritual imaginations of ancient civilizations. There could not be one without the other. However, if millions of people believed in a benevolent God, why not an evil being? It explained some of the imagery from the dreams he’d been having. Especially the one where the hippie tried to kill him. Why else would a burned-out hippie guy try to kill a child? Simple. He’d bought into the idea that Vince was to be the gateway to the emergence of Hanbi, which in a way resembled the emergence of the Christian Anti-Christ. And what if they all believed this so much that it was now permanently embedded in their psyches the same way Christians believed Jesus Christ was the Son of God, the Messiah, their Savior?

Vince shuddered. Why the hell not? It would explain some of the other dreams: the one with the adults wearing those black robes and cowls, chanting in a semi-circle while a toddler-Vince was placed on a raised dais to be worshipped. They had been worshipping him, tripping out, going on with their weird mix of religion and hallucinogens, and it had just gotten scary and dangerous and then his mother had seen it for what it had really been. Something scary, and just plain wrong, and she’d split. But somehow they’d tracked her down, and then found him. Their conviction in him had never wavered; they’d been permanently hard-wired.

A rush of activity interrupted his thoughts, and he turned toward the commotion. A pair of EMT’s was wheeling somebody in and Vince stepped away from the counter to get a better look. “Sir?” the black woman behind the counter said, but Vince wasn’t even listening. He had to see—

He rushed up to the stretcher as an EMT tried to hold him back. “Please step back, sir.”

“Frank!” Vince craned his neck to get a look.

And as the stretcher was whisked passed him, Vince got a quick glimpse of Frank as he was wheeled down the hall to OR. The brief glimpse was all Vince needed to see; Frank was unconscious, pale, and very bloody.

An orderly gripped Vince’s arm to hold him back. “Sir, please…”

“I’m his brother!” Vince said, his voice tinged with anguish.

“Sir?” The orderly had a firm grip in his upper right arm, and now a nurse joined him, one Vince hadn’t noticed before. The nurse was an older woman, in her forties maybe, and together the two escorted Vince to the waiting area. “We’re doing the best we can,” the orderly said. “And the best way you can help us is to remain calm.”

Vince nodded, fighting back the tears that threatened to spill out. He had to be strong, not only for himself but also for Frank.

“What’s your brother’s name?” The orderly was friendly, and had an open face that was sunny even in such dire circumstances.

“Frank,” Vince said, not looking at the orderly. “Frank Black.”

“Is your brother allergic to any medications?”

Vince shook his head. “No. I don’t think so, no.”

“How old is he, sir?” The nurse asked this question; her voice was kind, gentle.

For a moment, Vince didn’t know what to tell her. He had to think about it, add the numbers up in his head. Frank was two years older than he was, that much he knew. “He’s thirty-five,” he said, nodding. He looked at both nurses. “Thirty-five.”

“Do you know if he’s HIV positive?”

“Not that I know of.” How could he know that? He’d only known Frank for a week. Knowing that brought the pain and sorrow to come surging stronger. He sniffed back tears and shook his head. “No,” he said. “He doesn’t have HIV. At least not that I know of.”

Another nurse joined them. She appeared to be Vince’s age and had reddish hair. “If you’ll please come with me, sir, we’ll do the best we can to take care of your brother.”

Vince glanced back once more in the direction Frank had been taken and nodded. He let the redheaded nurse lead him back to the waiting area, feeling a tremendous weight settle on his shoulders. He heard the nurse and orderly that had been questioning him retreat to the OR, presumably to assist in working on Frank. The redheaded nurse had a kind voice. She sat down next to him. “We’re going to do everything we can but you have to be strong for him, okay?”

Vince nodded, not looking at her. He was frightened, and he was scared, and while he knew the nurse picked up on that, she didn’t know that he was frightened and scared for reasons she wouldn’t even be able to understand.

“MR. BLACK?”

At first Vince didn’t look up at the sound of the man’s voice. He was thinking of Frank and the last week or so that they were together. He was thinking of Mike Peterson, and Tracy Harris and his mother, and he was too preoccupied to remember that he’d lied to the admissions people that he was Frank’s brother so he wasn’t even focusing on that when the voice called out again. “Mr. Black?”

Vince looked up and was not too surprised to see that it belonged to a doctor.

He didn’t know how long he’d been in the tiny waiting room by himself. The redheaded nurse had led him there; it was segregated away from the main waiting area, most likely reserved for loved ones of critical patients for their privacy. He’d been sitting by himself in a chair just leaning forward, elbows resting on his knees, staring at the floor and thinking when the doctor entered. He glanced at his watch quickly—it was now almost five p.m. How long had he been here?

The doctor was tall, wearing green scrubs, his surgical mask hanging around his neck. He had a dark complexion and a mop of black hair. Vince nodded and stood up. “Frank’s my brother,” he said quickly. “How is he?”

“He’s in very serious condition,” the doctor began. “I’d like to start by saying that—”

“Can I see him?”

“It might not be a good idea for you to see him right now,” the doctor began.

“Please,” Vince said, imploring the physician. “Just for a minute.”

“We’re going to be giving him a stronger tranquilizer,” the doctor said, frowning. “He almost came to while he was in surgery. He’s lost a lot of blood. To be perfectly honest, I’d advise against seeing him now in the condition he’s in—”

“I have to see him!” He had this undying need to learn everything that Frank had gone through the last twenty-four hours.

The outburst of emotion had the right effect. “Only for a minute,” the doctor said. He put his hand on Vince’s shoulder and escorted him down the hall.

Vince tried to control the tears, but it was hard. As he walked with the doctor down the hall, all he could think of was the past week. How Frank had risked his life, as well as the life of his wife and children, to track Vince down and help him get to the bottom of this enigma regarding his mother. The fact that Frank had put so much on the line, even though Vince realized that he had his own personal motives as well, were weighing heavily on him.

“He was stabbed numerous times in the upper torso,” the physician said, relating the clinical details in a calm, yet caring manner. “Two of them were flesh wounds, but the other three were very serious. The other wounds are life-threatening and unusual.”

“Unusual? How? I don’t understand?”

The doctor glanced at Vince; he looked hesitant. He’s hiding something, Vince thought. “He’s currently on a ventilator to help him breath, and his blood pressure is low,” the doctor continued. “We’ve got him on—”

“Is he going to make it?” Vince asked.

They reached the door to the room Frank was in. The doctor looked hopeful, but grim. “We’re doing everything we can. The next forty-eight hours will be critical.”

Vince took this information well and nodded. Frank was tough. He could get through this.

“I’ll leave you with him for no more than two minutes,” the doctor said. “Then you’ll have to leave. He’s going to need his rest.”

“Yes,” Vince said, as the doctor opened the door to the room and allowed Vince entry.

Vince stepped into the room. It was a large triage area and Frank was the only patient, lying in a bed in the middle of the room. He was hooked up to a myriad of machines; ventilator, IVs, blood pressure gauge. It seemed to take forever for Vince to cross the room, but when he approached Frank’s bedside he saw that Frank’s eyes were closed. Vince winced at the sight of Frank’s bandaged, battered body. He was looking at a different man than the longhaired, menacing tattooed figure he’d met at Baxter’s in Irvine. Frank’s chest was heavily bandaged, as was his abdomen. His shirt and pants had been peeled off and a blue hospital blanket was pulled over his legs and groin. There was a bruise covering the left side of his face that extended to his temple. The only thing colorful about Frank now was his tattooed arms; his skin was deathly pale. As Vince leaned closer, he thought to himself, he’s gonna be all right. He’s gonna be all right.

Frank opened his eyes.

Vince jumped back, startled. Frank stared up at the ceiling and, for a moment, Vince wondered if Frank was even conscious. If perhaps the act of opening his eyes was some sort of subliminal command, the way comatose people will behave when they are in a deep sleep. He watched Frank for a moment, unable to breath, and then Frank’s eyes rolled toward him, resting on him. “V…Vince,” Frank sighed.

“Frank,” Vince said. He reached out, touched Frank’s arm gingerly.

Frank’s eyes were droopy; his pupils dilated. The drugs were taking effect. “H…Haow…”

“Easy, buddy,” Vince said, whispering, leaning closer to him. “It’s okay, just take it easy.”

“After the thing…got me,” Frank began, “they took me. My mother…she was furious with me.”

Gladys Black? The woman who had abandoned Frank as a child, had sacrificed Frank’s sister in a satanic ritual? Vince nodded, not knowing what to say.

“They took me to their home,” Frank said, his voice clear, struggling to maintain the strength of its former timbre. “Can you believe that?” His eyes went blank for a moment, his features slackened, then the muscles in his cheeks grew taut as he fought to control himself. “They took me home…”

“Take it easy,” Vince said, trying to calm Frank down. Frank was trying to tell him something, but he didn’t want the doctor or any of the nurses to interrupt him. “Easy does it.”

“…to somewhere…near Laguna…” Frank said. His eyes drew closed and he sighed. Vince waited, the hum of the machines in the room sounding very loud all of a sudden. “Laagunaaa Hills…”

“Yeah?” Vince whispered, trying to calm his own nerves down.

Frank’s eyes drifted open again, locked with Vince’s. His hand reached out, gripped Vince’s arm. “They took me…to one of their rooms…they let…they let it out again.” Frank winced, motioned to his heavily bandaged torso. “They let it…loose on me again. They…let it…eat me.”

Vince glanced back at the doorway; the coast was still clear. “Frank, listen, you need to relax. You can tell me everything when—”

“I don’t know why they let me go” Frank continued. He swallowed, then coughed. “Next thing I remember, I was outside…in…Fountain Valley? Huntington Beach maybe? I…started walking…saw how bad it was…found a phone booth…”

“—you get out, okay?” Vince was trying to calm Frank down, trying to get him to just relax and sleep, but he was still listening to what Frank was saying. Did he just tell me that they ate part of him? Is that what the doctor didn’t want to tell me?

“Tracy…where is she?” Frank said, his voice failing.

“She’s safe, Frank,” Vince said, his mind racing. “You’re going to be okay.”

“You…knew…” Frank was struggling to speak. His pupils dilated to wide discs, obscuring the whites. “…Tracy…”

Vince’s heart began to pound as Frank’s breathing became more labored, his eyes grew wider. The beeping of the heart monitor was racing as Frank’s heartbeat accelerated and Vince glanced at the monitor. Surely that couldn’t be a good sign. The green indicator on the machine was blipping like crazy. Frank had stopped talking and was lying slumped on the bed, staring sightlessly upward.

Vince turned toward the doorway. “Help! Doctor! Somebody!” He raced toward the nurse’s station just as a nurse rushed in, almost knocking him over. “The monitor—” he began, hovering in the doorway, watching helplessly as the doctor that had escorted him to Frank’s bedside rushed in.

Another pair of medical professionals joined them, and Vince could only watch in growing shock as a defibrillator was wheeled over. The dark-haired physician squeezed a dollop of gel on the defibrillator pads, placed them on Frank’s right pectoral muscle and on his left side. He watched the cardiac monitor as the nurse watched the dials on the defibrillator. “Clear,” she said.

Whump! Frank’s back arched as his body was jolted with electricity. There was a short pause as all eyes went to the monitor. Flatline.

“Damnit!” The doctor placed the pads back into position. “Increase the voltage, in five.”

The five seconds that passed were the longest Vince ever experienced, and when the nurse shouted “clear!” again and Frank was jolted with the defibrillator pads, Vince turned and bolted out of the room. He couldn’t bear to watch anymore, couldn’t bear to be in the same room as the doctors and nurses fought to save Frank’s life. He couldn’t bear to be in the same room because the sinking feeling that he had when he watched Frank flatline was that it was over. Frank wasn’t coming back.

Vince stood outside the triage room for a moment, collecting his bearings. Other medical personnel breezed past, some clutching charts, some pushing gurneys with patients. They didn’t pay attention to Vince. After a moment, Vince could hear what was going on in the triage room and he closed his eyes. They zapped Frank a third time, then a fourth. Each zap was followed by a bustle of activity—the administering of oxygen and CPR and fluids, then the all-clear signal, followed by another zap. Vince waited outside the closed triage room door, unable to move, transfixed by the sound of the medical personnel fighting to save Frank’s life. It felt like he was in a holding pattern, frozen until the final verdict was pronounced.

When it finally came it was in a single sentence, from the dark-haired doctor. “Time of death five minutes after five p.m., Pacific Time.”

With no clear destination in mind, Vince moved.

He headed down the hall, away from the triage room, not really knowing where he was going, only knowing that he had to get away.

Chapter Twenty-three

YOU KNEW….TRACY….

Frank’s last words floated through his mind as Vince walked out to his car numbly, the scene in the hospital reverberating in his mind. With Mike Peterson dead, Frank was obviously frantic, worried about Tracy, worried about Vince, and he was confirming to Vince what he’d known all along. The Children of the Night were after him. He was important to them. What was the term Frank had used? The Red Opener? Like some kind of portal? Whatever it was, it was sick, it was dangerous, it was insane, and he had to get as far away from these people as possible. And he had to contact Tracy and get somewhere safe where they could never be found.

Vince’s cell phone rang as he approached his car. He answered it as he disarmed the vehicle and climbed in. “Yeah?”

“Vince?” Tracy’s voice. She sounded concerned. He could only guess what he sounded like to her. “Vince, you okay?”

“Frank’s dead,” Vince said. He sat in the front bucket seat of his car, staring out at the lot and its multitudes of cars shimmering in the July sun. “So is Mike. They’re both dead.”

For a moment there was silence on the other end of the line. Then, Tracy came back on the line. Her voice was calm, urging. “Vince, are you okay to drive?”

“I think so,” Vince said. He felt numb; detached, like he was in a waking nightmare. “It’s just…everything…it happened so fast.”

“You need to get out of there,” Tracy said. “Do you understand me, Vince?”

“Yeah. I understand.”

“I need you to come pick me up,” Tracy continued. “Only you’re not coming to the condo. I’m at Brian’s place. Can you pick me up there?”

“What are you doing there?” Vince asked. Brian Dennison lived in a large house in Laguna Hills. They…took me…near Laguna Hills…

“I told him what’s happening and he’s set us up. Everything is set up for our new lives, Vince. I acted on this the minute you dropped me off at the condo. I did it for us. We’re both going to be fine.”

“Everything’s…set up?”

“To escape,” Tracy said, her voice calm, soothing. “But we have to leave now. Come get me.”

“Okay.”

“You remember where Brian lives, right?”

“Yeah. I’m leaving now.”

“Drive carefully. I’ll see you soon.” And then Tracy hung up.

This played in his mind as he headed south on the 405 toward Irvine. The Lexus purred contentedly in rush hour traffic as Vince merged into the next lane, maneuvering to the left so he could get onto Interstate 5 where he would then get off on Mission Road. From there he would turn left, heading inland. Laguna Beach would lie behind him, a conclave of upper-middle class homes nestled in South Orange County. But further inland…

Laguna Hills.

Vince had been to Brian’s house a number of times. The neighborhood was made up primarily of high-level professionals: bankers, lawyers, doctors, CEOs. It was very plausible that Gladys Black and her husband lived within the general area.

As Vince drove, he thought about what Frank Black had told him in his drug-addled state. It was obvious something had happened to him; he’d looked gravely wounded. The attending ER physician did not want to discuss the specific nature of Frank’s more threatening injuries. Vince felt his stomach churn; he was nervous. It was still very difficult to believe the supernatural was at play here. He had a hard time believing what Frank had told him. Vince a half-human half-demon hybrid? It was absurd. The Children of the Night might believe it, but Vince didn’t, and that’s what made them so powerful. It was their belief that propelled them, what motivated them. Their devotion to this insane cause was as idiotic as those Christian nuts in Kansas with the god hates fags website and the Jihadists in the Middle East who blew themselves up in order to take down a few infidels.

The exit he was looking for came up and Vince took it, cruising effort-lessly onto Mission Viejo Road. He continued east, trying not to be both-ered by rush hour traffic. He drove on autopilot, his route already mapped out. He knew where he was going, and he would know the house when he saw it.

How had Frank wound up back in Fountain Valley? Did Gladys and the other Children of the Night dump him on some random street corner after doing whatever it was they did with him? For what purpose? Why not just kill him and make the body disappear? The more Vince thought about it, the more confused he got. Words and images swam in his conscious. The Red Opener. Hanbi. Father of Satan. Ancient and forbidden books of black magic written by Assyrian priests. How could such a legend continue for untold thousands of years, known only by a select few?

Something came out….ripped me open…it ate me…

Don’t believe a word she says…she did it…she orchestrated it…

The more Vince thought about it, the more the questions piled on. Mike Peterson’s wife, Carol, crying on TV. Gladys Black being furious with Frank, letting him be savaged by whatever thing they’d let loose on him before. Newport Road came up and Vince swung into the left-hand lane, making his turn at the light and continuing north.

Something Frank said bugged him. They’ve been, like, onto you now, grooming you for the past ten years. Can you believe it?

Ten years?

Vince’s brow furrowed as he thought about the past ten years. In 1989 he’d still been a student, heading to the top of his graduating class in the MBA Program at UCI. He was dating a beautiful woman named Diana Roberts, whom he’d met at a party over the Christmas holidays in 1988, and next to his relationship with Laura, that liaison was the hottest affair he’d ever had. He remembered the relationship being fiery, hot with passion. There’d been something about Diana that had awoken such a lustful side of him that he couldn’t resist her. Normally, Vince had been attracted to conservative girls—preppy cheerleaders, studious types. Diana had been the exact opposite. She’d been a wild, heavy metal rocker chick with teased out hair, lithe features, legs to her neck, and a body that wouldn’t quit. Unlike most of the party girls Vince had known, Diana had actually possessed a brain. They’d have these long conversations about everything from politics to music, to literature and films, to economics and current events. She was well educated yet had a wild side that had won Vince over. He’d been a little sad to see the relationship end.

He kept his eye peeled to the cliffs to his right. It was still light enough to make out the houses perched along the edge of the canyon. The houses that lined the cliff looked to be a good quarter of a mile away, and Vince swung into his right lane so he could cruise it.

He wondered what ever happened to Diana Roberts. About a month or so into their relationship, she’d suddenly stopped calling him or taking his phone calls. When Vince dropped by her apartment in Hunting-ton Beach to see if she was okay (he’d thought she’d been sick or something), he was shocked to find that she’d cleared out. Her apartment was vacant and she’d left no forwarding address.

A year later he was working at Corporate Financial, in a job that had seemingly landed at his feet. Brian Denison, one of the middle managers that interviewed him for the position, had become a good friend and in the three years that passed Vince had risen up the ladder quickly. By 1994 he was a Regional Division Manager in charge of all accounts. He was also dating Laura Palmer, who he’d met at a business function. Two years later he and Laura were married, and Vince thought life couldn’t get any better.

Only it had. There was another promotion, this one as V.P. in charge of International Accounts. Brian was grooming him for a Presidency position; Vince knew that, and his handling of overseas stocks and bonds was becoming impeccable. One of the firm’s clients, Azif Offshore Investments, was rapidly growing into one of the most lucrative firms that the company held and it had been Brian’s baby, which he’d passed on to Vince. “I’m gonna let you do your magic on this one, pal,” Brian had told him that day just a year ago when he’d been handed the account. “These guys are gonna bust out. They’re projected at grossing three hundred billion dollars in 1999. By 2000, they’re gonna be bigger than Microsoft.”

Vince had been riding high, on top of the world, and then it had all come crashing down when Laura lost control of her vehicle and flew off the 5, crashing into a stand of trees.

Eight months after he’d buried her he still grieved. And he tried to get on with his life. Tracy Harris had proven to be a godsend. Brian Denison had been a saint. He’d given Vince all the time he’d needed, had helped him out on his accounts. Vince didn’t know how he’d managed to get through it, but somehow he did.

He saw the gleam of light reflecting off the plate glass window of a home nestled on a jutting crag just as another thought spiked his brain. Tracy Harris…something about her was suddenly becoming déjà vu. He knew he’d never met her before that social mixer at the American Banking Association Convention this past winter, but all of a sudden she popped into his head with the uncanny feeling that they had met before. It was something about her speech, the way she spoke and carried herself that was creating those familiar feelings. Vince tried to focus on it as he made a right hand turn down Park Street, which would lead him up the hill to the neighborhood where Brian lived.

Vince made another right down Fir Street. Tracy Harris wouldn’t get out of his mind, either. The taste of her lips, the comforting warmth of her body pressed against his, it was all coming back to him now, like an old friend, someone he hadn’t seen in years, someone he’d forgotten but his subconscious hadn’t.

As he drew closer to the neighborhood, he felt a weight settle in his stomach. His fingers gripped the steering wheel and he dry swallowed. This was ridiculous. He would have known if he’d slept with Tracy Harris before. He’d only been with ten other women in his life, and Tracy Harris sure hadn’t been one of them. Christ, he could name all his past lovers by name. Susie, Brandy, Lori, Tonya, Susan, Vicki, Diana, Cathy—

The names and faces rushed by and none matched, but oh there was one that was familiar. This realization settled in him as he pulled up in front of Brian’s home, a very large red brick sprawling place, and turned off the ignition. The driveway was full of vehicles. The house was at the end of a cul-de-sac; other cars were parked along the curbs of the neighboring homes, as if somebody were hosting a party. A strange sense of calmness flooded over him; he no longer felt afraid or nervous. He looked at Brian’s home, still trying to place where he might have possibly met up with Tracy Harris before, knowing he would make the connection soon. Then he got out of the car, closed the driver’s side door, and began walking up the driveway toward the house.

As he walked up the driveway, Diana Roberts came to his mind. There was something uncanny about Diana, something about her eyes…those green eyes of hers that had been so alluring, so entrancing. That and the way she had walked, the way she’d kissed him, the way she’d made love to him…it was all coming back now. And the more he thought about Diana Roberts, the more he thought about Tracy Harris and how opposite they were to each other. True, both of them were built similarly, but there the resemblances ended. Tracy was cultured, refined, classy. Diana Roberts was—

He mounted the concrete steps to the porch that led up to the large double oak doors and knocked.

And when the door was opened, a tall elderly man dressed in an immaculate black suit looked out at him and nodded. “Master Vincent,” the man said, his voice crisp and commanding. “We’ve been expecting you. Please, come in.” The man stepped aside, allowing Vince full view of the entry hall.

Vince blinked. Expecting him? He didn’t even know this old fuck. When did Brian get a butler? “Who…” be began.

“We’ve been waiting a long time for you to come home,” the man said, the barest hint of a smile playing along his lips. “Please. Come in.”

The man’s voice had a commanding tone. It propelled Vince up the step and through the threshold where he stood in the foyer, staring up at the vast high ceiling.

“This way, please.” The elderly man with the black suit began walking down the entry hall toward the rear of the house. Vince followed him.

Vince took everything in quickly; the polished mahogany of the woodwork, the stained glass windows, the furnishings; it was all the trappings of wealth and prestige. He’d been to Brian’s home numerous times in the past, but for some reason had never really paused to notice the details of Brian’s home. Had Vince taken Brian’s wealth for granted? Perhaps. But still—

The elderly man stepped aside just as they crested the entrance to the lavish den. Vince stepped through the doorway into the room and his eyes flew open, a gasp escaped him.

The den was large, with a cathedral ceiling. The rear of the room, which made up the rear wing of the home, was composed of plate glass that stretched to the ceiling. He was very familiar with this section of the home. These windows looked out onto the back deck, which, in turn, held a commanding view of south Orange County. The room was furnished with plush sofas and chairs, a cherry coffee table. A large marble hearth occupied a good portion of the south wall. Two large oil paintings hung in gold frames, flanking the hearth, their subjects dark and strange. Vince frowned; he’d never seen these paintings before.

The people gathered in the den turned to greet his entry.

The room was filled with two-dozen people dressed elegantly in suits, sport coats, blazers, vests, dresses, skirts, patent leather shoes and high heels, silk shirts and blouses. Most of them appeared to be older than Vince, in their forties and fifties, but there were a few elderly people as well. They were all looking at Vince, most of them smiling, as if watching a long lost loved one step off an airplane.

There were a couple of people in the room around Vince’s age. One of them was smiling at him, his eyes warm, friendly. He was easily recognizable. “Brian?” Vince asked.

Vince Walter’s best friend Brian Dennison smiled, his face alive with pride. “Vince, my man! So good to see you come home!”

“What’s this all about?” Vince said, his heart pounding. Brian’s wife, Kimberly, was standing beside her husband and for the first time Vince noticed something different about them. He’d known Brian and Kimberly for over ten years, had been to their home, had shared laughter and good times with them. He’d become tight with them, and as familiar as they were to him the moment he walked in, there was something subtly different about his friends. It was as if he’d just discovered they’d been wearing masks the whole time he’d known them, and that this mask had slipped over their countenance, ever so slightly, revealing their true faces.

“It’s all about welcoming you home, Andrew,” Brian said.

Vince started, blinking. Andrew? How could Brian know that the name his mother had given him when he was born was—

He was suddenly able to recognize other people in the room. A middle-aged couple, the woman demure and proper, the man resembling a line-backer; seeing him brought back memories of a California childhood when Vince used to play with his daughter, Nellie. Now he looked older, wiser, more confident. Another middle-aged couple stood near them, the man tall, powerfully built, with brown hair that was turning silver; the woman looked like she might be a power broker for a large corporation. She was dressed in a conservative business suit and her black hair was speckled with flecks of gray. He recognized those eyes as he looked into them and he saw Frank Black in her facial features. He blinked, their younger images molding perfectly with the older couple now staring back at him, faint smiles on their faces. “Gladys and Tom,” he whispered.

“Hello, Andrew.”

Vince turned toward the source of the voice. It came from an old man who was sitting in a red velvet chair with a large ornate back; more like a throne than an actual chair. The man looked to be well over eighty. He was dressed in a black suit, black slacks, a white shirt, a black tie knotted snuggly at his wrinkled neck. Two large gold rings sat on the ring fingers of both hands. His thinning white hair was combed back over his liver-spotted scalp. Despite his age, there was nothing about his demeanor or the sound of his voice to suggest he was frail. If anything he looked strong, powerful.

Vince recognized the old man immediately. “Samuel Garrison,” he said.

“Welcome home, Andrew,” the old man said. His features beamed a radiance that could only be described as pride.

Vince looked around at the sea of faces again. He recognized another face in the crowd, this one standing with the middle-aged couple. She was about his age, with blonde hair, wearing a black dress. She reminded Vince of a suburban housewife and the minute he saw her he was transported instantly back to his childhood, when he was eight years old, playing with his childhood friends as his parents visited with the parents of his friends. “Nellie,” he whispered.

Another woman stepped forward and when Vince cast his eyes on her his heart leaped in his chest. He stepped back in shock, unable to believe what he was seeing. “Tracy!”

Tracy Harris stood in front of the throng of people that had gathered in the immaculate den to greet him. She’d changed into a revealing outfit designed for evening wear; a one-piece black dress with a short skirt, plunging neckline, black stockings, high heels. Her auburn hair fell on her shoulders, and as she stepped toward Vince he saw the remarkable resemblance between Tracy and Diana Roberts, the girl he’d dated over ten years ago. “Tracy,” Vince said, taking a step back.

“It’s okay, Andrew,” Tracy said, her voice soothing, calm. “There’s no reason to be afraid.”

Vince was taking rapid steps back and he stopped when he heard the door behind him close. He glanced back quickly; the double doors to the den had been shut and now he heard the click of a lock. He whirled around to Tracy, who’d stopped her advancement. She was looking at him with a mixture of wonder, awe, and love. Vince’s hands were shaking; he was too scared to do anything except stand there, numb with fright. “What’s going on here?” he said, his voice taking on a squealing pitch.

“It’s okay, Andrew,” Tracy said, her voice soothing, musical. “These are your friends. Your family. We’ve waited so long for this.”

Vince looked around, his eyes darting around the room. Despite the fact that the room they were in was so huge, he was beginning to feel claustrophobic. He felt a tightness in his chest, a burning in his throat that could only be fear. As he tried to take everything in, the people that were gathered in the den rose to their feet. Vince jumped back, deathly afraid. “What’s going on?” he shouted, panicked.

The old man stepped forward, his stride steady with a sense of purpose. “There’s no reason to be fearful, Andrew. Relax. You’re home now.”

“Home?” Vince cried, feeling the tightness constrict his chest. “What are you talking about?”

“You haven’t guessed already?” The man that Vince had known as Uncle Sammy regarded him with an amused glint in his eye and Vince whirled around, searching for a way out. As his wandering gaze searched for an exit, they rested upon the paintings he’d glimpsed upon entering the den.

He stopped, transfixed by them. A sharp gasp commanded his speech, the shock rooted his feet to the floor. “I see you’ve noticed my Bosch,” Samuel Garrison said, taking a step toward Vince. “It’s an original. Dates back to 1505. I paid half a million dollars for it back in ’64. Remarkable, isn’t it?”

Remarkable wasn’t the word Vince would have used. Ghastly would have been more appropriate. The painting Vince was looking at depicted a Madonna and child, the infant suckling at her breasts. In the background, demons cavorted, performing vile rituals and tortures amid the flames of hell. The Madonna was done in a style typical of that period, but the infant….oh, the infant…

Vince couldn’t help himself. He took a step forward to inspect the painting closer.

The infant had been captured as it paused from suckling its mother’s breast. Its face was turned ever so slightly toward the painter, giving the viewer a half-view of its features. The baby was normal in every way except for the faint nubs of horns underneath the skin of its head, just waiting to sprout.

But it wasn’t the horns that made Vince Walters want to scream. It was its face.

It had Vince Walters face.

“The piece is titled appropriately enough,” Samuel Garrison said. Vince could feel the old man take a step behind him, admiring the painting. “It’s called ‘The Coming of the Red Opener.’ ”

Vince glanced quickly at the second painting. It wasn’t the same artist—he was no art aficionado, but he could tell the styles were different—but the subject matter was similar. In this painting, something was coming out of the demon-child…something with tentacles, its suckers ringed with sharp teeth…and just beyond, deep in the center of the demon-child, something else. Something that looked like it had wings.

As he whirled around to inspect the rest of the room he noticed other subtle differences in the sculptures and woodwork that graced it, his panic rising because Brian’s house had never borne such decorations. Chandeliers laced with grinning, leering demonic creatures. Balustrades woven with Pan-like creatures cavorting lustfully. Across the room hung another painting, this one enormous, and even though he was too far away to get a good look at it, its dark colors suggested a similar ominous tone. Another wall was lined with dark cherry wood bookshelves crammed with volumes large and small. Then he noticed the floor and this time he almost jumped back.

Funny how you never noticed things like floors in houses. Especially when one’s mind was on other things, like trying to get to the bottom of two weeks of murder, torture and other dark crimes related to his upbringing. In the past, a very large throw rug had always occupied the center of the den. This time, the rug was gone, revealing pure marble. It was a creamy off-white color and had felt slick beneath his shoes. And it was festooned with two large, graphically rendered designs that took up a large portion of the den floor space. The first design was baphomet symbol; the five pointed inverted pentagram with the devil’s goat in the star. But the second…oh the second…

His mind flashed back to that day at his mother’s home when he’d seen that strange symbol scrawled on the wall. Similar to a pentagram but different, with weird circular shapes that twisted and turned within it. This one was markedly different. The words etched into the marble—M’gwli acht K’tluth K’ryon Hanbi e ’ghorallth liber daemonorum—rocked his brainpan, but the difference was the thing that had been etched into the design, seemingly a part of it. It was leering, winged, somewhat demonic in nature but also very alien looking, as if it had come from an entirely different world.

Vince looked up at the sea of faces, his panic rising beyond hysteria now. “What in the name of God is going on here?”

“What He’s planned!” This from one of the nameless men. He looked solemn, serious. “No more, no less.”

Vince’s eyes darted along the sea of faces, still not believing what was happening. How could this have gone on for so long and he not know anything? Brian and Kimberly Denison…Tracy Harris….he saw her now for who she really was; he saw that long ago lover he’d had in Diana Roberts perfectly in her. A change in hairstyle, a slight gain in weight, a change of clothing and make-up style.

“Of course, God doesn’t remember,” the old man continued. “He might as well not even exist. In fact, he hasn’t existed in many trillions of years. He was rendered old and blind and a babbling, senile idiot long before the creation of the universe set things in motion.”

“I…I don’t understand,” Vince said. “How…” He looked at Tracy, trying to comprehend what was happening.

As if reading his thoughts, Samuel Garrison said, “Diana was the test. We’d been looking for you for a long time, and when the Dark Father gave us Diana, we sent her out in the world to find you. And she did.”

Vince looked at the old man, his eyes widening in horror. “What?”

Samuel Garrison smiled, his face beaming with pride and satisfaction. “Obviously you thought she was a real woman. The Dark Father granted us a Succubus that He knew would draw you out, and it did. And once it found you we called her back…then sent her back out under a slightly different persona. You know this second version as Tracy Harris.”

Succubus? Wasn’t that a female demon? A demonic seducer of men? Vince looked at Tracy, his face contorted in dawning shock and horror as she smiled seductively at him. “The hardest part was walking away from you and having to give you up for ten years.” She laughed. While her voice still contained the timbre of a normal laugh, there was something behind it that sounded inhuman, like the throaty laugh of a creature from the depths of hell.

“You can’t be serious,” Vince said, tearing his eyes away from Tracy and turned back to Samuel Garrison. His brain commanded his feet to move! Run! But they wouldn’t budge; they were rooted to the floor.

“All the memories you have been reliving are real, Andrew,” Samuel Garrison said. “Everything that feels like it was a dream really happened. It’s your subconscious bringing them back to the surface; it’s your memory being allowed free reign again.”

“I don’t understand,” Vince said, his voice cracking as he looked at Brian Dennison, tried to see the friend he’d known and loved for eleven years. The man that Vince knew as Brian Dennison was long gone; either that, or the man he was now looking at, the man that now smiled at him with a look of malevolence, had been there the whole time, lying to him.

“Your mother took you from us years ago, Andrew,” Samuel Garrison resumed. “But we knew you would come back to reclaim what’s yours.”

“The Kingdom is yours, Andrew,” Brian said. His eyes were locked on Vince’s; his angular, handsome features were now menacing, yet triumphant. Kimberly beamed beside him. “You are the gateway. Once you’ve fulfilled your duty, you will be rewarded like no other human being on earth.”

Vince’s mind was a rustling vortex. He felt his emotions crumble. A tear slid down his cheek as he saw his memories rush by in a whirlwind; his mother, memories of his upbringing, his years in Pennsylvania, the fights with his mother over her increasingly strict Christian ways (she knew, she knew the whole time and that’s why she turned so Christian, she knew what I was and she didn’t want to kill me, she wanted to save me, she thought that by saving me it would thwart His plans), his flight to California, graduate school, his marriage to Laura, his friendship with Brian, whom he thought was his friend. More tears slid down his cheek. His voice cracked. “What’s happening? I still don’t understand.”

Tracy stepped forward and now she was holding him and he was letting her. His mind wasn’t even registering what he already knew about her, that she wasn’t even human. His senses weren’t even registering the faint scent of brimstone and rot that seemed to permeate from her pores, the heat that radiated from her body as she took him in her arms, pressing him close to her. He didn’t resist as he felt himself lust for her, felt his penis rise to the occasion. He felt another flush of heat rise through his groin as she placed her lips to the cusp of his ear and began to whisper to him, and what she whispered to him was what he’d been thinking for the past week, not seriously, but as a bad joke. It had all seemed like a bad joke back then, even when he’d brought it up to Frank Black. Now the bad joke was not only confirmed as being real, it was real.

“Your mother took you from us,” Tracy whispered, her voice deep and ancient and evil. “We didn’t foresee that; your mother’s state of mind hid that from even Sam. She’d been gone for over a week by the time her husband came home, and by then she’d erased her tracks. They went crazy looking for you—after all, you’re the Dark Prince, the Red Opener, who will allow the Dark Father into this world to reclaim it for us and defeat the lowly prince of hypocrisy. You were our only hope, we couldn’t let Maggie bring us down. Satan promised he would bring you back; as your father, He saw this as an opportunity to expose you to the world, to allow your mind to develop on its own. Sam was wary, but he allowed it. The dark seed was planted inside you, and we knew it would grow, that it would need time to grow, that there was no fertilizer better than His Kingdom, what god gave him when he cast our Father into the pits of hell.”

Samuel Garrison continued. “On your twenty-second year, we conjured a Succubus from bodily fluids that we preserved from some clothes your mother left behind when you fled. She was designed for the purpose of zeroing in on you, and it didn’t take long. She located you here, in Orange County, and we couldn’t have been more delighted.” He laughed; it sounded like hot coals being rustled by a barbecue stick. “I knew then that the Dark Lord had kept his promise; He’d protected you; His guiding hand had led you back to your birthplace.”

“We worked at bringing you back into the fold,” Brian Dennison continued the narrative. Vince felt the walls close in on him as the nightmare unfolded. “Once Diana learned your name, it was easy to find your mother. It turned out that in the end her loyalty to us won out. She could have killed you hundreds of times after she took you, but she didn’t. She let you live because deep down, she knew that this was what her blind, idiot god wanted.”

“No,” Vince said, shaking his head.

“When we found you, I came in to your life and offered you the position at Corporate Financial, which is actually a front company for our global expansion. And through it all we groomed you for your future position as the years went by. Rituals were held, sacrifices made for the Lord of Darkness to protect you and give you strength. You learned fast. Rituals were performed to awaken your memories on your thirty-third birthday, a magical year for us because it coincides with Christ’s thirty-three years on earth. You would achieve magical powers on this year in your life. All that was needed was to bring Diana back in to your life as Tracy. She worked in protecting and guiding you. We knew there might be danger, and there was. Those assassination attempts…you thought that was us?” Brian shook his head, chuckling, a slight grin on his face. “That was the work of a defector of The Children of the Night, a member who knew of His plans. A renegade Christian cult that thought they could go against their god’s plan by killing the Anti-Christ. What fools!” Brian shrugged, his eyes glimmering. “After introducing Tracy back into your life, it was a simple matter of taking your mother out once and for all and then—”

“But Tracy isn’t even…human!” Vince was confused; his mind was whirling. “How could…I mean…when I met Laura shortly after…”

Brian’s smile faded a little. “We never anticipated that,” he said. “How could we? You were doing so well. Your love for money, for mammon, had been greater than love for your fellow man for so long that when that part of you was awakened by Laura, we knew something had to be done. So,” he shrugged, “it was taken care of.”

The implications of what Brian just said hit him like a ton of bricks. His mind reeled. He blinked back more tears, feeling the fear that had gripped his chest melt into something else, something that grew hot and bubbled to the surface of his psyche as he struggled to contain his emotions. “You…” he whispered, his voice hoarse. “You had her killed? But she…” he gasped, thinking back on that day when Laura had her accident. “But she…it was an accident! You mean to tell me you…cursed her somehow? Caused her car to lose control and fly off the road like that?”

“Of course,” Brian said, smiling. His eyes were black pits that reflected the depths of his soul. “What else would you expect us to do?”

The memories he had of Laura, his best friend, the woman who had awakened feelings he never thought he would have, the woman who had made him a man, bubbled to the surface. He experienced a brief epiphany of not only her memories, but what had been lurking in the shadows the entire time he’d been with her; Brian and Kimberly Dennison, their friends, wearing masks of kindness and love all the while secretly plotting Laura’s demise. And all because Vince had allowed Laura into his life, had allowed himself to feel the love of another person. If he hadn’t let Laura into his life she’d still be alive. The pain of her death that had fallen on her parents, her family, her friends, wouldn’t have happened. And as he realized this, the heat that Vince felt bubbling to the surface came pouring out of him. It came out of him like a blinding white-hot miasma, pouring out of him in waves. He let it propel his emotions forward and he screamed in anguish, at the pain he felt over her death. He tipped his head back and screamed in agony and hate, his eyes closed against the world, seeing only red.

“Yes, Andrew,” Samuel Garrison said. His wizened features were wrinkled in triumph. His dark eyes blazed. “Let the anger and the hate pour out of you. Let it be your guide. Let it compel you!”

Vince continued screaming, no longer able to control himself. All he could experience, all he could feel, was the blind hate he now felt. He’d found all of this so unbelievable, so fantastically absurd, that now that it was staring him in the face he couldn’t deal with it. Worse, they’d killed Laura! Why couldn’t they have just…

“We couldn’t have just left her alone, Andrew,” Samuel Garrison said, now joining Tracy at his side. The old man was standing next to him, his face inches from Vince’s. “She was part of it; she was nudged into your life by the Dark Father himself. She was a willing sacrifice and she didn’t even know it. Her death was to prove that what is inside you would come out and it’s coming out just fine now, so let it out. Let the hate and the anger and the rage you feel come out and take over. Let it overwhelm you. And then use it to your advantage; use it to do the bidding that you were born to do!”

His rage and hate was pouring out of him so swiftly, so fiercely, that he didn’t even know he’d so much in him. He felt it invade every pore, every blood vessel, every nook and cranny in his system and it was so overwhelming, all so pervading, that he felt something else enter him. And when he felt it, it seemed like a switch went on in his head and then he felt a sudden surge of power! And the power he felt was good. It was filling him with something he could only describe as otherworldly, spiritual. And as he screamed in rage and frustration he heard the dim voices of the people in the room as they crowded around him, encouraging him on, chanting beside him. He opened his eyes, not even aware that a spark had lit them, that they now glimmered with something else, something dark and full of rage and purpose. And when they saw it, the people in the room—Gladys and Tom Black, Paul and Opal, his old childhood friend Nellie and her father, Samuel Garrison, Brian and Kimberly Dennison, all of them began chanting.

“Hail Satan!” Brian and Kimberly Dennison chanted in unison, looking at Vince with what looked like awe.

“Hail Andrew!” The room chanted.

“Hail to the One Who Will Claim the World as Ours!” Samuel Garrison thundered.

A roaring cacophony: “Hail Satan! Ruler of the Earth, Destroyer of Christ, Savior to Us All. All Hail the Red Opener, gateway to Hanbi! Hail Satan! Hail Andrew!”

And as the voices roared in his head, as the people gathered in the room paid him the ultimate knowledge, Vincent Walters tipped his head back and let his rage and hate and anger take over, and then he really went mad.

Epilogue

September 13, 2004

VINCE WALTERS WAS in his office going over contracts when his secretary called him on his secure line.

Vince answered on speaker-phone. “Yes.”

“There’s a woman here to see you,” Barbara said. She sounded flustered. “She doesn’t have an appointment and—”

“Then send her away,” Vince said, turning back to his paperwork, dismissing her.

“I’ve tried and I was just about to call security but she’s insisting I call you first.” Barbara sounded pissed off now and Vince looked up from his paperwork, curious. Barbara never got angry. She could turn away the most ambitious salesman. Whoever this woman was, she’d really gotten under Barbara’s skin.

“Who is she?” Vince asked.

“She says—” Barbara began and then she was cut off by the sound of another woman’s voice, demanding something. Barbara said, “Ma’am, I’m telling him. Now will you please be patient!” To Vince: “She says her name is Brandy Black and that you knew her husband Frank. She’s requesting a meeting and I’ve told her that your calendar—”

“Send her in,” Vince said, frowning.

Barbara started, her voice surprised. “Send her in?”

“Send her in,” Vince confirmed. He hung up and began sweeping the papers he was working on into a folder labeled Al Azif Project. He’d finished the deal on this last year, shortly after making presidency of the corporation. He was not only in charge of World Accounts, the Al Azif project had been handed to him without question. He invested the funds in high yield stocks and bonds, channeled the profits to various offshore accounts and wiped his hands clean of it. In the years to come, the project would fund various weapons technologies intended for the US Government’s so-called War Against Terror. It would also fund biological research that would be a fundamental part of this new weapon. Once engaged, the group’s plans could move forward.

He swept the file into the top folder of his desk, making a mental note to place it in his safe when the door to his office opened and a dark-haired woman walked in.

Barbara was behind her, looking flustered. “Mr. Walters I tried to—”

“It’s all right,” Vince said, rising to his feet and buttoning his sport coat. He held his hand out to one of the two soft leather chairs in front of his desk and smiled at Brandy Black. “Mrs. Black. Nice to meet you. Please, have a seat.”

“No thanks, I’ll stand.” Brandy Black had crossed the room and now stood in front of the desk, arms crossed over her chest, her dark eyes smoldering. She was a stunningly attractive woman; five foot five with a trim, athletic body. Her features were beautifully sculptured; high cheekbones, full lips, perfect nose, stunning eyes, and luscious black hair that fell to her shoulders. She and Frank must have made a beautiful couple.

“Fine,” Vince said. He caught Barbara’s eye and nodded. Barbara got the hint and exited the room, closing the door behind her. Frank smiled at Brandy and sank back into his chair. “Well then,” he said, leaning back. “What can I do for you, Mrs. Black?”

“Don’t you know?” Like Barbara, Brandy looked pissed. Only she looked like she had a mission.

“I’m afraid I don’t,” Vince said. “Why don’t we start from the beginning?”

Brandy relaxed a little bit; her shoulders slumped slightly, her features softened. “I…um, listen, I’m sorry if I was nasty to your secretary back there, but she really pissed me off.”

Vince smiled. “Barbara’s been known to do that to even International Investors. That’s why I’ve retained her services.”

“Yeah, well, she wouldn’t even listen to me as I tried to tell her why I needed to see you,” Brandy said, and now she was slipping into another persona, one that was probably more normal for her. “If she hadn’t been so difficult, I wouldn’t have gotten so mad at her and I wouldn’t have stormed in here like some Nazi Storm-Trooper.”

Vince chuckled. “Nazi Storm-Trooper. I like that. Has a nice ring to it.”

Brandy turned to Vince, all traces of anger gone. Now she looked serious. “I’m sorry I’ve intruded on you, Mr. Walters, but you’re my only hope. I’ve been…trying to find out what happened to my husband for almost…well, for over two years now, and I’m getting nowhere.”

“So what do you want me to do?” This was the first time Vince had spoken to Brandy, much less met her. He’d kept tabs, though. The Mike Peterson murder-suicide case had been big news for a while until it was replaced by something else. The police had never questioned Vince in the death of Frank Black. As for Mike’s friend William Grecko, he’d proved to be no problem. Shortly after the Mike Peterson murder-suicide case broke, William Grecko checked himself in to a rehabilitation facility for his chronic alcoholism. He’d remained there for a month, then took a nearly one-year leave of absence from his law firm. The group monitored Grecko closely, but the lawyer seemed to have no interest in the Peterson case. When he did return to work, he took less stressful cases, mostly involving family matters. Shortly after Grecko went into rehab, the law firm’s offices were broken into and the entire suite searched; several computers were taken. The resulting data taken from the pilfered documents and computers stolen from the office suggested that none of William Grecko’s employees had any knowledge of his relationship with Mike Peterson. If Billy had any evidence saved on any electronic media, he’d taken it with him and put it in a safe place. A subsequent search of his home during his stint in rehab had come up with nothing as well.

That was fine, though. William Grecko couldn’t do anything even if he did reach out to his FBI contact. The group had friends in every government agency. At the first whiff of investigation, certain powers-that-be would make the appropriate moves and the investigation would be stopped.

In the years that had passed, Vince had resumed his life and position at Corporate Financial. He ascended to a higher role in the organization, began directing certain activities. Outside of the corporate structure, he began directing certain magical activities, including the monitoring of an older ritual the Yazidis developed, one they had practiced fifteen hundred years ago but was said to have elements that went back even further, to Sumerian times. In fact, he’d just received word from a high-ranking member of the group, Julie Montenelli, that the latest in a series of these rituals had just concluded successfully. These rituals, combined with others being practiced by the group, would create the right atmosphere for his own soul-cracking. And then, when the stars were right…

Brandy Black was an extremely beautiful woman. She was also extremely bold, especially to have hopped on a plane to California to confront him face to face. She was trying hard to control herself; her eyes were smoldering pits and her lips were pressed into a thin line of anger. Vince could detect her anger just simmering beneath the surface. “You’ve been ignoring me for years,” she said, a low whisper, guttural with anger and menace. “He seeks you out because he thinks he can help you…he risks his life because he thinks you’re in danger…” Brandy was lurching closer towards him, looking like she wanted to leap over his desk and throttle him. “…he does all this and you ignore me!”

Vince looked impassive. “I had no reason to speak to you.”

“No reason to speak to me?” Brandy looked taken aback by Vince’s stoic demeanor. “My husband wanted to help you! He kept me in the dark about what it was he was working on and all he would tell me was that something happened to you and him when the two of you were kids. Whatever it was, he was paranoid enough to set up these fake IDs for me and the kids, then move us out to the middle of goddamn nowhere—”

Vince held up his hand. “What is it you want to know?”

Brandy stopped. For a moment, she looked surprised, as if the years of stonewalling her and ignoring her inquiries had finally resulted in breaking his barrier. “I just want to know the truth,” she said. “What was he so scared of? What happened to him, what happened to you to… to make him do this?”

Vince shrugged. “I have no idea. I had a perfectly happy childhood. Frank, on the other hand…well, Frank was a troubled child. Seeing him again really brought those memories back and I’m sorry to say, whatever trouble he had only worsened in his adulthood.”

“What do you mean?”

“He was incoherent. He didn’t make any sense. He rambled on about his parents, how they were horrible to him and abused him and all that, then he claimed I had witnessed some of it and been abused myself. I was skeptical. He told me about his past, how he ran away, got hooked on dope, the whole nine yards. At first glance, I thought his story bore serious consideration, so I indulged him.”

Brandy was looking at him warily. Vince continued. He stood up from behind his desk and approached her. “We spent a few days together, driving around Orange County and he kept bringing things up about when we were kids. Try as I might, much of what he told me didn’t add up in my memory. Plus, he was using drugs again.”

“No he wasn’t,” Brandy said.

“Yes, he was,” Vince said. He nodded, then placed a friendly hand on her shoulder. “Granted, he was smoking pot. Claimed it relaxed him. He offered me some but I abstained. However, I’m afraid he was smoking more than pot. It had a strange scent to it. He wouldn’t tell me what else it was, and it wasn’t until later…after his accident happened, that I began asking around and doing some research when I found out what else he was smoking. It was opium.”

“Bullshit,” Brandy said. “Frank wouldn’t do that. He hadn’t touched dope in almost ten years—”

“Maybe he was relapsing then,” Vince said. “Regardless, he was using in front of me, and the longer I spent with him, the more I…well, the more I was beginning to see Frank for who he was.”

“And what’s that?”

“What did Frank tell you?” Vince asked. “About his childhood? About him and I? About him contacting me?”

“He didn’t tell me anything. Just that…what he was working on had to do with when the two of you both were kids. And how he thought that…well, how he thought he’d been abused in some way.”

“Ah, I see.” Frank took his hand off Brandy’s shoulder and strolled closer to the window, his hands behind his back. His corner office consisted of floor to ceiling windows that opened to a stunning view of Newport Beach. He turned to her. “He told me that as well. And to be perfectly honest, I don’t remember much of the details of our childhood. I remember we played together, of course. And I told him I always had the impression that he came from a troubled home. He confided to me the abuse allegations and it made sense to me. You know what I mean?”

Brandy nodded. “Yes. He told me all that too.”

“Did he tell you about my mother?”

Brandy shook her head. He could tell she was being truthful. “Frank showed up in my life a few days after I returned home from tending to my mother’s funeral. She’d been murdered in a home invasion robbery by a guy named Steve Anderson, who was seriously disturbed.” He shrugged, looking reflective. “Steve later hung himself with his shoelace in his cell a month before he went to trial.”

“I’m sorry to hear this,” Brandy said.

“Thank you,” Vince said, nodding. Steve Anderson, in fact, had been arrested two months after Frank’s death and the pieces of evidence against him fell quickly into place. “I was still reeling from the shock of my mother’s murder when Frank came back into my life. As much as I wanted to believe that Frank and I experienced similar things in our childhood, I simply couldn’t. I went along with him anyway because, like I told you, I was going through a bad time myself.”

“The Orange County medical examiner still won’t tell me the details of Frank’s death,” Brandy said. “All they’ll tell me was that his injuries were fatal…that he’d died from severe blood loss and shock.”

“I understand the police believe Frank was killed by an unknown assailant when he was trying to buy drugs,” Vince said.

“That’s not true!”

Vince shrugged. “He was found two blocks from a neighborhood in Fountain Valley where heroin and opium was regularly sold and used at.”

“How do you know this?”

“I tried calling him a day or so after I last saw him,” Vince explained. “A police officer answered his cell phone. He’d died maybe a few hours before. I met with the investigating officers and told them all I knew. They asked me if I’d observed Frank under the influence during that time and…well, I couldn’t lie to them.”

“Frank wasn’t doing drugs!” Brandy protested again.

“Didn’t they find traces of marijuana in his system?”

“Well yes, but—”

“And traces of opiates?”

Brandy looked upset. “He’d been prescribed OxyContin a month before following minor surgery on his back. But that doesn’t mean he—”

“Backslid? Perhaps not, but the lab results tell another story. The way he disappeared sure explains things.”

“What do you mean?”

“Come on, Brandy, let’s cut to the chase. Frank Black had fallen off the wagon and was losing his mind. It was obvious to me in the few days I spent with him that he was on a wild goose chase involving his alleged abuse, that he had a major drug problem, and that he was either making shit up or hallucinating it. He obviously sent you away as part of this fantasy, but I believe he also wanted you and your kids out of the way so he could get high in peace.”

“Why…why are you saying that?” Brandy was starting to cry.

Vince sighed, put his arm around her and gently escorted her away from the desk, toward the windows overlooking the view. “I’m sorry, but if you’d heard some of the things he was saying, you’d think it was crazy.”

“Try me.” She turned to him, her eyes imploring him to tell her the truth.

Vince looked reluctant. He shook his head. “Are you sure he never told you about his childhood? About his mother, Gladys?”

“He hated his mother,” Brandy said. “He never told me why, just that she and his stepfather were horrible people.”

“He didn’t tell you that he thought his parents were Satanists? That they belonged to a secret nationwide Satanic cult that was involved in white slavery, the international drug trade, and child pornography?”

Brandy looked like she’d been slapped in the face. She gasped, her eyes widened in surprise. “N-no…he didn’t. I—are you serious?”

“Very serious.”

“He told you this?”

“Yes, he did.”

“What about…your parents? Were they part of it too?”

Vince laughed. “My mother? A Satanist? She was the most Christian woman you could ever meet. It’s mind-blowing to say the least.”

“Did Frank tell you you’re mother was involved?”

“No. Only his.”

“You’re saying my husband told you that he thought that his parents were members of a satanic cult and that they abused him?” Brandy still looked like she was having a hard time accepting this.

Vince nodded. “Yes indeed.”

“And?”

“And what?”

“Were they?”

Vince noted her serious tone, her unblinking approach. He laughed. “You’re kidding, right?”

“No, I’m not,” Brandy said. “My husband obviously believed it. Why shouldn’t I?”

“Because it isn’t true,” Vince said. His tone and demeanor became more serious, less playful. “I’ve gotten to know Gladys Black and her husband in the past few years due to the intersecting of our professional lives. She’s a lovely woman. Very driven, professional. She was saddened to learn of Frank’s passing. We’ve talked a lot about Frank in the past few years and she shared some details of his childhood with me. He was a very disturbed child.”

“If you’re going to—”

“Let me finish,” Vince said, over-riding her protests. He stood tall and firm near the big plate glass windows that overlooked Newport Beach. “Your husband was obsessed with his theory. It was obvious to me he’d gone through a rough time, but Gladys tells me that Frank was seriously disturbed at a young age. He had disciplinary problems as early as the second grade. He began using drugs at a very early age, began drinking, began getting in trouble with the police. Gladys did everything she could to control him, but she couldn’t. She finally sent him to her former sister-in-law’s place in Texas. They had a hard time with him too, and he eventually left their home and wound up in Los Angeles. I’m sure he told you the rest? The years of selling and using drugs, being involved in petty crimes?”

Tears pooled in Brandy’s eyes. “You’re painting the impression that he was some kind of scumbag. He wasn’t anything like that!”

“I agree, he redeemed himself later,” Vince said. “I have to commend him for that. I think his relationship with you really helped as well. Unfortunately, his past demons were strong. He could never completely escape from them. In the end, they consumed him.”

“The police said Frank was talking to a guy named David Connelly,” Brandy said, wiping the tears from her cheeks. “They found the phone records on Frank’s cell phone. They haven’t been able to locate him. It’s like he just disappeared. Did he ever mention that name to you?”

Vince shook his head. David Connelly was the pseudonym Mike Peterson had adopted and opened his alternate identity under. With Carol Peterson’s help, they’d dismantled all traces of David Connelly when the three of them had been in Pennsylvania. “No, he didn’t. Why?”

“Are you sure? Because the phone records the police retrieved were made in the week the two of you were parading all over Southern California.”

“Frank made a few phone calls, but I never asked who he was talking to and he never told me.”

“So you’re telling me that Frank was crazy? That he had paranoid delusions?” When Brandy turned back to him, Vince saw that tears were pooling in her eyes.

Vince’s features softened. “I’m afraid so. I’m so sorry.”

Brandy nodded and turned around. She reached into her purse and extracted a tissue. She dabbed her eyes. Her voice was shaky, yet remained strong, vigilant. “I’ve been trying to talk to you about this for…the last four, five years now. Why wouldn’t you speak to me?”

“I didn’t want to hurt you,” Vince murmured softly. “I didn’t want you to…think less of your husband. I was…hoping you would simply…ac-cept what happened, accept the evidence the police found at the crime scene and just go on.”

Brandy nodded, her shoulders quaking with the intensity of her quiet sobbing. Vince let her stand there and sob; he could tell she needed to cry, that she needed to get it out. It was probably hard for her to comprehend that her husband had never truly changed his low-life ways, that he’d never received psychological counseling, that he’d allowed his problems to simmer and fester for years until he began making shit up until he began to believe his mother had been a deranged Satanist.

“I’m sorry,” Brandy said, her back still turned to him. “I’m sorry I’ve wasted your time like this and bugged you…”

“It’s okay,” Vince said. He stepped toward her and touched her shoulder gently.

She turned around, her eyes red. She wouldn’t look up at him. She looked too embarrassed. “Did Frank ever tell you about his real father?” Brandy said, sniffing.”

“No,” Vince said, curious. “He didn’t. What about him?”

Brandy wiped her eyes. “He told me his father was driven insane by his mother. He said one of the reasons he was contacting you was…to find out what happened to his father. And that…he thought that by doing that, he could help you too.”

“Help me?”

“Like I said, he never told me specifics. I just…kind of put two and two together.”

“I see,” Vince said. Playing dumb with this woman was proving to be beneficial. Until now, they had no idea what Frank had told her about his childhood. “His natural father suffered from similar delusions, then?”

“I don’t know what really happened to Frank’s dad. He only told me bits and pieces over the years. At first, he wouldn’t tell me anything about his parents. Every time I asked, he would clam up. The most he would say was that his father left the family when he was three and that his mom and stepfather were abusive toward him. Before he…well, before he sent the kids and me back east, he revealed a little more. He told me his father saw his mother do some really awful things and was driven insane by it. That’s the reason his father left. I…I never believed it, tried to get him to tell me more specifics, but he clammed up, said he’d already told me too much.”

“Uh huh,” Vince said, nodding for her to go on.

“I speculated that perhaps the real story behind it was that his father simply disappeared. Maybe he had his own drug and alcohol problems. I reached out to Frank’s Aunt, and she admitted to us that Frank’s dad turned up twenty years or so later, basically a homeless drunk. She wouldn’t tell me much else. I can…a conspiracy theorist would say that the reason he’d become an alcoholic was because he’d been driven to drink by the horrible things he’d seen. But I don’t buy that.”

“You don’t?” Vince looked at her, his gaze gentle, caring.

“No. I can’t believe that.” Brandy had gained her composure. She clutched her small purse in her hands, facing Vince as they stood by the large plate-glass windows. “If mental illness is hereditary…and I believe it is…I have to think that Frank had developed this theory himself. His Aunt won’t tell me what drove his father to drink, and I think she was a bit embarrassed to talk about it. I can see why now.”

“Why’s that?” Vince asked.

“Isn’t obvious? Like father, like son.”

Vince patted her shoulder again, lending some semblance of support to the still-grieving woman. “Again, I’m sorry.”

Brandy sighed. “It’s just…trying to wrap my head around this…why Frank would do this…has driven me crazy.”

“I can’t even imagine what you’ve had to go through,” Frank said.

“Did you know that the police in Pennsylvania got in touch with me?”

“No, I didn’t. What for?” Vince was aware of the criminal investigation over the gun battle in the parking lot of the Family Cupboard Restaurant in Lititz, Pennsylvania. A similarity in Frank’s appearance and the description of one of the gunmen wanted in the Pennsylvania shooting was made. The three men who’d ambushed them were connected to an apocalyptic Christian cult based out of Missouri—a group that had since been destroyed by The Children of the Night shortly after Vince’s re-baptism into the Dark Father’s fold, although he wasn’t going to tell Brandy that.

“They said he looked like a murder suspect,” she said. “The composite drawing looked kinda like him, but…Frank had cut his hair a day or two before his murder. Were you with him when he did that?”

“I was,” Vince admitted it. “I actually cut it for him. He asked me to.”

“Really?”

“Yes.”

“You cut it? In your home?”

“Yes.”

Once again, Brandy Black had that look about her; sharp, penetrating, as if trying to see past the lies Vince was feeding her. Vince didn’t drop his gaze.

Brandy reached into her purse and extracted a tissue. She wiped her eyes with it and then wadded it up, stuffing it in her purse. “I’m sorry Mr. Walters. It’s just…I’ve tried so hard to get to the bottom of Frank’s death that I simply didn’t want to believe what the police told me…that they found traces of drugs in his system. It’s just hard to believe that he would have…”

“Backslid like that?”

Brandy nodded. “Yes.”

Vince stepped forward and laid his hand on her shoulder. He began to lead her away from his desk toward the door to his office. He was gentle, and if he was forceful Brandy didn’t notice. She went willingly. “I’m sorry I’ve avoided you but, as I said, I didn’t want you to think less of Frank. Whatever problems he had…they were too strong for him.”

Brandy nodded, her face screwing up again, and Vince could tell she was struggling not to cry. He put his arm around her, drawing her close to him for comfort. “He was a brave man,” he said, his voice soothing. “He was trying to beat whatever demons he had in his past but they were too strong for him. They overwhelmed him. I’m sorry.”

Brandy nodded and sighed. She looked up at him with red, watery eyes. “Thank you.”

Vince offered her a smile and grasped the doorknob to the double oak doors that led out to the lobby of his office. “Is there anything else I can do for you?”

“No,” she said, shaking her head and composing herself. She grasped her purse. “I’m sorry to have bothered you. Thank you.”

“Don’t mention it.” Vince opened the door for her. “How are you and the kids by the way? You’re still on the east coast, right?”

Brandy stepped through the double doors and put her sunglasses on. She paused in the lobby, facing him. “Yes. We’re in Maine, at the house Frank set us up in before all this happened. We’re doing fine. My mother and I sold our agency, and I’ve got some money from Frank’s literary estate. We’re doing okay.”

“Good. If you need anything be sure to give me a call. Even if it’s just to talk.”

“Thank you,” Brandy said. “I will.”

“Take care of yourself, Brandy,” Vince said, touching her hand in a farewell gesture.

He watched her exit the lobby, not even paying attention to Barbara as the younger woman walked past to the elevator. Vince stepped back into his office and closed the doors behind him, pausing briefly as he rested his back against them.

Brandy Black would be fine. He had no idea how she would play into all this, but she had not been a thorn in his side before. Today’s episode was minor, really. He smiled to himself as he replayed the moment in his mind when he told her about the satanic aspects of Frank’s case. He knew she wouldn’t believe it, which was precisely why he’d told her. Her subconscious had already accepted the fact that Frank had relapsed into drug use again; she just didn’t want to accept that emotionally. What he told her had nudged her firmly into that corner of opinion and that was exactly where he wanted her.

Vince moved across the room to the large pane-glass windows and looked out over the parking lot. The visitor’s parking lot lay to his right and five minutes later Brandy exited the lower lobby, walking briskly across the atrium. He smiled as he watched her meander through the parking lot.

Vince Walters watched Brandy Black as she climbed into a white sedan, the corners of his mouth turned upward in a lupine grin. The file he’d swept to the side of his desk lay open, the words Al Azif clearly shown in the waning afternoon sunlight. He thought about the project, thought about all the hard work he’d put in on it, and as he thought he concentrated, pushing himself into that hallucinatory dream world he’d entered over and over again.

His vision blurred through a haze of smoke. He felt the heat rise around him, comforting, warm. Below him he heard screams of horror, but he ignored them. He looked out over the vast city of skyscrapers, the people below resembling tiny ants in a network of veins now growing littered with debris. And then he drifted up through the smoke as a faint rumbling erupted below.

He opened his eyes, the smell of smoke in the back of his throat. His smile grew wider. Al Azif’s funds were going to be well protected.

Al Azif.

Arabic for the Customs of the Dead.

And a great fury will come from the Middle East, the great tribulations will open up, and the Anti-Christ will begin amassing his army in the Battle of Armageddon.

The great fury was coming. Al Azif had funded it. Thanks to Samuel Garrison and his vast network.

Vince Walters—Andrew—was orchestrating it. The stars were closer to being aligned than ever before. When the soul-cracking occurred, it would coincide with a military operation in Iran, an operation that would be conveyed to most of the world as a small-time bombing run to quell rising tensions between Muslim extremists and reformers.

But it would be so much more.

The Lord works in mysterious ways.

But it was what he wanted. Even if most Christians tried to deny the fact, the simple fact of the matter was, it had to happen for their Savior to return.

Otherwise, why call yourself a Christian?

And why was he—the son of the Great Tempter—seen as such a bad guy in the Christian mythos?

Andrew smiled. None of that mattered. Sure, it was all written in the great spiritual texts of old. Sure it was foretold that he and Samuel and the others who had helped set this end of the battle up would be defeated. That wasn’t the point. The point was, it was what He wanted, and Andrew and Samuel, and the rest of the Children who had helped orchestrate this would bask in the glory of the Lord. Was not Judas Iscariot doing the Lord’s bidding when he betrayed Jesus with a kiss? Wasn’t he fulfilling God’s prophecies in the old Hebrew manuscripts?

Of course he was!

And so were Andrew and The Children of the Night.

And while he was at it, he was going to have some fun.

He laughed as he watched Brandy Black’s white sedan rental car recede in the distance.

June 17, 1997 – June 15, 2010

Pasadena, California

Lititz/Altoona, PA

About J. F. Gonzalez

J. F. Gonzalez is the author of over fifteen novels of horror and dark suspense including Back From the Dead, Primitive, Bully, The Beloved, Survivor, and is co-author of the Clickers series (with Mark Williams and Brian Keene respectively). His short fiction is collected in four volumes, of which the latest, The Summoning and Other Eldritch Tales, is available as an exclusive digital title. He also works in other media including film, the technology sector, and other areas of publishing. He lives with his family in Pennsylvania and is currently working on his next novel. For more information, visit him on the web at www.jfgonzalez.com.

Also by J. F. Gonzalez

Clickers

(Co-written with Mark Williams)

Click Click Click Click

Phillipsport, Maine is a quaint and peaceful seaside village. But when hundreds of creatures pour out of the ocean and attack, its residents must take up arms to drive the beasts back.

They are the Clickers, giant venomous blood-thirsty crabs from the depths of the sea. The only warning to their rampage of dismemberment and death is the terrible clicking of their claws. But these monsters aren’t merely here to ravage and pillage. They are being driven onto land by fear. Something is hunting the Clickers. Something ancient and without mercy.

Clickers II: The Next Wave

(Co-written with Brian Keene)

The first wave was just the beginning…

The United States is in ruins. It has just suffered one of the worst hurricanes in history, the people are demoralized, and the president is a religious fanatic. Then things get really bad - the Clickers return.

Thousands of the monsters swarm across the entire nation and march inland, slaughtering anyone and anything they come across. But this time the Clickers aren’t blindly rushing onto land - they are being led by an intelligence older than civilization itself. A force that wants to take dry land away from the mammals.

Those left alive soon realize that they must do everything and anything they can to protect humanity no matter the cost.

This isn’t war, this is extermination.

Clickers III: Dagon Rising

(Co-written with Brian Keene)

They thought it was over, but the second wave was only the beginning. In the aftermath of the Clickers and Dark Ones’s siege and a coup against an insane President, America rebuilds. Change has come, and a better future is promised to all. But promises can be broken and there may be no future at all because deep beneath the ocean a new terror awaits. Dagon, god of the Dark Ones, is waking up…and if humanity doesn’t stop him, then mankind will face extinction.

Trapped on a South Pacific Island, the cast of Clickers and Clickers II: The Next Wave join forces with a mysterious group of occult agents to face off against the Clickers, the Dark Ones, Dagon, and an all-new threat - the deadly obsidian Clickers. The stakes have never been higher. Dagon is rising…and humanity will fall.

Survivor

Author’s Preferred Edition

Before Hostel…before Saw…there was Survivor.

It was supposed to be a romantic weekend getaway. Lisa was looking forward to spending time alone with her husband, Brad, and telling him that they are going to have a baby. Instead, it becomes a nightmare when Brad is arrested and Lisa is kidnapped. But the kidnappers aren’t asking for ransom. They want Lisa herself. They’re going to make her a star - in a snuff film.

What they have in mind for Lisa is unspeakable. They plan to torture and murder her as graphically and brutally as possible, and to capture it all on film. If they have their way, Lisa’s death will be truly horrifying…but even more horrifying is what Lisa will do to survive…

It Drinks Blood

New Castle, Pennsylvania, during the tail end of the Great Depression.

Robert Brennan has never completely forgotten those days, even though he has tried to forget them. But when the nursing home he lives in receives a patient he remembers from those dark darks, it takes his mind back to a period marked by terrible, blood-soaked violence…the very kind marked by the twisted perversity of the stories he used to write for the weird-menace pulps…the kind marked by the real-life fiend that stalked the hobo jungles in search of fresh blood!

Primitive

It began as just another day for David Spires and his wife Tracy: coffee, breakfast, and getting the kids ready for school. Then the bottom dropped out of civilization.

The world ends not with a bang or a whimper, but with a dizzying downward spiral. Instead of the rat race of commuters scurrying to beat the clock, humans are now packs of animals reduced to snarling primitives.

David, Tracy and their daughter Emily, along with fellow survivors, leave Los Angeles for the safety of the country where fewer people means fewer primitives. But as they venture farther away from the city, they realize an unnatural force is at work. Civilization didn’t just fall apart…it was overtaken by an ancient evil that was present before the first cave paintings. Human history has no formal record of it, but the dark presence that’s fueled nightmares since time began has crept out of the shadows…and its influence is growing.

The Summoning and Other Eldritch Tales

The Summoning contains seven collected tales of Lovecraftian-inspired nightmares from J. F. Gonzalez. Featured in this collection are two original pieces: “Holes” and “The Summoning” (co-authored with Mike Baker).

This exclusive digital collection of stories includes:

Opening The Way: An Introduction

Tattoos

Going Home

The Revenge of Cthulhu

Holes

The Man Who Had a Death Wish

The Summoning

The Watcher From the Grave

Each story contains special story notes penned by the author!

Back From the Dead

Tim Gaines was the town pariah. Mocked and teased continuously since he was in the sixth grade, he approaches his senior year of high school with a sense of cautious trepidation. Years before, when he was in the sixth grade, a group of boys led by Scott Bradfield - a popular, well-liked kid from well-to-do parents - spread a vicious rumor that he was a devil-worshipper. The rumor stuck, and is believed by most of the students and even a few of the teachers and administrators. It’s a rumor Tim can’t beat, and one he sometimes feels he’s brought on to himself due to his love of horror novels and movies.

Now Tim has become friends with a loose-knit group of kids who have also become social outcasts thanks to other rumors about them by the student elite. With their mutual support, Tim has begun to come out of his shell. He’s going out with them, being invited to parties, and even begins to have a romantic interest in a girl, something he never thought would happen to him in high school.

But all that will change when Scott Bradfield and his friends set their sights on Tim again. Only this time, they need his help. Like most of the student body of Spring Valley High School, they sincerely believe Tim Gaines is a devil-worshipper. And they believe he has a dark power. Now they want to use him and that power for their own sinister plight…

…To bring back the dead homeless man they’d kidnapped and brutally beaten to a pulp in the guesthouse that resides on the Bradfield residence.

They want him brought back not because they’re scared of getting caught for his murder, but so they can savagely beat and murder him again…

…and again…

Fetish

Something is in search of human prey in the gang-ridden communities of Los Angeles…

When the member of a notorious street gang is found decapitated and dismembered at the bottom of the LA River, it quickly becomes apparent something is amiss. Detective Daryl Garcia connects it with the murders of six other gang members killed in the same way. It looks like the work of a serial killer, but the gang members don’t think so. They believe the murders are the work of rival gang members.

Someone has a dark desire of the most depraved fetish…

Detective Garcia becomes determined to find the killer at any cost. Together with Rachael Pearce, a journalist he falls in love with, he searches for the killer through the gang underground and the world of prostitution and drugs. And as suspect after suspect is released with no solid evidence to connect them to the crimes, the search for the killer becomes more urgent as the gang-infested areas of the city reach a boiling point to the brink of rioting. In a community of gang members – who are killers themselves – how does Detective Garcia find the most monstrous killer he has ever encountered?

Madness wears many faces…

Do Unto Others

Jim Cornell used to believe in God.

But when things went bad – his daughter getting cancer, his layoff from his well-paying job, the strain of his marriage – he began to have no use for God anymore.

When Jim’s forced into a situation that will require his participation in another man’s murder, his faith will be tested. Because while Jim used to believe in God, he’d never given that much thought to the Devil.

Now he’s going to have to. Because, like it or not, Jim is involved with people who have a deep religious faith, too.

Jim is about to discover that where there is light, there must be darkness. There’s more than one kind of religious faith and his is about to be put to the ultimate test.

The Corporation

Michelle Dowling found her dream job. The offer on her desk from Corporate Financial Consultants included a high five figure salary, generous benefits and cushy perks. Finally, after escaping the psychological abuse of an emotionally cold mother and a series of dead-end jobs, she could start planning for a future with her fiance, Donald.

However, Michelle forgot the cardinal rule for any job offer; always read the fine print. She really should have gotten more details about her overtime hours, company policies, and exactly what they meant when they said “Welcome to the Corporate Financial Family”.

Michelle isn’t afraid of hard work. She’s a dedicated employee, the kind any manager would want for his firm. But this Corporation requires much more than just dedication…

The Beloved

You’ve seen her before. Perhaps somebody you know is dating her, getting himself into debt by taking her out to fancy restaurants and buying her expensive gifts. Yet you see her for what she really is.

Elizabeth Weaver saw it in her brother Ronnie’s new girlfriend, Diana. Something about the woman rubbed Elizabeth the wrong way. She refused to get a job and help Ronnie around the house and seemed to bask in the attention and expensive gifts he showered her with. And as Ronnie began neglecting the rest of his family, they finally took notice, only Elizabeth saw what the others didn’t - that Diana wasn’t quite human.

And neither were her children.

Don Grant has tracked the creature for years, ever since it turned his wife into something barely more than a living zombie. He’s traced its history through the centuries. It feeds off our lust for it, the violence it goads us into creating, and it grows stronger and seductive with each new victim. Now Don has caught up with it and he has to stop it fast, or the nightmare will be unleashed on a whole new family.

Shapeshifter

Mark Wiseman thought he had his curse under control. He thought he’d kept it secret.

He was wrong.

Bernard Roberts is a wealthy, influential man, and he knows all about the curse that runs through Mark’s veins. He knows how Mark’s parents were killed eight years ago. If Mark wants Bernard to keep this knowledge to himself, he’ll have to do what Bernard wants. He’ll have to use his curse to kill.

But if Mark Wiseman begins to lose control of the curse, he will lose everything he has: his life and freedom, and the woman he loves.

Acknowledgements

My deepest appreciation and thanks go to a wide array of people who supported me during the various stages of writing this novel:

My wife, Cathy J. Gonzalez, my daughter Hannah; my parents Jesus and Glenda Gonzalez, my in-laws, Joe and Lucy Becker; my friends Del and Sue Howison, Pete Atkins, Mark Williams, William Relling, Jr., Dave Nordhaus, Richard Laymon, David J. Schow, Gary Zimmerman, Debbie Daughetee, Kurt and Amy Wimberger, Glen & Emily Vasey, John Skipp, Buddy Martinez; to Sylvia Huth and company at Kaiser who kept me employed during the early stages of this project; to Paul at Thunderstorm Books for taking interest in the project and providing great feedback when I was tired of it; editorial peeps: Shane Ryan Staley, Don D’Auria, Jamie LaChance, Bob Strauss, and Tod Clark. To those who provided inspiration and support during the massive rewrite of this novel: Val Gunn, Michael Harrell, Bob Ford, Brian Keene, Cassi Keene, Chet Williamson, Geoff Cooper, Mike Hawthorne, Mike Oliveri, Ace and Jodi Martinez, Perry, Alex, and Carrie Martinez, Jesse Calleja, Richard Christian Matheson, John Skipp, Brian Emrich, Michael Lansu, Steve Calcutt, and Craig Spector.

For my Aunt Irene

Who still loves a good shiver

No part of this book may be used or reproduced, stored into or introduced into a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or any other means now known or yet to be invented) without the prior written permission of the copyright holder, except in the case of brief quotations embedded in critical articles or reviews. For information, contact the author: www.jfgonzalez.com.

Translation: no part of this book may be reprinted without prior written permission from the author; that includes uploading digital editions onto file-sharing or bit-torrent networks and/or scanning pages of the paperback edition, creating a digital file, and uploading them to file-sharing/bit-torrent networks. Yes, this does constitute “reprinting”. It’s not the same as checking a copy out at the library or borrowing a copy from a friend. A copy of the book was made; hence, the “copy” in copyright. Committing any of these acts should result in your sudden death if done for financial gain on your part, or on that of the aforementioned file-sharing networks. If done out of ignorance of copyright law, I can cut some slack, and encourage you to either a) purchase a legal copy or, b) donate what I normally would have made had you bought your own copy ($2.99, pay-pal to jfgonzalez@jfgonzalez.com). Bottom line: if you do not have it in writing from the author, it isn’t authorized.

This is a work of fiction. All the characters and events portrayed are either fictitious or used fictitiously. Any resemblance to actual events and individuals is coincidental. This book is sold as is and neither the publisher, nor the author, will be responsible for any direct or consequential damages that may arise from the misuse of the information within.

A Signed Limited First Edition of this book was previously published by Thunderstorm Books for collectors.

They © 2011 by J. F. Gonzalez Cover Illustration and Design © 2011 Mike Hawthorne First Midnight Library eBook edition © 2012

All rights reserved

Midnight Library

Lititz, PA